Fujitsu XG Series P3NK 4452 01ENZD User Manual

User’s Guide  
Introduction  
P3NK-4452-01ENZ0  
Series  
User's Guide  
XG Series User’s Guide  
Contents  
Contents  
3
XG Series User’s Guide  
Contents  
4
XG Series User’s Guide  
Contents  
5
XG Series User’s Guide  
Contents  
6
XG Series User’s Guide  
Contents  
7
XG Series User’s Guide  
Contents  
8
XG Series User’s Guide  
Contents  
9
XG Series User’s Guide  
Contents  
10  
XG Series User’s Guide  
Contents  
11  
XG Series User’s Guide  
Contents  
12  
XG Series User’s Guide  
Contents  
13  
XG Series User’s Guide  
Contents  
5.39 Ethernet L3 Monitor Function Counter, Log, Statistics,  
14  
XG Series User’s Guide  
Contents  
15  
XG Series User's Guide  
Organization and Usage of This Manual  
This section describes target readers, contents, notations, etc. of this guide.  
Target Readers and Required Knowledge  
This guide was written for administrators, who are in charge of network construction, maintenance, and management.  
To use this guide, the following knowledge is required.  
Basic knowledge of networks, the Internet, and intranets  
Basic knowledge of system security  
This guide omits explanations of network protocol terms.  
Areas Covered  
This guide to the XGseries is composed of the following chapters.  
Chapter Titles  
Contents  
Describes the features and functions.  
Describes operating environment of CLI and how to operate CLI.  
Describes the necessary installation procedures.  
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Describes how to use the console screen.  
Describes how to use the commands.  
Describes the management of the device.  
Describes how to solve problems in the device.  
Describes message format of SNMP traps.  
Describes the list of MIBs supported by the SNMP agent  
About the Symbols  
The symbols used in this guide have the following meanings.  
Indicates useful information for using this device.  
Hint  
Indicates precautions that must be taken when using this device.  
Precautions  
Indicates additional information to complement operating instructions.  
Indicates related matters such as operation procedures, etc.  
Note  
Reference  
Indicates the available model name when using functions of this device.  
Available Model  
Indicates warning matters related to the Product Liability (P.L.) Law. Please follow them  
when using this device.  
Warning  
Caution  
Indicates cautionary notes related to the Product Liability (P.L.) Law. Please follow them  
when using this device.  
16  
     
XG Series User's Guide  
Trademark Notification in This Manual  
Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Server and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of the  
Microsoft Corporation in the USA and other countries.  
Adobe and Reader are trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the USA and other coun-  
tries.  
Netscape is a trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation in the USA.  
UNIX is a registered trademark of Open Group in the USA and other countries.  
Other company names and product names in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective com-  
panies.  
Abbreviated Product Names  
The product names used in this manual are abbreviated as follows.  
Product name  
Description in this manual  
Windows® XP  
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional operating system  
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition operating system  
Microsoft® Windows® Millennium Edition operating system  
Microsoft® Windows® 98 operating system  
Windows® Me  
Windows® 98  
Windows® 95  
Windows® 2000  
Microsoft® Windows® 95 operating system  
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server Network operating system  
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional operating system  
Microsoft® Windows NT® Server network operating system Version 4.0  
Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation operating system Version 4.0  
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003, Standard Edition  
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2, Standard Edition  
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003, Enterprise Edition  
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2, Enterprise Edition  
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003, Datacenter Edition  
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2, Datacenter Edition  
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003, Web Edition  
Windows NT® 4.0  
Windows Server® 2003  
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003, Standard x64 Edition  
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2, Standard x64 Edition  
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003, Enterprise x64 Edition  
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2, Enterprise x64 Edition  
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003, Enterprise Edition for Itanium-based systems  
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003, Datacenter x64 Edition  
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2, Datacenter x64 Edition  
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate operating system  
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business operating system  
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium operating system  
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic operating system  
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise operating system  
Windows Vista®  
17  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
How the Manuals for This Device Are Organized  
The following are XG series related manuals. Use these manuals as necessary.  
Manual Name  
Safety and Installation Guide  
Hardware Guide  
Description  
This manual describes the safety and installation.  
Describes the hardware of the XG.  
User’s Guide (This manual)  
This manual describes a variety of operations and procedures, including the  
installation and maintenance of the XG Series.  
18  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
End User's License Agreement  
#
@(#)COPYRIGHT 8.2 (Berkeley) 3/21/94  
All of the documentation and software included in the 4.4BSD and 4.4BSD-Lite Releases is copyrighted by The Regents of the  
University of California.  
Copyright 1979, 1980, 1983, 1986, 1988, 1989, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the University of California. All rights  
reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following  
conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in  
the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: This product  
includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.  
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from  
this software without specific prior written permission.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND  
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR  
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR  
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY  
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR  
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE  
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers and the American National Standards Committee X3, on Information  
Processing Systems have given us permission to reprint portions of their documentation.  
In the following statement, the phrase "this text" refers to portions of the system documentation.  
Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form in the second BSD Networking Software Release, from IEEE  
Std 1003.1-1988, IEEE Standard Portable Operating System Interface for Computer Environments (POSIX), copyright C 1988 by  
the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. In the event of any discrepancy between these versions and the original  
IEEE Standard, the original IEEE Standard is the referee document.  
In the following statement, the phrase "This material" refers to portions of the system documentation.  
This material is reproduced with permission from American National Standards Committee X3, on Information Processing  
Systems. Computer and Business Equipment Manufacturers Association (CBEMA), 311 First St., NW, Suite 500, Washington, DC  
20001-2178. The developmental work of Programming Language C was completed by the X3J11 Technical Committee.  
19  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
The views and conclusions contained in the software and documentation are those of the authors and should not be interpreted as  
representing official policies, either expressed or implied, of the Regents of the University of California.  
Copyright © 1989 Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are  
duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation, advertising materials, and other materials related to such distribution and  
use acknowledge that the software was developed by the University of California, Berkeley. The name of the University may not  
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,  
WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE.  
Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. Created 1991. All rights reserved.  
License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the "RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest  
Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing this software or this function.  
License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are identified as "derived from the RSA Data  
Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing the derived work.  
RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this software or the suitability of this  
software for any particular purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty of any kind.  
These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation and/or software.  
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]) All rights reserved.  
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young ([email protected]).  
The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.  
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following  
conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL  
documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson  
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed.If this package is used in a  
product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used.This can be in the form of a textual  
message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following  
conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in  
the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
20  
XG Series User's Guide  
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement:"This  
product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected])" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if  
the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related:-).  
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include  
an acknowledgement:"This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])"  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,  
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE  
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,  
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,  
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN  
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
Copyright (c) 1999 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following  
conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in  
the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product  
includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project  
for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.OpenSSL.org/)"  
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this  
software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact [email protected].  
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior  
written permission of the OpenSSL Project.  
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed  
by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.OpenSSL.org/)"  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND  
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS  
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR  
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY  
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR  
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE  
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
21  
Chapter 1  
Features and  
Functions  
This chapter describes the features and functions of the device.  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 1 Features and Functions  
1.1 Hardware Specifications  
This section explains the Hardware specifications for the device.  
1.1.1 Switch Specifications  
: supported, –: Not supported  
item  
specification  
XG0448  
model name  
XG0224  
XG2600  
Interface  
Console Port  
specifications  
RS232C  
number of ports  
Baud rate (bps)  
connector  
1
9600  
RJ45 8-pin Modular  
ETHER port  
specifications  
IEEE802.3  








10BASE-T interface  
100BASE-T interface  
1000BASE-T interface  
number of ports  
10/100BASE-TX  
10/100/1000BASE-T  
1 (Management Port)  
48  
24  
Port 45 to 48 are 10/100/  
1000Base-T and SFP combo  
ports. (*1)  
Port 21 to 24 are 10/100/  
1000Base-T and SFP combo  
ports.  
Baud rate (bps)  
10M  






100M  


RJ45 8-pin Modular  
100  
1000M  
connector  
cable length (maximum) (  
m)  
SFP port  
specifications  
IEEE802.3  
4
4
number of ports  
Port 21 to 24 are 10/100/  
Port 45 to 48 are 10/100/  
1000Base-T and SFP combo  
ports. (*1, *2)  
1000Base-T and SFP combo  
ports. (*2)  
connector  
20-pin SFP  
SFP+ Slot (*3)  
specifications  
number of ports  
connector  
IEEE802.3  
26  
20-pin SFP+  

CompactFlash Slot  
USB port  
specifications  
number of ports  
connector  
1
USB2.0 Compliance  
1
4-pin USB  
Expansion Slot  
2 (*1)  
Hardware Specifications  
23  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 1 Features and Functions  
item  
specification  
XG0448  
model name  
Power Voltage/Frequencys  
Power code  
XG0224  
XG2600  
AC100V-240V (50/60Hz)  
for 3-pin socket (grounded) (125V13A)  
AC:for 3-pin socket  
(grounded) (125V13A)  
Power cable length (m)  
3.0  
Maximum power consumption (W)  
Dimensions (mm) (W×D×H)  
Maximum weight (kg)  
67  
441×388×44  
5.5  
133.1  
441×430×44  
7.0  
111  
430×600×43.5  
13  
Ambient noise (dB)  
45 or less  
55 or less  
Temperature/Humidity (°C/%RH)  
Temperature condition: operating:0 to 40, storage:0 to 50  
Humidity condition:operating:15 to 85, storage:8 to 90  
*1)  
*2)  
*3)  
When the network traffic between port1 to 24, 51, 52 and port25 to 50 exceeds 24Gbps, transfer speeds underrun  
Wire speed.  
100BASE-FX, 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX, 1000BASE-ZX, 1000BASE-BX-D, 1000BASE-BX-U SFP SFP  
modules are available.  
10GBASE-SR, 10GBASE-LR SFP+ modules are available.  
Hardware Specifications  
24  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 1 Features and Functions  
1.1.2 Option  
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
SFP Module  
XG0224 / XG0448  
Available Model  
100BASE-FX  
1000BASE-SX  
1000BASE-LX  
1000BASE-ZX  
1000BASE-BX-D  
1000BASE-BX-U  
item  
Vendor PN  
specification  
FTLF8519P2BNL  
HFBR-5710L  
AGILENT  
HFCT-5710L  
SCP6P44-F7-BMH  
Vendor Name  
AGILENT  
FINISAR  
SUMITOMO ELECTRIC  
TECHNOLOGIES  
TECHNOLOGIES  
Interface  
specifications  
IEEE802.3z  
(1000BASE-SX Interface)  
IEEE802.3z  
(1000BASE-LX Interface)  
Baud rate (bps)  
connector  
1000M  
LC connector  
stressed receiver  
sensitivity  
-17dBm or more  
-20dBm or more  
-19.5dBm or more  
cable length  
(maximum)  
500m (MMF:50µm),  
300m (MMF:62.5µm)  
550m (MMF:50µm,  
62.5µm),  
550m (MMF:50µm,  
62.5µm),  
5km (SMF:10µm)  
10km (SMF:10µm)  
(*3)  
CLASS 1 LASER  
PRODUCT  
EN60825-1:1994+A11,  
EN60825-2:1994+A1  
EN60825-  
1:1994+A11+A2,  
EN60825-2:2004  
EN60825-  
1:1994+A1+A2  
IEC60825-1:2001  
specifications  
item  
Vendor PN  
specification  
SCP6P94-F7-BMH  
SBP6F54-F1-BN-49  
SBP6F54-F1-BT-31  
HFBR-57E0P  
Vendor Name  
ABAGO  
TECHNOLOGIES  
SUMITOMO ELECTRIC  
SUMITOMO ELECTRIC  
SUMITOMO ELECTRI  
Interface  
specifications  
IEEE802.3ah  
(1000BASE-BX-D  
Interface)  
IEEE802.3ah  
(1000BASE-BX-U  
Interface)  
IEEE802.3u  
(100BASE-FX  
Interface)  
(1000BASE-ZX  
Interface)  
Baud rate (bps)  
connector  
1000M  
100M  
LC connector  
stressed receiver  
sensitivity  
-24dBm or more  
-21dBm or more  
-31dBm or more  
cable length  
(maximum)  
(*3)  
70km (SMF:10µm)  
20km (SMF:10µm)  
2km (MMF:50µm)  
CLASS 1 LASER  
PRODUCT  
IEC60825-1:2001  
EN60825-  
1:1994+A1+A2  
specifications  
*1)  
Please make sure to use 1000BASE-BX-D SFP module and 1000BASE-BX-U SFP module in pairs.  
Hardware Specifications  
25  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 1 Features and Functions  
*2)  
*3)  
Applicable to XG0224 only.  
Cable length (maximum) is under the condition that the stressed receiver sensitivity satisfy the permissible level.  
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
SFP+ Module  
XG0448 / XG2600  
Available Model  
10GBASE-SR / LR  
item  
Vendor PN  
specification  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX1471D3BCL  
FINISAR  
Vendor Name  
Interface  
FINISAR  
specifications  
Baud rate (bps)  
connector  
IEEE802.3ae (10GBASE-SR)  
IEEE802.3ae (10GBASE-LR)  
10G  
LC connector  
stressed receiver  
sensitivity  
-7.5dBm or more  
-10.3dBm or more  
cable length (maximum)  
(*)  
300m (MMF:50µm)  
10km (SMF:10µm)  
CLASS 1 LASER  
EN60825-1:1994+A1+A2, EN60825-2:2004  
PRODUCT specifications  
*) Cable length (maximum) is under the condition that the stressed receiver sensitivity satisfy the permissible level.  
Precautions  
Cable length is as follows depending on the specifications of optical fiber cables.  
Type  
Core / Clad diameter  
Minimum transmission band  
160MHz/km  
cable length (maximum) (m)  
MMF  
62.5/125µm  
26  
200MHz/km  
33  
50/125µm  
400MHz/km  
66  
500MHz/km  
82  
2000MHz/km  
300  
Please use the most appropriate cable according to the environment of the installed place.  
Hardware Specifications  
26  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 1 Features and Functions  
SFP+ Expansion Card  
XG0224 / XG0448  
Available Model  
item  
Type name  
specification  
SJ10GSFPZ  
Interface (ETHER)  
specifications  
number of ports  
Baud rate (bps)  
connector  
IEEE802.3ae (10GBASE-R Interface)  
2
10G  
SFP connector  
CX4 Expansion Card  
XG0224 / XG0448  
Available Model  
item  
Type name  
specification  
SJ10GCX4Z  
Interface (ETHER)  
specifications  
number of ports  
Baud rate (bps)  
connector  
IEEE802.3ak (10GBASE-CX4 Interface)  
2
10G  
16pin, CX4connector  
cable length (maximum) 15  
(m)  
Compact Flash Card  
XG0224  
Available Model  
item  
specification  
Capacity (MBytes)  
256  
Power Cable (100V)  
All models  
Available Model  
item  
specification  
cable length (m)  
3
Hardware Specifications  
27  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 1 Features and Functions  
1.1.3 10/100/1000BASE-T Port Specifications  
All models  
Available Model  
1
8
connector is RJ45 8 pin  
XG0224 / XG0448  
–: Not supported  
Signal name  
(XG0224: 1 to 24 port)  
(XG0448: 1 to 48 port)  
Pin numbering  
10/100BASE-TX  
1000BASE-T  
MDI  
MDI  
TD+  
TD-  
RD+  
MDI-X  
RD+  
RD-  
TD+  
MDI-X  
TP1+  
TP1-  
TP0+  
TP3+  
TP3-  
TP0-  
TP2+  
TP2-  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TP0+  
TP0-  
TP1+  
TP2+  
TP2-  
TP1-  
TP3+  
TP3-  
RD-  
TD-  
XG2600  
–: Not supported  
Signal name  
Pin numbering  
10/100BASE-TX  
MDI  
TD+  
TD-  
RD+  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RD-  
Hardware Specifications  
28  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 1 Features and Functions  
1.1.4 USB Port Specifications  
XG0448 / XG2600  
Available Model  
1
2
3
4
Pin numbering  
Signal name  
1
2
3
4
VBUS  
D-  
D+  
GND  
1.1.5 Console Port Specifications  
All models  
Available Model  
1
8
connector is RJ45 8 pin  
A straight cable is used.  
–: Not supported  
Pin numbering  
Signal name  
in / out  
Content  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ER  
TD  
GND  
GND  
RD  
out  
out  
data terminal ready  
send data  
ground  
ground  
in  
receive data  
Hardware Specifications  
29  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 1 Features and Functions  
1.2 Software Specifications  
This section explains the software specifications for the device.  
1.2.1 Software Specifications  
: Supported, –: Not supported  
Features  
Item  
XG0224  
XG0448  
XG2600  
Store and  
Forward  
Store and  
Forward  
Forwarding Mode  
Selectable  
VLAN  
Port VLAN  
Tag VLAN  
Protocol VLAN  
Link Down Relay  
Link aggregation  
Static  
LACP  
Back up port  
STP  
STP  
MSTP  
RSTP  
LLDP  
LLMNR  
QoS  
QoS sending algorithm  
strict  
DRR  
WRR  
Assign the priority to the queue  
CoS  
IPv4 TOS (ip precedence)  
IPv6 TC  
(with the use of  
ACL)  
(with the use of  
ACL)  
(with the use of  
ACL (*1))  
(with the use of  
ACL)  
(with the use of  
ACL)  
IPv4 DSCP  
(with the use of  
ACL)  
(with the use of  
ACL)  
(with the use of  
ACL (*1))  
IPv6 DSCP  
(with the use of  
ACL)  
(with the use of  
ACL)  
Software Specifications  
30  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 1 Features and Functions  
Features  
Item  
XG0224  
XG0448  
XG2600  
Rewrite the priority  
COS (user priority)  
(with the use of  
ACL)  
(with the use of  
ACL)  
IPv4 TOS (ip precedence)  
IPv4 DSCP  
(with the use of  
ACL)  
(with the use of  
ACL)  
(with the use of  
ACL (*1))  
(with the use of  
ACL)  
(with the use of  
ACL)  
(with the use of  
ACL (*1))  
IPv6 DSCP  
(with the use of  
ACL)  
(with the use of  
ACL)  
Security  
IP/MAC filtering  
(*1)  
Log in password  
Application filtering (per application server)  
IPv4 filter  
(with the use of  
ACL)  
(with the use of  
ACL)  
(with the use of  
ACL)  
IPv6 filter  
(with the use of  
ACL)  
(with the use of  
ACL)  
RADIUS client  
Loop detection  
Broadcast/multicast storm control  
MAC table flash  
Port mirroring  
ether L3 watch  
Output rate control  
Routing  
IPv4  
Static  
Multicast  
IGMP snoop (v1, v2)  
ProxyDNS  
DNS server  
DNS relaying  
URL filtering  
SNMP Agent (v1, v2c, v3)  
Means of configuration  
telnet  
ssh  
Serial (CLI)  
WWW browser (Web UI)  
Software Specifications  
31  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 1 Features and Functions  
Features  
Item  
XG0224  
XG0448  
XG2600  
Logging  
System logging  
Error logging  
Automated time adjustment  
Scheduling  
Compact flash  
USB memory  
*1) For the packets which applied MAC/IP filter, QoS function with the use of ACL become void.  
1.2.2 Initial Values  
–: Not supported  
Features  
Item  
XG0224  
XG0448  
XG2600  
Port information  
ETHER port  
Manage  
1-20  
21-24  
25-26  
1-44  
45-48  
49-52  
1-26  
ment port  
Copper/Fiber  
10/  
Auto-  
detect  
Auto-  
detect  
10Gbps 100Mbps  
(Fixed)  
(Auto-  
detect)  
Full/half duplex  
Full-  
duplex  
(Fixed)  
Auto-  
Auto-detect  
Auto-detect  
detect  
MDI/MDI-X  
Flow control  
MDI  
Auto-detect  
Auto-detect  
(Fixed)  
tx: OFF  
(Fixed)  
rx: ON  
(Fixed)  
tx: OFF, rx: ON  
VLAN  
VID 1 (no tag)  
Protocol VLAN  
Predefined protocol  
Link aggregation  
Load balancing algorithm  
Back up port  
IPv4, IPv6, FNA  
tx MAC address XOR rx MAC address  
Master ports preferred  
Port selection scheme  
STP information  
STP operating mode  
LLDP  
STP used  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Used  
LLMNR  
Enabled (lan 0,vlan1)  
Disabled  
Disabled Enabled  
Loop detection  
Broadcast/Multicast storm control  
Egress Rate Control  
IGMP snoop  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Software Specifications  
32  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 1 Features and Functions  
Features  
XG0448  
Item  
XG0224  
XG2600  
IP interface  
oob Interface  
(Management  
port):enable IPv6,  
enable LLMNR  
lan0 Interface:enable IPv6, enable LLMNR  
Disabled  
RADIUS client  
Password information  
User name  
admin  
None  
Password  
ACL information  
None  
ProxyDNS information  
SNMP  
None  
Disabled  
5 min.  
telnet/SSH auto logoff  
Console auto logoff  
Web browser auto logoff  
System log information  
Sending to the Server  
Facility  
8 hour  
10min (Fixed)  
Disabled  
23 (local7)  
Priority  
error, warn, info  
Security  
proxydns  
Automatically current time Set  
Schedule information  
Host database information  
Compact flash dump  
USB memory dump  
Disabled  
None  
None  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Software Specifications  
33  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 1 Features and Functions  
1.2.3 System Maximum Values  
–: Not supported  
Features  
Item  
XG0224  
XG0448  
XG2600  
Bridge information  
# of blocks registered (*1)  
# of static blocks registered  
VLAN definition  
16000  
32000  
400  
16000  
# of VLANs (*2)  
4094  
8
# of Protocol VLAN  
User defined Protocol VLAN  
Link aggregation  
unlimited  
16 VLAN  
# of member ports  
# of groups  
8
10  
10  
13  
13  
26  
26  
Back up ports  
# of groups  
13  
STP information  
# of MSTP instances  
# of neighbor LLDP device information (*3)  
MAC filters  
16  
26+364  
52+728  
26+364  
128 (per device)  
(*4)  
64 (per device)  
(*8)  
IPv4  
IPv6  
128 (per device)  
(*5)  
Rewrite the priority  
IPv4  
COS (user priority)  
128 (per device)  
(*6)  
IPv4 TOS (ip precedence)  
IPv4 DSCP  
128 (per device)  
(*6)  
64 (per device)  
(*8)  
128 (per device)  
(*6)  
64 (per device)  
(*8)  
Assign the priority to the queue  
128 (per device)  
(*6)  
64 (per device)  
(*8)  
IPv6  
IPv6 DSCP  
128 (per device)  
(*7)  
Assign the priority to the queue  
128 (per device)  
(*7)  
MAC table Flushing  
# of address group  
4
# of VLAN for every address group  
IGMP snoop  
50  
# of multicast group addresses registered  
Port mirroring  
200  
1
2000  
Target port  
tx: 1, rx: 1 (*9)  
Software Specifications  
34  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 1 Features and Functions  
Features  
Item  
XG0224  
XG0448  
XG2600  
# of ARPs registered  
8000  
static  
200  
100  
100  
# of IPv4 interfaces  
# of IPv6 interfaces  
RA information (IPv6)  
# of interface receiving RA  
100 (*10)  
100 (*10)  
2
4
# of Default Router for every interface  
# of IPv6 prefix for every interface  
# of Neighbor Cache entry  
Routing table (IPv4)  
4
8000  
# of routes registered  
200  
200  
# of static routes registered  
Routing table (IPv6)  
# of routes registered  
200  
1
# of RA routes registered  
# of static routes registered  
IP filtering information  
200  
IPv4  
128 (per device)  
(*4)  
64 (per device)  
(*8)  
IPv6  
128 (per device)  
(*5)  
DSCP rewrite information  
IPv4  
128 (per device)  
(*6)  
64 (per device)  
(*8)  
IPv6  
128 (per device)  
(*7)  
# of ACL definitions  
800  
300  
# of host database definitions  
AAA information  
100  
# of groups  
10  
1000  
4
# of defined authenticated users  
# of defined RADIUS servers  
ProxyDNS  
50  
SNMP information  
# of max. SNMP managers registered  
# of simultaneously connected telnet/ssh/WWW browser clients (*11)  
System logging  
8
8
# of displayed system log records  
Max. # of system log servers registered  
Automated time adjustment  
Max. # of SNTP servers registered  
# of schedules defined  
1024 or more  
3
4
20  
30  
Application filtering information (per application server)  
*1) Includes own entries of the device and static entries.  
*2) Includes system use of VLANs (number of ether ports + 1).  
Software Specifications  
35  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 1 Features and Functions  
*3) First, the maximum number of neighbor LLDP device information is 15 times of the number of total ports including  
1G and 10G. (XG0224: 390, XG0448: 780, XG2600: 390)  
Second, each port including 1G and 10G must have at least one LLDP information. (XG0224: 26, XG0448: 52,  
XG2600: 26)  
The remaining number of neighbor LLDP device information can be distributed to any ports. (XG0224: 364,  
XG0448: 728, XG2600: 364)  
*4) Total number of MAC filter (IPv4) and IPv4 filter definitions.  
*5) Total number of MAC filter (IPv6) and IPv6 filter definitions.  
*6) Total number of Rewrite the priority (IPv4) and IPv4 DSCP rewrite definitions.  
*7) Total number of Rewrite the priority (IPv6) and IPv6 DSCP rewrite definitions.  
*8) The total number of MAC filter, IPv4 filter, MAC QoS and IPv4 DSCP rewrite definitions may be reduced as the  
number of ACL rules increase.  
*9) Same port can't be used as a target port for tx and for rx.  
*10) Includes Management Port Interface (oob).  
*11) 4 sessions for Telnet, 1session fot WWW (http), 1session for console, 1session for ftp, 1session for ssh (sftp).  
Software Specifications  
36  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 2 Using the CLI  
2.1 Overview of the CLI  
This section describes how to use the command line interface (CLI) for the XG Series.  
2.1.1 Operating Environment for the CLI  
There are two ways to access the device to run commands.  
Serial connection  
Connect to the serial port of the device using RS232C cable via RJ45conversion cable.  
The available terminal emulation type is VT100.  
When initially connecting a terminal to the device, configure the serial port on the client side as shown below.  
Item  
Setting value  
Baud rate  
9600 bps  
8 bit  
Character size  
Parity  
None  
1 bit  
Stop bits  
Flow control  
Emulation  
None  
VT100  
ASCII  
Character set  
Line feed code  
Transmission: CR (carriage return) only  
Reception: LF is added  
Remote connection via LAN port  
Connect a terminal or host computer using a telnet client to the management LAN port of the device TCP port of 23  
Is used for the default telnet connection  
The following tables list the factory defaults.  
Management-LAN [XG2600] and LAN Interface initial settings  
Item  
Setting value  
IP address  
None (must be set before using the LAN interface)  
None (must be set before using the LAN interface)  
Subnet address  
Telnet server initial settings  
Item  
Use telnet  
Setting value  
Enable  
Port number  
Emulation  
23 (TCP)  
VT100/VT200/xterm  
Delete  
BackSpace key  
Character set  
ASCII  
To use the remote connection via the management-LAN port, use the "oob ip" command to configure the management-  
LAN port for the device as below. [XG2600]  
XG2600(config)# oob ip 192.168.1.1/24 3  
XG2600(config)# commit  
XG2600(config)# save  
To use the remote connection via the LAN port 1, use the "lan ip" command to configure the management-LAN port  
Overview of the CLI  
38  
     
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 2 Using the CLI  
for the device as below.  
XG2600(config)# ether 1 vlan untag 1  
XG2600(config)# lan 0 vlan 1  
XG2600(config)# lan 0 ip 192.168.1.1/24 3  
XG2600(config)# commit  
XG2600(config)# save  
A VT100, VT200, or xterm can be used as a terminal.  
2.1.2 Command Modes and Mode Switching  
The following table shows a hierarchy of command modes and mode switching.  
2.1.2.1 Command Operation Procedure  
The flow of system operation via command execution is as follows:  
1) Login to the device.  
2) Run an operation command to manage system operations.  
3) Run a configure command to move to configuration mode.  
4) Run a configuration command to set candidate configuration (candidate-config).  
5) Run a commit command to apply the candidate configuration as a running configuration (running-config).  
6) Run a save command to save the candidate configuration as a startup configuration (startup-config).  
7) Run an exit or similar command to return to operation mode.  
8) Repeat steps 2) through 7)  
9) Run an exit command to log out.  
Reference  
Login  
user name  
Operation mode  
Configuration mode  
configure  
user  
admin / su  
exit / !  
User  
class  
Admin  
class  
Admin  
class  
exit  
exit  
exit / ! / end / quit  
admin  
Operation command  
Operation command  
Configuration command  
commit  
load  
Running configuration  
(running-config)  
Candidate configuration  
(candidate-config)  
save  
load  
Startup configuration  
(startup-config)  
reset / Reconnect power  
Overview of the CLI  
39  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 2 Using the CLI  
Login to the device  
When you connect to the device via a console port, telnet, or ssh connection (*1), a login prompt like the following one  
appears:  
Login:  
Password:  
Enter user name (*1)  
Enter password.  
<WARNING> weak admin’s password:set the password (*2)  
Commands can be run. (*3)  
#
By entering the user name and password, you can run commands.  
Only the administrator can log into the system for the first time. For the first time, enter "admin" for the user name, and  
press ENTER for the password.  
*1) For ssh connections, "Login:" does not appear. Specify the user name at the ssh client.  
*2) This message warns you that system security is weak because the password is not set. This message will not appear  
after you set a password with 8 or more alphanumeric characters and symbols.  
*3) The model name is also shown in the prompt by default. When a prompt character string is configured, the configured  
prompt is displayed.  
User name and password  
The user name and password are different for the administrator and general users.  
User name  
The username for the administrator is "admin" and the user name for the general user is "user" (fixed user names).  
By using a password aaa command and specifying use of AAA user information (aaa user id command) or RADIUS  
server user information as the login user information, you can add user names as an administrator or general user.  
Password  
No password is configured by default. Be sure to configure the password when you log into the system for the first  
time. Use the password admin set command to configure the administrator password and the password user set  
command to configure the general user password. When configuring password aaa command settings, set the  
administrator and user passwords in the AAA user information stored in the system (aaa user password command) or in  
the user information for the RADIUS server.  
Reference  
Overview of the CLI  
40  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 2 Using the CLI  
Privilege classes (admin class and user class)  
Two privilege classes are available; admin class (login as admin) and user class (login as user).  
admin class  
All commands can be run.  
However, admin commands and su commands cannot be run because it is not necessary to run them in admin class.  
user class  
Only a portion of operation commands can be run. Configuration commands cannot be run. You can run an admin  
command to transfer to admin class.  
If a password aaa command has been used to specify use of the AAA user information (aaa user id command) or RADIUS  
server user information as the login user information, the user name privilege class is determined as follows:  
When using RADIUS server  
Determined according to the Filter-ID attribute information configured in the RADIUS server.  
RADIUS attribute (number)  
Filter-ID (11)  
Setting  
: ”administrator”  
: ”user”  
For admin class  
For user class  
When using user information on the device  
Determined according to aaa user user-role command settings.  
Use modes (operation mode and configuration mode)  
Two use modes are available; operation mode and configuration mode.  
Operation mode  
Only operation commands can be run.  
Configuration mode  
Both configuration commands and operation commands can be run.  
The use mode immediately after logging into the system is operation mode.  
The table below displays user names and corresponding passwords, as well as privilege class and use mode after login.  
Login user  
name  
Default password  
information  
Password configuration  
command  
Login privilege  
class  
Login use mode  
admin  
None  
password admin set  
admin class  
Operation mode  
(blank) (Hit ENTER)  
user  
Not set  
password user set  
user class  
Operation mode  
(login not possible [*])  
*) To log into the system as user, configure password information for the user.  
Overview of the CLI  
41  
               
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 2 Using the CLI  
2.1.2.2 Executable commands  
Command execution is restricted according to the following conditions:  
Command type  
Privilege class  
Use mode  
Reference  
Command type (operation commands and configuration commands)  
Two command types are available; operation commands and configuration commands.  
Since the use mode after logging into the system is operation mode, you can only run operation commands.  
By running a configure command, the use mode changes to configuration mode and you will be able to run configuration  
commands as well as operation commands.  
However, since you cannot run a configure command in user class, run an admin command to change to admin class before  
running the configure command.  
The following table lists command types and functions.  
Command type  
Command function  
Operation command  
Display and manipulate device status, operation status, and  
network status, display or delete stored information, etc.  
Configuration command  
Operating information settings and network configuration,  
etc.  
The following table lists commands and operations.  
Command  
Operation  
Configuration command  
commit command  
Sets to candidate configuration (candidate-config).  
These are basically not reflected in running operations; however, as in password  
information configuration, there are commands to reflect settings immediately.  
The candidate configuration is reflected in the running configuration (running-  
config) and active operations change.  
Reference  
Reference  
save command  
Saves candidate configuration to startup configuration (startup-config).  
Applies candidate configuration to the running configuration.  
Run reset command or reconnect  
power  
show candidate-config command  
show running-config command  
show startup-config command  
delete command  
Displays candidate configuration settings.  
Displays active configuration settings.  
Displays startup configuration settings.  
Deletes configuration settings.  
Precautions  
If you run a reset command or reconnect power without first running a save command, the running configuration and  
candidate configuration will return to the state they were in before running a configuration command.  
Overview of the CLI  
42  
     
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 2 Using the CLI  
2.2 Using the CLI  
2.2.1 Using the Shell Function  
The shell function supports the following features in order to assist command entry:  
The following describes each function.  
2.2.1.1 Command execution function  
The command execution function allows you to enter a command string and hit ENTER or RETURN to run the command.  
You can enter ASCII characters, EUC kanji, or Shift JIS kanji characters for the command string.  
To enter a kanji character, specify its code using a terminal charset command.  
The maximum length of a command string is 1,022 characters (including the prompt string) for ASCII characters. A single  
kanji character is equivalent to two ASCII characters.  
2.2.1.2 Entry editing function  
The entry editing function allows you to move the cursor, insert or delete characters, and delete, cut, and paste words  
within an entered command string.  
Refer to "2.2.1.10 List of shell key bindings" (pg.52) for keys used with the entry editing function.  
The entry editing function uses the VT100 terminal escape sequence to move the cursor and perform other functions.  
When cursor movement or other functions do not work correctly, check that the terminal software being used supports  
VT100 terminal emulation. In addition, if the screen display is not set to 24 lines and 80 columns, use the terminal window  
command to configure the screen correctly.  
Reference  
Using the CLI  
43  
         
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 2 Using the CLI  
2.2.1.3 Command name autocomplete function  
The command name autocomplete function allows you to display a list of command names without entering anything by  
pressing the TAB key or CTRL + I. In addition, if you press the TAB key or CTRL + I after entering part of a command,  
the command string will be automatically completed. Automatically completed character strings differ depending on  
conditions.  
The following table details autocomplete operations for entered characters.  
Command name beginning with entered characters  
When nothing is entered  
Operation  
A list of all command names is displayed.  
When a single command applies  
The applicable command name is automatically completed  
along with a single blank character.  
When multiple commands apply, with the same string  
following the entered characters  
The identical character string portion is completed.  
A list of possible commands is displayed.  
Nothing is displayed.  
When multiple commands apply, with different strings  
following the entered characters  
When no command applies  
When you use autocomplete without entering anything, a list of commands with the command-type lines shown below is  
displayed.  
--Exec commands-  
Operation commands and alias commands  
-- Exec commands (config mode)--  
Operation commands and aliases for configuration mode  
--Config commands--  
Configuration commands  
--Config commands (current directory)--  
Configuration command arguments (when the configuration hierarchy function is enabled and you are not in the top  
hierarchy)  
The command name autocomplete function works differently according to the number of times you hit the TAB key or  
CTRL + I.  
The table below lists the autocomplete operation for each number of times the TAB key or CTRL + I are hit.  
Note that descriptions are displayed in Japanese (kanji characters). If they are not displayed correctly, use a terminal  
charset command to specify a kanji character code which is displayed correctly.  
Number of times the TAB  
Operation  
key or CTRL + I are hit  
One time  
A list of command names is displayed or the entered command string is automatically  
completed.  
Two times  
Command and argument names corresponding to the use mode and their descriptions are  
displayed.  
In operation mode, the operation command names and descriptions, and the names of  
commands registered using an alias command as well as their registration content are  
displayed.  
In configuration mode when the configuration hierarchy function is disabled, the  
configuration command names and their descriptions are displayed.  
In configuration mode, when the configuration hierarchy function is enabled and you are at  
the top hierarchy level, the configuration command names and descriptions are displayed.  
In configuration mode, when the configuration hierarchy function is enabled and you are not  
at the top hierarchy level, the command argument names available for the current hierarchy  
level and their descriptions are displayed.  
Using the CLI  
44  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 2 Using the CLI  
Number of times the TAB  
key or CTRL + I are hit  
Operation  
Three times  
Command forms are displayed.  
In operation mode, simplified command forms are displayed.  
In configuration mode, when the configuration hierarchy function is disabled, simplified  
command forms are displayed.  
In configuration mode, when the configuration hierarchy function is enabled and you are at  
the top hierarchy level, simplified command forms are displayed.  
In configuration mode, when the configuration hierarchy function is enabled and you are not  
at the top hierarchy, command forms for the current hierarchy level and simplified command  
forms are displayed.  
Four times  
Returns to the operation for hitting the TAB key or CTRL + I one time.  
Using the CLI  
45  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 2 Using the CLI  
2.2.1.4 Command argument autocomplete function  
While entering configuration command arguments, the command argument autocomplete function allows you to display a  
list of arguments and candidate arguments without entering anything by pressing the TAB key or CTRL + I. In addition, if  
you press the TAB key or CTRL + I after entering part of an argument, the remaining character string will be automatically  
completed.  
The argument autocomplete function works differently according to the number of times you hit the TAB key or CTRL + I.  
The table below lists the autocomplete operation for each number of times the TAB key or CTRL + I are hit.  
Note that descriptions are displayed in Japanese (kanji characters). If they are not displayed correctly, use a terminal  
charset command to specify a kanji character code which is displayed correctly.  
Number of times the TAB  
Operation  
key or CTRL + I are hit  
One time  
A list of arguments and argument candidates is displayed or the entered argument  
string is autocompleted.  
This works in the same way as command name autocomplete.  
Descriptions of arguments and argument candidates are displayed.  
The command syntax following the current argument is displayed.  
Returns to the operation for hitting the TAB key or CTRL + I one time.  
Two times  
Three times  
Four times  
For some command arguments, you can specify multiple arguments separated by a comma (,), or specify a range of values  
delimited by a hyphen (-). The argument autocomplete function assumes that all arguments allow specifying multiple arguments  
and value range, and if you autocomplete an argument after entering "," or "-", all the argument candidates will be given.  
Note  
2.2.1.5 Abbreviated command entry function  
The abbreviated command entry function allows you to run a command with its name and argument entered only partway.  
For each command name and command argument entered, the command name autocomplete and command argument  
autocomplete are performed and the command is executed. When there are multiple candidates, enter characters until  
candidates are narrowed to one, and then execute the command. If you execute the command while there are still multiple  
candidates, the command is not autocompleted and an error occurs.  
2.2.1.6 Command alias function  
The command alias function allows you to register a command name and its argument(s) as a single command.  
Use the alias command to register, delete, and display command aliases.  
Note that commands registered with a command alias cannot be autocompleted by the abbreviated command entry  
function, and you must enter the complete command name and arguments when registering them.When a command alias is  
registered correctly, it will be included for command name and argument autocomplete.  
Using the CLI  
46  
         
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 2 Using the CLI  
2.2.1.7 Configuration hierarchy function  
The configuration hierarchy function interprets common portions of executed configuration command names and  
arguments as a hierarchy level, and allows you to move between hierarchy levels.  
When you execute a configuration command and the command completes successfully, in general the portion from the  
command name to the argument two arguments before an argument specifying a variable value becomes a hierarchy level.  
This may differ depending on the command.  
Ex.)  
(argument with variable value)  
(configure)# lan 0 ip address 192.168.0.1/24 3  
(Move hierarchy level to the argument two before the variable value argument)  
(configure-lan-0-ip)#  
Even in cases where an error occurs because the number of arguments is less than required, the configuration hierarchy  
function assumes the entered command name and arguments to be a hierarchy level. Depending on the command, even if  
arguments are incorrect the configuration hierarchy function may judge that there are not enough arguments and interpret  
the entry as a hierarchy level. The portion assumed to be a hierarchy level is displayed at the command prompt. However,  
if you have used a terminal prompt command to change the entry prompt string to exclude the configuration hierarchy, it is  
not displayed.  
After moving to a hierarchy level, you can only enter command arguments following the current level to execute the  
command. When the number of arguments is still not enough, a further hierarchy level is displayed. When you have  
omitted an optional argument, without moving to another hierarchy level the command is executed correctly, following  
which you will move to a higher hierarchy level. Be sure to enter optional arguments as a group. To execute a command  
other than at the hierarchy level you have moved to, enter it beginning with the command name.  
However, in a hierarchy level for an argument which allows for arbitrary character strings, any strings other than the  
commands below will be entered as configuration command arguments. To enter one of the following commands as an  
argument for a configuration command, move to a higher level, and then enter so that strings matching these commands  
are the second argument or following.  
exit, !, end, quit, up, top, delete, show, clear, commit, discard, save, load, reset,  
Comment line beginning with #  
Ex.)  
(configure)# acl 0 ip  
(configure-acl-0-ip)# any  
(Moves to another level because there are not enough arguments.)  
(Moves to another level because there are not enough arguments.)  
(configure-acl-0-ip-any)# any (Moves to higher level because command can complete successfully  
without specifying an optional argument.)  
(configure-acl-0)#  
If you run the show command with no arguments after moving hierarchy levels, a list of configuration commands for that  
level and following is displayed.  
You can move to a higher hierarchy level or to the top level using an up command or top command respectively.  
The configuration hierarchy function is disabled by default. Even when it has been enabled, this function is disabled after  
you log out of the system. In this case, no message is displayed to indicate that the function has been disabled.  
The following explains how to enable and disable the configuration hierarchy function.  
To enable the configuration hierarchy function: Press CTRL + O in configuration mode.  
The following message is displayed and the configuration hierarchy function is enabled. Information which has been  
partially entered will not be discarded.  
<NOTICE> The configuration directory mode is enabled. To disable, type Ctrl+G.  
Using the CLI  
47  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 2 Using the CLI  
To disable the configuration hierarchy function: Press CTRL + G.  
The following message is displayed and the configuration hierarchy function is disabled. Information which has been  
partially entered will be discarded.  
<NOTICE> The configuration directory mode is disabled.  
A command execution example is shown below.  
z Command  
# configure  
(config)# lan 0 ip address 192.168.1.1/24 3  
(config-lan-0-ip)#  
(config-lan-0-ip)# show  
address 192.168.1.1/24 3  
service server  
(Change to configuration mode.)  
(Run configuration command.)  
(Hierarchy level is displayed at the command prompt.)  
(Display configuration following the current level.)  
info address 192.168.1.100/24 32  
(config-lan-0-ip)# save  
(config-lan-0-ip)# top  
(config)#  
(Enter the command name and run the command.)  
(Move to the top level.)  
2.2.1.8 Time of command execution display function  
The time of command execution display function allows you to display the time when the execution of a command starts.  
This function is useful when a command execution log is being recorded during operations.  
To enable the time of command execution display function, use the terminal timestamp command.  
Although you can check command execution time with the show logging command, execution time is only displayed for  
commands recorded in the command execution history. You can also use the terminal prompt command to display the date  
and time in the prompt string However, this is not the time when a command was executed but the time when the prompt  
was displayed.  
2.2.1.9 Command history function  
The command history function allows you to record command execution history and re-execute commands using this  
history. You can also redisplay commands and replace commands in the history.  
You can set the number of lines in the command history using a terminal logging command.  
You can also press CTRL + P and CTRL + N to sequentially display the command history items, and re-execute or re-edit and  
execute a displayed command.  
Note  
Reference  
The following explains how to re-execute and redisplay commands.  
You can use the history specifier and display specifier together with command character string replacement.  
Using the CLI  
48  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 2 Using the CLI  
Re-executing commands  
You can enter a history specifier at the beginning of the command string to re-execute the command. The command will be  
executed after the command string for re-execution is displayed. In addition, command history and history numbers can be  
viewed with the history command. Note that you can enter the history specifier only once at the beginning of the command  
line. Any history specifiers entered thereafter will be treated as normal characters.  
History specifier  
!!  
! history number  
Operation  
Re-execute the last command run.  
Re-execute the command with the specified history number.  
!-number in history Re-execute the command run the specified number of commands before in the history.  
Ex.) !-3 (The third command from the newest in the history is re-executed.)  
! string  
The last run command beginning with the specified string is re-executed.  
Ex.) !net (The last run command beginning with "net" is re-executed.)  
When you enter a string following the history specifier, it will be added to end of the command string invoked from the  
history.  
The following shows an example.  
z Command  
# show ip route  
(The execution results of show ip route are displayed.)  
# !! all  
show ip route all  
(Add "all" to the last command and execute it.)  
(Display the command string to re-execute.)  
(The execution results of show ip route all are displayed.)  
Redisplaying commands  
You can redisplay a previously run command by entering a display specifier (:p) following a history specifier. Note that the  
displayed command is not re-executed yet.  
Since the displayed command string is recorded as a new command history item, you can re-execute it by entering !! after  
checking the command string.  
Display specifier  
:p  
Operation  
Redisplays a command.  
Ex.) !net:p (The last run command beginning with "net" is redisplayed.)  
When you enter a string following the display specifier, it will be added to end of the command string invoked from the  
history.  
A command execution example is shown below.  
z Command  
# show ip route  
(The execution results of show ip route are displayed.)  
# !!:p all  
show ip route al  
(Add "all" to the last command executed and display it.)  
(Display the command string.)  
# !!  
(Re-execute the previous command.)  
show ip route all  
(Display the command string to re-execute.)  
(The execution results of show ip route all are displayed.)  
Using the CLI  
49  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 2 Using the CLI  
Replacing the last command string  
By entering a replacement specifier (^), replacement target string, and replacement string at the beginning of a command  
string, you can re-execute the last command with the specified string replaced with a new string.  
If no replacement string is specified, the target string will be deleted.  
The table below lists specifiers and operations. (A: replacement target string, B: replacement string, C: additional string)  
Command  
^A^B^  
Operation  
Replace A with B and execute the command string.  
^A^B^:p  
^A^B^C  
^A^B^:pC  
^A^^  
Replace A with B and display the command string.  
Replace A with B, add C to the command string, and execute it.  
Replace A with B, add C to the command string, and display it.  
Delete A and execute the command string.  
^A^^:p  
Delete A and display the command string.  
^A^^C  
Delete A, add C to the command string, and execute it.  
Delete A, add C to the command string, and display it.  
^A^^:pC  
A command execution example is shown below.  
z Command  
# show running-config lan 0 ip address  
(Display the IP address for lan 0.)  
# ^addr^rout^:p  
(Replace addr with rout and display the command string.)  
show running-config lan 0 ip routess  
# ^ess^e^  
show running-config lan 0 ip route  
(replace ess with e and execute the command string.)  
(Display the command and execute it.)  
(Display the static route information for lan 0.)  
Using the CLI  
50  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 2 Using the CLI  
Replacing command strings  
By entering a single-replacement specifier (:s) or all-replacement specifier (:gs) following a history specifier and  
replacement specifier, you can replace the target string and re-execute the command string.  
A single-replacement specifier replaces the first matching string only, while an all-replacement specifier replaces all  
matching strings.  
The replacement target string and replacement string are specified as with string replacement for the preceding command;  
however, arbitrary characters (@, #, %, &, ~, =, _, etc.) may be used as delimiters. You can successively enter a single-  
replacement specifier, all-replacement specifier, and display specifier.  
The table below lists specifiers and operations. This example uses "/" as a delimiter.  
(A: replacement target string, B: replacement string, C: additional string)  
Command  
:s/A/B/  
Operation  
Replace only the first instance of A with B and execute the command string.  
Replace only the first instance of A with B and display the command string.  
Replace only the first instance of A with B, add C to the command string, and execute it.  
Replace only the first instance of A with B, add C to the command string, and display it.  
Replace all instances of A with B and execute the command string.  
Replace all instances of A with B and display the command string.  
Replace all instances of A with B, add C to the command string, and execute it.  
Replace all instances of A with B, add C to the command string, and display it.  
Delete only the first instance of A and execute the command string.  
Delete only the first instance of A and display the command string.  
Delete only the first instance of A, add C to the command string, and execute it.  
Delete only the first instance of A, add C to the command string, and display it.  
Delete all instances of A and execute the command string.  
:ps/A/B/  
:s/A/B/C  
:ps/A/B/C  
:gs/A/B/  
:pgs/A/B/  
:gs/A/B/C  
:pgs/A/B/C  
:s/A//  
:ps/A//  
:s/A//C  
:ps/A//C  
:gs/A//  
:pgs/A//  
Delete all instances of A and display the command string.  
:gs/A//C  
Delete all instances of A, add C to the command string, and execute it.  
Delete all instances of A, add C to the command string, and display it.  
:pgs/A//C  
:s/A1/B1/:gs/A2/B2/:p  
Replace only the first instance of A1 with B1, replace all instances of A2 with B2, and display the  
command string.  
A command execution example is shown below.  
z Command  
# lan 0 ip address 192.168.0.1/24 3  
# !!:gs/0/1/:p  
(Replace all instances of 0 with 1 and display the command string.)  
lan 1 ip address 192.168.1.1/24 3  
# !!  
(Re-execute the last command to run.)  
lan 1 ip address 192.168.1.1/24 3  
When entering a command with the command history function, you can omit the last delimiter (/, ^, etc.) at the end of the  
command line. However, when the last delimiter is omitted, you cannot specify a display specifier (:p), additional history  
specifier, or additional string.  
Note  
Using the CLI  
51  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 2 Using the CLI  
2.2.1.10 List of shell key bindings  
The following table shows the key bindings for using the shell.  
Key combination  
(note)  
Single  
key  
Operation  
Ctrl+A  
Moves the cursor to the top.  
Ctrl+B  
Ctrl+C  
Ctrl+D  
(Note)  
Moves the cursor to the left by one character.  
Interrupts input.  
Deletes one character if any are input.  
Logs off if there are no characters entered.  
Ctrl+E  
Ctrl+F  
Ctrl+G  
Ctrl+H  
Moves the cursor to the end.  
(Note)  
Moves the cursor to the right by one character.  
Disables the configuration hierarchy function.  
BS  
BACKSPACE  
Moves the cursor one character to the left deleting one character.  
Ctrl+I  
Tab  
Autocomplete/displays autocomplete candidate list/displays argument descriptions/  
displays argument syntax  
Ctrl+J  
Return  
Input complete  
Ctrl+K  
Cuts from the cursor position to the end.  
Updates the screen.  
Ctrl+L  
Ctrl+M  
Ctrl+N  
Ctrl+O  
Ctrl+P  
Input complete  
(Note)  
Shows the next history item.  
Enables the configuration hierarchy function.  
Shows the previous history item.  
Redisplays input.  
(Note)  
Ctrl+R  
Ctrl+T  
Converts one character.  
Ctrl+U  
Ctrl+W  
Ctrl+X  
Cuts from the cursor position to the top.  
Cuts from the cursor position one word to the left.  
Cuts from the cursor position to the top.  
Paste  
Ctrl+Y  
ESC Ctrl+H  
ESC Ctrl+I  
ESC Ctrl+K  
ESC b  
ESC f  
ESC BS  
Cuts from the cursor position one word to the left.  
ESC TAB Displays argument description.  
Cuts from the cursor position one word to the right.  
Moves the cursor to the left by one word.  
Moves the cursor to the right by one word.  
ESC n  
ESC p  
ESC <  
ESC >  
Shows the next history item beginning with the string prior to the cursor position.  
Shows the previous history item beginning with the string prior to the cursor position.  
Shows the oldest history item.  
Shows the newest history item.  
Notes)  
"Ctrl+α" indicates pressing CTRL and α at the same time.  
"ESC α" indicates pressing ESC followed by α.  
The arrow keys (,,,) do not work properly on the hyper terminal. Use key combinations instead.  
When using with terminal software or telnet commands, some key combinations with CTRL may not work. Refer to  
the terminal software or telnet command manual to configure the device so that so that key combinations with CTRL  
work properly.  
Using the CLI  
52  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 2 Using the CLI  
2.2.2 Error Messages Common to All Commands  
The table below lists error messages common to all commands and displayed when autocompleting or executing  
commands.  
Note that the argument position shown in these error messages indicates the place of the erroneous argument, counted from  
the command name as "1."  
Common error message  
Meaning  
<ERROR> Command name: Unknown command  
An unknown command.  
Cannot be executed in the current use mode.  
Cannot be executed with the current privilege class.  
<ERROR> Command name: Operation not permitted Execution of this command is not permitted.  
<ERROR>: 0: missing argument  
The argument specification is insufficient.  
The argument specification is excessive.  
<ERROR>: 0: too many argument(s)  
<ERROR>: Argument position: format error  
The argument syntax is not correct.  
Unknown command for configuration hierarchy.  
<ERROR>: Argument position: value out of range  
The argument value is out of the valid range (too small, too large,  
too long, etc.).  
<ERROR>: Argument position: lack of table  
<ERROR>: Argument position: no such table  
<ERROR>: Argument position: duplicate value  
<ERROR>: Argument position: fail to request  
<ERROR>: Argument position: unique password  
The number of arguments has reached the defined upper limit.  
Specified definition cannot be found.  
Already defined.  
Could not execute the command.  
Not a unique password.  
Cannot be changed from the unique format.  
<ERROR>: detected HARD ERROR, cannot execute Cannot execute the command due to a hardware error.  
Using the CLI  
53  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 2 Using the CLI  
2.2.3 Characters that can be entered  
Any letter (A-Z, a-z) and digit (0-9)  
Space (ASCII code: 0x20)  
Symbols: !, #, $, %, `, ', (, ), _, -, ~, ^, \, {, }, :, +, ,, ., @, =, [, ], &, *, ;, /, ?, |, >  
Command and option separators are recognized as one or more space characters (ASCII code: 0x20).  
Don't enclose a parameter in quotes (") but for instructions to use quotes (") to contain a blank space.  
The commands are case-sensitive.  
Using the CLI  
54  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 3 Installation  
3.1 Workflow for Initial Setup of the Device  
This section describes the procedures to setup the device.  
1) Prepare a terminal  
Prepare a terminal for the initial configuration.  
2) "Besic Setting Up"  
Connect the device and terminal with an RS232C cable. The band rate setting is 9,600 bps.  
To configure the Device basically, carry out the following procedure.  
Command  
Task  
Login:admin  
Password:  
Login to the device from the serial terminal. The user name is  
"admin". The default password is not set.  
XG2600# configure  
Switch to Configuration mode.  
Set the device name (HOST-NAME).  
Set time zone.  
XG2600(config)# sysname HOST-NAME  
XG2600(config)# time zone -0500  
XG2600(config)# date YYYY/MM/DD.hh:mm:ss  
Set date and time.  
XG2600(config)# password admin set  
Password:  
Set the password for user "admin".  
Type password.  
Retype password:  
Retype password.  
XG2600(config)# save  
XG2600(config)# reset  
Save the configuration.  
Reset the device.  
3) Turn on the device to start the system.  
Turn on the terminal and the device to start the system.  
The initial setting of the LAN interface is for only IPv6 link-local address.  
To use the following functions, set up the LAN interface:  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Telnet connection  
SNMP manager connection  
System log transmission  
Time synchronization using an NTP/SNTP server  
Configuration file upload/download  
Firmware update  
Collection of maintenance information  
The initial setting of the Telnet connection via the management LAN interface is disabled.  
Enable telnet connection if necessary.  
Initially, the SNMP agent configuration is not set.  
Set the SNMP configuration as needed.  
7) This is the end of the preparation procedure  
Proceed with configuring the switch.  
Workflow for Initial Setup of the Device  
56  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 3 Installation  
3.1.1 Configure LAN Interface  
The initial setting of the LAN interface is for only IPv6 link-local address.  
To use the following functions, configure the LAN interface.  
Telnet connection  
SNMP manager connection  
System log transmission  
Time synchronization using an NTP/SNTP server  
Configuration file upload/download  
Firmware update  
Collection of maintenance information  
To configure the LAN interface, carry out the following procedure.  
Command  
Task  
Login:admin  
Password:  
Login to the device from the serial terminal. The user name is  
"admin". Type the password for uset "admin".  
XG2600# configure  
Switch to Configuration mode.  
XG2600(config)# oob ip address A.B.C.D/M 3  
Set the IP address, subnet, and default gateway of the LAN interface  
for management port. (XG2600 only)  
XG2600(config)# lan 0 ip address A.B.C.D/M 3  
XG2600(config)# lan 0 vlan 1  
Set the IP address, subnet, and default gateway of the LAN interface  
for VLAN ID 1.  
XG2600(config)# proxydns domain 0 any * any  
static A.B.C.D  
(Optional)  
Set up DNS servers.  
XG2600(config)# commit  
XG2600(config)# save  
XG2600(config)# exit  
Apply the configuration.  
Save the configuration.  
Switch to Operation mode.  
3.1.2 Telnet Connection via the LAN Interface (Optional)  
The "Telnet server function" is initially enabled.  
The telnet session timeout period is initially 5 minutes.  
To change the telnet session timeout period, carry out the following procedure in "admin" Operation mode.  
Command  
Task  
XG2600# configure  
Switch to Configuration mode.  
XG2600(config)# telnetinfo autologout 30m  
Set the Telnet session timeout period (30 minutes).  
If the Telnet session timeout period expires the telne connection is  
terminated.  
XG2600(config)# commit  
XG2600(config)# save  
XG2600(config)# exit  
Apply the configuration.  
Save the configuration.  
Switch to Operation mode.  
Workflow for Initial Setup of the Device  
57  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 3 Installation  
3.1.3 SNMP Configuration (Optional)  
To operate in conjunction with an SNMP manager, the SNMP agent must be configured.  
To configure the SNMP agent, carry out the following procedures in "admin" Operation mode.  
Command  
Task  
XG2600# configure  
Switch to Configuration mode.  
Enable SNMP function.  
XG2600(config)# snmp service on  
XG2600(config)# snmp agent contact SYSTEM-  
CONTAC  
Set the swith's contact (SYSTEM-CONTACT).  
XG2600(config)# snmp agent location SYSTEM-  
LOCATION  
Set the swith's location (SYSTEM-LOCATION).  
XG2600(config)# snmp agent address A.B.C.D  
Set the SNMP agent address. This setting is also used for the local  
address at trap transmission.  
Make sure to set it when using the SNMP agent function  
XG2600(config)# snmp manager 0 A.B.C.D  
COMMUNIT-YNAME v2c disable  
Set the IP address (host name) of the SNMP manager, the commu-  
nity name, sending SNMPv2 traps, and disabling writing. if the SNMP  
trap notification is enabled.  
XG2600(config)# commit  
XG2600(config)# save  
XG2600(config)# exit  
Apply the configuration.  
Save the configuration.  
Switch to Operation mode.  
Switch to Configuration mode.  
Enable SNMP function.  
XG2600# configure  
XG2600(config)# snmp service on  
Workflow for Initial Setup of the Device  
58  
 
Chapter 4  
Switch  
Functions and  
their Configuration  
This chapter describes the functions of the device and how to configure them.  
Refer to "2.1.1 Operating Environment for the CLI" (pg.38) for details on using the CLI.  
Reference  
Refer to "chapter 5 Command Reference" (pg.85) for details on commands.  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration  
4.1 Basic Switch Functions  
This section describes the basic switch functions.  
4.1.1 Switching Mode (XG2600)  
XG2600 provides the following two switching modes.  
XG0224 and XG0448 provide store-and-forward switching modes only.  
Store-and-forward switching mode  
After the device finishes receiving a frame, it checks the FCS (Frame Check Sequence) and performs a validity check  
(on packet size, etc.) before forwarding the frame. If the switch receives a frame with an error frame, it discards it.  
Cut-through switching mode  
The device transmits the frame to the destination as soon as the first 64 bytes of the frame are received with no errors.  
Since the device starts transmitting the frame before it receives the entire frame, this mode allows forwarding at low  
latency.  
To change the switching modes, carry out the following procedures in "admin" Operation mode.  
Command  
Task  
Switch to Configuration mode.  
XG2600# configure  
XG2600(config)# forwardingmode cut-through  
XG2600(config)# forwardingmode store-and-forward  
XG2600(config)# commit  
Select the (cut-through) for the switching mode.  
Select the (store-and-forward) for the switching mode.  
Apply the configuration.  
XG2600(config)# save  
Save the configuration.  
XG2600(config)# exit  
Switch to Operation mode.  
Basic Switch Functions  
61  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration  
4.1.2 MAC Address Table Management  
The MAC address table is a database used for managing the association between address information and destination ports.  
XG0224 and XG2600 can learn up to 16000 entries of MAC addresses.  
XG0448 can learn up to 32000 entries of MAC addresses.  
Dynamic MAC address learning  
The device dynamically learns MAC addresses from received frames. If MAC addresses are not refreshed before the  
aging time expires, they will be removed frame MAC address table.  
To disable the dynamic learning, carry out the following procedures in "admin" Operation mode.  
Command  
Task  
Switch to Configuration mode.  
XG2600# configure  
XG2600(config)# mac learning off  
XG2600(config)# commit  
XG2600(config)# save  
Disable the dynamic MAC address learning.  
Apply the configuration.  
Save the configuration.  
XG2600(config)# exit  
Switch to Operation mode.  
To change aging time period of MAC address learning table, carry out the following procedures in "admin" Operation  
mode..  
Command  
Task  
Switch to Configuration mode.  
XG2600# configure  
XG2600(config)# mac age 1000  
XG2600(config)# commit  
XG2600(config)# save  
Change aging time period of MAC address learning table.  
Apply the configuration.  
Save the configuration.  
XG2600(config)# exit  
Switch to Operation mode.  
Static unicast address  
By registering a unicast MAC address with the MAC address table, unicast frames are forwarded to a specified port.  
Static unicast addresses are not subject to MAC address removal controlled by the aging function.  
To register, change or delete a static unicast address, carry out the following procedures in "admin" Operation mode.  
Command  
Task  
Switch to Configuration mode.  
XG2600# configure  
XG2600(config)# vlan <vid> forward <count>  
<dst_addr> <port>  
Register a static unicast address, destination port and vlan with  
the MAC address table (or remove them from it).  
XG2600(config)# delete vlan <vid> forward  
XG2600(config)# commit  
Apply the configuration.  
Save the configuration.  
Switch to Operation mode.  
XG2600(config)# save  
XG2600(config)# exit  
Basic Switch Functions  
62  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration  
4.1.3 Jumbo Frame Support  
The device can transmit jumbo frames of up to 9KB (9216 bytes). (XG0224,XG0448)  
The device can transmit jumbo frames of up to 16KB (16128 bytes). (XG2600)  
4.1.4 Flow Control  
Flow control is a function that prevents frame loss when the receive buffer in the switch overflows due to temporary traffic  
overload by using a PAUSE frame.  
When the device receives a PAUSE frame, it temporarily stops sending frames at the receive port. If the receive buffer  
overflows, it is possible to restrict frame transmission from the connected device by sending a PAUSE frame.  
For each port, it is possible to select whether or not to send a PAUSE frame. Select the mode depending on whether the  
destination responds to a PAUSE frame or not.  
To change the flow control mode, carry out the following procedures in "admin" Operation mode.  
Command  
Task  
Switch to Configuration mode.  
XG2600# configure  
XG2600(config)# ether 1-3 flowctl off on  
Set the flow control mode disable send flow control packets and  
enable receive flow control packets.  
XG2600(config)# commit  
XG2600(config)# save  
XG2600(config)# exit  
Apply the configuration.  
Save the configuration.  
Switch to Operation mode.  
4.1.5 Storm Control  
The device discards broadcast/multicast frames when the number of received broadcast frames are over a given threshold  
to prevent unnecessary waste of bandwidth due to retained broadcast frames on the network. This function is called "Storm  
Control".  
For each port, it is possible to configure storm control.  
When broadcast/multicast frames are discarded by storm control, system logs are output.  
To configure storm control, carry out the following procedures in "admin" Operation mode.  
XG2600  
Command  
Task  
Switch to Configuration mode.  
XG2600# configure  
XG2600(config)# ether 1-5 mac storm 7000000k  
8000000k discard  
Enable storm control, set broadcast threshold 7000000k bps,  
multicast threshold 8000000k bps, and set "discard" when  
broadcast and multicast traffic exceeds the threshold.  
XG2600(config)# commit  
XG2600(config)# save  
XG2600(config)# exit  
Apply the configuration.  
Save the configuration.  
Switch to Operation mode.  
Basic Switch Functions  
63  
     
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration  
XG0224/XG0448  
Command  
Task  
XG0224# configure  
Switch to Configuration mode.  
XG0224(config)# ether 1-5 mac storm 20000000  
discard close  
Enable storm control, set threshold 20000000 pps, set "discard"  
when broadcast traffic exceeds the threshold, set "close" when  
multicast traffic exceeds the threshold.  
XG0224(config)# commit  
XG0224(config)# save  
XG0224(config)# exit  
Apply the configuration.  
Save the configuration.  
Switch to Operation mode.  
4.1.6 Egress Rate Control (XG2600 Only)  
It is possible to set an egress rate-limiting value for each port in approximately 40Mbps increments.  
To set an egress rate-limiting value, carry out the following procedures in "admin" Operation mode.  
Command  
Task  
Switch to Configuration mode.  
XG2600# configure  
XG2600(config)# ether 1-5 ratecontrol 8000m  
Specify an egress rate limiting value by 8000M bps for port 1-5.  
Basic Switch Functions  
64  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration  
4.2 Port Mirroring  
It is possible to monitor the traffic by mirroring the frames sent or received by a port to another port.  
Multiple ports may not be mirrored to one port. However, multiple ports may be mirrored.  
To configure port mirroring, carry out the following procedure in "admin" Operation mode.  
XG2600  
Command  
Task  
Switch to Configuration mode.  
XG2600# configure  
XG2600(config)# ether 10 type mirror 0 1 rx  
Configure the port 10 to be destination port and the receive  
frames of the source port (port 1) are mirrored.  
XG2600(config)# ether 11 type mirror 0 2 tx  
Configure the port 11 to be destination port and the send frames  
of the source port (port 2) are mirrored.  
XG2600(config)# commit  
XG2600(config)# save  
XG2600(config)# exit  
Apply the configuration.  
Save the configuration.  
Switch to Operation mode.  
XG0224/XG0448  
Command  
XG0224# configure  
Task  
Switch to Configuration mode.  
XG0224(config)# ether 10 type mirror 0 1 both  
Configure the port 10 to be destination port and the receive/send  
frames of the source port (port 1) are mirrored.  
XG0224(config)# ether 10 type mirror 10 2 tx  
Configure the port 10 to be destination port and the send frames  
of the source port (port 2) are mirrored.  
XG0224(config)# commit  
XG0224(config)# save  
XG0224(config)# exit  
Apply the configuration.  
Save the configuration.  
Switch to Operation mode.  
Port Mirroring  
65  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration  
4.3 Link Down Relay  
Link Down Relay is a function that monitors the status of a specified port link, if a link down detected the device notifies  
the device force to link down the relay port.  
(1)When Link Down Relay is not used  
(1)  
(3)  
XG  
(2)  
(4)  
XG  
Link Up  
Link Up  
Link Down  
(2)When Link Down Relay is used  
(1)  
(3)  
XG  
(2)  
(4)  
XG  
The other end becomes  
link down when a link fault  
Link Down Relay  
Link Down  
is detected.  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
XG  
XG  
The other end becomes  
link down when a link  
Link Down Relay  
Link Down Relay  
fault is detected.  
Link Down Relay  
To configure Link Down Relay, carry out the following procedure in "admin" Operation mode.  
Command  
Task  
Switch to Configuration mode.  
XG2600# configure  
XG2600(config)# ether 10 downrelay port 11,12  
Set port 11,12 go linkdown when the port 10 linkdown.  
Set port 11,12 go linkup when the port 10 linkup.  
XG2600(config)# ether 10 downrelay recovery mode  
auto  
XG2600(config)# commit  
XG2600(config)# save  
XG2600(config)# exit  
Apply the configuration.  
Save the configuration.  
Switch to Operation mode.  
Link Down Relay  
66  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration  
4.4 Link Aggregation  
Link aggregation is a function that combines multiple ports into a single logical link. A set of ports that comprise a logical  
link are called an aggregation group.  
Link aggregation provides:  
Increased bandwidth  
By grouping multiple physical ports into a single logical link (an aggregation group), network traffic (data sent and  
received) will be balanced across the physical ports, thereby providing increased bandwidth.  
Redundancy  
Multiplexing ports allows uninterrupted network operations should one of the multiple links fail. Since the link status  
of the logical aggregation groups remains unchanged, there are no fluctuations in network traffic, the effect of a fault  
having been minimized.  
Up to 10 ports can be used to create a single link aggregation group using link aggregation. Up to 10 aggregation groups  
can be created.  
XG  
XG  
Aggregation Group  
Aggregation Group  
Physical Port  
Physical Port  
Physical Port  
Physical Port  
The communication  
can be continued  
even though one  
physical port is  
down.  
Bandwidth is  
expanded by  
bundling the  
physical port.  
Physical  
Physical Port  
Port  
is down.  
XG  
XG  
Link Aggregation  
Link Aggregation  
67  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration  
4.4.1 Configuring Link Aggregation  
Either static or dynamic (also known as LACP) configuration can be selected for Link Aggregation.  
Static configuration  
Configures aggregation groups statically.  
LACP  
Configures link aggregation using Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP). The LACP is a switch-to-switch  
control protocol that enables dynamic configuration of aggregation groups and is standardized by the IEEE802.3ad.  
The LACP facilitates load balancing across the individual links aggregated between the devices connected.  
Either "active" or "passive" LACP mode can be selected.  
-
active  
The device starts LACP negotiation. Since the active mode allows the reception of LACP control frames, it is  
possible to direct the device in "active" mode.  
-
passive  
The device responds to LACP control frames but does not start LACP negotiation.  
To configure static link aggregation, carry out the following procedure in "admin" Operation mode.  
Command  
Task  
Switch to Configuration mode.  
XG2600# configure  
XG2600(config)# ether 1-8 type linkaggregation 1  
XG2600(config)# linkaggregation 1 mode static  
XG2600(config)# commit  
Set port 1-8 to be linkaggregation group 1.  
Set linkaggregation group 1 to be static.  
Apply the configuration.  
XG2600(config)# save  
Save the configuration.  
XG2600(config)# exit  
Switch to Operation mode.  
To configure LACP link aggregation, carry out the following procedure in "admin" Operation mode.  
Command  
Task  
Switch to Configuration mode.  
XG2600# configure  
XG2600(config)# ether 1-8 type linkaggregation 1  
XG2600(config)# ether 11-18 type linkaggregation 2  
XG2600(config)# linkaggregation 1 mode active  
XG2600(config)# linkaggregation 2 mode passive  
XG2600(config)# commit  
Set port 1-8 to be linkaggregation group 1.  
Set port 11-18 to be linkaggregation group 2.  
Set linkaggregation group 1 to be active.  
Set linkaggregation group 2 to be passive.  
Apply the configuration.  
XG2600(config)# save  
Save the configuration.  
XG2600(config)# exit  
Switch to Operation mode.  
Link Aggregation  
68  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration  
4.4.2 Frame Distribution Methods in Link Aggregation  
How frames are distributed across physical ports that make up an aggregation group are determined by the contents of a  
frame (source and destination MAC addresses).  
There are 6 ways to specify how frames are distributed:  
Frame distribution based on destination MAC address (da-mac)  
The destination port is determined based on the destination MAC address of the frames.  
Frame distribution based on source MAC address (sa-mac)  
The destination port is determined based on the source MAC address of the frames.  
Frame distribution based on destination and source MAC addresses (both-mac)  
The destination port is determined based on the destination and source MAC addresses of the frames.  
Frame distribution based on destination IP address (da-ip)  
The destination port is determined based on the destination IP address of the frames.  
Frame distribution based on source IP address (sa-ip)  
The destination port is determined based on the source IP address of the frames.  
Frame distribution based on destination and source IP addresses (both-ip)  
The destination port is determined based on the destination and source IP addresses of the frames.  
To set a distribution method, carry out the following procedure in "admin" Operation mode.  
Command  
Task  
Switch to Configuration mode.  
Set port 1-8 to be linkaggregation group 1.  
XG2600# configure  
XG2600(config)# ether 1-8 type linkaggregation 1  
XG2600(config)# linkaggregation 1 algorithm both-mac Set linkaggregation group 1 uses frame distribution based on  
destination and source IP address.  
XG2600(config)# commit  
XG2600(config)# save  
XG2600(config)# exit  
Apply the configuration.  
Save the configuration.  
Switch to Operation mode.  
Link Aggregation  
69  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration  
4.4.3 The Number of Ports That Require Linkup  
It is possible to specify the number of ports that enable a linkup state for an aggregation group. If the number of active  
ports that make up an aggregation group in a linkup state is less than the specified number of ports, the aggregation group  
changes to a linkdown state.  
For static link aggregation  
If the number of ports that make up an aggregation group in a linkup state no longer satisfies the specified number of  
ports, the aggregation group changes to a linkdown state.  
For LACP link aggregation  
If the number of ports that make up an established LACP aggregation group changes, the aggregation group reverts to  
a linkdown state.  
To set the number of ports in the aggregation group, carry out the following procedure in "admin" Operation mode.  
Command  
Task  
Switch to Configuration mode.  
Set port 1-8 to be linkaggregation group 1.  
XG2600# configure  
XG2600(config)# ether 1-8 type linkaggregation 1  
XG2600(config)# linkaggregation 1 collecting minimum 3 Set the minimum number of member ports for aggregation group  
1 to 3.  
XG2600(config)# commit  
XG2600(config)# save  
XG2600(config)# exit  
Apply the configuration.  
Save the configuration.  
Switch to Operation mode.  
4.4.4 Notes on Link Aggregation  
No link aggregation can be used if the half-duplex link mode has been set by the "ether duplex" command.  
All ports in the link aggregation group must be set with the same link speed.  
All ports in the link aggregation group must be set to belong to the same VLAN.  
Specify the link aggregation group in sequential ports.  
No link aggregation can be used for the non-sequentially numbered port configuration.  
The member ports of a link aggregation group must be specified to have the sequentially numbered ports.  
If the Ethernet port type has been set as a link aggregation port and if the definition conflict as described above has  
occurred, the relevant port is not linked up and it cannot be used. Change the settings by referring to the log messages.  
Link Aggregation  
70  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration  
4.5 Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)  
The Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) is a function that prevents loops from occurring on a network. It is also possible to  
provide network redundancy by intentionally creating a loop.  
STP exclusively uses only one active path between network devices, and shuts out other paths, to avoid network loops. An  
active path is selected by comparing path costs defined on each path. After the comparison, the lowest cost path will be  
selected. If the selected path becomes disabled, STP will activate the lowest cost path amongst the paths remaining.  
The device supports IEEE802.1w RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol). The RSTP is upward compatible with  
IEEE802.1D STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) and serves as a STP if the destination device only supports STP.  
Route Switch  
Switch A  
Switch B  
Switch Priority = 20  
Switch Priority = 10  
Path Cost = 10  
Designated port  
Route port  
t = 15  
Blocking port  
Forwarding pass  
Blocking pass  
Pass Cos  
15  
20  
Path Cost = 10  
Switch Priority = 40  
Switch Priority = 30  
Switch D  
Switch C  
Physical Topology  
Switch A  
Route Switch  
= 10  
Path Cost  
Switch C  
Switch B  
Route  
Route  
Path Cost = 10  
Path Cost = 20  
15  
Switch D  
Route  
Path Cost = 25  
Logical Topology by STP  
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)  
71  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration  
4.5.1 Port Roles Based on Spanning Tree  
RSTP assigns one of these port roles to individual ports:  
Root port  
Provides the best path (lowest cost) when the switch forwards packets to the root switch.  
Designated port  
Connects to the designated switch toward the leaves of the spanning tree. The port specified connecting to the  
designated port serves as a root port.  
Alternate Port  
The alternative port with the second lowest path cost. In the event that the root port goes to a linkdown state, the  
alternate port serves as the root port. It does not always send or receive frames while in the blocking state.  
Backup Port  
Provides an alternative path to that specified. In the event that the specified port goes into a linkdown state, the backup  
port serves as the new designated port. It does not always send or receive frames while it is in the blocking state.  
Disabled Port  
Disabled port, it does not send or receive any frames.  
4.5.2 Spanning Tree Protocol Port States  
The port states defined by the STP are:  
Discard  
The port is in a "discarding state. BPDUs are only received.  
Learn  
The port is in a "learning" state. A port in the learning state learns the destination MAC address of the received frames  
but does not participate in frame forwarding.  
Forward  
The port is ready to transmit data traffic.  
The STP states "blocking" and "listening" have been merged into a unique RSTP "discarding" state. The correspondence  
between STP port states and RSTP port states are shown below.  
Display Format  
Discard  
STP (IEEE802.1D)  
Blocking  
RSTP (IEEE802.1w)  
Discarding  
Discard  
Learn  
Listening  
Learning  
Discarding  
Learning  
Forward  
Forwarding  
Forwarding  
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)  
72  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration  
4.5.3 Configuring Spanning Tree  
To configure the spanning tree protocol, carry out the following procedure in "admin" Operation mode.  
Command  
Task  
Switch to Configuration mode.  
XG2600# configure  
XG2600(config)# stp mode stp  
Enable Spanning Tree Protocol.  
XG2600(config)# stp domain 0 priority (0-61440)  
XG2600(config)# stp hello (1s-10s)  
XG2600(config)# stp age (6s-40s)  
Configure Spanning Tree Protocol parameters on the device.  
Switch priority  
Hello time  
XG2600(config)# stp delay (4s-30s)  
Maximum aging time (max-age)  
Forward delay time (forward-time)  
XG2600(config)# ether 1-8 stp use on  
XG2600(config)# ether 9-20 stp use off  
Enable Spanning Tree Protocol on port 1-8.  
Disable Spanning Tree Protocol on port 9-20.  
XG2600(config)# ether 1-8 stp domain 0 priority (0-240) Configure the following parameters related to the spanning tree  
topology:  
XG2600(config)# ether 1-8 stp domain 0 cost  
(1-200000000)  
Port priority  
Path cost  
XG2600(config)# commit  
XG2600(config)# save  
XG2600(config)# exit  
Apply the configuration.  
Save the configuration.  
Switch to Operation mode.  
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)  
73  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration  
4.6 VLAN  
VLAN (Virtual LAN) is a technology that divides a single network into virtually separated networks.  
VLANs are separate logical networks within one physical network. A VLAN capable switch can change and define new  
LAN network configurations without changing physical cable connections. This creates a flexible and extensible network  
system.  
The device provides for port-based or Tag-based (IEEE802.1Q) VLANs.  
4.6.1 Port-Based VLAN  
Port-based VLAN is a method for configuring VLAN membership on a port basis. Forwarding is based on the destination  
MAC addresses and related port.  
Segment 3 (VLAN30)  
Segment 1 (VLAN10)  
VLAN10 consists  
of Port 1, 2, 3  
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
8
VLAN20 consists  
of Port 5, 6, 7  
VLAN30 consists  
of port 4, 8  
Segment 2 (VLAN20)  
Port Base VLAN  
To configure a port-based VLAN, carry out the following procedures in "admin" Operation mode.  
Command  
Task  
Switch to Configuration mode.  
XG2600# configure  
XG2600(config)# ether 1-3 vlan untag 10  
XG2600(config)# ether 5-7 vlan untag 20  
XG2600(config)# ether 4,8 vlan untag 30  
XG2600(config)# commit  
Set the default port VLAN ID 10 for port 1-3.  
Set the default port VLAN ID 20 for port 5-7.  
Set the default port VLAN ID 30 for port 4,8.  
Apply the configuration.  
XG2600(config)# save  
Save the configuration.  
XG2600(config)# exit  
Switch to Operation mode.  
VLAN  
74  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration  
4.6.2 Tag-Based (IEEE802.1Q) VLAN  
Tag-based VLAN is a method of configuring VLANs so that the frame forwarding decision is based on a tag in the MAC  
header identifying the VLAN membership. 4 bytes of additional data in the header, called a VLAN tag, identifies the  
VLAN frame ownership. Using a VLAN tag enables configuring a single physical link that shares multiple VLANs.  
The device’s tag-based VLAN function is based on the IEEE 802.1Q standard.  
The following figure shows an Ethernet frame format including a VLAN tag as specified by the IEEE 802.1Q standard.  
TYPE  
LENGTH  
DA  
(6)  
SA  
(6)  
Protocol data (IP Packet, etc.)/  
LLC,SNAP  
VLAN tag  
(4)  
(2)  
2 bytes  
TPID  
0x8100  
2 bytes  
TCI  
User  
CFI  
VLAN ID  
12 bit  
Priority  
3 bit  
1 bit  
TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier) (0x8100)  
TCI (Tag Control Information)  
User Priority(3bit): Priority of Frames (Higher priority to larger number from 0 to 7)  
CFI (Canonical Format Indicator)(1bit): ”1” when RIF field exists. Normally “0”.  
VLAN ID(12bit):VLAN identifier (0 to 4095. 0 and 4095 are reserved ID)  
Tag VLAN Frame Format  
To configure a tag-based VLAN, carry out the following procedures in "admin" Operation mode.  
Command  
Task  
Switch to Configuration mode.  
XG2600# configure  
XG2600(config)# ether 1-8 vlan tag 100-300  
XG2600(config)# commit  
Set the tag-based VLAN ID 100-300 for port 1-8.  
Apply the configuration.  
XG2600(config)# save  
Save the configuration.  
XG2600(config)# exit  
Switch to Operation mode.  
VLAN  
75  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration  
4.7 Quality of Service (QoS)  
The device provides Quality of Service (QoS) that is based on the IEEE802.1p standard.  
The device QoS determines the priority of frames at the ingress side using VLAN tag (including priority tag) or a port's  
default priority. Their priorities are mapped to 8 output queues.  
The queues are processed in the order of the QoS priority precedence.  
The device priorities available are:  
Default priority  
Set a default priority of 0 to 7 for each port.  
For frames whose priority was not set (VLAN-untagged frames), the default priority is assigned according to the value  
of the frame.  
Mapping to output queues  
The device is equipped with 8 output queues with different levels (0 to 7). Frames are transmitted in order of output  
queue priority.  
Each priority is mapped to a specified output queue.  
To set the default priority and output queue mapping, carry out the following procedure in "admin" Operation mode.  
XG2600  
Command  
Task  
Switch to Configuration mode.  
XG2600# configure  
XG2600(config)# ether 1-8 qos priority (0-7)  
Set a default priority for frames whose priority was not set  
(VLANuntagged frame) when received.  
XG2600(config)# ether 1-8 qos prioritymap (0-7) (0-7)  
Set the level of output queue to map to each frame that has a  
priority value.  
XG2600(config)# save  
XG2600(config)# reset  
Save the configuration.  
Reset the device.  
XG0224/XG0448  
Command  
XG0224# configure  
Task  
Switch to Configuration mode.  
XG0224(config)# ether 1-8 qos priority (0-7)  
Set a default priority for frames whose priority was not set  
(VLANuntagged frame) when received.  
XG0224(config)# qos cosmap (0-7) (0-7)  
Set the level of output queue to map to each frame that has a  
priority value.  
XG0224(config)# save  
XG2600(config)# reset  
Save the configuration.  
Reset the device.  
Quality of Service (QoS)  
76  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration  
4.8 IGMP Snooping  
IP multicast is often used to distribute multimedia data, including video and voice, over a network.  
A layer 2 switch floods multicast frames, absorbing unnecessary network bandwidth. A layer 3 switch that supports  
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) manages multicast groups using IGMP packets. The device controls how IP  
multicast packets are forwarded to required ports by monitoring IGMP packets generated by layer 3 switches, thereby  
preventing unnecessary flooding. This function is called "IGMP Snooping".  
The device supports IGMP snooping for IGMP v1/v2.  
Multicast Server  
Multicast Router  
Multicast Server  
Multicast Router  
Transfer only to  
Flooding to all  
the required  
ports  
ports  
Layer 2  
Switch  
Layer 2  
Switch  
XG  
Terminal  
Terminal  
IGMP Snooping  
IGMP No Snooping  
IGMP Snooping  
IGMP Snooping  
77  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration  
4.8.1 Registering Group Members  
On receiving an IGMP Report message, the device registers a multicast MAC address to the IGMP snooping control table  
for the port that received the IGMP Report message and the connecting multicast router port.  
Multicast Router  
VLAN 10  
Port 8  
XG  
IGMPsnoopingControl Table  
VLAN  
IGMP Report  
MAC  
Destination IP : 239.1.2.3  
: 0100.5E01.0203  
VLAN(RouterPort)  
Group IP  
(MAC address)  
Port  
1
Reporter  
(01:00:05:01:02:03)  
239.1.2.3  
10 (8)  
192.168.10.20  
Source IP  
Group IP  
: 192.168.10.20  
: 239.1.2.3  
Port 1  
Port 2  
Port 3  
Terminal 1  
Terminal 3  
Terminal 2  
Registering Group Members  
The device can register multicast groups up to a maximum value (Reference "1.2.3 System Maximum Values" (pg.34)).  
Multicast packets that cannot be registered are those flooding all ports belonging to the same VLAN.  
Note  
If "igmpsnoop unknown flooding off" command is set, Multicast packets that cannot be registered are those not flooding all  
ports belonging to the same VLAN (XG0224, XG0448).  
The following figure shows the relationship between the registered IP multicast address and the multicast MAC address.  
MAC addresses that are registered with IGMP snooping are between 0100.5E00.0000 and 0100.5E7F.FFFF. An IP  
multicast address is 32 bits. The first 4 bits are always 1110 followed by 28 bits that represent the IP multicast address  
information. Of these 28 bits, the lower order 23 bits are mapped to a MAC address and the data in the higher order 5 bits  
is not used.  
Therefore 32 IP multicast addresses are mapped to the same single MAC address.  
IP Multicast Address  
239.  
1. 2.  
3
1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1  
Class D  
0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1  
5 Bit Loss  
Lower 23 Bit Mapping  
Reserved for IPv4 Multicast  
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0  
0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1  
0 1 0 0 . 5 E 0 1 . 0 2 0 3  
Multicast MAC Address  
Multicast Address  
IGMP Snooping  
78  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration  
4.8.2 Removing Group Members  
The group members registered by IGMP snooping are removed under the following status.  
If after receiving an IGMP Report message for group registration, the group member interval expires before the device  
receives another IGMP Report message, the switch removes the host from the group member. The setting for the group  
member interval is 260 seconds.  
If an IGMP Leave message is sent from a host, the multicast router sends out an IGMP Specific Query (GSQ) message  
to determine whether that the host has left the group.  
If after receiving the IGMP Leave message, the last member interval expires before the device receives another IGMP  
Report message, the switch removes the host from the group member. The setting for the last member interval is 2  
seconds.  
Multicast Router  
VLAN 10  
Port 8  
IGMP Leave  
IGMPsnoopingControl Table  
MAC  
: 0100.5E00.0002  
VLAN  
Destination IP : 224.0.0.2  
VLAN(RouterPort)  
Group IP  
(MAC address)  
Port  
1
Reporter  
Source IP  
: 192.168.10.20  
: 239.1.2.3  
(01:00:05:01:02:03)  
Group IP  
239.1.2.3  
10 (8)  
192.168.10.20  
Port 1  
Port 3  
Port 2  
Terminal 1  
Terminal 2  
Terminal 3  
Removing Group Members (1)  
IGMP Specific Query  
Multicast Router  
MAC  
: 0100.5E01.0203  
VLAN 10  
Port 8  
Destination IP : 239.1.2.3  
Group IP  
: 239.1.2.3  
XG  
IGMPsnoopingControl Table  
VLAN  
VLAN(RouterPort)  
Group IP  
(MAC address)  
Port  
1
Reporter  
(01:00:05:01:02:03)  
239.1.2.3  
10 (8)  
192.168.10.20  
Port 1  
Port 3  
Port 2  
Terminal 3  
Terminal 1  
Terminal 2  
Removing Group Members (2)  
The registered Multicast Group IP is not detete form the IGMP snooping Control Table automatically.  
Please use "clear igmpsnoop group" command to delete it.  
Note  
IGMP Snooping  
79  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration  
4.8.3 Managing Group Members  
When network congestion causes Leave message loss or there is a host that uses IGMPv1, the multicast router does not  
receive Leave messages. The multicast router sends out an IGMP General Query message to all hosts (IP address:  
224.0.0.1) at intervals (query interval) to determine membership information.  
Upon reception of an IGMP General Query message, the host, a member of the group, returns an IGMP Report message to  
maintain membership in the group.  
IGMP General Query  
Multicast Router  
MAC  
: 0100.5E01.0001  
Destination IP : 224.0.0.1  
VLAN 10  
Port 8  
Group IP : 0.0.0.0  
IGMPsnoopingControl Table  
VLAN  
VLAN(RouterPort)  
Group IP  
(MAC address)  
Port  
1
Reporter  
XG  
(01:00:05:01:02:03)  
239.1.2.3  
10 (8)  
192.168.10.20  
Port 1  
Port 2  
Port 3  
Terminal 3  
Terminal 1  
Terminal 2  
Managing Group Members  
In consideration of General Query or Report message loss caused by network congestion, since RFC 2236 defines the  
default query interval for multicast routers as 125 seconds, this device uses 126 seconds for the group member interval  
when it works as a Querier.  
IGMP Snooping  
80  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration  
4.8.4 IGMP Querier  
In a typical network configuration, the multicast router periodically sends out an IGMP General Query message to  
determine if any of the hosts on the network are members of any multicast groups. Receiving a response from a host  
ascertains its membership in a multicast group.  
IGMP Querier is a function that acts as a proxy for a multicast router when one is not available in a network segment to  
send an IGMP General Query message to all hosts.  
The Query interval is 126 seconds.  
Multicast Server  
XG  
IGMP Querier  
IGMP General Query  
MAC  
: 0100.5E01.0001  
Destination IP : 224.0.0.1  
Group IP : 0.0.0.0  
Port 1  
Port 2  
Port 3  
Terminal 1  
Terminal 2  
Terminal 3  
IGMP Querier  
Upon reception of an IGMP Leave message, the device sends an IGMP Specific Query (GSQ) message to determine that  
the host is interested in leaving the group.  
If an IGMP Specific Query message is sent 2 times and the host does not respond with an IGMP Report message, that host  
is removed.  
Generally, IGMP Querier uses "0.0.0.0" for the source IP address when sending a Query message.  
Since some client software does not return a response for a Query message with the source IP address being set  
to "0.0.0.0", it is recommended that an address other than "0.0.0.0" be used.  
Note  
If a multicast router exists on the network segment, the device does not send Query message even if IGMP  
Querier is valid.  
IGMP Snooping  
81  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration  
4.8.5 Configuring IGMP Snooping  
To configure IGMP snooping, carry out the following procedure in "admin" Operation mode.  
Command  
Task  
Switch to Configuration mode.  
XG2600# configure  
XG2600(config)# igmpsnoop use on  
XG2600(config)# vlan 10 igmpsnoop router yes 15,16  
XG2600(config)# commit  
Enable global IGMP snooping on the device.  
Specify the multicast router port statically with VLAN.  
Apply the configuration.  
XG2600(config)# save  
Save the configuration.  
XG2600(config)# exit  
Switch to Operation mode.  
To enable IGMP query, carry out the following procedure in "admin" Operation mode.  
Command  
Task  
Switch to Configuration mode.  
XG2600# configure  
XG2600(config)# igmpsnoop use on  
XG2600(config)# vlan 20 igmpsnoop querier on  
XG2600(config)# commit  
Enable global IGMP snooping on the device.  
Specify the Querier operation mode if no multicast router exists.  
Apply the configuration.  
XG2600(config)# save  
Save the configuration.  
XG2600(config)# exit  
Switch to Operation mode.  
IGMP Snooping  
82  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration  
4.9 Network Management  
4.9.1 Traffic Statistics  
The device can display traffic statistics to analyze network operations such as traffic bytes, errors, etc.  
The following are the Traffic Statistics the device provides.  
Displays traffic information on outgoing and incoming frames for each port.  
Displays traffic information on incoming frames by frame size range for each port.  
Displays traffic information on incoming frames for each VLAN.  
Displays incoming traffic information by QoS priority for each port.  
Displays information related to data flow for each port.  
Displays information about errors that occur during transmission/reception for each port.  
To display traffic statistics, monitor and show commands are provided.  
Display the usage ratio (or utilization) information of Ethernet physical ports.  
"show ether statistics" (show ether statistics detail) command  
Display the statistics of Ethernet physical ports.  
4.9.2 SNMP Agent  
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is a protocol that monitors and manages devices on a network.  
The device supports the SNMP (v1/v2c/v3) function to collect management information blocks (MIBs) from a remote  
network manager (SNMP manager).  
For the MIBs supported, refer to Appendix B. The device can be configured for up to 16 SNMP managers and up to 16  
SNMP trap destinations (8 for v1/v2c, 8 for v3).  
To configure the SNMP agent, carry out the following procedures in "admin" Operation mode.  
Command  
Task  
XG2600# configure  
Switch to Configuration mode.  
Enable SNMP function.  
XG2600(config)#snmp service on  
XG2600(config)#snmp agent contact  
SYSTEM-CONTAC  
Set the swith's contact (SYSTEM-CONTACT).  
XG2600(config)#snmp agent location  
SYSTEM-LOCATION  
Set the swith's location (SYSTEM-LOCATION).  
XG2600(config)#snmp agent address A.B.C.D  
Set the SNMP agent address. This setting is also used for the  
local address at trap transmission.  
Make sure to set it when using the SNMP agent function.  
XG2600(config)# snmp manager 0 A.B.C.D  
COMMUNIT-YNAME v2c disable  
Set the IP address (host name) of the SNMP manager, the  
community name, sending SNMPv2 traps, and disabling writing.  
if the SNMP trap notification is enabled.  
XG2600(config)# snmp user 0 name USERNAME  
XG2600(config)# snmp user 0 address 0 A.B.C.D  
Set a SNMP v3 user name.  
Set a SNMP v3 host address.  
XG2600(config)# snmp user 0 notification 0 A.B.C.D  
Set a SNMP v3 trap notification host address.  
XG2600(config)# snmp user 0 auth md5  
auth_password  
Set the authentication protocol and password for SNMP v3.  
XG2600(config)# snmp user 0 priv des priv_password  
Set the encryption protocol and password for SNMP v3.  
Network Management  
83  
     
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 4 Switch Functions and their Configuration  
Command  
Task  
XG2600(config)# snmp user 0 read view 0  
XG2600(config)# snmp user 0 notify view 0  
XG2600(config)# commit  
Set MIB read permission view for SNMP v3.  
Set trap notification permission view for SNMP v3.  
Apply the configuration.  
XG2600(config)# save  
Save the configuration.  
XG2600(config)# exit  
Switch to Operation mode.  
4.9.3 RMON  
Remote Monitoring (RMON) is a function provided to monitor communications over a network, such as traffic and errors.  
RMON, used in conjunction with the SNMP agent, allows the remote monitoring of traffic on a LAN segment.  
The device supports 2 RMON groups (Statistics, History).  
Statistics group  
Collects traffic statistics for each port.  
History group  
Records traffic statistics for each port at specified time intervals.  
To configure RMON, carry out the following procedure in "admin" Operation mode.  
Command  
Task  
Switch to Configuration mode.  
XG2600# configure  
XG2600(config)#snmp rmon <on|off>  
XG2600(config)# commit  
XG2600(config)# save  
Specify whether to enable or disable the RMON function.  
Apply the configuration.  
Save the configuration.  
XG2600(config)# exit  
Switch to Operation mode.  
Network Management  
84  
 
Chapter 5  
Command  
Reference  
This chapter explains about Command Reference.  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1 Port Information Settings  
This section explains about port information settings.  
Allowed range of port definition numbers  
The Ethernet definition serial number (decimal value), which is to be specified in <number> ("ether" port definition  
number) of the [Option] described in each command of this section, shall be within the range of each model as shown  
below.  
Range  
Model  
XG0224  
1 to 26  
1 to 52  
1 to 26  
XG0448  
XG02600  
Configuration of port types for each model  
The following provides the configuration of port types according to the "ether" port definition number.  
1000BASE-X/SerDes 10/100/1000BASE-T 1000BASE-X/SerDes  
Model  
(downlink)  
ether 1 to 20  
ether 1 to 44  
(uplink)  
ether 21 to 24  
ether 45 to 48  
(interlink)  
ether 25 to 26  
ether 49 to 52  
ether 1 to 26  
XG0224  
XG0448  
XG2600  
Specifying the range of port numbers  
A range of multiple ports can be specified in <number> ("ether" port definition number) shown in the [Options] of each  
command in this section.  
Examples of multiple ports range specification for XG2600/XG0224/XG0448.  
1
= port1  
1-20  
21-24  
-4  
= port1 to port20  
= port21 to port24  
= port1 to port4  
Port Information Settings  
89  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.1  
Ethernet Common Information  
This section explains about the commands related to ethernet common information.  
5.1.1.1 forwardingmode  
Function  
forwardingmode <mode>  
Available Model XG2600  
Syntax  
forwardingmode <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
store-and-forward  
store and forward mode is used  
cut-through  
cut through mode (default) is used  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set the switching mode of 10GbE ports.  
In cut-through mode, 65 byte and over error frames and 16129 byte and over frames  
are forwarded. 64 byte and below frames are not forwarded.  
It is forwarded as FCS error frame at the frame relay of 16129 or more.  
In store and forward mode, Error frames and 16129 byte and over frames are not  
forwarded.  
Statistics for 10GbE ports is cleared when you change the switching mode.  
Default  
It is assumed that cut through mode is used.  
forwardingmode cut-through  
Port Information Settings  
90  
     
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.1.2 ether use  
Function  
Set the port use.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
ether <number> use <mode>  
Options  
<number>  
ether port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
<mode>  
Specify a port operation mode.  
on  
Use the Ethernet port.  
off  
Do not use the Ethernet port.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set to use the Ethernet port.  
It is assumed that the Ethernet port is used.  
ether <number> use on  
Port Information Settings  
91  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.1.3 ether media  
Function  
Sets media type for Ethernet ports.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448  
Syntax  
ether <number> media <type>  
Options  
<number>  
Ethernet port number(s)  
Configure Ethernet port number(s) to be used as base 10 value(s).  
If configuring multiple port numbers, separate them with a comma.  
Use hyphens to specify a range of port numbers. (ex: "1-8")  
Refer to the beginning of this chapter for details on how to specify port numbers.  
Range  
Model  
21 to 24  
45 to 48  
XG0224  
XG0448  
<type>  
Media type.  
metal  
Use 10/100/1000BASE-T ports (RJ45)  
fiber  
Use SFP Ports.  
*The 100BASE-FX module can be used by XG0224 / XG0448.  
auto  
Automatically selects media type.  
*However, if both Ethernet and SFP ports are connected the SFP ports are used.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Sets the type of media to be used by the Ethernet port.  
If auto is selected and cables are connected to 10/100/1000BASE-T ports as well as to  
SFP ports, the SFP ports will be selected.  
Similarly, with the auto setting, if 10/100/1000BASE-T port(s) are in a link up state and  
SFP slot(s) are put into a link up state by connecting a cable to them, operation  
changes to the SFP slot(s) and the 10/100/1000BASE-T port(s) change to a link down  
state.  
Use the fiber setting if using the 100BASE-FX module.  
(The 100BASE-FX module cannot be used with the auto setting.)  
Default  
If unset, automatic selection of media type will be the default.  
ether <number> media auto  
Port Information Settings  
92  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.1.4 ether mode  
Function  
Set the link speed.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448  
Syntax  
ether <number> mode <speed>  
Options  
<number>  
ether port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value. When setting multiple port numbers,  
separate them with commas (,). When setting sequential numbers, separate them with  
hyphens (-). (Example: "11-16")  
Range  
Model  
1 to 24  
1 to 48  
XG0224  
XG0448  
<speed>  
Link speed  
auto  
Determine the link speed through auto negotiation.  
1000  
Set the 1Gbps fixed link speed.  
100  
Set the 100Mbps fixed link speed.  
10  
Set the 10Mbps fixed link speed.  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set the link speed at the Ethernet port.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Use the 100Mbps fixed link speed setting if using the 100BASE-FX module.  
It is assumed that Auto Negotiation mode has been specified.  
Default  
ether <number> mode auto  
Port Information Settings  
93  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.1.5 ether duplex  
Function  
Set the full-duplex or half-duplex link mode.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448  
Syntax  
ether <number> duplex <duplex>  
Options  
<number>  
ether port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value. When setting multiple port numbers,  
separate them with commas (,). When setting sequential numbers, separate them with  
hyphens (-). (Example: "11-16")  
Range  
Model  
1 to 24  
1 to 48  
XG0224  
XG0448  
<duplex>  
Full-duplex or half-duplex link mode.  
full  
Operates in full-duplex fixed link mode.  
half  
Operates in half-duplex fixed link mode.  
This option can be specified only when a fixed link speed has been specified by the  
"ether mode" command. (This option setting is made invalid if the link speed has been  
set to "auto".)  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set the full-duplex or half-duplex link mode on the Ethernet port.  
If "1000" is specified in the "ether mode" command, this command setting is disabled  
and the system operates in full-duplex link mode.  
If "auto" is specified in the "ether mode" command, this command setting is disabled  
and the system operates depending on the result autonegotiated with the connected  
device.  
Default  
It is assumed that full-duplex link mode has been specified.  
ether <number> duplex full  
Port Information Settings  
94  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.1.6 ether mdi  
Function  
Set the MDI.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448  
Syntax  
ether <number> mdi <mode>  
Options  
<number>  
ether port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value. When setting multiple port numbers,  
separate them with commas (,). When setting sequential numbers, separate them with  
hyphens (-). (Example: "11-16")  
Range  
Model  
1 to 24  
1 to 48  
XG0224  
XG0448  
<mode>  
Specify the MDI mode.  
auto  
Set the MDI or MDI-X auto detection mode.  
mdi  
Set the fixed MDI mode.  
mdix  
Set the fixed MDI-X mode.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set the MDI mode for the Ethernet port.  
The auto mode is enabled only when "auto" or "1000M fixed" is specified in the "ether  
mode" command.  
If anything other than "auto" is specified in the "ether mode" command, the port operates  
as MDI-X port.  
If "1000M" is set in the "ether mode" command, the MDI-X fixed mode or the Auto  
Detect mode setting is disabled. The port operates as MDI port.  
If "auto" is set in the "ether mode" command for the 10/100/1000BASE-T port, the MDI-  
X fixed mode setting is disabled. The port always operates as MDI port.  
Default  
It is assumed that MDI/MDI-X Auto Detect mode has been specified.  
ether <number> mdi auto  
Port Information Settings  
95  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.1.7 ether flowctl  
Function  
Set the flow control function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
ether <number> flowctl <send> <receive>  
Options  
<number>  
ether port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
<send>  
on  
Send flow control packets.  
off  
Do not send flow control packets.  
<receive>  
on  
Controls the flow when flow control packets are received.  
off  
Do not control the flow even when flow control packets are received.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set the operation of flow control function on the Ethernet port using the transmission and  
reception functions. The backpressure function is enabled in half-duplex link mode.  
The flow control function is enabled independently of the link speed being set by the  
"ether mode" command.  
Default  
It is assumed to have been specified to take the flow control only when a flow control  
packet is received.  
ether <number> flowctl off on  
Port Information Settings  
96  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.1.8 ether type  
Function  
Set a port type.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
ether <number> type normal  
ether <number> type mirror <count> <source> <mode>  
ether <number> type linkaggregation <group>  
ether <number> type backup <group> <priority>  
Options  
<number>  
ether port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value. When setting multiple port numbers,  
separate them with commas (,). When setting sequential numbers, separate them with  
hyphens (-). (Example: "11-16")  
normal  
mirror  
: Normal port  
: Target mirroring port  
linkaggregation : Link aggregation port  
backup  
: Backup port  
<count>  
Definition number  
Specify the source port number with a decimal number.  
Range  
Model  
0 to 25  
0 to 51  
0 to 25  
XG0224  
XG0448  
XG2600  
<source>  
Source port number  
Set the source port number with a decimal number if mirroring has been specified.  
Range  
Model  
1 to 26  
0 to 52  
0 to 26  
XG0224  
XG0448  
XG2600  
<mode>  
Mirroring mode  
Set one of the following operation modes if mirroring has been specified.  
rx : The receive frames of the source port are mirrored.  
tx : The send frames of the source port are mirrored.  
both : Both the send and receive frames of the source port are mirrored. [XG0224/XG0448]  
Port Information Settings  
97  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
<group>  
Group number  
Set a link aggregation group number with a decimal number.  
Range  
Model  
1 to 13  
1 to 26  
1 to 10  
XG0224  
XG0448  
XG2600  
Set a backup group number with a decimal number.  
Range  
Model  
1 to 13  
1 to 26  
1 to 13  
XG0224  
XG0448  
XG2600  
<priority>  
Priority of port  
Set the master port or backup port if "type backup" has been specified.  
master: Master port  
backup: Backup port  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set an Ethernet port type.  
Select the normal port, the mirror port, the link aggregation port, or the backup port.  
Caution  
Cautions on linkaggregation settings  
All ports in the link aggregation group must be set to belong to the same VLAN.  
No link aggregation can be used for the non-sequentially numbered port configuration.  
The member ports of a link aggregation group must be specified to have the  
sequentially numbered ports.  
No link aggregation can be used if the half-duplex link mode has been set by the "ether  
duplex" command.  
Cautions on mirror setting  
[XG2600]  
Only one target port can be configured for tx and rx respectively.  
Target ports for tx and rx can not be configured to a same port.  
Target port is the dedicated port for the mirror of source port.  
When target ports are used for tx and rx, the specified source ports are applied to both  
target ports.  
e.c.  
#ether 1 type mirror 0 10 tx  
#ether 2 type mirror 0 11 rx  
In above configuration, Tx frames of source port ether10 and ether11 are mirrored to  
target port ether1.  
Rx frames of source port ether10 and ether11 are mirrored to the target port ether2.  
The port which has been configured to target port can not be configured to source port.  
The packet to exceed the band of the target port when there are two or more source  
ports of the mirror for the target port is abandoned.  
The storm control to the port set as a mirror target port becomes invalid.  
Port Information Settings  
98  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
The mirror traffic is as follows according to the state of STP/RSTP/MSTP of the source  
port.  
When the mirror of two or more sources is possible, traffic corresponding to each state  
is mirror.  
STP, RSTP, state of MSTP, and mirror frame  
Source port  
Frame kind  
Excluding  
Target port forwarding  
(in object VLAN in case of MSTP)  
disable  
It is not forwarded  
BPDU  
BPDU  
It is not forwarded  
It is not forwarded  
Blocking and listening  
Excluding  
BPDU  
(Discarding in RSTP/MSTP )  
BPDU  
It is forwarded  
It is not forwarded  
It is forwarded  
It is forwarded  
It is forwarded  
Learning  
Excluding  
BPDU  
Forwarding  
Excluding  
BPDU  
The presence of the VLAN tag of the packet output to the target port: about the  
mirroring of the transmission frame.  
It agrees to the tagging setting of the address source port of the packet. The VLAN tag  
attaches to the packet output to the target port only when there is the one of the setting  
with the VLAN tag in the address source port when there are two or more addresses of  
the packet like the multicast, the broadcast, and the flooding, etc., and the packet is  
output from two or more source ports. The content of tag becomes tag that should be  
applied to the destination.  
As for the mirroring of the reception frame, presence and the content of the VLAN tag  
of the packet output to the target port are corresponding to the packet when inputting it.  
When the reception frame mirroring is done rewriting DSCP and ip precedence, the  
frame not the reception frame but after it changes is mirror.  
When STP and LLDP are defined in the target port of the mirror, the port cannot be  
used.  
The storm control to the same port where the mirror target port was set becomes  
invalid.  
[XG0224/XG0448]  
Only a single port can be set as the mirrored target port on the device.  
The port which is set to be target port, can be used for forwarding.  
The destination MAC address, the source MAC address, and the presence or absence  
of VLAN tag together with its contents sent to the target port may differ from those of  
the packet actually sent from or received at the source port.  
Cautions on backup setting  
If multiple ports defined as master or backup exist in the same backup group, the port with a  
smaller number is enabled, and the port with a larger number is not linked up and it cannot be  
used.  
If the master or backup port is undefined in the same backup group, the relevant port is not  
linked up and it cannot be used.  
Default  
It is assumed that the normal port has been specified.  
ether <number> type normal  
Port Information Settings  
99  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.1.9 ether vlan tag  
Function  
Set the tagged VLAN.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
ether <number> vlan tag <tagged_vidlist>  
Options  
<number>  
ether port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
<tagged_vidlist>  
Tagged VLAN ID list  
Set a tagged VLAN ID.  
When setting multiple IDs, separate them with commas (,).  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set a tagged VLAN ID.  
To add a VLAN, specify the VLAN ID list including already registered VLANs.  
The M1 port internally uses maximum VLAN ID in unused.  
Therefore, the communication of the M1 port is temporarily interrupted when VLAN ID  
allocated in the M1 port is specified by the vlan tag command, and the TCP session is  
cut. (Only XG2600)  
Default  
N/A  
Port Information Settings  
100  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.1.10 ether vlan untag  
Function  
Set the untagged VLAN.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
ether <number> vlan untag <untagged_vidlist>  
Options  
<number>  
ether port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
<untagged_vidlist>  
Untagged VLAN ID list  
Set an untagged VLAN ID.  
When setting multiple IDs, separate them with commas (,).  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set an untagged VLAN ID.  
To add a VLAN, specify the VLAN ID list including already registered VLANs.  
Although multiple vid numbers can be specified in the "untagged_vidlist", the following  
conditions must be satisfied.  
- Only a single port can be defined as a port VLAN.  
If multiple VLANs with no protocol VLAN settings have been specified, only the VLAN  
with the smallest number will be enabled.  
- The protocol VLANs of up to 11 protocols (system definition protocol (ipv4/ipv6/fna)  
or user definition (up to 8 definitions)) can be defined.  
The M1 port internally uses maximum VLAN ID in unused.  
Therefore, the communication of the M1 port is temporarily interrupted when VLAN ID  
allocated in the M1 port is specified by the vlan untag command, and the TCP session is  
cut. (Only XG2600)  
Default  
On occasions when "ether vlan tag" command is not defined:  
It is assumed that 1 has been specified as the default VLAN ID.  
ether <number> vlan untag 1  
On occasions when "ether vlan tag" command is defined:  
It is assumed that "ether vlan untag" command has not been specified.  
Port Information Settings  
101  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.1.11 ether egress permission  
Function  
Set the forwarding permission port list information.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
ether <number> egress permission <portlist>  
Options  
<number>  
ether port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
<portlist>  
Forwarding permitted port list  
Specify a list of the Ethernet ports that are permitted to forward data.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set a port list to allow forwarding via the ports.  
If a link aggregation port or a backup port is specified on the port list, forwarding is  
allowed via all ports of the link aggregation or backup group.  
Default  
It is assumed that forwarding has been permitted for all ports.  
5.1.1.12 ether loopdetect use  
Function  
Set to use the Loop Detection function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
ether <number> loopdetect use <mode>  
Options  
<number>  
ether port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
<mode>  
on  
Enable the Loop Detection function.  
off  
Disable the Loop Detection function.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set whether or not to enable the loop detection function.  
Disable if the system is stopped by the "loopdetect use" definition even if this mode is set  
to be effective.  
Default  
It is assumed that the loop detection function is enabled.  
ether <number> loopdetect use on  
Port Information Settings  
102  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.1.13 ether loopdetect frame  
Function  
Enable the Loop Detection Frame sender.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
ether <number> loopdetect frame <target>  
Options  
<number>  
ether port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
<target>  
Set the sender of loopdetect-frame.  
own  
A Loop is detected when receiving a Loop Detection frame from this device.  
any  
A Loop is detected when receiving a Loop Detection frame from any device.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Specify the sender of Loop Detection frames used to detect a loop.  
The following is the port which is blocked/offlined when a loop is detected.  
<target>  
Sender of Loop Detection frame  
This device  
The port which is blocked/offlined  
own  
The port reporting the Loop Detection  
frame  
any  
This device  
The port reportinging the Loop Detection  
frame  
Other device  
The port receiving the Loop Detection  
frame  
Default  
It is assumed that set the sender as own.  
ether <number> loopdetect frame own  
Port Information Settings  
103  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.1.14 ether startup  
Function  
Set the offline status when it is started up.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
ether <number> startup <mode>  
Options  
<number>  
ether port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
<mode>  
online  
The port starts operation in the online state during device startup or during dynamic  
definition reflection.  
offline  
The port starts operation in the offline state during device startup or during dynamic  
definition reflection. Also, wait for an offline release instruction from operator.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set the port in offline state during device startup or during reflection of dynamic  
definitions.  
During device startup or during change of dynamic definitions, the relationship between  
the Ethernet port state and the port offline state is as follows.  
Ether port state during device startup or dynamic definitions change  
<mode>  
Linkup possible  
Linkup impossible  
Port offline  
online  
Linkup or Communication Linkdown or  
Communication  
possible  
Communication  
impossible  
impossible  
staying in offline state  
offline  
Communication  
impossible  
Communication  
impossible  
Communication  
impossible  
entering offline state  
entering offline state  
staying in offline state  
Caution  
Default  
If ports are offline, release them with the "online" command with port releasing.  
It is assumed that forcible offline processing to the port is not performed during device  
startup or during reflection of dynamic definitions.  
ether startup online  
Port Information Settings  
104  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.1.15 ether recovery limit  
Function  
Set the upper limit number of linkdown times.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
ether <number> recovery limit <limit>  
Options  
<number>  
ether port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
<limit>  
Number of linkdown times  
Set the upper limit number of linkdown times, for the ports to go offline, with a decimal  
value from 1 to 10.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set the number of times for linkdown as the upper limit for the relevant ports to go offline.  
When the upper limit has been exceeded, the log is output to the SYSLOG and the ports  
are offline.  
Caution  
Default  
If ports are offline, release them with the "online" command with port releasing.  
When offline ports are released by with "online" command, the number of times for  
linkdown is reset to zero again.  
The ports are not offline during linkdown, assuming that there is no upper limit.  
Port Information Settings  
105  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.1.16 ether downrelay port  
Function  
Set the linked port list information about the Linkdown Relay function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
ether <number> downrelay port <portlist>  
Options  
<number>  
ether port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
<portlist>  
Relay port list  
Set a list of the Ethernet ports that go offline (linkdown) together with the linked  
Ethernet port that has been set by this definition when the linkdown of the linked  
Ethernet port occurs.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set a list of the Ethernet ports that go offline (linkdown) together with the linked Ethernet  
port that has been set by this definition when the linkdown of the Ethernet port occurs.  
If the linkdown relay operation occurs, the linked port goes offline, and the log is output to  
the SYSLOG.  
Caution  
If ports are offline, release them by the "online" command with port releasing.  
The definition is applied normally even if the set port is included on the relay operation  
port list. However, if the set only port is included on the list, no relay operation occurs  
but only the set port goes offline.  
When the Ethernet port type is a linkaggregation port, and linked port list information  
for the Linkdown Relay function of the linkaggregation is set, the Linkdown Relay  
function of the linkaggregation becomes enable and this definition is ignored.  
The linked port does not go offline at the Linkdown operation during the dynamic  
definition change on the Ethernet port where this command is set.  
Default  
The linkdown relay function is not executed, assuming that port list information has not  
been set.  
Port Information Settings  
106  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.1.17 ether downrelay recovery mode  
Function  
Set offline state release operation on the Linkdown Relay function of the Ethernet port.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
ether <number> downrelay recovery mode <mode>  
Options  
<number>  
The Ethernet port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
<mode>  
Set offline state release operation on the linked port list.  
manual  
Specify offline state release with command.  
auto  
Specify offline state release with linkup.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set offline state release operation from the offline port set on the linked port list  
information of the Linkdown Relay function.  
Setting "manual" for the releasing operation enables the releasing operation of the linked  
port by "online" command or dynamic definition change.  
If the release setting is "auto", the linked ports offline release is possible with the linkdown  
relay function setting port's linkup as well as the "online" command and a dynamic  
definition change.  
When the releasing offline operation by linkup is executed when "auto" is set, the system  
log is output.  
Caution  
When the Ethernet port where the Linkdown Relay function is set is in an offline state,  
release the offline state with the "online" command, setting "auto" does not change the  
state to be linked up.  
Even if the linked port is in an offline state due to something other than the Linkdown  
Relay, set the parameters with "linkaggregation downrelay recovery cause" command  
when releasing the offline state.  
When the Ethernet port type is a linkaggregation port, and the linked port list  
information for the Linkdown Relay function of the linkaggregation is set, the Linkdown  
Relay function of the linkaggregation becomes enable and this definition is ignored.  
Even if "auto" is set for release operation, offline state release operation will not be  
executed to the ether ports still in a linkup state since some ports are already shifting to  
online or offline state.  
Linkdown Relay function operates by ether port or by linkaggregation, but not by  
backup port.  
For this reason, when the same link operation port is set on an ether or linkaggregation  
port in the same backup group, and "auto" is set for offline state release operation, the  
release operation may not be executed because the operation is performed by one port  
at a time.  
Default  
It is assumed that "manual" was specified for the linked port list offline state release  
operation.  
ether <number> downrelay recovery mode manual  
Port Information Settings  
107  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.1.18 ether downrelay recovery cause  
Function  
Set the target parameters for releasing the offline state on the Linkdown Relay function of  
the Ethernet port.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
ether <number> downrelay recovery cause <cause>  
Options  
<number>  
The Ethernet port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
<cause>  
Specify the offline parameters targeted for releasing the offline state of linked port from  
the following.  
downrelay  
Specify when offline parameters with the Linkdown Relay function are targeted for  
release.  
all  
Release all the parameters offline states.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set the offline parameters targeted to releasing offline state lead by linkup when "auto"  
was specified on "ether downrelay recovery" command.  
Set the parameters assigned for releasing of offline state during the releasing operation.  
Caution  
Default  
This command is enabled only when "auto" is specified in "ether downrelay recovery  
mode" command. The definition is ignored when "manual" is specified.  
The offline state is released without depending on this command definition when the  
"online" command in the linked port is executed, or during dynamic definition change  
accompanied by releasing of the offline state.  
It is assumed that "downrelay" was specified for the target parameters of offline state  
release of the linked port list.  
ether <number> downrelay recovery cause downrelay  
Port Information Settings  
108  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.1.19 ether description  
Function  
Define the text description for a ether port  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
ether <number> description <description>  
Options  
<number>  
The Ethernet port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
<description>  
Description  
Define the description for a ether port with up to 50 characters from 0x21, 0x23 to 0x7e  
of ASCII code.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Defines the description text for each ether port.  
This description is used also for the SNMP agent function.  
The SNMP agent function sets this description to ifAlias MIB (OID:1.3.6.1.2.1.31.1.1.1.18).  
Default  
No ether port descriptions are defined.  
Port Information Settings  
109  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.1.20 linkaggregation algorithm  
Function  
Set the load distribution algorithm of link aggregation.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
linkaggregation <group> algorithm <type>  
Options  
<group>  
Link aggregation group number  
Set a link aggregation group number with a decimal number.  
Range  
Model  
1 to 13  
1 to 26  
1 to 10  
XG0224  
XG0448  
XG2600  
<type>  
Specify the load distribution algorithm.  
sa-mac  
Distribute frames based on the source MAC address.  
da-mac  
Distribute frames based on the destination MAC address.  
both-mac  
Distribute frames based on the exclusively ORed (XORed) source and destination  
MAC addresses.  
sa-ip  
Distribute frames based on the source IP address.  
da-ip  
Distribute frames based on the destination IP address.  
both-ip  
Distribute frames based on the exclusively ORed (XORed) source and destination IP  
addresses.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set an algorithm for each link aggregation group.  
It is assumed that "both-mac" has been set for the load distribution algorithm of the link  
aggregation.  
linkaggregation <group> algorithm both-mac  
Port Information Settings  
110  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.1.21 linkaggregation mode  
Function  
Set the link aggregation operation mode.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
linkaggregation <group> mode <la_mode>  
Options  
<group>  
Link aggregation group number  
Set a link aggregation group number with a decimal number.  
Range  
Model  
1 to 13  
1 to 26  
1 to 10  
XG0224  
XG0448  
XG2600  
<la_mode>  
Link aggregation operation mode  
Set the following operation mode.  
static  
: Static operation  
: Dynamic operation with LACP enabled by "active".  
active  
passive : Dynamic operation with LACP enabled by "passive".  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set an operation mode of the link aggregation.  
If static is specified, the static link aggregation without LACP is configured.  
If active or passive is specified, the dynamic link aggregation that uses the LACP is set.  
If the active mode is specified, the LACPDU's cyclic transmission is automatically sent to  
the remote LACP device.  
If the passive mode is specified, the LACPDU's cyclic transmission starts only when an  
LACPDU is received from the remote LACP. In other words, no link aggregation is  
configured if both devices are in the passive mode.  
Default  
It is assumed that the static operation mode has been set for the link aggregation.  
linkaggregation <group> mode static  
Port Information Settings  
111  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.1.22 linkaggregation type  
Function  
Set a link aggregation type.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
linkaggregation <group> type normal  
linkaggregation <group> type backup <backup_group> <priority>  
Options  
<group>  
Link aggregation group number  
Set a link aggregation group number with a decimal number.  
Range  
Model  
1 to 13  
1 to 26  
1 to 10  
XG0224  
XG0448  
XG2600  
normal : Normal link aggregation  
Multiplexed multiple ports are used as a normal ports.  
backup : Backup link aggregation.  
Multiplexed multiple ports are used as a backup ports.  
<backup_group>  
Backup group number  
Set a backup group number with a decimal number.  
Range  
Model  
1 to 13  
1 to 26  
1 to 13  
XG0224  
XG0448  
XG2600  
<priority>  
Priority of backup port  
It is a priority of the link aggregation used as a backup port.  
Set the master port or backup port if "type backup" has been specified.  
master: Master port  
backup: Backup port  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set a link aggregation type.  
Select the normal link aggregation or the backup link aggregation.  
The backup link aggregation can also be used for backup of broadband ports.  
Caution  
Cautions on "type backup" setting  
If a link aggregation, that has the same priority as the port defined as "master" or  
"backup", exists in the same backup group, the port will be enabled as a backup port  
but the link aggregation will be disabled.  
If more than one master or backup link aggregation exists in the same backup group,  
the link aggregation with a smaller link aggregation group number will be enabled. The  
backup link aggregation with a larger link aggregation group number will be disabled.  
If the master or backup link aggregation is undefined in the same backup group, its  
settings are disabled.  
Port Information Settings  
112  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
If definition conditions such as described above are contradictory, the relevant ports  
are not linked up for use.  
Change the settings referring to the system log message.  
Default  
It is assumed that the normal link aggregation has been specified.  
linkaggregation <group> type normal  
5.1.1.23 linkaggregation collecting minimum  
Function  
Set the minimum number of member ports for link aggregation.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
linkaggregation <group> collecting minimum <count>  
Options  
<group>  
Link aggregation group number  
Set a link aggregation group number with a decimal number.  
Range  
Model  
1 to 13  
1 to 26  
1 to 10  
XG0224  
XG0448  
XG2600  
<count>  
Minimum number of member ports  
Set the minimum number of member ports with a decimal number from 1 to 8, where  
communication with link aggregation is allowed. However, the communication of link  
aggregation is disabled if the number of ports connected to the link aggregation is less  
than the minimum number of member ports.  
Also, the communication of link aggregation is disabled if the number of connected  
ports decreases below the minimum number of member ports due to failure or other  
reasons.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set the minimum number of member ports to allow communication of the link  
aggregation.  
This command is used to stop communication until the link aggregation is assigned the  
specific bandwidth in redundant configuration or other. If it is under the specific  
bandwidth, the link aggregation communication is disabled.  
Caution  
Default  
If a number larger than the number of member ports effective for the setting is specified  
as the minimum number of member ports, the communication of this link aggregation is  
disabled.  
It is assumed that 1 has been specified as the minimum number of member ports for the  
link aggregation.  
linkaggregation <group> collecting minimum 1  
Port Information Settings  
113  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.1.24 linkaggregation icmpwatch address  
Function  
Set the destination address for "ether" L3 monitoring of link aggregation.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
linkaggregation <group> icmpwatch address <dst_addr>  
Options  
<group>  
Link aggregation group number  
Set a link aggregation group number with a decimal number.  
Range  
Model  
1 to 13  
1 to 26  
1 to 10  
XG0224  
XG0448  
XG2600  
<dst_addr>  
Destination IP address to be monitored  
Specify the destination IP address to be monitored.  
The allowable range is as follows:  
1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254  
128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254  
192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set the operation information for destination monitoring.  
This command sends an ICMP ECHO packet from the specified link aggregation group to  
the destination IP address, specified by <dst_addr>, and checks the presence of the  
destination by receiving a response.  
Caution  
Default  
Do not set the IP address of the local device in <dst_addr>. Also, make sure that the  
specified IP address is included in the same subnet.  
If any of the above three addresses is specified, the Ethernet L3 monitoring function will  
not operate normally.  
It is assumed that the Ethernet L3 monitoring function is not used for the link aggregation.  
Port Information Settings  
114  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.1.25 linkaggregation icmpwatch interval  
Function  
Set various types of "ether" L3 monitoring intervals for link aggregation.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
linkaggregation <group> icmpwatch interval <interval> <timeout> [<retry>]  
Options  
<group>  
Link aggregation group number  
Set a link aggregation group number with a decimal number.  
Range  
Model  
1 to 13  
1 to 26  
1 to 10  
XG0224  
XG0448  
XG2600  
<interval>  
Transmission interval of normal ICMP ECHO packets  
Specify the transmission interval of normal ICMP ECHO packets to be within the range  
of 1 to 60 seconds (or 1 minute).  
The unit shall be m (minute) or s (second).  
<timeout>  
Monitoring timeout  
Specify the monitoring timeout period as between 5 to 180 seconds (or 3 minutes). If  
the time exceeds, this monitoring is considered as failed.  
The unit should be in m (minute) or s (second).  
<retry>  
Retransmission interval of ICMP ECHO packets  
Specify the retransmission interval of ICMP ECHO packets between 1 to <timeout>-1  
seconds if the normal ICMP ECHO packet transmission is not acknowledged.  
The unit should be in m (minute) or s (second).  
The default is 1s.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set the operation information for destination monitoring.  
The destination is monitored in the interval specified by <interval> while the response to  
ICMP ECHO packet is being received normally. If the response to ICMP ECHO packet is  
not received, the packet transmission is repeated at the intervals specified in <retry>. If  
no response is returned within the time period specified by <timeout>, a communication  
failure is assumed and an abnormal detection is reported. Accordingly, all the member  
ports specified in <group> are offline.  
Caution  
Default  
If ports are offline, release them by the "online" command.  
It is assumed that the 10-second transmission interval during normal communication, the  
5-second timeout for monitoring, and the 1-second retransmission interval have been  
specified.  
linkaggregation <group> icmpwatch interval 10s 5s 1s  
Port Information Settings  
115  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.1.26 linkaggregation downrelay port  
Function  
Set the linked port list information about the linkaggregation Linkdown Relay function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
linkaggregation <group> downrelay port <portlist>  
Options  
<group>  
Link aggregation group number  
Set a link aggregation group number with a decimal number.  
Range  
Model  
1 to 13  
1 to 26  
1 to 10  
XG0224  
XG0448  
XG2600  
<portlist>  
Relay port list  
Set a list of the Ethernet ports that places the linked port offline (linkdown) by linkdown  
where this definition has been set.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
If a linkdown occurs in the linkaggregation set with this definition, set a list of the Ethernet  
ports that will also linkdown (port linkdown).  
If a linkdown relay operation occurs, its linked port goes to an offline state, and a system  
log is output.  
Caution  
If ports are offline, release them with the "online" command in port releasing.  
The definition is applied normally even if a port set with linkaggregation is included on  
the relay operation port list.  
When the Ethernet port type is a linkaggregation port, and this definition is set in the  
linkaggregation settings, this definition becomes enabled and the Linkdown Relay  
function is ignored.  
The linked port does not change to offline status during the dynamic definition change  
Linkdown operation on the Ethernet port where this command is set.  
Default  
The Linkdown Relay function is not executed, assuming that port list information has not  
been set.  
Port Information Settings  
116  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.1.27 linkaggregation downrelay recovery mode  
Function  
Set offline state release operation on the Linkdown Relay function of linkaggregation.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
linkaggregation <group> downrelay recovery mode <mode>  
Options  
<group>  
Link aggregation group number  
Set a link aggregation group number with a decimal number.  
Range  
Model  
1 to 13  
1 to 26  
1 to 10  
XG0224  
XG0448  
XG2600  
<mode>  
Set the releasing offline state operation on the linked port list.  
manual  
Specify offline state release with command.  
auto  
Specify offline state release with linkup.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set offline state release operation from the offline port set in the linked port list  
information of the Linkdown Relay function.  
Setting "manual" for the release operation enables the release operation of the linked  
port with the "online" command or dynamic definition change.  
If the release setting is "auto", the linked ports offline release is possible with the linkdown  
relay function setting port's linkup as well as the "online" command and a dynamic  
definition change.  
If the offline release operation with linkup is executed when "auto" is set, the system log  
is output.  
Caution  
When the linkaggregation port where the Linkdown Relay function is set is in its offline  
state, release the offline state with the "online" command because setting "auto" does  
not change the linked state.  
Even if the linked port is in its offline state due to something other than the Linkdown  
Relay, set the parameters with the "linkaggregation downrelay recovery cause"  
command when releasing the offline state.  
Even if "auto" is set for release operation, offline state release operation will not be  
executed to the ether ports still in a linkup state since some ports are already shifting to  
online or offline state.  
Linkdown Relay function operates by ether port or by linkaggregation, but not by  
backup port.  
For this reason, when the same link operation port is set on an ether or linkaggregation  
port in the same backup group, and "auto" is set for offline state release operation, the  
release operation may not be executed because the operation is performed by one port  
at a time.  
Port Information Settings  
117  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Default  
It is assumed that "manual" was specified for releasing the offline state operation of the  
linked port list.  
linkaggregation <group> downrelay recovery mode manual  
5.1.1.28 linkaggregation downrelay recovery cause  
Function  
Set the target parameters for offline state release in the Linkdown Relay function of the  
linkaggregation.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
linkaggregation <group> downrelay recovery cause <cause>  
Options  
<group>  
Link aggregation group number  
Set a link aggregation group number with a decimal number.  
Range  
Model  
1 to 13  
1 to 26  
1 to 10  
XG0224  
XG0448  
XG2600  
<cause>  
Specify the offline parameters targeted to offline state release of the linked port from the  
following.  
downrelay  
Specify when offline parameters by the Linkdown Relay function are targeted for  
release.  
all  
Release offline state of all parameters.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set the offline parameters lead by linkup assigned for releasing the offline state when  
"auto" is specified in the "ether downrelay recovery" command.  
Caution  
This command is enabled only when "auto" is set for offline state release operation  
("ether downrelay recovery mode" command) lead by linkup.  
The definition is ignored when "manual" is specified.  
The offline state is released independent of this command definition when the "online"  
command in the linked port is executed, or during dynamic definition change  
accompanied by releasing the offline state.  
Default  
It is assumed that "downrelay" was specified as the target parameters for offline state  
release of the linked port list.  
linkaggregation <group> downrelay recovery cause downrelay  
Port Information Settings  
118  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.1.29 linkaggregation description  
Function  
Define the text description for a link aggregation group.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
linkaggregation <group> description <description>  
Options  
<group>  
Link aggregation group number  
Set a link aggregation group number with a decimal number.  
Range  
Model  
1 to 13  
1 to 26  
1 to 10  
XG0224  
XG0448  
XG2600  
<description>  
Description  
Define the description for a link aggregation group with up to 50 characters from 0x21,  
0x23 to 0x7e of ASCII code.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Defines the description text for each link aggregation group.  
This description is used also for the SNMP agent function.  
The SNMP agent function sets this description to ifAlias MIB (OID:1.3.6.1.2.1.31.1.1.1.18).  
Default  
No link aggregation group descriptions are defined.  
Port Information Settings  
119  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.1.30 backup mode  
Function  
Set the backup port selection method.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
backup <group> mode <mode>  
Options  
<group>  
Backup group number  
Set a backup group number with a decimal number.  
Range  
Model  
1 to 13  
1 to 26  
1 to 13  
XG0224  
XG0448  
XG2600  
<mode>  
Set a port selection mode if both master and backup ports can be used.  
master  
Use the master port first.  
earlier  
Use the port that has been linked up first and enabled for use.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set how to select a method of port selection for each backup group.  
It is assumed that the master port is set to be used first as backup switching mode.  
backup <group> mode master  
Port Information Settings  
120  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.1.31 backup standby  
Function  
Set the standby status of backup ports.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
backup <group> standby <mode>  
Options  
<group>  
Backup group number  
Set a backup group number with a decimal number.  
Range  
Model  
1 to 13  
1 to 26  
1 to 13  
XG0224  
XG0448  
XG2600  
<mode>  
Set the standby status of backup ports.  
online  
The backup port in standby status does not go offline.  
offline  
The backup port in standby status goes offline.  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Set the standby status of backup ports.  
If the standby state is specified to offline, the backup port in standby status goes offline.  
The offline port is in the same state as when the "offline" command for the Ethernet port  
control is executed.  
If the currently operating backup port goes down, the offline port is released.  
The released port is switched unless it is still offline due to another function or has an  
error.  
Caution  
When the backup port selection method is set as a "master", backup priority port is not  
offline even it is set to be offline in standby status.  
If the backup priority port must be offline, set the backup port selection method as  
"earlier".  
When backup port is set to be offline in standby status, offline port cannot be released  
automatically by any function other than backup port function. The same is true for the  
offline port set by "offline" command.  
Default  
It is assumed that "online" has been specified as the standby status of backup ports.  
backup <group> standby online  
Port Information Settings  
121  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.2  
MAC Information  
This section explains about the commands related to MAC information.  
5.1.2.1 ether mac storm  
Function  
Set the broadcast and multicast storm control information.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
XG2600  
ether <number> mac storm <threshold_broadcast> <threshold_multicast> <action>  
XG0224/XG0448  
ether <number> mac storm <threshold> <broadcast> <multicast>  
Options  
<number>  
ether port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
<threshold_broadcast>  
Threshold of broadcast traffic  
Set the threshold value for broadcast storm traffic with Kbit/s, Mbit/s or Gbit/s  
8k - 8000000k  
1m - 8000m  
1g - 8g  
(Storm monitoring does not start if the threshold is set to 0.)  
<threshold_multicast>  
Threshold of multicast traffic  
Set the threshold value for multicast storm traffic with Kbit/s, Mbit/s or Gbit/s  
8k - 8000000k  
1m - 8000m  
1g - 8g  
(Storm monitoring does not start if the threshold is set to 0.)  
<action>  
Set the action which occurs if the traffic exceeds the threshold.  
discard  
Discard the packets which exceed the threshold  
close  
Close the port (offline)  
<threshold>  
Threshold  
Set the traffic threshold value for the broadcast or multicast storm.  
Set the number of packets per second in the following range.  
(Storm monitoring does not start if the threshold is set to 0.)  
Range  
Model  
0 to 30,000,000  
XG0224 / XG0448  
Port Information Settings  
122  
     
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
<broadcast>  
<multicast>  
Set the operation that occurs if the traffic exceeds the threshold.  
off  
The guard function is disabled.  
discard  
Discard the packets that exceed the threshold.  
close  
Close the port (offline).  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
XG0224 / XG0448  
Set the broadcast or multicast storm control information.  
If "discard" or "close" is specified, the systemlog is output when the threshold value is  
exceeded or the device is restored.  
XG2600  
Set the broadcast or multicast storm control information.  
If "discard" or "close" is specified, the systemlog is output when the threshold value is  
exceeded or the device is restored.  
Storm monitoring doesn’t start If the threshold of both broadcast and multicast is set to 0.  
Caution  
Default  
XG0224 / XG0448  
It might be considered that broadcast/multicast roughhouse control information is set,  
and "clear statistics" is restored from the state of the roughhouse once when it retreats  
and the statistical information of correspondence port is cleared with the reception rate  
exceeds the threshold.  
N/A  
Port Information Settings  
123  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.3  
STP Information  
This section explains about the commands related to STP information.  
5.1.3.1 ether stp use  
Function  
Set the STP availability.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
ether <number> stp use <mode>  
Options  
<number>  
ether port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
<mode>  
on  
Specify it when STP is used.  
off  
Specify it when STP is not used.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set whether or not to enable the STP.  
If the STP operation mode of the device is OFF (stp mode disabled), the "stp use on"  
setting is ignored and disabled.  
If the STP operation mode of the bridge is case except OFF (stp mode disabled), the  
communication on the port may temporarily fail by the change of topology.  
Set "stp use off" for the port where the STP is not used.  
Default  
It is assumed that the STP is used in the ether port.  
ether <number> stp use on  
Port Information Settings  
124  
     
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.3.2 ether stp domain cost  
Function  
Set the path cost.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
ether <number> stp domain <instance-id> cost {auto|<path_cost>}  
Options  
<number>  
ether port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
<instance-id>  
STP instance ID number  
Specify a decimal value from 0 to 15.  
For non-MSTP operation mode, entering a value from 1 to 15 makes it invalid, although  
the allowable range is set with a value from 0 to 15.  
auto  
Determine the cost automatically.  
<path_cost>  
Path cost  
Set the path cost with a decimal value from 1 to 200000000.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set a path cost of the STP port.  
The cost specified by the instance ID 1 to 15 is valid only when the device is in the MSTP  
operation mode (stp mode mstp), but the set value is ignored when the device is in the  
non-MSTP operation mode.  
Default  
It is assumed that automatic setting is used for the ether port path cost.  
ether <number> stp domain 0 cost auto  
Port Information Settings  
125  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.3.3 ether stp domain priority  
Function  
Set the priority.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
ether <number> stp domain <instance-id> priority <priority>  
Options  
<number>  
ether port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
<instance-id>  
Instance ID number  
Specify a decimal value from 0 to 15.  
For non-MSTP operation mode, entering a value from 1 to 15 makes it invalid, although  
the allowable range is set with a value from 0 to 15.  
<priority>  
Priority  
Set the port priority with a decimal value from 0 to 240.  
A smaller value has a higher priority.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set the port priority.  
Specify an integer (valid value) that can be divided by 16 in <priority>.  
Valid values: 0, 16, 32, 48, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160, 176, 192, 208, 224, 240  
If an integer other than the valid values is specified, this setting is disabled.  
The priority specified by the instance ID 1 to 15 is valid only when the device is in the  
MSTP operation mode (stp mode mstp), but the set value is ignored when the device is in  
the non-MSTP operation mode.  
Default  
It is assumed that 128 is used for the STP port priority.  
ether <number> stp domain 0 priority 128  
Port Information Settings  
126  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.3.4 ether stp force-version  
Function  
Set the STP Force Protocol Version.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
ether <number> stp force-version <version>  
Options  
<number>  
ether port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
<version>  
STP Force protocol version  
Set it with a decimal value from 0 to 3.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set the STP Force protocol version.  
STP Force protocol version (0: STP, 1: Unsupported, 2: RSTP, 3: MSTP)  
Caution  
If the device is in the MSTP operation mode (stp mode mstp), the STP Force protocol  
version can be set within the range of 0 to 3 and the STP, RSTP or MSTP is operable.  
If the device is in the RSTP operation mode (stp mode rstp), the STP Force protocol  
version can be set within the range of 0 to 2 and the STP or RSTP is operable.  
If the device is in the STP operation mode (stp mode stp), the STP Force protocol version  
can be set to 0 only.  
If a version outside of the valid range is set, this setting will be disabled.  
Default  
The Ethernet port operates based on the device's operation mode (stp mode).  
Port Information Settings  
127  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.4  
LLDP Information  
This section explains about the commands related to LLDP Information.  
5.1.4.1 ether lldp mode  
Function  
Set LLDP function  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
ether <number> lldp mode <mode>  
Options  
<number>  
ether port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
<mode>  
LLDP function mode  
disable : Not work LLDP function.  
enable : Send and receive LLDP information  
send  
: Send LLDP information  
receive : receive LLDP information  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set LLDP mode of the specified ether port.  
It is assumed that the LLDP function is disabled.  
ether lldp mode disable  
Port Information Settings  
128  
     
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.4.2 ether lldp info  
Function  
Set LLDP information which is sent  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
ether <number> lldp info port-description <mode>  
ether <number> lldp info system-name <mode>  
ether <number> lldp info system-description <mode>  
ether <number> lldp info system-capabilities <mode>  
ether <number> lldp info management-address <mode>  
ether <number> lldp info port-vlan-id <mode>  
ether <number> lldp info port-and-protocol-vlan-id <mode>  
ether <number> lldp info vlan-name <mode>  
ether <number> lldp info protocol-identity <mode>  
ether <number> lldp info mac-phy-configuration-status <mode>  
ether <number> lldp info power-via-mdi <mode>  
ether <number> lldp info link-aggregation <mode>  
ether <number> lldp info maximum-frame-size <mode>  
Options  
<number>  
ether port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
port-description  
system-name  
system-description  
system-capabilities  
management-address  
port-vlan-id  
port-and-protocol-vlan-id  
vlan-name  
protocol-identity  
mac-phy-configuration-status  
power-via-mdi  
link-aggregation  
maximum-frame-size  
Port Information Settings  
129  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
LLDP Information Name  
Specify LLDP Information Name (TLV of 802.1AB)  
port-description  
: Port Description Information (Port Description TLV)  
: System Name Information (System Name TLV)  
system-name  
system-description  
system-capabilities  
management-address  
: Sysrem description Information (System Description TLV)  
: System Capabilities Information (System Capabilities TLV)  
: Management Address Information  
(Management Address TLV)  
port-vlan-id  
: Port VLAN ID Information (IEEE802.1 Port VLAN ID TLV)  
port-and-protocol-vlan-id : Prootocol VLAN ID Information  
(IEEE802.1 Port And Protocol VLAN ID TLV)  
vlan-name  
: VLAN Name Information (IEEE802.1 VLAN Name TLV)  
: Protocol VLAN Identitiy Information  
protocol-identity  
(IEEE802.1 Protocol Identity TLV)  
mac-phy-configuration-status  
: MAC/PHY Configuration /Status Infomation  
(IEEE802.3 MAC/PHY Configuration/Status TLV)  
: MDI Power Information (IEEE802.3 Power Via MDI TLV)  
: Link Aggregation Information  
power-via-mdi  
link-aggregation  
(IEEE802.3 Link Aggregation TLV)  
maximum-frame-size  
: Maximum Frame Size Information  
(IEEE802.3 Maximum Frame Size TLV)  
<mode>  
Send mode  
Set whether LLDP information is sent or not  
enable: send LLDP information  
disable: not send LLDP information  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set whether LLDP information is sent or not  
It is assumed that Send mode of all LLDP Information is "enable".  
ether <number> lldp info port-description enable  
ether <number> lldp info system-name enable  
ether <number> lldp info system-description enable  
ether <number> lldp info system-capabilities enable  
ether <number> lldp info management-address enable  
ether <number> lldp info port-vlan-id enable  
ether <number> lldp info port-and-protocol-vlan-id enable  
ether <number> lldp info vlan-name enable  
ether <number> lldp info protocol-identity enable  
ether <number> lldp info mac-phy-configuration-status enable  
ether <number> lldp info power-via-mdi enable  
ether <number> lldp info link-aggregation enable  
ether <number> lldp info maximum-frame-size enable  
Port Information Settings  
130  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.4.3 ether lldp vlan  
Function  
Set VLAN for sending LLDP information  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
ether <number> ldp vlan <vlanidlist>  
Options  
<number>  
ether port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
vlan <vlanidlist>  
Set VLAN ID for port-and-protocol-vlan-id, vlan-name,protocol-identity transmission.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set VLAN ID for ort-and-protocol-vlan-id, vlan-name, protocol-identitytransmission.  
All VLAN information is sent.  
5.1.4.4 ether lldp notification  
Function  
Set SNMP Notification Trap transmission information  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
ether <number> lldp notification <mode>  
Options  
<number>  
ether port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
<mode>  
SNMP Notification Trap Transmission Mode  
Set whether SNMP Notification Trap is sent or not when LLDP information of the  
specified physical port is changed.  
enable: Send SNMP Notification Trap  
disable: Not send SNMP Notification Trap  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set whether SNMP Notification Trap is sent or not when LLDP information of the  
specified physical port is changed.  
Caution  
Default  
When snmp service command is disabled or snmp traplldpremtableschange coomad is  
disabled, SNMP Notification Trap (lldpRemTablesChange Trap) is not sent.  
lldp notification disable.  
ether <number> lldp notification disable  
Port Information Settings  
131  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.5  
Filter Information  
This section explains about the commands related to filter information.  
5.1.5.1 ether macfilter  
Function  
Set the MAC filter.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
ether <number> macfilter <count> <action> <acl>  
Options  
<number>  
ether port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
<count>  
Priority  
Set the filtering priority to be set with a decimal value.  
A smaller value has a higher priority.  
The specified value is sorted and renumbered in sequence. If a filtering definition with  
the same value already exists, the existing one will be changed.  
Range  
Model  
0 to 511  
0 to 63  
XG0224 / XG0448  
XG2600  
<action>  
pass  
Transmit the packets that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp"  
or "acl udp" definition of access control list.  
reject  
Discard the packets that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp", or  
"acl udp" definition of access control list.  
<acl>  
ACL definition number  
Specify the ACL definition number of the access control list where the packet pattern to  
be filtered has been defined.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set the MAC filtering for each Ethernet port.  
For the ingress packets that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp",  
or "acl udp" definitions of the access control list which has been specified by <acl>, the  
filter processing is executed in the way as specified by <action>.  
Caution  
Note 1.  
If none of "acl mac", "acl vlan" and "acl ip" definitions exist on the access control list  
which has been specified by <acl> or if the access control list specified by <acl> does not  
exist, the packets are not filtered.  
Note 2.  
The packet filtering default value is "pass".  
No packets are filtered if only "pass" is set in <action>.  
Port Information Settings  
132  
     
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
[XG2600]  
Note 3.  
"acl mac llc" definitions can not filter llc frames with the VLAN tag.  
Note 4.  
This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.  
The allowable upper limits are as follows.  
Upper limit based on "commands"  
64 commands for the entire device.  
Up to 64 commands can be set for the entire device, including the "ether macfilter",  
commands.  
The priority for each command is as follows.  
1) "ether macfilter" command  
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.  
2) "vlan macfilter" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
3) "lan ip filter" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
4) "ether qos aclmap" command  
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.  
5) "vlan qos aclmap" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
6) "lan ip dscp" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
Upper limit based on "masks"  
64 masks for the entire device.  
Up to 64 masks can be set for the entire device, including the "ether macfilter", "vlan  
protocol" commands.  
The priority for each command is as follows.  
1) "vlan protocol" commands  
2) "ether macfilter" command  
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.  
3) "vlan macfilter" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
4) "lan ip filter" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
5) "ether qos aclmap" command  
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.  
6) "ether qos aclmap" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
7) "lan ip dscp" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
Port Information Settings  
133  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
The number of masks that each command use depends on applied ACL.  
When Multiple ACL are applied, the number of masks amount to sum total, and  
depends on ACLs the number of masks amount to less than sum total.  
The following is the number of masks for ACL.  
ACL  
number of masks  
"acl mac"  
define LSAP of llc  
not define LSAP of llc  
"acl vlan"  
3
1
1
not define src IP address  
not define tos/dscp value  
not define tos/dscp value  
define src IP address  
1
3
not define dst IP address  
define dst IP address  
1
use same netmask for src and dst IP address  
not define tos/dscp value  
1
3
3
not define tos/dscp value  
use different netmask for src and dst IP address  
The following is the number of masks for "vlan protocol" command.  
"vlan protocol" definition  
define vlan protocol ipv4  
number of masks  
3
1
1
1
define vlan protocol ipv6  
define vlan protocol <count> ether  
define vlan protocol <count> llc  
Upper limit based on "actions"  
16 actions for the entire device.  
Up to16 actions can be set for the entire device, including the "ether qos aclmap", "vlan  
The following commands spend 1 action regardless of multiple use.  
1) "vlan protocol" commands  
2) "ether qos aclmap" command  
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.  
3) "vlan qos aclmap" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
4) "lan ip dscp" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
The following commands spend 1 action regardless of multiple use.  
- vlan <vid> protocol ipv4  
- vlan <vid> protocol ipv6  
Port Information Settings  
134  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
The following commands spend 1 action for each.  
If same <tos_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.  
If same <dscp_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.  
If same <queue_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.  
- ether <number> qos aclmap <count> tos <tos_value> <acl>  
- ether <number >qos aclmap <count> dscp <dscp_value> <acl>  
- ether <number> qos aclmap <count> queue <queue_value> <acl>  
- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> tos <tos_value> <acl>  
- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> dscp <dscp_value> <acl>  
- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> queue <queue_value> <acl>  
- lan <number> ip dscp <count> acl <acl_count> <dscp_value>  
The following commands spend 1 action for each.  
If same <vid> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.  
- vlan <vid> protocol <count> ether  
- vlan <vid> protocol <count> llc  
Note 5.  
When the port type of the Ethernet port is a link aggregation, the same setting is needed  
in all the member ports where the link aggregation is composed.  
[XG0224/XG0448]  
Note 3.  
This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.  
The allowable upper limits are as follows.  
Upper limit based on "commands"  
128 commands for the entire device.  
Up to 128 commands can be set for the entire device, including the "ether macfilter",  
The priority for each command is as follows.  
1) "ether macfilter" command  
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.  
2) "vlan macfilter" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
3) "lan ip filter" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
If up to 128 of "ether macfilter" commands have been defined for port ether1, the  
subsequent "vlan macfilter" and "lan ip filter" command will be no longer applied.  
Upper limit based on rule  
128 rules for the entire device.  
For the "ether macfilter", "vlan macfilter" and "lan ip filter" commands, the number of  
rules to be used varies depending on the contents of the specified acl as shown below.  
The number of rules for each ACL is as follows.  
- For ACL to set TCP or UDP  
Result of multiplication between the number of source ports and the number of  
destination ports for TCP or UDP  
- For ACL to set ICMP  
Result of multiplication between the number of ICMP TYPEs and the number of  
ICMP CODEs for ICMP  
- For ACL not to set TCP, UDP, or ICMP  
1
Port Information Settings  
135  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
You can expand the upper limit to use "resource filter distribution" command and  
change resource distribution.  
Note 4.  
Up to 700 commands can be set for the entire device, including the definitions which  
It is assumed that this option has not been set.refer to ACL such as "ether macfilter",  
commands.  
Note 5.  
When the port type of the Ethernet port is a link aggregation, set it only to the anchor port  
where the link aggregation is composed.  
Default  
It is assumed that this option has not been set.  
5.1.5.2 ether macfilter move  
Function  
Change the priority of MAC filter.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
ether <number> macfilter move <count> <new_count>  
Options  
<number>  
ether port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
<count>  
Source priority  
Set the source priority with a decimal value.  
<new_count>  
Destination priority  
Set the destination priority with a decimal value.  
Range  
Model  
0 to 511  
0 to 63  
XG0224 / XG0448  
XG2600  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Change the priority of MAC filtering for each Ethernet port.  
If the current priority is set as <count>, change the priority of this definition to  
<new_count>.  
When the definition is changed, the priority is renumbered.  
Default  
N/A due to an edit command.  
Port Information Settings  
136  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.6  
QoS Information  
This section explains about the commands related to QoS information.  
5.1.6.1 ether qos aclmap  
Function  
Set the Quality of Service (QoS) conversion.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
ether <number> qos aclmap <count> <action> <value> <acl>  
Options  
<number>  
ether port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
<count>  
Priority  
Set the QoS conversion priority with a decimal value.  
A smaller value has a higher priority.  
If multiple <action> are executed for the same packet and if they conflict with each  
other, the <action> with a higher priority is executed.  
The specified value is sorted and renumbered in sequence. If a filtering definition with  
the same value already exists, the existing one will be changed.  
Range  
Model  
0 to 511  
0 to 63  
XG0224 / XG0448  
XG2600  
<action>  
cos [XG0224/XG0448]  
Rewrite the "cos" value (the "user priority" value in the Tag Control Information (TCI)  
field of the Tagged VLAN) of packets that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl  
icmp", "acl tcp", or "acl udp" definition of access control list.  
dscp  
Rewrite the "dscp" value (the high-order 6 bits in the TOS field of IP header), if packets  
that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp", or "acl udp" definition  
of access control list are IP packets.  
tos  
Rewrite the "ip precedence" value (the high-order 3 bits in the TOS field of IP header),  
if packets that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp", or "acl udp"  
definition of access control list are IP packets.  
queue  
Change the queue at the output port that is used to output the input packets that match  
the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp", or "acl udp" definition of access  
control list.  
Port Information Settings  
137  
     
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
<value>  
Replacing value  
If "cos" is selected in <action>:  
- <cos_value>  
Set the replaced "cos" value with a decimal value from 0 to 7.  
- tos  
Replace the "cos" value with the "ip precedence" value in the packet.  
If "dscp" is selected in <action>:  
- <dscp_value>  
Set the replaced "dscp" value with a decimal value from 0 to 63.  
If "tos" is selected in <action>:  
- <tos_value>  
Set the replaced "ip precedence" value with a decimal value from 0 to 7.  
- cos  
Replace the "ip precedence" value with the "cos" value.  
If "queue" is selected in <action>:  
- <queue_value>  
Specify a queue number of the output port to be used.  
A larger value indicates a queue with a higher output priority.  
Range  
Model  
0 to 7  
XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
<acl>  
ACL definition number  
Specify the ACL definition number of the access control list where the packet pattern to  
configure QoS conversion has been defined.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set the QoS (quality of service) of each Ethernet port.  
For the ingress packets that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp",  
or "acl udp" definitions of the access control list which has been specified by <acl>, the  
QoS processing is executed in the way as specified by <action>.  
Caution  
Note 1.  
If none of "acl mac", "acl vlan" and "acl ip" definitions exist on the access control list  
which has been specified by <acl> or if the access control list specified by <acl> does not  
exist, the packets are not filtered.  
[XG2600]  
Note 2.  
If a queue is selected by <action> and if this queue has not been associated with the cos  
value by the "ether qos prioritymap" command, the QoS processing is not executed.  
Note 3.  
"acl mac llc" definitions can not filter llc frames with the VLAN tag.  
Port Information Settings  
138  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Note 4.  
This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.  
The allowable upper limits are as follows.  
Upper limit based on "commands"  
64 commands for the entire device.  
Up to 64 commands can be set for the entire device, including the "ether macfilter",  
commands.  
The priority for each command is as follows.  
1) "ether macfilter" command  
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.  
2) "vlan macfilter" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
3) "lan ip filter" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
4) "ether qos aclmap" command  
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.  
5) "vlan qos aclmap" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
6) "lan ip dscp" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
Upper limit based on "masks"  
64 masks for the entire device.  
Up to 64 masks can be set for the entire device, including the "ether macfilter", "vlan  
protocol" commands.  
The priority for each command is as follows.  
1) "vlan protocol" commands  
2) "ether macfilter" command  
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.A  
smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.  
3) "vlan macfilter" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
4) "lan ip filter" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
5) "ether qos aclmap" command  
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.  
6) "vlan qos aclmap" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
7) "lan ip dscp" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
The number of masks that each command use depends on applied ACL.  
When Multiple ACL are applied, the number of masks amount to sum total, and  
depends on ACLs the number of masks amount to less than sum total.  
Port Information Settings  
139  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
The following is the number of masks for ACL..  
ACL  
number of masks  
"acl mac"  
define LSAP of llc  
3
1
1
not define LSAP of llc  
"acl vlan"  
not define src IP address  
not define tos/dscp value  
not define tos/dscp value  
define src IP address  
1
3
not define dst IP address  
define dst IP address  
1
use same netmask for src and dst IP address  
not define tos/dscp value  
not define tos/dscp value  
use different netmask for src and dst IP address  
1
3
3
The following is the number of masks for "vlan protocol" command.  
"vlan protocol" definition  
define vlan protocol ipv4  
number of masks  
3
define vlan protocol ipv6  
1
1
1
define vlan protocol <count> ether  
define vlan protocol <count> llc  
Upper limit based on "actions"  
16 actions for the entire device.  
Up to16 actions can be set for the entire device, including the"ether qos aclmap", "vlan  
The priority for each command is as follows.  
1) "vlan protocol" commands  
2) "ether qos aclmap" command  
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.  
3) "vlan qos aclmap" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
4) "lan ip dscp" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
The following commands spend 1 action regardless of multiple use.  
- vlan <vid> protocol ipv4  
- vlan <vid> protocol ipv6  
Port Information Settings  
140  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
The following commands spend 1 action for each.  
If same <tos_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.  
If same <dscp_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.  
If same <queue_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.  
- ether <number> qos aclmap <count> tos <tos_value> <acl>  
- ether <number >qos aclmap <count> dscp <dscp_value> <acl>  
- ether <number> qos aclmap <count> queue <queue_value> <acl>  
- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> tos <tos_value> <acl>  
- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> dscp <dscp_value> <acl>  
- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> queue <queue_value> <acl>  
- lan <number> ip dscp <count> acl <acl_count> <dscp_value>  
The following commands spend 1 action for each.  
If same <vid> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.  
- vlan <vid> protocol <count> ether  
- vlan <vid> protocol <count> llc  
Note 5.  
When the port type of the Ethernet port is a link aggregation, the same setting is needed  
in all the member ports where the link aggregation is composed.  
[XG0224/XG0448]  
Note 2.  
If a queue is selected by <action> and if this queue has not been associated with the cos  
value by the "qos cosmap" command, the QoS processing is not executed.  
Note 3.  
This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.  
The allowable upper limits are as follows.  
Upper limit based on "commands"  
128 commands for the entire device.  
Up to 128 commands can be set for the entire device, including the "ether qos aclmap",  
1) "ether qos aclmap" command  
A smaller Ethernet port value has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.  
2) "vlan qos aclmap" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
3) "lan ip dscp" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
If up to 128 of "ether qos aclmap" commands have been defined for port ether1, the  
subsequent "vlan qos aclmap" and "lan ip dscp" command will be no longer applied.  
Upper limit based on rule  
128 rules for the entire device.  
number of rules to be used varies depending on the contents of the specified acl as  
shown below.  
The number of rules for each ACL is as follows.  
- For ACL to set TCP or UDP  
Result of multiplication between the number of source ports and the number of  
destination ports for TCP or UDP  
- For ACL to set ICMP  
Result of multiplication between the number of ICMP TYPEs and the number of  
ICMP CODEs for ICMP  
Port Information Settings  
141  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
- For ACL not to set TCP, UDP, or ICMP  
1
You can expand the upper limit to use "resource filter distribution" command and change  
resource distribution.  
Note 4.  
Up to 700 commands can be set for the entire device, including the definitions which refer  
ip6 dscp" and "serverinfo filter" commands.  
Note 5.  
When the port type of the Ethernet port is a link aggregation, set it only to the anchor port  
where the link aggregation is composed.  
Default  
It is assumed that this option has not been set.  
5.1.6.2 ether qos aclmap move  
Function  
Change the QoS conversion priority of the Ethernet port.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
ether <number> qos aclmap move <count> <new_count>  
Options  
<number>  
ether port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
<count>  
Source priority  
Set the source priority with a decimal value.  
<new_count>  
Destination priority  
Set the destination priority with a decimal value.  
Range  
Model  
0 to 511  
0 to 63  
XG0224 / XG0448  
XG2600  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Change the priority of QoS definition for each Ethernet port.  
If the current priority is set as <count>, change the priority of this definition to  
<new_count>.  
When the definition is changed, the priority is renumbered.  
Default  
N/A due to an edit command.  
Port Information Settings  
142  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.6.3 ether qos priority  
Function  
Set the priority.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
ether <number> qos priority <queue_priority>  
Options  
<number>  
ether port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
<queue_priority>  
Queue priority  
Set the default queue priority with a decimal value from 0 to 7.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set a tag priority value to be assigned to the untagged receive packet.  
It is assumed that 0 has been specified as the queue priority.  
ether <number> qos priority 0  
Port Information Settings  
143  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.6.4 ether qos mode  
Function  
Set the QoS sending algorithm.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
ether <number> qos mode <mode> [ <q0> <q1> <q2> <q3> <q4> <q5> <q6> <q7>]  
Options  
<number>  
ether port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
<mode>  
mode  
strict  
: Use the strict priority scheduling.  
drr [XG2600]  
: Use the deficit round robin scheduling.  
wrr [XG0224/XG0448] : Use the weighted round robin scheduling.  
<q0> <q1> <q2> <q3> <q4> <q5> <q6> <q7>  
Bandwidth of queues [XG2600]  
Set bandwidth of 8 queues as the guaranteed minimum bandwidth if "drr" is specified in  
<mode>.  
Set each of them from 800m to 4000m or 1g to 4g (bps).  
Weight of queues [XG0224/XG0448]  
Set the weight of 8 queues as the number of packets to send if "wrr" is specified in  
<mode>.  
Set each of them with a decimal number from 0 to 15.  
If 0 is specified, this COS queue will be Strict Priority operation.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set the QoS sending algorithm.  
[XG2600]  
Sum total of bandwidth in drr mode should be maximum band of port (10Gbps).  
"ether qos mode drr" command and "ether ratecontrol" command can not use at the  
same time and same port.  
[XG0224/XG0448]  
If a queue is specified to be weighted to 0 in the wrr mode, it operates in the same way as  
the strict mode, and the operation precedes the wrr operation.  
Default  
It is assumed that the strict mode has been specified in the QoS sending algorithm.  
ether <number> qos mode strict  
Port Information Settings  
144  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.6.5 ether qos prioritymap  
Function  
Assign the priority to the queue  
Available Model XG2600  
Syntax  
ether <number> qos prioritymap <priority> <queue>  
Options  
<number>  
ether port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
<priority>  
Specify the priority of packets with a decimal value from 0 to 7.  
<queue>  
Specify the queue for the priority specified in <priority> with a decimal value from 0 to 7.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
assign packets of priority specified with <priority> to queue specified with <queue>  
ether <number> qos prioritymap 0 2  
ether <number> qos prioritymap 1 0  
ether <number> qos prioritymap 2 1  
ether <number> qos prioritymap 3 3  
ether <number> qos prioritymap 4 4  
ether <number> qos prioritymap 5 5  
ether <number> qos prioritymap 6 6  
ether <number> qos prioritymap 7 7  
Port Information Settings  
145  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.7  
LACP Information  
This section explains about the commands related to LACP information.  
5.1.7.1 ether lacp port-priority  
Function  
Set the LACP port priority.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
ether <number> lacp port-priority <priority>  
Options  
<number>  
ether port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
<priority>  
Priority of LACP port  
Set the port priority with a decimal value from 1 to 65535.  
A smaller value has a higher priority.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set the priority of LACP port. The LACP port priority is used as the priority for the  
connection port to be selected by the link aggregation group. A smaller value has a  
higher priority. If the priority is the same, the port with a smaller number has the higher  
priority in port selection.  
It indicates the priority of port selection in the local device. The final port selection for the  
final connection depends on the LACP system priority.  
However, this definition is no use if the active or passive is not specified for the  
linkaggregation operation mode of "the linkaggregation mode".  
Default  
It is assumed that 32768 has been specified as the LACP port priority.  
ether <number> lacp port-priority 32768  
Port Information Settings  
146  
     
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.8  
ether L3 Monitor Information  
This section explains about the commands related to ether L3 monitor information.  
5.1.8.1 ether icmpwatch address  
Function  
Set the destination address for Ethernet L3 monitoring.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
ether <number> icmpwatch address <dst_addr>  
Options  
<number>  
ether port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
<dst_addr>  
Destination IP address of ICMP ECHO packets  
Specify the destination IP address to be monitored.  
The allowable range is as follows:  
1.0.0.1to 126.255.255.254  
128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254  
192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set the operation information for destination monitoring.  
The ICMP ECHO packet is sent from the specified Ethernet port to the destination IP  
address specified by <dst_addr>, and its presence is checked by receiving a response.  
Caution  
Do not set the IP address of the local device in <dst_addr>. Also, make sure that the  
specified IP address is included in the same subnet.  
If any of the above three addresses are specified, the Ethernet L3 monitoring function will  
not operate normally.  
If the ether type is linkaggregation  
The Ethernet L3 monitoring definition that has been set for the Ethernet port is disabled.  
Set the Ethernet L3 monitoring definition for the "linkaggregation icmpwatch".  
When using both the backup port function and the Ethernet L3 monitoring  
function  
The active port is monitored.  
When a port is first linked up, it is used as the operation port in the earlier mode.  
Therefore, set the port monitoring for both the master and backup ports.  
Default  
It is assumed that the Ethernet L3 monitoring function is not used.  
Port Information Settings  
147  
     
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.8.2 ether icmpwatch interval  
Function  
Set various types of "ether" L3 monitoring intervals.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
ether <number> icmpwatch interval <interval> <timeout> [<retry>]  
Options  
<number>  
ether port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
<interval>  
Transmission interval of normal ICMP ECHO packets  
Specify the transmission interval of normal ICMP ECHO packets to be within the range  
of 1 to 60 seconds (or 1 minute).  
The unit shall be m (minute) or s (second).  
<timeout>  
Monitoring timeout  
Specify the monitoring timeout period as between 5 to 180 seconds (or 3 minutes). If  
the time exceeds, the monitoring is considered as failed.  
The unit should be in m (minute) or s (second).  
<retry>  
Retransmission interval of ICMP ECHO packets  
Specify the retransmission interval of ICMP ECHO packets between 1 to <timeout>-1  
seconds if the normal ICMP ECHO packet transmission is not acknowledged.  
The unit should be in m (minute) or s (second).  
The default is 1s.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set the operation information for destination monitoring.  
The destination is monitored in <interval> when the response of ICMP ECHO packet is  
normally received.  
If the response to ICMP ECHO packet is not received, the packet is resent by the <retry>.  
If no response is returned within the time period specified in the <timeout>, an error is  
detected assuming that any fault occurs and the Ethernet port specified in the <number>  
goes offline.  
Caution  
Default  
If ports go offline, release them with the "online" command.  
It is assumed that the 10-second transmission interval during normal communication, the  
5-second timeout for monitoring, and the 1-second retransmission interval have been  
specified.  
ether <number> icmpwatch interval 10s 5s 1s  
Port Information Settings  
148  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.9  
ether SNMP Information  
This section explains about the commands related to ether SNMP Information.  
5.1.9.1 ether snmp trap linkdown  
Function  
Enable/disable a linkdown trap for a specified ether port.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
ether <number> snmp trap linkdown <mode>  
Options  
<number>  
ether port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
<mode>  
Enable or disable linkdown trapping for the specified port(s).  
enable  
Enable trapping.  
disable  
Disable trapping.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Enable or disable the linkdown trap for the specified ether port(s).  
The "snmp trap linkdown" command has a priority over this command.  
It is assumed that the linkdown trap is enabled for all ports.  
Default  
ether <number> snmp trap linkdown enable  
Port Information Settings  
149  
     
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.9.2 ether snmp trap linkup  
Function  
Enable/disable a linkup trap for a specified ether port.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
ether <number> snmp trap linkup <mode>  
Options  
<number>  
ether port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
<mode>  
Enable or disable linkup trapping for the specified port(s).  
enable  
Enable trapping.  
disable  
Disable trapping.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Enable or disable the linkup trap for the specified ether port(s).  
The "snmp trap linkup" command has a priority over this command.  
It is assumed that the linkup trap is enabled.  
Default  
ether <number> snmp trap linkup enable  
Port Information Settings  
150  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.1.10 ether output rate control information  
This section explains about the commands related to ether output rate control information.  
5.1.10.1 ether ratecontrol  
Function  
Set output rate limit of ether port  
Available Model XG2600  
Syntax  
ether <number> ratecontrol <rate>  
Options  
<number>  
ether port number  
Set a port number to use with a decimal value.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
<rate>  
Output rate  
Specify output rate which is limited in the ether port with Mbps or Gbps  
40m to 10000m  
1g to 10g  
If "10000m" or "10g" is set, packets are not limited.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set output rate control.  
"ether qos mode drr" command and "ether ratecontrol" command can not use at the  
same time and same port.  
Default  
It is assumed that the output rate limit function is not used.  
Port Information Settings  
151  
     
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.2 LACP Information Settings  
This section explains about LACP information settings.  
5.2.1  
LACP Information  
This section explains about the commands related to LACP information.  
5.2.1.1 lacp system-priority  
Function  
Set the LACP system priority.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
lacp system-priority <priority>  
Options  
<priority>  
Priority of LACP system  
Set the device priority with a decimal value from 1 to 65535.  
A smaller value has a higher priority.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set the priority of LACP system. The LACP system priority is used to determine which  
has a higher priority for the information exchange between a link aggregation group and  
another remote link aggregation group. If the priority is same, the system ID (the  
designated MAC address +1) with a smaller number has the higher priority.  
However, this definition is meaningless if the active or passive is not set for the  
linkaggregation operation mode of the "linkaggregation mode".  
Default  
It is assumed that 32768 has been specified as the LACP system priority.  
lacp system-priority 32768  
LACP Information Settings  
152  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.2.1.2 lacp bpdu  
Function  
Set the BPDU forwarding mode of the LACP.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
lacp bpdu <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
on  
Specify the BPDU forwarding mode.  
off  
Specify the BPDU discarding mode.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set the BPDU forwarding mode of the LACP.  
Set whether or not to forward a BPDU frame when the LACP function has been disabled.  
However, the BPDU frame forwarding is disabled if the link aggregation is not set for the  
device.  
Caution  
Default  
The BPDU frame, which is not provided with the VLAN tag, is forwarded based on the  
receive port setting without the VLAN tag if the BPDU forwarding mode is specified.  
It is assumed that discarding mode is specified as BPDU forwarding mode of LACP.  
lacp bpdu off  
LACP Information Settings  
153  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.3 VLAN Information Settings  
This section explains about VLAN information settings.  
VLAN ID allowed range  
The VLAN ID, which is to be specified in <vid> of [Options] described in each command of this section, shall be within  
the range specified as shown below.  
Range  
1 to 4094  
Model  
XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
5.3.1  
VLAN Common Information  
This section explains about the commands related to VLAN common information.  
5.3.1.1 vlan name  
Function  
Set the VLAN name.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
vlan <vid> name <name>  
Options  
<vid>  
VLAN ID  
Specify a VLAN ID with a decimal value.  
VLAN1 has been defined as the default port VLAN during device startup, and it has  
been registered as the "default" VLAN name.  
<name>  
VLAN name  
Specify the VLAN name using up to 32 characters from the 0x21, 0x23 to 0x7e ASCII  
set.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set a VLAN name.  
If this command is omitted, VLAN1 is set to the "default".  
If a VLAN other than VLAN1 is created, it is set in the 'v'+<vid> format.  
(Example: If vid=5, "v5" is set.)  
Caution  
Default  
If "delete vlan <vid> name" is specified, the VLAN name is initialized but the VLAN itself  
is not deleted. (The VLAN can be deleted by the "ether vlan" command.)  
When VLAN ID is 1  
vlan 1 name default  
When VLAN ID is other than 1  
vlan <vid> name 'v'+<vid>  
VLAN Information Settings  
154  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.3.1.2 vlan protocol  
Function  
Set the protocol VLAN.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
vlan <vid> protocol <protocol-type>  
vlan <vid> protocol <count> <frame-type> <ether-type>  
Options  
<vid>  
VLAN ID  
Specify a decimal VLAN ID from 2 to 4094.  
<protocol-type>  
Select a system-defined protocol type.  
ipv4 : EthernetII Ethertype=0800,0806,8035  
ipv6 : EthernetII Ethertype=86dd  
fna  
: 802.3LLC LSAP=8080,0000,0001  
[XG2600] The fna protocol can be assigned only untagged frames.  
<count>  
Protocol definition number  
Specify a decimal protocol definition value from 0 to 7 if the protocol is defined by the  
user.  
[XG2600]  
<frame-type>  
Specify it if the protocol is defined by the user.  
ethertype  
Ethernet II or IEEE 802.3s with SNAP format frames  
llc  
IEEE 802.3 with LLC format frames  
<ether-type>  
Specify the Ethertype or LLC value if the protocol is defined by the user.  
Specify the Ethertype value for Ethernet II format or IEEE 802.3 SNAP format frames,  
or specify an LLC value (DSAP or SSAP) for IEEE 802.3 LLC format frames, using a 4-  
digit hexadecimal value (from 0000 to ffff).  
Setting example)  
ipx  
: ethertype=8137,8138  
appletalk : ethertype=809b,80f3  
This device can't appreciate Ethernet II format from IEEE 802.3 SNAP format.  
If you use appletalk (SNAP format) protocol, please check on there is no Ethernet II  
format frame using same ether-type of appletalk.  
[XG0224/XG0448]  
<frame-type>  
Specify it if the protocol is defined by the user.  
ethertype  
Ethernet II format frames  
snap  
IEEE 802.3s with SNAP format frames  
llc  
IEEE 802.3 with LLC format frames  
VLAN Information Settings  
155  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
<ether-type>  
Specify the Ethertype or LLC value if the protocol is defined by the user.  
Specify the Ethertype value for Ethernet II format or IEEE 802.3 SNAP format frames,  
or specify an LLC value (DSAP or SSAP) for IEEE 802.3 LLC format frames, using a 4-  
digit hexadecimal value (from 0000 to ffff).  
Setting example)  
ipx  
: ethertype=8137,8138  
appletalk : ethertype=809b,80f3  
If EthernetII format was specified, the EtherType value = 0000 to 05ff setting is  
disabled.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set the protocol VLAN conditions using this command.  
The protocol can be set by one of the following two methods.  
Selecting a system-defined protocol (ipv4/ipv6/fna).  
Directly specifying a protocol type in the user definition.  
Caution  
No protocol VLANs can be set for the default VLAN (VLAN ID=1).  
Up to 8 definitions can be given to set the user-defined protocol conditions for the  
entire device.  
Both the system-defined <protocol-type> definition and the user definition cannot be  
specified in the same VLAN all together.  
The same protocol definition as the system-defined <protocol-type> definition can be  
used as the user definition.  
However, if these definitions compete against each other on the same port, only the  
VLAN with a smaller identification number will be enabled. For example, the following  
can be set:  
ether 1 vlan untag 10  
ether 2 vlan untag 20  
vlan 10 protocol ipv4  
vlan 20 protocol 0 ethertype 0800  
However, if "ether 1 vlan untag 10,20" is set for the Ethernet port, the ether1 port is  
included in VLAN10 but not included in VLAN20.  
The same protocol definition can be used for multiple different VLANs.  
However, if those VLANs compete against each other on the same port, only the VLAN  
with a smaller identification number will be enabled. For example, the following can be  
set:  
ether 1 vlan untag 10  
ether 2 vlan untag 20  
vlan 10 protocol ipv4  
vlan 20 protocol ipv4  
However, if "ether 1 vlan untag 10,20" is set for the Ethernet port, the ether1 port is  
included in VLAN10 but not included in VLAN20.  
If the protocol type differs, multiple protocol VLANs can be set on the same port. For  
example, the following can be set:  
ether 1 vlan untag 10,20  
vlan 10 protocol ipv4  
vlan 20 protocol ipv6  
If "delete vlan <vid> protocol" is set, all VLAN protocol conditions are deleted, but the  
VLAN itself is not deleted. (The VLAN can be deleted by the "ether vlan" command.)  
VLAN Information Settings  
156  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
[XG2600]  
The Max definition number of "vlan protocol" definitions is 16.  
If there are "vlan protocol" definitions over 16, the definition, the VLAN and the ports  
belong to the VLAN are invalid.  
The "vlan protocol" definition uses the ACL resources,please refer "ether macfilter",  
"ether qos aclmap", "vlan macfilter", "vlan qos aclmap", "lan ip filter", "lan ip dscp".  
The fna protocol can be assigned only untagged frames.  
Default  
N/A  
VLAN Information Settings  
157  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.3.1.3 vlan forward  
Function  
Set static forwarding rules setting.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
vlan <vid> forward <count> <dst_addr> <port>  
Options  
<vid>  
VLAN ID  
Specify a VLAN ID with a decimal value.  
<count>  
Definition number  
Specify it with a decimal value from 0 to 399.  
<dst_addr>  
Destination MAC address  
Specify the MAC address to be added statically to the learning table.  
(It must be in the xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx format, where "xx" is a 2-digit hexadecimal value.)  
<port>  
ether port number  
Specify the Ethernet port number using a decimal value.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set static forwarding rules.  
Address 00:00:00:00:00:00, the broadcast address, or multicast address, option  
cannot be specified in <dst_addr>.  
This setting is disabled if VLAN specified in <vid> is not registered.  
This setting is disabled if the port specified by <port> is not set in the VLAN specified  
by <vid>.  
If the port specified by <port> is a member of link aggregation ports, set it to forward  
packets to the link aggregation ports.  
If the port specified by <port> is a backup port, set it to forward packets to the port used  
for the backup port.  
Default  
N/A  
VLAN Information Settings  
158  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.3.1.4 vlan description  
Function  
Set description for VLAN  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
vlan <vid> description <description>  
Options  
<vid>  
VLAN ID  
Specify VLAN ID with a decimal value from 0 to 4094  
<description>  
Description  
Specify the VLAN description using up to 32 characters from the 0x21, 0x23 to 0x7e  
ASCII set.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set description for VLAN  
N/A  
VLAN Information Settings  
159  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.3.2  
IGMP Snooping Information  
This section explains about the commands related to IGMP snooping information.  
5.3.2.1 vlan igmpsnoop router  
Function  
Set the multicast router port.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
vlan <vid> igmpsnoop router <mode> [<portlist>]  
Options  
<vid>  
VLAN ID  
Specify a VLAN ID with a decimal value.  
<mode>  
Specify how to determine the multicast router port.  
auto  
Determine the multicast router port dynamically.  
yes  
Specify the multicast router port statically.  
Only the ports specified by <portlist> are set as the router ports.  
The <portlist> option must be specified if this mode is selected.  
<portlist>  
Specify a list of multicast router ports. This option can be specified only if the static mode  
has been selected.  
When specifying multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,). Also, when  
specifying a range of values, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example:"1-3")  
The available description format is as follows:  
To specify 1, 2, 3, 5 and 7 as the portlist:  
Example: 1-3,5,7  
To specify 1, 3 and 5 as the portlist:  
Example: 1,3,5  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Specify the multicast router connection port.  
This setting is enabled only when IGMP snooping is set to use.  
This setting is ignored if IGMP snooping is not used.  
If multicast routers are connected to two or more ports of the same VLAN, set it  
statically without fail. If "auto" is defined, the communication may fail.  
When connecting multiple devices to each other when IGMP snooping is enabled for  
the devices, set the port as the multicast router port.  
Default  
It is assumed that the multicast router port is determined dynamically.  
vlan <vid> igmpsnoop router auto  
VLAN Information Settings  
160  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.3.2.2 vlan igmpsnoop querier  
Function  
Set the Querier operations.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
vlan <vid> igmpsnoop querier <mode>  
Options  
<vid>  
VLAN ID  
Specify a VLAN ID with a decimal value.  
<mode>  
on  
Specify the Querier operation mode if no multicast router exists.  
off  
Do not operate as the Querier regardless of whether the multicast router exists or not.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Specify the querier operation mode.  
If the querier operation is disabled and the multicast router does not exist, multicast  
forwarding is stopped.  
This setting is enabled only when IGMP snooping is used.  
This setting is ignored if IGMP snooping is not used.  
Default  
It is operated as Querier if no multicast router exists.  
vlan <vid> igmpsnoop querier on  
VLAN Information Settings  
161  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.3.2.3 vlan igmpsnoop source  
Function  
Set the IP address to be used for IGMP snooping.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
vlan <vid> igmpsnoop source <address>  
Options  
<vid>  
VLAN ID  
Specify a VLAN ID with a decimal value.  
<address>  
Specify the source IP address to be used for IGMP snooping.  
This IP address is used as the source address for all IGMP packets.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Specify the source address of IGMP packets sent by IGMP snooping.  
This setting is enabled only when IGMP snooping is set to use.  
This setting is ignored if IGMP snooping is not used.  
When IGMP snooping is used, set the Querier IP address.  
To make the querier operation enabled, set an address whose value is greater than the  
multicast router address.  
When connecting multiple IGMP snooping devices, do not set the addresses of two or  
more devices within the same VLAN.  
Default  
IGMP packets are sent with the source address 0.0.0.0.  
vlan <vid> igmpsnoop source 0.0.0.0  
VLAN Information Settings  
162  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.3.2.4 vlan igmpsnoop proxy  
Function  
Set the IGMP proxy mode.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
vlan <vid> igmpsnoop proxy <mode>  
Options  
<vid>  
VLAN ID  
Specify a VLAN ID with a decimal value.  
<mode>  
Specify the proxy response mode.  
off  
Do not respond any IGMP packet.  
on  
Proxy responds to a querier.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Specify the IGMP proxy's response transmission mode. If a device that uses IGMP v1  
exists, specify "off".  
Caution  
Default  
This setting is enabled only when IGMP snooping is set to use.  
This setting is ignored if IGMP snooping is not used.  
The proxy response "off" mode is applied.  
vlan <vid> igmpsnoop proxy off  
VLAN Information Settings  
163  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.3.3  
Filter Information  
This section explains about the commands related to filter information.  
5.3.3.1 vlan macfilter  
Function  
Set the MAC filter for VLAN.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
vlan <vid> macfilter <count> <action> <acl>  
Options  
<vid>  
VLAN ID  
Specify a VLAN ID with a decimal value.  
<count>  
Priority  
Set the filtering priority to be specified with a decimal value.  
A smaller value has a higher priority.  
The specified value is sorted and renumbered in sequence. If a filtering definition with  
the same value already exists, the existing one will be changed.  
Range  
Model  
0 to 511  
0 to 63  
XG0224 / XG0448  
XG2600  
<action>  
pass  
Transmit the packets that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp"  
or "acl udp" definition of access control list.  
reject  
Discard the packets that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp", or  
"acl udp" definition of access control list.  
<acl>  
ACL definition number  
Specify the ACL definition number of the access control list where the packet pattern to  
be filtered has been defined.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set MAC filtering for each VLAN.  
For the input packets that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp", or  
"acl udp" definitions of the access control list which has been specified by <acl>, the filter  
processing is executed in the way as specified by <action>.  
VLAN Information Settings  
164  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Caution  
Note 1.  
If none of "acl mac", "acl vlan" and "acl ip" definitions exist on the access control list  
which has been specified by <acl> or if the access control list specified by <acl> does not  
exist, the packets are not filtered.  
Note 2.  
The packet filtering default value is "pass".  
No packets are filtered if only "pass" is set in <action>.  
[XG2600]  
Note 3.  
"acl mac llc" definitions can not filter llc frames with the VLAN tag.  
Note 4.  
This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.  
The allowable upper limits are as follows.  
Upper limit based on "commands"  
64 commands for the entire device.  
Up to 64 commands can be set for the entire device, including the"ether macfilter"",  
commands.  
The priority for each command is as follows.  
1) "ether macfilter" command  
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.  
2) "vlan macfilter" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
3) "lan ip filter" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
4) "ether qos aclmap" command  
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.  
5) "vlan qos aclmap" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
6) "lan ip dscp" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
Upper limit based on "masks"  
64 masks for the entire device.  
Up to 64 masks can be set for the entire device, including the "ether macfilter", "vlan  
protocol" commands.  
The priority for each command is as follows.  
1) "vlan protocol" commands  
2) "ether macfilter" command  
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.  
3) "vlan macfilter" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
4) "lan ip filter" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
VLAN Information Settings  
165  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5) "ether qos aclmap" command  
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.  
6) "vlan qos aclmap" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
7) "lan ip dscp" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
The number of masks that each command use depends on applied ACL.  
When Multiple ACL are applied, the number of masks amount to sum total, and  
depends on ACLs the number of masks amount to less than sum total.  
The following is the number of masks for ACL.  
ACL  
number of masks  
"acl mac"  
define LSAP of llc  
not define LSAP of llc  
"acl vlan"  
3
1
1
not define src IP address  
not define tos/dscp value  
not define tos/dscp value  
define src IP address  
1
3
not define dst IP address  
define dst IP address  
1
use same netmask for src and dst IP address  
not define tos/dscp value  
1
3
3
not define tos/dscp value  
use different netmask for src and dst IP address  
The following is the number of masks for "vlan protocol" command.  
"vlan protocol" definition  
define vlan protocol ipv4  
number of masks  
3
1
1
1
define vlan protocol ipv6  
define vlan protocol <count> ether  
define vlan protocol <count> llc  
Upper limit based on "actions"  
16 actions for the entire device.  
Up to16 actions can be set for the entire device, including the "ether qos aclmap", "vlan  
The following commands spend 1 action regardless of multiple use.  
1) "vlan protocol" commands  
2) "ether qos aclmap" command  
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.  
3) "vlan qos aclmap" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
VLAN Information Settings  
166  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
4) "lan ip dscp" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
The following commands spend 1 action regardless of multiple use.  
- vlan <vid> protocol ipv4  
- vlan <vid> protocol ipv6  
The following commands spend 1 action for each.  
If same <tos_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.  
If same <dscp_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.  
If same <queue_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.  
- ether <number> qos aclmap <count> tos <tos_value> <acl>  
- ether <number >qos aclmap <count> dscp <dscp_value> <acl>  
- ether <number> qos aclmap <count> queue <queue_value> <acl>  
- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> tos <tos_value> <acl>  
- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> dscp <dscp_value> <acl>  
- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> queue <queue_value> <acl>  
- lan <number> ip dscp <count> acl <acl_count> <dscp_value>  
The following commands spend 1 action for each.  
If same <vid> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.  
- vlan <vid> protocol <count> ether  
- vlan <vid> protocol <count> llc  
[XG0224/XG0448]  
Note 3.  
This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.  
The allowable upper limits are as follows.  
Upper limit based on "commands"  
128 commands for the entire device.  
Up to 128 commands can be set for the entire device, including the "ether macfilter",  
The priority for each command is as follows.  
1) "ether macfilter" command  
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.  
2) "vlan macfilter" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
3) "lan ip filter" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
If up to 128 of "ether macfilter" commands have been defined for port ether1, the  
subsequent "vlan macfilter" and "lan ip filter" command will be no longer applied.  
Upper limit based on rule  
128 rules for the entire device.  
For the "ether macfilter", "vlan macfilter" and "lan ip filter" commands, the number of  
rules to be used varies depending on the contents of the specified acl as shown below.  
The number of rules for each ACL is as follows.  
- For ACL to set TCP or UDP  
Result of multiplication between the number of source ports and the number of  
destination ports for TCP or UDP  
VLAN Information Settings  
167  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
- For ACL to set ICMP  
Result of multiplication between the number of ICMP TYPEs and the number of  
ICMP CODEs for ICMP  
- For ACL not to set TCP, UDP, or ICMP  
1
You can expand the upper limit to use "resource filter distribution" command and  
change resource distribution.  
Note 4.  
Up to 700 commands can be set for the entire device, including the definitions which  
It is assumed that this option has not been set.refer to ACL such as "ether macfilter",  
commands.  
Default  
It is assumed that this option has not been set.  
VLAN Information Settings  
168  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.3.3.2 vlan macfilter move  
Function  
Change the priority of VLAN MAC filter.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
vlan <vid> macfilter move <count> <new_count>  
Options  
<vid>  
VLAN ID  
Specify a VLAN ID with a decimal value.  
<count>  
Source priority  
Set the source priority with a decimal value.  
<new_count>  
Destination priority  
Set the destination priority with a decimal value.  
Range  
Model  
0 to 511  
XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Change the priority of MAC filtering for each VLAN.  
If the current priority is set as <count>, change the priority of this definition to  
<new_count>.  
When the definition is changed, the priority is renumbered.  
Default  
N/A due to an edit command.  
VLAN Information Settings  
169  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.3.3.3 vlan ip6filter  
Function  
Set VLAN IPv6 filter  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448  
Syntax  
vlan <vid> ip6filter <count> <action> <acl>  
Options  
<vid>  
VLAN ID  
Specify the VLAN ID with a decimal value from 1 to 4094.  
<count>  
Priority  
Set the filtering priority with a decimal value  
A smaller value has a higher priority.  
Range  
0 to 511  
Model  
XG0224 / XG0448  
<action>  
pass  
Pass the packets which match "acl ip6", "acl icmp", "acl tcp" and "acl udp"  
reject  
Discard the packets which match "acl ip6", "acl icmp", "acl tcp" and "acl udp"  
<acl>  
ACL definition number  
Specify the ACL definition number which is used for the filter  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set IPv6 filtering per VLAN  
Action specified in <action> works packets which match access control list which is  
defined in "acl ip6", "acl icmp", "acl tcp" and "acl udp"  
Caution  
Note 1.  
If none of "acl ip6" definition exist on the access control list which has been specified by  
<acl> or if the access control list specified by <acl> does not exist, the packets are not  
filtered.  
Note 2.  
The packet filtering default value is "pass".  
No packets are filtered if only "pass" is set in <action>.  
Note 3.  
This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.  
The allowable upper limits are as follows.  
Upper limit based on "commands"  
128 commands for the entire device.  
Up to 128 commands can be set for the entire device, including the "vlan ip6filter" and  
"lan ip6 filter" commands.  
The priority for each command is as follows.  
VLAN Information Settings  
170  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
1) "vlan ip6filter" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
2) "lan ip6 filter" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
If up to 128 of "vlan ip6filter" commands have been defined, the subsequent "lan ip6  
filter" command will be no longer applied.  
Upper limit based on rule  
128 rules for the entire device.  
For the "vlan ip6filter" and "lan ip6 filter" commands, the number of rules to be used  
varies depending on the contents of the specified acl as shown below.  
The number of rules for each ACL is as follows.  
- For ACL to set TCP or UDP  
Result of multiplication between the number of source ports and the number of  
destination ports for TCP or UDP  
- For ACL to set ICMP  
Result of multiplication between the number of ICMP TYPEs and the number of  
ICMP CODEs for ICMP  
- For ACL not to set TCP, UDP, or ICMP  
1
You can expand the upper limit to use "resource filter distribution" command and change  
resource distribution.  
Note 4.  
Up to 700 commands can be set for the entire device, including the definitions which refer  
ip6 dscp" and "serverinfo filter" commands.  
Default  
N/A  
VLAN Information Settings  
171  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.3.3.4 vlan ip6filter move  
Function  
Change the priority of VLAN IPv6 filter  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448  
Syntax  
vlan <vid> ip6filter move <count> <new_count>  
Options  
<vid>  
VLAN ID  
Specify VLAN ID with a decimal value from 1 to 4094  
<count>  
Priority  
Specify the priority with a decimal value  
<new_count>  
New Priority  
Specify the new priority with a decimal value  
Range  
0 to 511  
Model  
XG0224 / XG0448  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Change the priority of IPv6 filter per VLAN  
N/A  
VLAN Information Settings  
172  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.3.4  
QoS Information  
This section explains about the commands related to QoS information.  
5.3.4.1 vlan qos aclmap  
Function  
Set the QoS conversion of the VLAN.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> <action> <value> <acl>  
Options  
<vid>  
VLAN ID  
Specify a VLAN ID with a decimal value.  
<count>  
Priority  
Set the QoS conversion priority with a decimal value.  
A smaller value has a higher priority.  
If multiple <action> are executed for the same packet and if they conflict with each  
other, the <action> with a higher priority is executed.  
The specified value is sorted and renumbered in sequence. If a filtering definition with  
the same value already exists, the existing one will be changed.  
Range  
Model  
0 to 511  
0 to 63  
XG0224 / XG0448  
XG2600  
<action>  
cos [XG0224/XG0448]  
Rewrite the "cos" value (the "user priority" value in the Tag Control Information (TCI)  
field of the Tagged VLAN) of packets that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl  
icmp", "acl tcp", or "acl udp" definition of access control list.  
dscp  
Rewrite the "dscp" value (the high-order 6 bits in the TOS field of IP header), if packets  
that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp", or "acl udp" definition  
of access control list are IP packets.  
tos  
Rewrite the "ip precedence" value (the high-order 3 bits in the TOS field of IP header),  
if packets that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp", or "acl udp"  
definition of access control list are IP packets.  
queue  
Change the queue at the output port that is used to output the input packets that match  
the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp", or "acl udp" definition of access  
control list.  
<value>  
Replacing value  
If "cos" is selected in <action>:  
- <cos_value>  
Set the replaced "cos" value with a decimal value from 0 to 7.  
- tos  
Replace the "cos" value with the "ip precedence" value in the packet.  
VLAN Information Settings  
173  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
If "dscp" is selected in <action>:  
- <dscp_value>  
Set the replaced "dscp" value with a decimal value from 0 to 63.  
If "tos" is selected in <action>:  
- <tos_value>  
Set the replaced "ip precedence" value with a decimal value from 0 to 7.  
- cos  
Replace the "ip precedence" value with the "cos" value.  
If "queue" is selected in <action>:  
- <queue_value>  
Specify a queue number of the output port to be used.  
A larger value indicates a queue with a higher output priority.  
Range  
Model  
0 to 7  
XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
<acl>  
ACL definition number  
Specify the ACL definition number of the access control list where the packet pattern to  
configure QoS conversion has been defined.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set the QoS (quality of service) of each Ethernet port.  
For the ingress packets that match the "acl mac", "acl vlan", "acl ip", "acl icmp", "acl tcp",  
or "acl udp" definitions of the access control list which has been specified by <acl>, the  
QoS processing is executed in the way as specified by <action>.  
Caution  
Note 1.  
If none of "acl mac", "acl vlan" and "acl ip" definitions exist on the access control list  
which has been specified by <acl> or if the access control list specified by <acl> does not  
exist, the packets are not filtered.  
[XG2600]  
Note 2.  
If a queue is selected by <action> and if this queue has not been associated with the cos  
value by the "ether qos prioritymap" command, the QoS processing is not executed.  
Note 3.  
"acl mac llc" definitions can not filter llc frames with the VLAN tag.  
Note 4.  
This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.  
The allowable upper limits are as follows.  
Upper limit based on "commands"  
64 commands for the entire device.  
Up to 64 commands can be set for the entire device, including the "ether macfilter",  
commands.  
The priority for each command is as follows.  
VLAN Information Settings  
174  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
1) "ether macfilter" command  
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.  
2) "vlan macfilter" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
3) "lan ip filter" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
4) "ether qos aclmap" command  
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.  
5) "vlan qos aclmap" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
6) "lan ip dscp" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
Upper limit based on "masks"  
64 masks for the entire device.  
Up to 64 masks can be set for the entire device, including the "ether macfilter", "vlan  
protocol" commands.  
The priority for each command is as follows.  
1) "vlan protocol" commands  
2) "ether macfilter" command  
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.A  
smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.  
3) "vlan macfilter" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
4) "lan ip filter" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
5) "ether qos aclmap" command  
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.  
6) "vlan qos aclmap" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
7) "lan ip dscp" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
VLAN Information Settings  
175  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
The number of masks that each command use depends on applied ACL.  
When Multiple ACL are applied, the number of masks amount to sum total, and  
depends on ACLs the number of masks amount to less than sum total.  
The following is the number of masks for ACL..  
ACL  
number of masks  
"acl mac"  
define LSAP of llc  
not define LSAP of llc  
"acl vlan"  
3
1
1
not define src IP address  
not define tos/dscp value  
not define tos/dscp value  
define src IP address  
1
3
not define dst IP address  
define dst IP address  
1
use same netmask for src and dst IP address  
not define tos/dscp value  
1
3
3
not define tos/dscp value  
use different netmask for src and dst IP address  
The following is the number of masks for "vlan protocol" command.  
"vlan protocol" definition  
define vlan protocol ipv4  
number of masks  
3
1
1
1
define vlan protocol ipv6  
define vlan protocol <count> ether  
define vlan protocol <count> llc  
Upper limit based on "actions"  
16 actions for the entire device.  
Up to16 actions can be set for the entire device, including the "ether qos aclmap", "vlan  
The priority for each command is as follows.  
1) "vlan protocol" commands  
2) "ether qos aclmap" command  
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.  
3) "vlan qos aclmap" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
4) "lan ip dscp" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
The following commands spend 1 action regardless of multiple use.  
- vlan <vid> protocol ipv4  
- vlan <vid> protocol ipv6  
VLAN Information Settings  
176  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
The following commands spend 1 action for each.  
If same <tos_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.  
If same <dscp_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.  
If same <queue_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.  
- ether <number> qos aclmap <count> tos <tos_value> <acl>  
- ether <number >qos aclmap <count> dscp <dscp_value> <acl>  
- ether <number> qos aclmap <count> queue <queue_value> <acl>  
- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> tos <tos_value> <acl>  
- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> dscp <dscp_value> <acl>  
- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> queue <queue_value> <acl>  
- lan <number> ip dscp <count> acl <acl_count> <dscp_value>  
The following commands spend 1 action for each.  
If same <vid> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.  
- vlan <vid> protocol <count> ether  
- vlan <vid> protocol <count> llc  
[XG0224/XG0448]  
Note 2.  
If a queue is selected by <action> and if this queue has not been associated with the cos  
value by the "qos cosmap" command, the QoS processing is not executed.  
Note 3.  
This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.  
The allowable upper limits are as follows.  
Upper limit based on "commands"  
128 commands for the entire device.  
Up to 128 commands can be set for the entire device, including the "ether qos aclmap",  
1) "ether qos aclmap" command  
A smaller Ethernet port value has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.  
2) "vlan qos aclmap" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
3) "lan ip dscp"command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
If up to 128 of "ether qos aclmap" commands have been defined for port ether1, the  
subsequent "vlan qos aclmap" and "lan ip dscp" command will be no longer applied.  
Upper limit based on rule  
128 rules for the entire device.  
number of rules to be used varies depending on the contents of the specified acl as  
shown below.  
The number of rules for each ACL is as follows.  
- For ACL to set TCP or UDP  
Result of multiplication between the number of source ports and the number of  
destination ports for TCP or UDP  
- For ACL to set ICMP  
Result of multiplication between the number of ICMP TYPEs and the number of  
ICMP CODEs for ICMP  
- For ACL not to set TCP, UDP, or ICMP  
1
VLAN Information Settings  
177  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
You can expand the upper limit to use "resource filter distribution" command and change  
resource distribution.  
Note 4.  
Up to 700 commands can be set for the entire device, including the definitions which refer  
ip6 dscp" and "serverinfo filter" commands.  
Default  
It is assumed that this option has not been set.  
5.3.4.2 vlan ip6qos aclmap  
Function  
Set IPv6 QoS of VLAN  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448  
Syntax  
vlan <vid> ip6qos aclmap <count> <action> <value> <acl>  
Options  
<vid>  
VLAN ID  
Specify the VLAN ID with a decimal value from 1 to 4094  
<count>  
Prioruty  
Specify the priority of the QoS definition with a decimal value  
A smaller value is a higher priority  
If multiple <action> are executed for the same packet and if they conflict with each  
other, the <action> with a higher priority is executed.  
The specified value is sorted and renumbered in sequence. If a filtering definition with  
the same value already exists, the existing one will be changed.  
Range  
0 to 511  
Model  
XG0224 / XG0448  
<action>  
dscp  
Rewrite the "dscp" value (the high-order 6 bits in the Traffic class field of IPv6 header),  
if packets thatmatch the "acl ip6", "acl icmp", "acl tcp", or "acl udp" definition of access  
control list are IP packets.  
queue  
Change the queue at the output port that is used to output the input packets that match  
the"acl ip6", "acl icmp", "acl tcp", or "acl udp" definition of access control list.  
<value>  
Rewrite Value  
If dscp is selected in <action>:  
<dscp_value>  
Set the rewrite "dscp" value with a decimal value from 0 to 63  
If queue is selected in <action>:  
<queue_value>  
Specify a queue number of the output port to be used. A larger value indicates a queue  
with a higher output priority.  
Range  
Model  
0 to 7  
XG0224 / XG0448  
VLAN Information Settings  
178  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
<acl>  
ACL definition number  
Specify the ACL definition number of the access control list where the packet pattern to  
configure QoS conversion has been defined.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set IPv6 QoS per VLAN  
For the input packets that match the "acl ipv6", "acl icmp", "acl tcp", or "acl udp"  
definitions of the access control list which has been specified by <acl>, the QoS  
processing is executed in the way as specified by <action>.  
Caution  
Note1.  
If none of "acl ip6" definition exist on the access control list which has been specified by  
<acl> or if the access control list specified by <acl> does not exist, the QoS processing is  
not applied to those packets.  
Note2.  
If a queue is selected in <action> and if this queue has not been associated with the  
priority by the "qos cosmap" command, the QoS processing is not executed.  
Note 3.  
This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.  
The allowable upper limits are as follows.  
Upper limit based on "commands"  
128 commands for the entire device.  
Up to 128 commands can be set for the entire device, including the "vlan ip6qos  
aclmap" and "lan ip6 dscp" commands.  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
2) "lan ip6 dscp" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
If up to 128 of "vlan ip6qos aclmap" commands have been defined, the subsequent "lan  
ip6 dscp"command will be no longer applied.  
Upper limit based on rule  
128 rules for the entire device.  
For the "vlan ip6qos aclmap" and "lan ip6 dscp" commands, the number of rules to be  
used varies depending on the contents of the specified acl as shown below.  
The number of rules for each ACL is as follows.  
- For ACL to set TCP or UDP  
Result of multiplication between the number of source ports and the number of  
destination ports for TCP or UDP  
- For ACL to set ICMP  
Result of multiplication between the number of ICMP TYPEs and the number of  
ICMP CODEs for ICMP  
- For ACL not to set TCP, UDP, or ICMP  
1
You can expand the upper limit to use "resource filter distribution" command and change  
resource distribution.  
VLAN Information Settings  
179  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Note 4.  
Up to 700 commands can be set for the entire device, including the definitions which refer  
ip6 dscp" and "serverinfo filter" commands.  
Default  
N/A  
5.3.4.3 vlan ip6qos aclmap move  
Function  
Change the priority of IPv6 QoS for VLAN  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448  
Options  
<vid>  
VLAN ID  
Specify the VLAN ID with a decimal value from 1 to 4094  
<count>  
Priority  
Specify the priority with a decimal value  
<new_count>  
New Priority  
Specify the new priority with a decimal value  
Range  
Model  
0 to 511  
XG0224 / XG0448  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Change the priority of IPv6 QoS definition per VLAN  
If the current priority is set as <count>, change the priority of this definition to  
<new_count>. When the definition is changed, the priority is renumbered.  
Default  
N/A  
VLAN Information Settings  
180  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.4 MAC Information  
This section explains about MAC information.  
5.4.1  
MAC Information  
This section explains about the commands related to MAC information.  
5.4.1.1 mac learning  
Function  
Set the MAC address learning.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
mac learning <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
on  
Enable automatic learning of the MAC address.  
off  
Disable automatic learning of the MAC address.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set to enable or disable the automatic MAC address learning.  
It is assumed that MAC address learning is specified as enable.  
mac learning on  
MAC Information  
181  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.4.1.2 mac age  
Function  
Set the aging-out time of MAC address learning table.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
mac age <time>  
Options  
<time>  
Aging-out time  
Set the aging-out time of MAC address learning table in seconds.  
Range  
10 to 1,000,000  
10 to 3,500  
Model  
XG0224 / XG0448  
XG2600  
Values can be set within the range of 10 to 1,000,000 seconds. (Default value is set to  
300 seconds.)  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set the aging-out time of MAC address learning table.  
It is assumed that the aging-out time of MAC address learning table is set to 300sec.  
mac age 300  
MAC Information  
182  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.5 LAN Information Settings  
This section explains about LAN information settings.  
Allowed range of lan definition numbers  
The lan definition serial number (decimal value), which is to be specified in <number> ("lan" definition number) of  
[Options] described in each command of this section, shall be within the range for each model as shown below.  
Range  
Model  
0 to 99  
XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
5.5.1  
IPv4 Related Information  
This section explains about the commands related to IPv4 related information.  
5.5.1.1 lan description  
Function  
Define the text description for a lan interface.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
lan <number> description <description>  
Options  
<number>  
lan definition number  
Specify a lan definition serial number with a decimal value.  
The default is 0.  
<description>  
Description  
Define the description text for a lan with up to 50 characters from 0x21, 0x23 to 0x7e of  
ASCII code.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Defines the description for a lan interface.  
This description is used also for the SNMP agent function.  
The SNMP agent function sets this description to ifAlias MIB (OID:1.3.6.1.2.1.31.1.1.1.18).  
Default  
No lan interface description is defined.  
LAN Information Settings  
183  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.5.1.2 lan ip address  
Function  
Set the IP address.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
lan [<number>] ip address <address>/<mask> <broadcast>  
Options  
<number>  
lan definition number  
Specify a lan definition serial number with a decimal value.  
The default is 0.  
<address>/<mask>  
IP address/number of mask bits (or mask value)  
Specify a combination of the IP address and the number of mask bits to be assigned to  
the LAN interface. For the mask value, specify successive 1s following the most  
significant bit (MSB).  
The allowable range of IP addresses is as follows:  
0.0.0.0  
1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254  
128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254  
192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254  
For the number of mask bits, specify a decimal value from 2 to 30.  
For the mask value, specify a number 192.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.252.  
The available description format is as follows:  
IP address/number of mask bits (Example: 192.168.1.1/24)  
IP address/mask value (Example: 192.168.1.1/255.255.255.0)  
<broadcast>  
Specify a broadcast address.  
0  
Specify it for 0.0.0.0.  
1  
Specify it for 255.255.255.255.  
2  
Specify it when "network address + all 1s" is obtained from "<address>/<mask>".  
3  
Specify it when "network address + all 1s" is obtained from "<address>/<mask>".  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set the IP address, number of mask bits (or mask value), and broadcast address for the  
LAN interface on this device.  
Default  
It is assumed that the IP address is not specified.  
lan <number> ip address 0.0.0.0/0 0  
LAN Information Settings  
184  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.5.1.3 lan ip route  
Function  
Set the IPv4 static route information.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
lan [<number>] ip route <count> <address>/<mask> <next_hop> [<distance>]  
Options  
<number>  
lan definition number  
Specify a lan definition serial number with a decimal value.  
The default is 0.  
<count>  
Static route information definition number  
Specify a static route information definition number with a decimal value.  
Range  
0 to 199  
Model  
XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
<address>/<mask>  
IPv4 address/number of mask bits (or mask value)  
Specify a destination network with a combination of the IPv4 address and the number  
of mask bits.  
For the mask value, specify successive 1s following the most significant bit (MSB).  
The available description format is as follows:  
- IPv4 address/number of mask bits (Example: 192.168.1.0/24)  
- IPv4 address/mask value (Example: 192.168.1.0/255.255.255.0)  
default  
Specify it when the default route is set as a destination network.  
Specifying 0.0.0.0/0(0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0) has the same meaning.  
<next_hop>  
IPv4 address of next_hop router  
Specify the IPv4 address of the next_hop router to send packets to the destination  
network.  
<distance>  
Priority  
Specify the static route information priority with a decimal value from 1 to 254.  
A smaller value has a higher priority.  
The default is 1.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set the IPv4 static route information.  
Up to 4 IPv4 static route information can be defined for the product as a whole.  
Max definition number  
Model  
200  
XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Caution  
Default  
Default routes can not be set with same priority.  
It is assumed that the IPv4 static route information is not used.  
LAN Information Settings  
185  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.5.1.4 lan ip filter  
Function  
Set the IP filter.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
lan [<number>] ip filter <count> <action> acl <acl_count>  
Options  
<number>  
lan definition number  
Specify a lan definition serial number with a decimal value.  
The default is 0.  
<count>  
Filtering definition number  
Specify a definition number, which indicates a filtering priority, with a decimal value.  
The specified value is sorted and renumbered in sequence. If a filtering definition with  
the same value already exists, the existing one will be changed.  
Range  
Model  
0 to 511  
0 to 63  
XG0224 / XG0448  
XG2600  
<action>  
Set whether or not to transmit the packet to be filtered.  
pass  
Transmit the relevant packet.  
reject  
Block the relevant packet.  
<acl_count>  
ACL definition number  
Specify the required ACL definition number with a decimal value.  
If the ACL specified in <acl_count> is not defined, the filtering definition will be disabled  
and ignored.  
Use the following ACL definition for IP filter.  
- ip  
If the ip value is not set, the filtering definition will be disabled and ignored.  
- tcp  
Available only when "6" is set in <protocol> of ip.  
Otherwise, the set value is ignored.  
If the tcp value is not set while "6" is set in <protocol> of ip, each value of tcp will be  
assumed to be "any".  
- udp  
Available only when "17" is set in <protocol> of ip.  
Otherwise, the set value is ignored.  
If the udp value is not set while "17" is set in <protocol> of ip, each value of udp is  
assumed to be "any".  
- icmp  
Available only when "1" is set in <protocol> of ip.  
Otherwise, the set value is ignored.  
If the icmp value is not set while "1" is set in <protocol> of ip, each value of icmp will  
be assumed to be "any".  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
LAN Information Settings  
186  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Explanation  
Set the IP filter for the LAN interface.  
The IP filter is used to transmit or reject packets that have matched the address, protocol,  
TOS or DSCP value, port number, ICMP TYPE, and ICMP CODE specified in ACL.  
Checking whether the conditions are satisfied or not according to the set priority, if a  
packet that has satisfied those conditions is found, it is filtered, and the subsequent  
setting will be ignored.  
A packet that has not satisfied any conditions will be transmitted.  
Caution  
Note 1.  
If none of "acl ip" definition exist on the access control list which has been specified by  
<acl> or if the access control list specified by <acl> does not exist, the packets are not  
filtered.  
Note 2.  
The packet filtering default value is "pass".  
No packets are filtered if only "pass" is set in <action>.  
[XG2600]  
Note 3.  
This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.  
The allowable upper limits are as follows.  
Upper limit based on "commands"  
64 commands for the entire device.  
Up to 64 commands can be set for the entire device, including the "ether macfilter",  
commands.  
The priority for each command is as follows.  
1) "ether macfilter" command  
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.  
2) "vlan macfilter" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
3) "lan ip filter" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
4) "ether qos aclmap" command  
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.  
5) "vlan qos aclmap" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
6) "lan ip dscp" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
Upper limit based on "masks"  
64 masks for the entire device.  
Up to 64 masks can be set for the entire device, including the "ether macfilter", "vlan  
protocol" commands.  
The priority for each command is as follows.  
1) "vlan protocol" commands  
LAN Information Settings  
187  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
2) "ether macfilter" command  
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.  
3) "vlan macfilter" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
4) "lan ip filter" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
5) "ether qos aclmap" command  
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.  
6) "vlan qos aclmap" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
7) "lan ip dscp" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
The number of masks that each command use depends on applied ACL.  
When Multiple ACL are applied, the number of masks amount to sum total, and  
depends on ACLs the number of masks amount to less than sum total.  
The following is the number of masks for ACL.  
ACL  
number of masks  
"acl mac"  
define LSAP of llc  
not define LSAP of llc  
"acl vlan"  
3
1
1
not define src IP address  
not define tos/dscp value  
not define tos/dscp value  
define src IP address  
1
3
not define dst IP address  
define dst IP address  
1
use same netmask for src and dst IP address  
not define tos/dscp value  
1
3
3
not define tos/dscp value  
use different netmask for src and dst IP address  
The following is the number of masks for "vlan protocol" command.  
"vlan protocol" definition  
define vlan protocol ipv4  
number of masks  
3
1
1
1
define vlan protocol ipv6  
define vlan protocol <count> ether  
define vlan protocol <count> llc  
LAN Information Settings  
188  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Upper limit based on "actions"  
16 actions for the entire device.  
Up to16 actions can be set for the entire device, including the "ether qos aclmap", "vlan  
The priority for each command is as follows.  
1) "vlan protocol" commands  
2) "ether qos aclmap" command  
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.  
3) "vlan qos aclmap" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
4) "lan ip dscp" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
The following commands spend 1 action regardless of multiple use.  
- vlan <vid> protocol ipv4  
- vlan <vid> protocol ipv6  
The following commands spend 1 action for each.  
If same <tos_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.  
If same <dscp_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.  
If same <queue_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.  
- ether <number> qos aclmap <count> tos <tos_value> <acl>  
- ether <number >qos aclmap <count> dscp <dscp_value> <acl>  
- ether <number> qos aclmap <count> queue <queue_value> <acl>  
- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> tos <tos_value> <acl>  
- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> dscp <dscp_value> <acl>  
- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> queue <queue_value> <acl>  
- lan <number> ip dscp <count> acl <acl_count> <dscp_value>  
The following commands spend 1 action for each.  
If same <vid> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.  
- vlan <vid> protocol <count> ether  
- vlan <vid> protocol <count> llc  
[XG0224/XG0448]  
Note 3.  
This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.  
The allowable upper limits are as follows.  
Upper limit based on "commands"  
128 commands for the entire device.  
Up to 128 commands can be set for the entire device, including the "ether macfilter",  
The priority for each command is as follows.  
1) "ether macfilter" command  
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.  
2) "vlan macfilter" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
3) "lan ip filter" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
LAN Information Settings  
189  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
If up to 128 of "ether macfilter" commands have been defined for port ether1, the  
subsequent "vlan macfilter" and "lan ip filter" command will be no longer applied.  
Upper limit based on rule  
128 rules for the entire device.  
For the "ether macfilter", "vlan macfilter" and "lan ip filter" commands, the number of  
rules to be used varies depending on the contents of the specified acl as shown below.  
The number of rules for each ACL is as follows.  
- For ACL to set TCP or UDP  
Result of multiplication between the number of source ports and the number of  
destination ports for TCP or UDP  
- For ACL to set ICMP  
Result of multiplication between the number of ICMP TYPEs and the number of  
ICMP CODEs for ICMP  
- For ACL not to set TCP, UDP, or ICMP  
1
You can expand the upper limit to use "resource filter distribution" command and change  
resource distribution.  
Note 4.  
Up to 700 commands can be set for the entire device, including the definitions which refer  
ip6 dscp" and "serverinfo filter" commands.  
Default  
Transmit all packets, assuming that the IP filter is not set.  
LAN Information Settings  
190  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.5.1.5 lan ip filter move  
Function  
Change the IP filter priority.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
lan [<number>] ip filter move <count> <new_count>  
Options  
<number>  
lan definition number  
Specify a lan definition serial number with a decimal value.  
The default is 0.  
<count>  
Target filtering definition number  
Specify a filtering definition number to change the priority.  
<new_count>  
Destination filtering definition number  
Specify a new priority for <count> with a decimal value.  
If any definition with the same definition number exists, it will be inserted before the  
existing one.  
Range  
Model  
0 to 511  
0 to 63  
XG0224 / XG0448  
XG2600  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Change the IP filter priority.  
Explanation  
LAN Information Settings  
191  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.5.1.6 lan ip dscp  
Function  
Set the DSCP value rewriting conditions.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
lan [<number>] ip dscp <count> acl <acl_count> <new_dscp>  
Options  
<number>  
lan definition number  
Specify a lan definition serial number with a decimal value.  
The default is 0.  
<count>  
DSCP value rewriting definition number  
Specify a definition number, which indicates the priority of DSCP value rewriting  
conditions, with a decimal value.  
The specified value is sorted and renumbered forward when setting was completed.  
If any DSCP value rewriting definition with the same definition number exists, the value  
of the existing definition will be changed.  
Range  
Model  
0 to 511  
0 to 63  
XG0224 / XG0448  
XG2600  
<acl_count>  
ACL definition number  
Specify the required ACL definition number with a decimal value.  
If the ACL specified in <acl_count> is not defined, the DSCP value rewriting definition  
will be disabled and ignored.  
Use the following ACL definition for DSCP value rewriting.  
- ip  
If the ip value is not set, the DSCP value rewriting definition will be disabled and  
ignored.  
- tcp  
Available only when "6" is set in <protocol> of ip.  
Otherwise, the set value is ignored.  
If the tcp value is not set while "6" is set in <protocol> of ip, each value of tcp will be  
assumed to be "any".  
- udp  
Available only when "17" is set in <protocol> of ip.  
Otherwise, the set value is ignored.  
If the udp value is not set while "17" is set in <protocol> of ip, each value of udp is  
assumed to be "any".  
- icmp  
Available only when "1" is set in <protocol> of ip.  
Otherwise, the set value is ignored.  
If the icmp value is not set while "1" is set in <protocol> of ip, each value of icmp will  
be assumed to be "any".  
<new_dscp>  
DSCP value  
Specify the DSCP value to be rewritten with a decimal value from 0 to 63.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
LAN Information Settings  
192  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Explanation  
Set DSCP value rewriting conditions.  
Rewrite the DSCP value of a packet, which has satisfied conditions, to the specified  
DSCP value.  
Caution  
Note 1.  
If none of "acl ip" definition exist on the access control list which has been specified by  
<acl> or if the access control list specified by <acl> does not exist, the packets are not  
filtered.  
[XG2600]  
Note 2.  
This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.  
The allowable upper limits are as follows.  
Upper limit based on "commands"  
64 commands for the entire device.  
Up to 64 commands can be set for the entire device, including the "ether macfilter",  
commands.  
The priority for each command is as follows.  
1) "ether macfilter" command  
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.  
2) "vlan macfilter" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
3) "lan ip filter" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
4) "ether qos aclmap" command  
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.  
5) "vlan qos aclmap" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
6) "lan ip dscp" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
Upper limit based on "masks"  
64 masks for the entire device.  
Up to 64 masks can be set for the entire device, including the "ether macfilter", "vlan  
protocol" commands.  
The priority for each command is as follows.  
1) "vlan protocol" commands  
2) "ether macfilter" command  
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.  
3) "vlan macfilter" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
4) "lan ip filter" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
LAN Information Settings  
193  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5) "ether qos aclmap" command  
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.  
6) "vlan qos aclmap" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
7) "lan ip dscp" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
The number of masks that each command use depends on applied ACL.  
When Multiple ACL are applied, the number of masks amount to sum total, and  
depends on ACLs the number of masks amount to less than sum total.  
The following is the number of masks for ACL.  
ACL  
number of masks  
"acl mac"  
define LSAP of llc  
not define LSAP of llc  
"acl vlan"  
3
1
1
not define src IP address  
not define tos/dscp value  
not define tos/dscp value  
define src IP address  
1
3
not define dst IP address  
define dst IP address  
1
use same netmask for src and dst IP address  
not define tos/dscp value  
1
3
3
not define tos/dscp value  
use different netmask for src and dst IP address  
The following is the number of masks for "vlan protocol" command.  
"vlan protocol" definition  
define vlan protocol ipv4  
number of masks  
3
1
1
1
define vlan protocol ipv6  
define vlan protocol <count> ether  
define vlan protocol <count> llc  
Upper limit based on "actions"  
16 actions for the entire device.  
Up to16 actions can be set for the entire device, including the "ether qos aclmap", "vlan  
The priority for each command is as follows.  
1) "vlan protocol" commands  
2) "ether qos aclmap" command  
A smaller Ethernet port number has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.  
3) "vlan qos aclmap" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
LAN Information Settings  
194  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
4) "lan ip dscp" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
The following commands spend 1 action regardless of multiple use.  
- vlan <vid> protocol ipv4  
- vlan <vid> protocol ipv6  
The following commands spend 1 action for each.  
If same <tos_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.  
If same <dscp_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.  
If same <queue_value> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.  
- ether <number> qos aclmap <count> tos <tos_value> <acl>  
- ether <number >qos aclmap <count> dscp <dscp_value> <acl>  
- ether <number> qos aclmap <count> queue <queue_value> <acl>  
- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> tos <tos_value> <acl>  
- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> dscp <dscp_value> <acl>  
- vlan <vid> qos aclmap <count> queue <queue_value> <acl>  
- lan <number> ip dscp <count> acl <acl_count> <dscp_value>  
The following commands spend 1 action for each.  
If same <vid> is used, the commands use 1 action for them.  
- vlan <vid> protocol <count> ether  
- vlan <vid> protocol <count> llc  
[XG0224/XG0448]  
Note 2.  
This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.  
The allowable upper limits are as follows.  
Upper limit based on "commands"  
128 commands for the entire device.  
Up to 128 commands can be set for the entire device, including the "ether qos aclmap",  
1) "ether qos aclmap" command  
A smaller Ethernet port value has a higher priority among Ethernet ports.  
2) "vlan qos aclmap" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
3) "lan ip dscp" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
If up to 128 of "ether qos aclmap" commands have been defined for port ether1, the  
subsequent "vlan qos aclmap" and "lan ip dscp"command will be no longer applied.  
Upper limit based on rule  
128 rules for the entire device.  
number of rules to be used varies depending on the contents of the specified acl as  
shown below.  
The number of rules for each ACL is as follows.  
- For ACL to set TCP or UDP  
Result of multiplication between the number of source ports and the number of  
destination ports for TCP or UDP  
LAN Information Settings  
195  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
- For ACL to set ICMP  
Result of multiplication between the number of ICMP TYPEs and the number of  
ICMP CODEs for ICMP  
- For ACL not to set TCP, UDP, or ICMP  
1
You can expand the upper limit to use "resource filter distribution" command and change  
resource distribution.  
Note 4.  
Up to 700 commands can be set for the entire device, including the definitions which refer  
ip6 dscp" and "serverinfo filter" commands.  
Default  
It is assumed that DSCP value rewriting is not performed.  
5.5.1.7 lan ip dscp move  
Function  
Change the priority of DSCP value rewriting conditions.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
lan [<number>] ip dscp move <count> <new_count>  
Options  
<number>  
lan definition number  
Specify a lan definition serial number with a decimal value.  
The default is 0.  
<count>  
Target DSCP value rewriting definition number  
Specify a DSCP value rewriting definition number before the priority was changed.  
<new_count>  
Destination DSCP value rewriting definition number  
Specify a new priority for <count> with a decimal value.  
If any definition with the same definition number exists, it will be inserted before the  
existing one.  
Range  
Model  
0 to 511  
0 to 63  
XG0224 / XG0448  
XG2600  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Change the priority of DSCP value rewriting conditions.  
LAN Information Settings  
196  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.5.1.8 lan ip arp static  
Function  
Sets static ARP.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448  
Syntax  
lan [<number>] ip arp static <count> <dst> <mac>  
Options  
<number>  
Defined LAN number  
The sequential number of a LAN definition expressed in base 10.  
Default is 0.  
<count>  
Static ARP table entry number  
The static ARP table entry number, expressed as a base 10 number from 0-199.  
If an entry already exists in the table at the entry number specified, the command will  
modify the existing entry.  
<dst>  
Destination IP address  
Specifies the destination IP address to be registered in the static ARP table.  
Below are the ranges of IP addresses that may be specified.  
<mac>  
MAC address  
Specifies the MAC address to use when sending packets to the destination IP address.  
Specify in the format xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx (where xx is a two-digit, base 16 value).  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Sets static ARP entries in the ARP table.  
Multiple ARP entries may not be made for the same destination IP address.  
The static ARP function will not operate for interfaces in which the IP address is not set.  
MAC addresses cannot be set to broadcast or multicast.  
Default  
If unset, the static ARP function will not be used.  
LAN Information Settings  
197  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.5.2  
IPv6 Related Information  
This section explains about the commands related to IPv6 Related Information.  
5.5.2.1 lan ip6 use  
Function  
Set IPv6 function  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
lan [<number>] ip6 use <mode>  
Options  
<number>  
lan definition number  
Specify lan definition number with a decimal value  
<mode>  
Specify whether to send and receive IPv6 packets  
on  
Enable IPv6  
off  
Disable Ipv6  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set IPv6 function  
It is assumed that the IPv6 server function is not used.  
lan <number> ip6 use off  
5.5.2.2 lan ip6 ifid  
Function  
Set IPv6 interface ID  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
lan [<number>] ip6 ifid <interfaceID>  
Options  
<number>  
lan definition number  
Specify lan definition number with a decimal value  
<interfaceID>  
Specify ID for this interface  
auto  
ID with EUI-64 format is created from MAC address  
interface ID  
Specify ID for this interface with a hexadecimal number  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set IPv6 interface ID  
It is assumed that "auto" has been set.  
lan <number> ip6 ifid auto  
LAN Information Settings  
198  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.5.2.3 lan ip6 address  
Function  
Set IPv6 address  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
lan [<number>] ip6 address [<count>] <address>/<prefixlen>  
Options  
<number>  
lan definition number  
Specify lan definition number with a decimal value  
<count>  
IPv6 address definition number  
Specify IPv6 address definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 3  
<address>/<prefixlen>  
IPv6 address/prefix length  
Specify IPv6 address and prefix length. Link local address can not be specified.  
Specify 64 for prefix length.  
auto  
Address is automatically set with prefix of received RA (Router Advertisement)  
message.  
"lan ip6 ra mode recv" need to be set  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set IPv6 address for this interface  
It is assumed that IPv6 function use only IPv6 link-local addresses.  
5.5.2.4 lan ip6 ra mode  
Function  
Set RA (Router Advertisement) message mode  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
lan [<number>] ip6 ra mode <mode>  
Options  
<number>  
lan definition number  
Specify lan definition number with a decimal value  
<mode>  
off  
Disable RA message send/receive function  
recv  
Enable RA message receive function  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set RA message function mode  
Explanation  
RA message receive function  
When it is enabled, ND (Neighbor Discovery) parameter, default route, global address  
are configured automatically based on RA message  
Default  
It is assumed that RA message send/receive function is disabled.  
lan <number> ip6 ra mode off  
LAN Information Settings  
199  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.5.2.5 lan ip6 route  
Function  
Set IPv6 static route information  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
lan [<number>] ip6 route <count> <address>/<prefixlen> <next_hop> [<distance>]  
Options  
<number>  
lan definition number  
Specify lan definition number with a decimal value  
<count>  
Static route information definition number  
Specify static route information definition number with a decimal value  
Range  
0 to 199  
Model  
XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
<address>/<prefixlen>  
IPv6 address/prefix length  
Specify the destination network with IPv6 address and prefix length.  
Link local address can not be specified.  
default  
Specify this when default route is set as the destination network  
<next_hop>  
Next hop router IPv6 address  
Set IPv6 address of next hop router  
<distance>  
Priority  
Set priority of this static route information with a decimal value from 1 to 254  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set IPv6 static route information.  
It is assumed that the IPv6 static route information is not used.  
LAN Information Settings  
200  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.5.2.6 lan ip6 filter  
Function  
Set IPv6 filter  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448  
Syntax  
lan [<number>] ip6 filter <count> <action> acl <acl_count>  
Options  
<number>  
lan definition number  
Specify lan definition number with a decimal number  
<count>  
filtering definition number  
Set the filtering priority with a decimal value  
A smaller value has a higher priority.  
Range  
0 to 511  
Model  
XG0224 / XG0448  
<action>  
pass  
Pass the packets which match  
reject  
Discard the packets which match  
<acl_count>  
ACL definition number  
Specify ACL definition number with a decimal value.  
- ip  
If ip value is not configured, that filter definition is ignored  
- tcp  
This is enabled when ip6 <protocol> value is 6  
- udp  
This is enabled when ip6 <protocol> value is 17  
- icmp  
This is enabled when ip6 <protocol> value is 58  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set IPv6 filter for LAN interface  
Note 1.  
If none of "acl ip6" definition exist on the access control list which has been specified by  
<acl> or if the access control list specified by <acl> does not exist, the packets are not  
filtered.  
Note 2.  
The packet filtering default value is "pass".  
No packets are filtered if only "pass" is set in <action>.  
LAN Information Settings  
201  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Note 3.  
This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.  
The allowable upper limits are as follows.  
Upper limit based on "commands"  
128 commands for the entire device.  
Up to 128 commands can be set for the entire device, including the "vlan ip6filter" and  
"lan ip6 filter"commands.  
The priority for each command is as follows.  
1) "vlan ip6filter" command  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
2) "lan ip6 filter" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
If up to 128 of "vlan ip6filter" commands have been defined, the subsequent "lan ip6  
filter" command will be no longer applied.  
Upper limit based on rule  
128 rules for the entire device.  
For the "vlan ip6filter" and "lan ip6 filter" commands, the number of rules to be used  
varies depending on the contents of the specified acl as shown below.  
The number of rules for each ACL is as follows.  
- For ACL to set TCP or UDP  
Result of multiplication between the number of source ports and the number of  
destination ports for TCP or UDP  
- For ACL to set ICMP  
Result of multiplication between the number of ICMP TYPEs and the number of  
ICMP CODEs for ICMP  
- For ACL not to set TCP, UDP, or ICMP  
1
You can expand the upper limit to use "resource filter distribution" command and change  
resource distribution.  
Note 4.  
Up to 700 commands can be set for the entire device, including the definitions which refer  
ip6 dscp" and "serverinfo filter" commands.  
Default  
It is assumed that the IPv6 filter is not set.  
LAN Information Settings  
202  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.5.2.7 lan ip6 filter move  
Function  
Change priority of IPv6 filter  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448  
Syntax  
lan [<number>] ip6 filter move <count> <new_count>  
Options  
<number>  
lan definition number  
Specify lan definition number with a decimal value  
<count>  
Filterling definition number  
Specify filtering definition number  
<new_count>  
New filtering definition number  
Specify with a decimal value  
Range  
Model  
0 to 511  
XG0224 / XG0448  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Change priority of IPv6 filter  
N/A  
LAN Information Settings  
203  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.5.2.8 lan ip6 dscp  
Function  
Set DSCP value rewrite condition  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448  
Syntax  
lan [<number>] ip6 dscp <count> acl <acl_count> <new_dscp>  
Options  
<number>  
lan definition number  
Specify lan definition number with a decimal value  
<count>  
DSCP rewrite definition number  
Specify priority of DSCP rewrite condition with a decimal value.  
Range  
0 to 511  
Model  
XG0224 / XG0448  
<acl_count>  
ACL definition number  
Specify ACL definition number with a decimal value  
- ip6  
If ip6 value is not configured, that filter definition is ignored  
- tcp  
This is enabled when ip6 <protocol> value is 6  
- udp  
This is enabled when ip6 <protocol> value is 17  
- icmp  
This is enabled when ip6 <protocol> value is 58  
<new_dscp>  
DSCP value  
Specify Rewrite DSCP value with a decimal value from 0 to 63  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set DSCP value rewrite condition  
Note1.  
If none of "acl ip6" definition exist on the access control list which has been specified by  
<acl> or if the access control list specified by <acl> does not exist, the QoS processing is  
not applied to those packets.  
Note2.  
If a queue is selected in <action> and if this queue has not been associated with the  
priority by the "qos cosmap" command, the QoS processing is not executed.  
Note 3.  
This command is unavailable if the allowable upper limit for the device is exceeded.  
The allowable upper limits are as follows.  
Upper limit based on "commands"  
128 commands for the entire device.  
Up to 128 commands can be set for the entire device, including the "vlan ip6qos  
aclmap" and "lan ip6 dscp" commands.  
LAN Information Settings  
204  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
A smaller VLAN ID has a higher priority among VLANs.  
2) "lan ip6 dscp" command  
A smaller lan definition number has a higher priority among lans.  
If up to 128 of "vlan ip6qos aclmap" commands have been defined, the subsequent  
"lan ip6 dscp"command will be no longer applied.  
Upper limit based on rule  
128 rules for the entire device.  
For the "vlan ip6qos aclmap" and "lan ip6 dscp" commands, the number of rules to be  
used varies depending on the contents of the specified acl as shown below.  
The number of rules for each ACL is as follows.  
- For ACL to set TCP or UDP  
Result of multiplication between the number of source ports and the number of  
destination ports for TCP or UDP  
- For ACL to set ICMP  
Result of multiplication between the number of ICMP TYPEs and the number of  
ICMP CODEs for ICMP  
- For ACL not to set TCP, UDP, or ICMP  
1
You can expand the upper limit to use "resource filter distribution" command and change  
resource distribution.  
Note 4.  
Up to 700 commands can be set for the entire device, including the definitions which refer  
ip6 dscp" and "serverinfo filter" commands.  
Default  
It is assumed that DSCP value rewriting is not performed.  
LAN Information Settings  
205  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.5.2.9 lan ip6 dscp move  
Function  
Change priority of DSCP value rewrite condition  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448  
Syntax  
lan [<number>] ip6 dscp move <count> <new_count>  
Options  
<number>  
lan definition number  
Specify lan definition number with a decimal value  
<count>  
DSCP value rewrite definition number  
Specify DSCP value rewrite definition number  
<new_count>  
New DSCP value rewrite definition number  
Specify new DSCP value rewrite definition number  
Range  
Model  
0 to 511  
XG0224 / XG0448  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Change priority of DSCP value rewrite condition  
N/A  
LAN Information Settings  
206  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.5.3  
VLAN Related Information  
This section explains about the commands related to VLAN related information.  
5.5.3.1 lan vlan  
Function  
Set a VLAN ID.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
lan [<number>] vlan <vid>  
Options  
<number>  
lan definition number  
Specify a lan definition serial number with a decimal value.  
The default is 0.  
<vid>  
Set a decimal VLAN ID from 1 to 4094.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Associate a VLAN ID with a lan definition number.  
This setting is disabled if VLAN specified in <vid> is not registered.  
If VLAN specified in <vid> is set at multiple lan interfaces, only the lowest lan definition  
will be enabled.  
Default  
N/A  
LAN Information Settings  
207  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.5.4  
LLMNR Related Information  
This section explains about the commands related to LLMNR Related Information.  
5.5.4.1 lan llmnr use  
Function  
Set to use the LLMNR function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
lan [<number>] llmnr use <mode>  
Options  
<number>  
lan definition number  
Specify a lan definition serial number with a decimal value.  
The default is 0.  
<mode>  
on  
Enable LLMNR function.  
off  
Disable LLMNR function.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set whether or not to enable the LLMNR function on this interface.  
If enabled, this device answers LLMNR Query for hostname of this device.  
Sender The LLMNR function to  
The hostname of this device is set by "sysname" command, and the default hostname is  
Model name (e.c. XG0224).  
Caution  
Default  
"lan llmnr use" (lan llmnr use on) and "oob llmnr use" (oob llmnr use on) definitions can  
be set only 2 definitions for the entire device.  
Up to 2 commands can be set for the entire device, including the "lan llmnr use" (lan  
llmnr use on) and "oob llmnr use" (oob llmnr use on) commands.  
If none of "lan ip address" and "lan ip6 use on" definition exist on the lan interface  
LLMNR function dosn't work.  
It is assumed that the LLMNR function is not used on the lan interface.  
LAN Information Settings  
208  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.5.5  
Management LAN port IPv4 Related Information  
This section explains about the commands related to Management LAN port IPv4 Related Information.  
5.5.5.1 oob ip address  
Function  
Set IP address of oob port  
Available Model XG2600  
Syntax  
oob ip address <address>/<mask> <broadcast>  
Options  
<address>/<mask>  
IP address/number of mask bits (or mask value)  
Sepcify a combination of the IP address and mask to be assigned to Out of Band port  
The allowable range of IPaddress is as follows.  
0.0.0.0  
1.0.0.1 - 126.255.255.254  
128.0.0.1 - 191.255.255.254  
192.0.0.1 - 223.255.255.254  
The available description format is as follows.  
IP address/number of mask bits (Example: 192.168.1.1/24)  
IP address/mask value (Example: 192.168.1.1/255.255.255.0)  
<broadcast>  
Specify a broadcast address  
0  
Specify it for 0.0.0.0  
1  
Specify it for 255.255.255.255  
2  
Specify it when "network address + all 0" is obtained from <address>/<mask>  
3  
Specify it when "network address + all 1" is obtained from <address>/<mask>  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set the IP address.  
It is assumed that the IP address is not specified.  
oob ip address 0.0.0.0/0 0  
LAN Information Settings  
209  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.5.5.2 oob ip route  
Function  
Set the IPv4static route information  
Available Model XG2600  
Syntax  
oob ip route <count> <address>/<mask> <next_hop> [<distance>]  
Options  
<count>  
Static route information definition number  
Specify a static route information definition number with a decimal value.  
Range  
0 to 199  
Model  
XG2600  
<address>/<mask>  
IPv4 address/number of mask bits (or mask value)  
Specify a destination network with a combination of the IPv4 address and the number  
of mask bits. For the mask value, specify successive 1s following the most significant  
bit (MSB). The available description format is as follows:  
- IPv4 address/number of mask bits (Example: 192.168.1.0/24)  
- IPv4 address/mask value (Example: 192.168.1.0/255.255.255.0)  
default  
Specify default when the default route is set as a destination network.  
It’s same as specifying 0.0.0.0/0(0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0)  
<next_hop>  
IPv4 address of next hop router  
Specify the IPv4 address of the next hop router  
<distance>  
Priority  
Specify the static route information priority with a decimal value from 1 to 254.  
A smallr value has a higher priority.  
The default is 1.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set the IPv4 static route information  
Explanation  
Max definition number  
Model  
200  
XG2600  
Caution  
Default  
When the same destination as static route is set, be careful about the following.  
Multiple default routes can not be cofigured with the same priority.  
N/A  
LAN Information Settings  
210  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.5.6  
Management LAN port IPv6 Related Information  
This section explains about the commands related to Management LAN port IPv6 Related Information.  
5.5.6.1 oob ip6 use  
Function  
Set IPv6 function of oob port  
Available Model XG2600  
Syntax  
oob ip6 use <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
Specify wheter or not to receive and send IPv6 packets  
on  
Enable IPc6 function  
off  
Disable IPv6 function  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Specify wheter or not to receive and send IPv6 packets  
It is assumed that the IPv6 server function is not used.  
oob ip6 use off  
5.5.6.2 oob ip6 ifid  
Function  
Set IPv6 interface ID  
Available Model XG2600  
Syntax  
oob ip6 ifid <interfaceID>  
Options  
<interfaceID>  
Specify ID for this interafce  
auto  
Automatically generated ID (EUI-64 format) from MAC address is used  
Interface ID  
Specify ID for this interface with a hexadecimal value. Separate 4 degits with " "(colon)  
Normally specify "auto".  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set IPv6 interface ID  
It is assumed that "auto" has been set.  
oob ip6 ifid auto  
LAN Information Settings  
211  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.5.6.3 oob ip6 address  
Function  
Set IPv6 address  
Available Model XG2600  
Syntax  
oob ip6 address [<count>] <address>/<prefixlen>  
Options  
<count>  
IPv6 address definition number  
Specify IPv6 address definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 3.  
<address>/<prefixlen>  
IPv6 address/prefix length  
Specify IPv6 address and prefix length. Link local address can not be specified.  
Specify 64 for prefix length.  
auto  
Address is automatically set with prefix of received RA (Router Advertisement)  
message.  
"lan ip6 ra mode recv" need to be set  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set IPv6 address for this interface  
It is assumed that IPv6 function use only IPv6 link-local addresses.  
5.5.6.4 oob ip6 ra mode  
Function  
Set RA (Router Advertisement) message mode  
Available Model XG2600  
Syntax  
oob ip6 ra mode <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
off  
Disable RA message send/receive function  
recv  
Enable RA message receive function  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set RA message function mode  
Explanation  
RA message receive function  
When it is enabled, ND (Neighbor Discovery) parameter, default route, global address  
are configured automatically based on RA message  
Default  
It is assumed that RA message send/receive function is disabled.  
lan <number> ip6 ra mode off  
LAN Information Settings  
212  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.5.6.5 oob ip6 route  
Function  
Set IPv6 static route information  
Available Model XG2600  
Syntax  
oob ip6 route <count> <address>/<prefixlen> <next_hop> [<distance>]  
Options  
<count>  
Static route information definition number  
Specify static route information definition number with a decimal value  
Range  
0 to 199  
Model  
XG2600  
<address>/<prefixlen>  
IPv6 address/prefix length  
Specify the destination network with IPv6 address and prefix length.  
Link local address can not be specified.  
default  
Specify this when default route is set as the destination network  
<next_hop>  
Next hop router IPv6 address  
Set IPv6 address of next hop router  
<distance>  
Priority  
Set priority of this static route information with a decimal value from 1 to 254  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set IPv6 static route information.  
It is assumed that the IPv6 static route information is not used.  
LAN Information Settings  
213  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.5.7  
Management LAN port LLMNR Related Information  
This section explains about the commands related to Management LAN port LLMNR Related Information.  
5.5.7.1 oob llmnr use  
Function  
Set to use the LLMNR function of oob interace.  
Available Model XG2600  
Syntax  
oob llmnr use <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
on  
Enable LLMNR function.  
off  
Disable LLMNR function.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set whether or not to enable the LLMNR function on the oob interface.  
If enabled, this device answers LLMNR Query for hostname of this device.  
Sender The LLMNR function to  
The hostname of this device is set by "sysname" command, and the default hostname is  
Model name (e.c. XG0224).  
Caution  
Default  
"lan llmnr use" (lan llmnr use on) and "oob llmnr use" (oob llmnr use on) definitions can  
be set only 2 definitions for the entire device/  
Up to 2 commands can be set for the entire device, including the ""lan llmnr use" (lan  
llmnr use on) and "oob llmnr use" (oob llmnr use on) commands.  
If none of "lan ip address" and "lan ip6 use on" definition exist on the lan interface  
LLMNR function dosn't work.  
It is assumed that the LLMNR function is not used on the oob interface.  
LAN Information Settings  
214  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.6 IPv4 Related Information  
This section explains about IPv4 related information.  
5.6.1  
IPv4 Related Information  
This section explains about the commands related to IP related information.  
5.6.1.1 ip arp age  
Function  
Set a valid time of ARP entry.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
ip arp age <time>  
Options  
<time>  
Set a valid time (minutes) of ARP entry with a decimal value from 1 to 240.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set a valid time of ARP entry.  
It is assumed that 20 minutes has been set.  
ip arp age 20  
IPv4 Related Information  
215  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.7 QoS Information Settings  
This section explains about QoS information settings.  
5.7.1  
QoS Information  
This section explains about the commands related to QoS information.  
5.7.1.1 qos cosmap  
Function  
Set the correspondence between the COS value and storage queue for a specific packet.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448  
Syntax  
qos cosmap <cos> <queue>  
Options  
<cos>  
cos value  
Set a cos value (user priority value in the Tag Control Information (TCI) field of Tagged  
VLAN) of the packet where the specified queue is to be stored, with a decimal value  
from 0 to 7.  
<queue>  
Queue number  
Set the number of a queue to store the packet, which has the cos value specified in  
<cos>, with a decimal value.  
A larger value has a higher priority.  
Range  
Model  
0 to 7  
XG0224 / XG0448  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
This product has 8 keys.  
Explanation  
Packets are queued in multiple queues of an output port (including a port for the local  
device). Which queues are to be selected is determined by the COS value of an output  
packet.  
Store the packet, which has the cos value specified in <cos>, in the queue specified in  
<queue>.  
A larger queue number has a higher output priority.  
A queue with no cos value is unavailable.  
Default  
qos cosmap 0 2  
qos cosmap 1 0  
qos cosmap 2 1  
qos cosmap 3 3  
qos cosmap 4 4  
qos cosmap 5 5  
qos cosmap 6 6  
qos cosmap 7 7  
QoS Information Settings  
216  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.8 STP Information  
This section explains about STP information.  
5.8.1  
STP Information  
This section explains about the commands related to STP information.  
5.8.1.1 stp mode  
Function  
Set the STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) operation mode.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
stp mode {disable | stp | rstp | mstp }  
Options  
disable  
Specify when STP is not used.  
stp  
Specify when STP (dot1d) is used.  
rstp  
Specify when RSTP (dot1w) is used.  
mstp  
Specify when MSTP (dot1s) is used.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set the STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) operation mode.  
It is assumed that the STP is set for STP operation mode.  
stp mode stp  
STP Information  
217  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.8.1.2 stp age  
Function  
Set a maximum valid time of bridge configuration.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
stp age <max_age>  
Options  
<max_age>  
Maximum valid time  
Specify a valid time of the BPDU information sent from the root bridge within the range  
of 6 to 40 seconds.  
The unit will be s (second).  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set a valid time for the BPDU that the root bridge sends.  
Receiving no BPDU frame from the root bridge within the max age time will lead this  
device to begin sending BPDU as a root bridge.  
Caution  
<max_age> checks the relationship between the definition values of stp delay  
<delay_time> and stp hello <time>.  
Check with forward delay time  
max age time <= 2 × (forward delay time - 1.0 seconds)  
Check with hello time  
max age time >= 2 × (hello time + 1.0 seconds)  
If one or both of the above definition value is invalid, the set values of <max_age>,  
<delay_time>, and <time> will be disabled.  
The following shows definition conditions that are available for checking the relationship  
between <max age>, <delay_time>, and <time>.  
2 × (forward delay time - 1.0 second) >= max age time >= 2 × (hello time + 1.0 second)  
Default  
It is assumed that 20 seconds are set for the valid time of the BPDU sent by the root  
bridge.  
stp age 20s  
STP Information  
218  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.8.1.3 stp delay  
Function  
Set a maximum forward delay time.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
stp delay <delay_time>  
Options  
<delay_time>  
Maximum forward delay time  
Specify a maximum forward delay time within the range of 4 to 30 seconds.  
The unit will be s (second).  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set a maximum forwarding delay time.  
This setting is disabled when this device does not function as a root bridge even if it uses  
an STP.  
Specify the time period required to change from the listening state to the learning state or  
from the leaning state to the forwarding state via an STP.  
Caution  
<delay_time> checks the relationship with the definition value of stp age <max_age>.  
Check with max age time  
max age time <= 2 × (forward delay time - 1.0 second)  
If the definition value is invalid, the set values of <max_age>, <delay_time>, and <time>  
will be disabled.  
The following shows definition conditions that are available for checking the relationship  
between <max age>, <delay_time>, and <time>.  
2 × (forward delay time - 1.0 second) >= max age time >= 2 × (hello time + 1.0 second)  
Default  
It is assumed that 15 seconds are set for a maximum forwarding delay time.  
stp delay 15s  
STP Information  
219  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.8.1.4 stp hello  
Function  
Set a Hello message transmission interval.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
stp hello <time>  
Options  
<time>  
Transmission interval  
Specify a transmission interval of configuration BPDU to be sent periodically after this  
device becomes a root bridge, within the range of 1 to 10 seconds. The unit will be s  
(second).  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Specify a transmission interval of configuration BPDU to be sent when this device  
functions as a root bridge.  
This setting is disabled when this device does not function as a root bridge even if it uses  
an STP.  
Caution  
<time> checks the relationship with the definition value of stp age <max_age>.  
Check with max age time  
max age time > = 2 × (hello time + 1.0 second)  
If the definition value is invalid, the set values of <max_age>, <delay_time>, and <time>  
will be disabled.  
The following shows definition conditions that are available for checking the relationship  
between <max age>, <delay_time>, and <time>.  
2 × (forward delay time - 1.0 second) >= max age time >= 2 × (hello time + 1.0 second)  
Default  
It is assumed that 2 seconds are set for a transmission interval of configuration BPDU.  
stp hello 2s  
STP Information  
220  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.8.1.5 stp bpdu  
Function  
Set the BPDU forwarding mode.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
stp bpdu <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
on  
Specify the BPDU flooding mode.  
off  
Specify the BPDU unflooding mode.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set the BPDU flooding mode.  
Explanation  
Set whether or not to forward a BPDU frame when the STP function has been disabled.  
Caution  
Default  
The BPDU frame, which is not provided with the VLAN tag, is forwarded based on the  
receive port setting without the VLAN tag if the BPDU flooding mode is specified.  
It is assumed that discarding mode is specified as the BPDU forwarding mode.  
stp bpdu off  
STP Information  
221  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.8.1.6 stp domain priority  
Function  
Set the bridge priority.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
stp domain <instance-id> priority <priority>  
Options  
<instance-id>  
STP instance ID number  
Specify a decimal value from 0 to 15.  
For non-MSTP operation mode, entering a value from 1 to 15 makes it invalid, although  
the allowable range is set with a value from 0 to 15.  
<priority>  
Priority  
Specify the priority of this device in the bridge network with a decimal value from 0 to  
61440. A smaller value has a higher priority.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Specify the priority of the bridge used for the algorithm for determining the root bridge.  
Specify the minimum value for a bridge to be used as a root bridge.  
Caution  
<priority> must be an integer (valid value) that is divisible by 4096.  
Valid values  
0, 4096, 8192, 12288, 16384, 20480, 24576, 28672, 32768, 36864, 40960, 45056,  
49152, 53248, 57344, 61440  
If an integer other than the valid values is specified, this setting is disabled.  
Default  
It is assumed that 32768 is set for the entire instance priority.  
stp domain 0 priority 32768  
STP Information  
222  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.8.1.7 stp config_id  
Function  
Set the MST configuration.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
stp config_id <region_name> <revision_level>  
Options  
<region_name>  
Region name (Configuration name)  
Specify a configuration name using up to 32 characters from 0x21, 0x23 to 0x7e ASCII  
set.  
<revision_level>  
Revision level  
Specify a decimal value from 0 to 255.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set MST configuration (MST region name and revision level).  
This command is enabled only in the MSTP operation mode.  
Default  
It is assumed that MST for MST configuration information, "region1" for region name, and  
"0" for revision level are set.  
stp config_id region1 0  
5.8.1.8 stp domain vlan  
Function  
Set the VLAN assignment to the MSTP instance.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
stp domain <instance-id> vlan <vidlist>  
Options  
<instance-id>  
Instance ID number  
Specify a decimal value from 1 to 15.  
<vidlist>  
VLAN ID  
Specify a decimal VLAN ID from 1 to 4094.  
When setting multiple VLAN IDs, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-  
10,100,200")  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set VLAN assignment to an MSTP instance.  
This command is enabled only in the MSTP operation mode.  
The definition is disabled when vlan assigned to an instance is not set to the Ethernet  
port.  
Default  
N/A  
STP Information  
223  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.8.1.9 stp max-hops  
Function  
Set a maximum hop count of bridge configuration.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
stp max-hops <hop_count>  
Options  
<hop_count>  
Maximum hop count  
Specify a decimal value from 1 to 40.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
This command is used instead of the Message Age and Max Age parameters in the MST  
region.  
It indicates the valid hop count for the BPDU that the root bridge sends.  
When the hop count of the received BPDU is 0, this device begins to send BPDU with the  
maximum hop count as a root bridge.  
Caution  
Default  
This command is enabled only in the MSTP operation mode.  
The hop count is reduced each time BPDU is forwarded via a neighboring device. If this  
device functions as a root bridge with the hop count set to 1, a spanning tree will be  
created only between this device and a neighboring device.  
It is assumed that 20 is set for hop count.  
stp max-hops 20  
STP Information  
224  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.9 LLDP Information Settings  
This section explains about Loop Detection information settings.  
5.9.1  
LLDP Information  
This section explains about the commands related to LLDP Information.  
5.9.1.1 lldp send interval  
Function  
Set LLDP send interval  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
lldp send interval <interval> <delay>  
Options  
<interval>  
LLDP send interval  
Specify LLDP send interval with a decimal value with h (hours), m (minutes), s (seconds)  
It can be specified from 5 seconds to 32768 seconds.  
This setting corresponds to msgTxInterval in 802.1AB  
<delay>  
LLDP send miimal interval  
Specify LLDP send minimal interval with a decimal value with h (hours), m (minutes), s  
(seconds) It can be specified from 1 second to 0.25 x <interval>seconds (Max is 8192 sec).  
This setting corresponds to TxDelay in 802.1AB  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Specify LLDP send interval which this device sends LLDP information periodically with  
and LLDP send minimal interval which this device sends LLDP information when LLDP  
information is changed  
Default  
It is assumed that 30sec is set for LLDP send interval and 2sec is set for LLDP send  
miimal interval.  
lldp send interval 30s 2s  
LLDP Information Settings  
225  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.9.1.2 lldp send hold  
Function  
Set LLDP hold times  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
lldp send hold <count>  
Options  
<count>  
LLDP hold times  
Specify LLDP hold time which neighbor device holds LLDP information of this device.  
Specify LLDP hold times with a decimal value from 2 times to 10 times.  
This setting corresponds to msgTxInterval in 802.1AB  
This setting corresponds to msgTxHold in 802.1AB  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Specify LLDP hold time which neighbor device holds LLDP information of this device.  
It is assumed that 4 is set for LLDP hold times.  
lldp send hold 4  
5.9.1.3 lldp reinit delay  
Function  
Set LLDP reinit delay time  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
lldp reinit delay <delay>  
Options  
<delay>  
LLDP reinit delay time  
When LLDP send function is disabled, this device sends LLDP information with TTL=0  
and after <delay> time, this device reinitializes the internal status.  
This setting corresponds to reinitDelay in 802.1AB  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
When LLDP send function is disabled, this device sends LLDP information with TTL=0  
and after <delay> time, this device reinitializes the internal status.  
Default  
It is assumed that 2sec is set for LLDP reinit delay time.  
lldp reinit delay 2s  
LLDP Information Settings  
226  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.9.1.4 lldp notification interval  
Function  
Set minimal interval of SNMP Notification Trap  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
lldp notification interval <interval>  
Options  
<interval>  
Trap minimal interval  
Specify minimal interval of SNMP Notification Trap with a decimal value with h (hours),  
m (minutes), s (seconds) from 5 seconds to 3600 seconds.  
This setting corresponds to NotificationInterval in 802.1AB  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Specify minimal interval between SNMP Notification Traps  
When snmp service command is disabled or snmp trap lldpremtableschange is disabled  
SNMP Notification Trap (lldpRemTablesChange Trap) is not sent  
Default  
It is assumed that 5sec is set for Trap minimal interval.  
lldp notification interval 5s  
LLDP Information Settings  
227  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.10 IGMP Snooping Information Settings  
This section explains about IGMP snooping information settings.  
5.10.1 IGMP Snooping Information  
This section explains about the commands related to IGMP snooping information.  
5.10.1.1 igmpsnoop use  
Function  
Set the IGMP snooping function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
igmpsnoop use <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
Specify the IGMP snooping mode.  
on  
Enable IGMP snooping.  
off  
Disable IGMP snooping.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Specify the IGMP snooping mode.  
It is assumed that the IGMP snooping function is not used.  
igmpsnoop use off  
5.10.1.2 igmpsnoop localgroup  
Function  
Set the local group of IGMP snooping function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
igmpsnoop localgroup <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
Specify the local group of IGMP snooping function.  
join  
The packets are forwarded when membership report is recived for local group.  
auto  
The packets are forwarded when multicast packets to local group are received.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Specify local group behavior of IGMP snooping.  
It is assumed that the packets are forwarded when multicast packets to local group are  
received.  
igmpsnoop localgroup auto  
IGMP Snooping Information Settings  
228  
               
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.10.1.3 igmpsnoop unknown flooding  
Function  
Set the unknown multicast packets handling in IGMP snooping function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448  
Syntax  
igmpsnoop unknown flooding <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
Specify flooding mode for unknown multicast packets.  
off  
Discard unknown multicast packets.  
on  
Flooding to the same VLAN.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set the unknown multicast packets handling in IGMP snooping function.  
This command is valid when IGMP snooping function is enabled.  
If IGMP snooping function is disabled, unknown multicast packets are flooded not  
depending on this definition.  
Default  
It is assumed that "Discard unknown multicast packets".  
igmpsnoop unknown flooding off  
IGMP Snooping Information Settings  
229  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.11 Loop Detection Information Settings  
This section explains about Loop Detection information settings.  
5.11.1 Loop Detection Information  
This section explains about the commands related to Loop Detection information.  
5.11.1.1 loopdetect use  
Function  
Set the Loop Detection function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
loopdetect use <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
on  
Enable the Loop Detection function.  
off  
Disable the Loop Detection function.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set whether or not to enable the loop detection function.  
It is assumed that the loop detection function is disabled.  
loopdetect use off  
Loop Detection Information Settings  
230  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.11.1.2 loopdetect portdisable  
Function  
Set the port offline mode.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
loopdetect portdisable <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
yes  
Place the port offline automatically.  
no  
Do not place the port offline.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set whether or not to place the relevant port offline when a loop is detected.  
If ports are placed offline, release them by the "online" command with port releasing.  
It is assumed that the ports are not placed offline.  
Default  
loopdetect portdisable no  
5.11.1.3 loopdetect portblock  
Function  
Set the port blocking behavior after the Loop detected.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
loopdetect portblock <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
yes  
If the Loop detected, the ether port is blocking (without linkdown).  
no  
After the Loop detected, the ether port is non-blocking.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Specify the port blocking behavior after the Loop detected.  
The blocking port will be non-blocking, if no Loop is detected while recovery monitoring  
works on.  
The recovery monitoring counter specified by "loopdetect recovery"command and the  
monitoring interval is specified by "loopdetect interval"command.  
Caution  
Default  
When the "loopdetect portdisable" (loopdetect portdisable yes) command is set, this  
port blocking function is not work.  
When the STP function is enabled, this port blocking function is not work.  
It is assumed that port blocking function is disabled.  
loopdetect portblock no  
Loop Detection Information Settings  
231  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.11.1.4 loopdetect interval  
Function  
Set a transmission interval of the Loop Detection frame.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
loopdetect interval <time>  
Options  
<time>  
Transmission interval  
Specify a transmission interval of the loop detection frame with a value from 1 to 32767  
seconds.  
The unit shall be h (hour), m (minute), or s (second).  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Specify a transmission interval of the Loop Detection frame.  
It is assumed that 10 seconds have been specified.  
loopdetect interval 10s  
5.11.1.5 loopdetect recovery  
Function  
Set the upper limit of monitoring counter for blocking port recovery.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
loopdetect recovery <count>  
Options  
<count>  
Upper limit of monitoring counter for blocking port recovery, with a decimal value from 1  
to 65535.  
If the counter is expired without detecting the Loop, the blocking port is set non-  
blocking again.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set the upper limit of monitoring counter for blocking port recovery.  
If the counter is expired without detecting the Loop, the blocking port is set non-blocking  
again.  
If the the Loop is detected, the counter is set 0 agein.  
The monitoring interval is specified by "loopdetect interval"command.  
Default  
It is assumed 60 has been specified as the upper limit of monitoring counter.  
loopdetect recovery 60  
Loop Detection Information Settings  
232  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.12 ACL Information Settings  
This section explains about ACL information settings.  
5.12.1 ACL Information  
This section explains about the commands related to ACL information.  
Specifying range for ACL definition number  
Model  
ACL definition number  
XG0224/XG0448  
Specify a range between 0 to 799 for ACL definition number (in a decimal number) to specify  
"acl_count" written in the [Option] in command in this section.  
XG2600  
Specify a range between 0 to 299 for ACL definition number (in a decimal number) to specify  
"acl_count" written in the [Option] in command in this section.  
5.12.1.1 acl mac  
Function  
Set the definition of the ACL MAC.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
acl <acl_count> mac <src_mac> <dst_mac> llc <value>  
acl <acl_count> mac <src_mac> <dst_mac> ether <value>  
acl <acl_count> mac <src_mac> <dst_mac> any  
Options  
<acl_count>  
ACL definition number  
Specify an ACL definition serial number with a decimal value.  
<src_mac>  
Specify the source MAC address for ACL.  
any  
Specify it when targeting all MAC addresses.  
bcast  
Specify it when targeting a broadcast MAC address.  
mcast  
Specify it when targeting a multicast MAC address.  
Other than those above  
Specify the target MAC address. Specify the source MAC address for ACL in the  
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx format, where "xx" is a 2-digit hexadecimal value.  
<dst_mac>  
Specify the destination MAC address for ACL.  
any  
Specify it when targeting all MAC addresses.  
bcast  
Specify it when targeting a broadcast MAC address.  
mcast  
Specify it when targeting a multicast MAC address.  
ACL Information Settings  
233  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Messages other than those above  
Specify the target MAC address. Specify the source MAC address for ACL in the  
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx format, where "xx" is a 2-digit hexadecimal value.  
<format> <value>  
llc  
Specify it when targeting the LLC-format frame in which the value of <value> matches  
LSAP. In <value>, specify a hexadecimal value from 0 to ffff.  
To target all LLC-format frames, specify "any" in <value>.  
ether  
Specify it when targeting the Ethernet-format frame in which the value of <value>  
matches the type. In <value>, specify a hexadecimal value from 5dd to ffff.  
To target all Ethernet-format frames, specify "any" in <value>.  
any  
Specify it when targeting all frames. <value> is not necessary.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Specify the etherframe pattern in the ACL definition.  
Any etherframe pattern can be specified in the ACL definition.  
5.12.1.2 acl vlan  
Function  
Set the definition of the ACL VLAN.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
acl <acl_count> vlan <vid> <cos>  
Options  
<acl_count>  
ACL definition number  
Specify an ACL definition serial number with a decimal value.  
<vid>  
Specify the source VID address for ACL.  
any  
Specify when targeting all VID addresses.  
Other than those above  
Specify the target VID. The allowable range of VID addresses for ACL is 1 to 4094.  
<cos>  
Specify COS for ACL.  
any  
Specify it when targeting all COS.  
Other than those above  
Specify the target COS. The allowable range of COS for ACL is 0 to 7.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Specify VLAN in the ACL definition.  
Any VLAN ID can be specified in the ACL definition.  
ACL Information Settings  
234  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.12.1.3 acl ip  
Function  
Set the definition of the ACL IPv4.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
acl <acl_count> ip <src_addr>/<mask> <dst_addr>/<mask> [<protocol> [any]]  
acl <acl_count> ip <src_addr>/<mask> <dst_addr>/<mask> [<protocol> [tos <value>]]  
acl <acl_count> ip <src_addr>/<mask> <dst_addr>/<mask> [<protocol> [dscp <value>]]  
Options  
<acl_count>  
ACL definition number  
Specify an ACL definition serial number with a decimal value.  
<src_addr>/<mask>  
Specify the source IP address for ACL and the number of mask bits.  
IP address/number of mask bits (or mask value)  
Specify a combination of the source IP address for ACL and the number of mask bits.  
For the mask value, specify successive 1s following the most significant bit (MSB).  
The available description format is as follows:  
- IP address/number of mask bits (Example: 192.168.1.1/24)  
any  
Specify it when all source IP addresses are subject to ACL.  
The default is 0.0.0.0/0.  
<dst_addr>/<mask>  
Specify the destination IP address for ACL and the number of mask bits.  
IP address/number of mask bits (or mask value)  
Specify a combination of the destination IP address for ACL and the number of mask  
bits.  
The description format is identical to for <src_addr>/<mask>.  
any  
Specify it when all destination IP addresses are subject to ACL.  
The default is 0.0.0.0/0.  
<protocol>  
Specify a protocol number for ACL.  
Protocol number  
Specify the protocol number for ACL with a decimal value from 1 to 255. (Example:  
ICMP:1, TCP:6, UDP:17, etc.)  
any  
Specify it when all protocol numbers are subject to ACL.  
The default is "any".  
<type>  
Specify how to identify QoS for ACL.  
tos  
Specify it when identifying the ACL target with the TOS value.  
dscp  
Specify it when identifying the ACL target with the DSCP value.  
any  
Specify it when identifying the ACL target with all TOS and DSCP values.  
<value>  
Specify the TOS or DSCP value used to identify the ACL target.  
ACL Information Settings  
235  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
TOS value  
Specify the TOS value used to identify the ACL target with a hexadecimal value from 0  
to ff.  
DSCP value  
Specify the DSCP value used to identify the ACL target with a decimal value from 0 to  
63.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Specify the IPv4 packet pattern in the ACL definition.  
Make sure to define the acl ip when using L3 protocols such as TCP, UDP, or ICMP.  
Default  
Any IP packet pattern can be specified in the ACL definition.  
(The ACL definition is disabled if "all any" is specified or undefined.)  
ACL Information Settings  
236  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.12.1.4 acl ip6  
Function  
Set ACL IPv6 definition  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
acl <acl_count> ip6 <src_addr>/<prefixlen> <dst_addr>/<prefixlen> [<protocol> [any]]  
acl <acl_count> ip6 <src_addr>/<prefixlen> <dst_addr>/<prefixlen> [<protocol> [tc <value>]]  
acl <acl_count> ip6 <src_addr>/<prefixlen> <dst_addr>/<prefixlen>  
[<protocol> [dscp <value>]]  
Options  
<acl_count>  
ACL definition number  
Specify ACL definition number with a decimal number  
<src_addr>/<prefixlen>  
Specify source IPv6 and prefix length  
IPv6 address/prefix length  
Specify IPv6 address and prefix length  
any  
Any source IPv6 address  
<dst_addr>/<prefixlen>  
Specify destination IPv6 and prefix length  
IPv6 address/prefix length  
Specify destination IPv6 and prefix length  
any  
Any destination IPv6 address  
<protocol>  
Specify protocol number  
protocol number  
Specify protocol number  
any  
Any protocol number  
<type>  
tc  
Specify Traffic Class value value  
dscp  
Specify DSCP value  
any  
Specify TOS value, DSCP value  
<value>  
Traffic Class value  
Specify traffic class value  
DSCP value  
Specify DSCP value with a decimal number from 0 to 63  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set ACL IPv6 definition  
N/A  
ACL Information Settings  
237  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.12.1.5 acl tcp  
Function  
Set the definition of the ACL TCP.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
acl <acl_count> tcp <src_port> <dst_port>  
Options  
<acl_count>  
ACL definition number  
Specify an ACL definition serial number with a decimal value.  
<src_port>  
Specify a source port number for ACL.  
Port number  
Specify the source port number for ACL with a decimal value from 1 to 65535.  
When specifying multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
Using a comma (,) enables you to specify up to 10 port numbers, including <src_port>  
and <dst_port>.  
The available description format is as follows:  
- Decimal number from 1 to 65535 (Example: 65535 = Port 65535)  
- Port number, port number, ... (Example: 10,20,30 = Ports 10, 20, and 30)  
any  
Specify it when all source port numbers are subject to ACL.  
<dst_port>  
Specify a destination port number for ACL.  
Port number  
Specify the destination port number for ACL with a decimal value from 1 to 65535.  
The same is true with the description format in <src_port>.  
any  
Specify it when all destination port numbers are subject to ACL.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Specify the TCP packet pattern in the ACL definition.  
When using this command, be sure to specify protocol (tcp 6) in the "acl ip" or "acl ip6"  
command.  
Default  
Any TCP packet pattern can be specified in the ACL definition.  
ACL Information Settings  
238  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.12.1.6 acl udp  
Function  
Set the definition of the ACL UDP.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
acl <acl_count> udp <src_port> <dst_port>  
Options  
<acl_count>  
ACL definition number  
Specify an ACL definition serial number with a decimal value.  
<src_port>  
Specify a source port number for ACL.  
Port number  
Specify the source port number for ACL with a decimal value from 1 to 65535.  
When specifying multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
Using a comma (,) enables you to specify up to 10 port numbers, including <src_port>  
and <dst_port>.  
The available description format is as follows:  
- Decimal number from 1 to 65535 (Example: 65535 = Port 65535)  
- Port number, port number, ... (Example: 10,20,30 = Ports 10, 20, and 30)  
any  
Specify it when all source port numbers are subject to ACL.  
<dst_port>  
Specify a destination port number for ACL.  
Port number  
Specify the destination port number for ACL with a decimal value from 1 to 65535.  
The same is true with the description format in <src_port>.  
any  
Specify it when all destination port numbers are subject to ACL.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Specify the UDP packet pattern in the ACL definition.  
When using this command, be sure to specify protocol (udp 17) in the "acl ip" or "acl ip6"  
command.  
Default  
Any UDP packet pattern can be specified in the ACL definition.  
ACL Information Settings  
239  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.12.1.7 acl icmp  
Function  
Set the definition of the ACL ICMP.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
acl <acl_count> icmp <icmptype> <icmpcode>  
Options  
<acl_count>  
ACL definition number  
Specify an ACL definition serial number with a decimal value.  
<icmptype>  
Specify ICMP TYPE for ACL.  
ICMP TYPE  
Specify the source ICMP TYPE for ACL with a decimal value from 0 to 255.  
When specifying multiple ICMP TYPEs, separate them with commas (,).  
Using a comma (,) enables you to specify up to 10 ICMP TYPEs.  
The available description format is as follows:  
- Decimal number from 0 to 255 (Example: 8 = ICMP TYPE 8)  
- ICMP TYPE, ICMP TYPE, ... (Example: 0, 8, 30 = ICMP TYPEs 0, 8, and 30)  
any  
Specify it when all ICMP TYPEs are subject to ACL.  
<icmpcode>  
Specify ICMP CODE for ACL.  
ICMP CODE  
Specify the source ICMP CODE for ACL with a decimal value from 0 to 255.  
When specifying multiple ICMP CODEs, separate them with commas (,).  
Using a comma (,) enables you to specify up to 10 ICMP CODEs.  
The available description format is as follows:  
- Decimal number from 0 to 255 (Example: 8 = ICMP CODE 8)  
- ICMP CODE, ICMP CODE, ... (Example: 0, 8, 30 = ICMP CODEs 0, 8, and 30)  
any  
Specify it when all ICMP CODEs are subject to ACL.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Specify the ICMP packet pattern in the ACL definition.  
When using this command, be sure to specify <protocol> (icmp 1) using the "acl ip" or  
(icmpv6 58) using the "acl ip6" command.  
Default  
Any ICMP packet pattern can be specified in the ACL definition.  
ACL Information Settings  
240  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.12.1.8 acl description  
Function  
Set the definition of the ACL description.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
acl <acl_count> description <description>  
Options  
<acl_count>  
ACL definition number  
Specify an ACL definition serial number with a decimal value.  
<description>  
Description of setting  
Describe settings with this ACL definition number, using up to 50 characters from 0x21,  
0x23 to 0x7e ASCII set.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Describe settings with this ACL definition number.  
It is assumed that no setting is described.  
ACL Information Settings  
241  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.13 AAA Information Settings  
This section explains about AAA Information Settings.  
Allowed range of group IDs  
The group serial number (decimal value), which is to be specified in [<group_id>] (group ID) described in [Options] of  
each command, shall be within the range as shown below.  
Range  
Model  
0 to 9  
XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Allowed range of AAA user information definition number  
The group serial number (decimal value), which is to be specified in [<number>] (AAA user information definition  
number) described in [Options] of each command, shall be within the range as shown below.  
Range  
0 to 999  
Model  
XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Allowed range of RADIUS server definition number  
The group serial number (decimal value), which is to be specified in [<number>] (RADIUS server definition number)  
described in [Options] of each command, shall be within the range as shown below.  
Range  
Model  
0 to 3  
XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
AAA Information Settings  
242  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.13.1 Group ID Information  
This section explains about the commands related to group ID information.  
5.13.1.1 aaa name  
Function  
Set a group name.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
aaa [<group_id>] name <group_name>  
Options  
<group_id>  
Group ID  
Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.  
The default is 0.  
<group_name>  
Group name  
Specify a group name using up to 32 characters from 0x21, 0x23 to 0x7e ASCII set.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set a group name.  
This command will fail if the same group name is already registered.  
It is assumed that no group name is set.  
Default  
AAA Information Settings  
243  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.13.2 AAA User Information  
This section explains about the commands related to AAA user information.  
5.13.2.1 aaa user id  
Function  
Set the authentication information (user ID).  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
aaa [<group_id>] user [<number>] id <id>  
Options  
<group_id>  
Group ID  
Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.  
The default is 0.  
<number>  
AAA user information definition number  
Specify a group serial number with a decimal value  
The default is 0.  
<id>  
User ID  
Specify a user ID using up to 128 characters from 0x21, 0x23 to 0x7e ASCII set.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set the authentication information (user ID) for authentication protocol.  
It is assumed that no authentication information (user ID) is set.  
AAA Information Settings  
244  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.13.2.2 aaa user password  
Function  
Set the authentication information (password).  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
aaa [<group_id>] user [<number>] password <password> [encrypted]  
Options  
<group_id>  
Group ID  
Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.  
The default is 0.  
<number>  
AAA user information definition number  
Specify a group serial number with a decimal value.  
The default is 0.  
<password>  
Authentication password  
Specify the authentication password using up to 128 characters from 0x21, 0x23 to  
0x7e ASCII set.  
Specify the encrypted authentication password together with "encrypted" to be  
displayed with the "show" command.  
Correctly specify the character string displayed in the "show" command.  
encrypted  
Specify the encrypted authentication password  
Specify it when setting the encrypted authentication password in <password>.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set the authentication information (authentication password) for authentication protocol.  
With the "show" command, the encrypted authentication password is displayed together  
with "encrypted".  
Default  
It is assumed that no authentication information (password) is specified.  
AAA Information Settings  
245  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.13.2.3 aaa user user-role  
Function  
Sets user privilege class.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
aaa [<group_id>] user [<number>] user-role <class>  
Options  
<group_id>  
Group ID  
Set group IDs using a base 10 sequential serial number.  
Default is 0.  
<number>  
AAA User ID  
Serial number within the group, expressed as a base 10 value.  
Default is 0.  
<class>  
Sets privilege class.  
administrator  
Sets privilege class to administrator class.  
user  
Sets privilege class to user class.  
none  
No privilege class specified.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
When used for login user information, sets user privilege class.  
If unset, privilege class is unspecified.  
AAA Information Settings  
246  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.13.3 RADIUS Information Settings  
This section explains about the commands related to RADIUS information.  
5.13.3.1 aaa radius service  
Function  
Set the RADIUS service.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
aaa [<group_id>] radius service <service> [<type>]  
Options  
<group_id>  
Group ID  
Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.  
The default is 0.  
<service>  
client  
Use it as the RADIUS client function.  
off  
Do not use the RADIUS function.  
<type>  
This parameter is available when "client" is specified in<service>.  
auth  
Enable the RADIUS authentication function.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set the RADIUS function used for the local device.  
It is assumed that the RADIUS authentication function is not used.  
aaa [<group_id>] radius service off  
AAA Information Settings  
247  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.13.3.2 aaa radius auth source  
Function  
Set the local IP address of the RADIUS authentication device.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
aaa [<group_id>] radius auth source <address>  
Options  
<group_id>  
Group ID  
Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.  
<address>  
Local IP address  
Specify the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the remote RADIUS authentication device.  
The allowable range is as follows:  
- IPv4  
1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254  
128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254  
192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254  
- IPv6  
::2 to fe7f:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff  
fec0:: to feff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set the IP address of the local RADIUS authentication device.  
When using this device as a RADIUS authentication client, set the local IP address used  
for communication with the RADIUS authentication server.  
Default  
It is assumed that the local IP address used for communication with the remote RADIUS  
authentication device is automatically selected.  
AAA Information Settings  
248  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.13.3.3 aaa radius auth message-authenticator  
Function  
Set the Message-Authenticator.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
aaa [<group_id>] radius auth message-authenticator <mode>  
Options  
<group_id>  
Group ID  
Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.  
<mode>  
off  
Disable Message-Authenticator.  
on  
Enable Message-Authenticator.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set whether to enable Message-Authenticator for authentication.  
For EEE802.1x authentication, enable Message-Authenticator regardless of this setting.  
This command is available only for authentication request messages in this device.  
Default  
Disable Message-Authenticator.  
aaa [<group_id>] radius auth message-authenticator off  
AAA Information Settings  
249  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.13.3.4 aaa radius client server-info auth secret  
Function  
Set the shared key (RADIUS secret) for the RADIUS authentication server.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
aaa [<group_id>] radius client server-info auth [<number>] secret <secret> [encrypted]  
Options  
<group_id>  
Group ID  
Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.  
The default is 0.  
<number>  
Server definition number  
Specify the definition number of the remote device with a decimal value.  
The default is 0.  
<secret>  
Shared key (RADIUS secret)  
Specify the shared key (RADIUS secret), which has been determined between this  
device and the RADIUS authentication server, using up to 64 characters from 0x21,  
0x23 to 0x7e ASCII set.  
Encrypted shared-key (RADIUS secret)  
Specify the encrypted shared-key (RARIUS secret) together with "encrypted" to be  
displayed with the "show" command.  
encrypted  
Specify the encrypted shared-key (RADIUS secret)  
Specify it when setting the encrypted shared-key (RADIUS secret) in <secret>.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set the shared key (RADIUS secret) used between this device and RADIUS  
authentication server.  
With the "show" command, the encrypted shared-key (RADIUS secret) is displayed  
together with "encrypted".  
Default  
It is assumed that the shared key (RADIUS secret) is not set.  
AAA Information Settings  
250  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.13.3.5 aaa radius client server-info auth address  
Function  
Set the IP address of the remote RADIUS authentication server.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
aaa [<group_id>] radius client server-info auth [<number>] address <address>  
Options  
<group_id>  
Group ID  
Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.  
<number>  
Server definition number  
Specify the definition number of the remote device with a decimal value.  
The default is 0.  
<address>  
Remote IP address  
Specify the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the remote RADIUS authentication device.  
The allowable range is as follows:  
- IPv4  
1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254  
128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254  
192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254  
- IPv6  
::2 to fe7f:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff  
fec0:: to feff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set the IP address of the RADIUS authentication server that communicates with this  
device.  
Multiple servers cannot be specified.  
Default  
The IP address of the remote RADIUS authentication device is not set. Be sure to set this  
command when using the RADIUS authentication function.  
AAA Information Settings  
251  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.13.3.6 aaa radius client server-info auth port  
Function  
Specify UDP port of the authentication server (the old RFC specifications compatible).  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
aaa [<group_id>] radius client server-info auth [<number>] port <port>  
Options  
<group_id>  
Group ID  
Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.  
<number>  
Server definition number  
Specify the definition number of the remote device with a decimal value.  
The default is 0.  
<port>  
1812  
The UDP port number that has been assigned to the RADIUS authentication server in  
the latest RFC specifications.  
1645  
The UDP port number that has been assigned to the RADIUS authentication server in  
the old RFC specifications.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set the UDP port number of the RADIUS authentication server for which a RADIUS  
authentication client requests authentication.  
If the RADIUS authentication server for which the authentication is requested is installed  
with a UDP port based on the old RFC specifications, set the port number to 1645.  
Default  
It is assumed that the UDP port number of the RADIUS accounting server is set to 1812.  
aaa radius client server-info auth port 1812  
AAA Information Settings  
252  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.13.3.7 aaa radius client server-info auth deadtime  
Function  
Set a recovery standby time.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
aaa [<group_id>] radius client server-info auth [<number>] deadtime <deadtime>  
Options  
<group_id>  
Group ID  
Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.  
<number>  
Server definition number  
Specify the definition number of the remote device with a decimal value.  
The default is 0.  
<deadtime>  
Recovery standby time  
Specify a time period required to automatically restore the RADIUS server to the alive  
state after it was placed into the dead state.  
The unit shall be d (day), h (hour), m (minute), or s (second).  
The allowable range is as follows:  
0 to 86400 (seconds):  
Specifying "0s" will not automatically restore the RADIUS server to the alive state.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
If the RADIUS server does not respond after the response wait time set in the "aaa radius  
client retry" command lapsed, it will be placed in the dead state and set to the lowest  
priority. Once the RADIUS server is placed in the dead state, it will remain disabled as  
long as an alive server is active. Set a wait time to automatically recover the server from  
the dead state to the alive state according to the priority setting.  
To recover from the dead state to the alive state, one of the following conditions must be  
satisfied.  
When the set time has elapsed:  
When a response has been returned from the RADIUS server in the dead state, to  
which some packets were sent, after all the available servers were placed into the dead  
state; or  
When the dead state has been manually recovered with the "radius recovery"  
command.  
Default  
It is assumed that the server is not recovered automatically.  
aaa radius client server-info auth deadtime 0s  
AAA Information Settings  
253  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.13.3.8 aaa radius client server-info auth priority  
Function  
Set the priority.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
aaa [<group_id>] radius client server-info auth [<number>] priority <priority>  
Options  
<group_id>  
Group ID  
Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.  
<number>  
Server definition number  
Specify the definition number of the remote device with a decimal value.  
The default is 0.  
<priority>  
Priority  
Specify the priority required to enable the RADIUS server in the same group.  
A smaller value has a higher priority, where "0" is assumed to be the highest priority  
level and "255" to be the lowest priority level.  
0 to 255:  
Specifying "255" will always place the RADIUS server into the dead state.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Specify the priority used to determine the RADIUS server for accounting among multiple  
RADIUS servers in the same group. A RADIUS server with the highest priority, which is  
not in the dead state, is used in the same group. If there are multiple RADIUS servers  
which have the highest priority, the target RADIUS server will be determined randomly.  
Default  
It is assumed that the highest priority has been specified.  
aaa radius client server-info auth priority 0  
AAA Information Settings  
254  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.13.3.9 aaa radius client server-info auth source  
Function  
Set the local IP address.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
aaa [<group_id>] radius client server-info auth [<number>] source <address>  
Options  
<group_id>  
Group ID  
Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.  
<number>  
Server definition number  
Specify the definition number of the remote device with a decimal value.  
The default is 0.  
<address>  
Local IP address  
Specify the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the local RADIUS authentication server.  
The allowable range is as follows:  
- IPv4  
1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254  
128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254  
192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254  
- IPv6  
::2 to fe7f:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff  
fec0:: to feff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set the IP address of the local RADIUS authentication device. The IP address setting of  
this definition supersedes that of the local RADIUS authentication device set by "aaa  
radius auth source".  
Default  
It is assumed that the IP address setting of the local RADIUS authentication device set by  
"aaa radius auth source" is applied.  
AAA Information Settings  
255  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.13.3.10 aaa radius client retry  
Function  
Set a RADIUS packet retry count and a transmission interval.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
aaa [<group_id>] radius client retry <interval> <retry>  
Options  
<group_id>  
Group ID  
Specify a group ID with a serial decimal value.  
<interval>  
Transmission interval  
Set a packet transmission interval when the RADIUS server returns no response.  
The allowable range is as follows:  
1 to 10 (seconds)  
<retry>  
Retry count value  
Set a packet retry count value when the RADIUS server returns no response.  
The allowable range is as follows:  
1 to 10 (times)  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set a number of times for retransmission and a transmission interval for packet when no  
response has been returned from the RADIUS server.  
The time period to wait for a response from the server is transmission interval x (number  
of transmission + 1) seconds.  
Default  
Operate assuming that the transmission interval is 5 seconds and the number of times for  
retransmission is 2.  
In this case, the time period to wait for a response from the server is 15 seconds after the  
first packet transmission was completed.  
aaa 0 client radius retry 5 2  
5.13.3.11 aaa radius client security  
Function  
Set security Level when RADIUS server doesn’t respond  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
aaa [<group_id>] radius client security <level>  
Options  
<group_id>  
Group ID  
Specify group ID with a decimal value.  
<level>  
high  
Set security level to high  
normal  
Set security level to normal  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set security Level when RADIUS server doesn’t respond  
aaa <group_id> client radius security high  
AAA Information Settings  
256  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.14 Password Information  
This section explains about password information.  
5.14.1 password format  
Function  
Sets format for encrypted password strings.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
password format <format>  
Options  
<format>  
Format for encrypted password strings  
common  
Common password format  
Encrypted password strings that can be used by other devices.  
unique  
Device-specific password format  
Encrypted password strings that can only be used by this device.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
When plain text passwords are set in the configuration they are converted to encrypted  
password strings. When the show or save command is executed, encrypted passwords  
are displayed or stored with the word "encrypted" appended.  
This command configures the format in which encrypted password strings are shown and  
stored. This setting applies to all passwords in the configuration.  
This command takes effect immediately upon configuration.  
If the Common option is set, password strings will be encrypted in the same common  
password format for all devices. If a device is replaced due to failure or other  
circumstances, a configuration that has been saved using the common password format  
can be restored to the new device after replacement. While the common option is in  
effect, passwords may be set in plain text or in the common password format. Passwords  
may not be set in a device-specific format.  
If the unique option is set, encrypted password strings will be in a device-specific  
password format, unique to each device. A configuration shown or stored using a device-  
specific password format can only be set or restored to that specific device. If the device  
is replaced due to failure or other circumstances, the configuration saved in the device-  
specific password format cannot be restored, so please be sure to reset the new device  
with plain text passwords after replacement. While the unique option is in effect,  
passwords may be set in plain text, the common password format, or the device-specific  
password format displayed on the device.  
If the unique option is set on devices implementing Trusted Platform Module (TPM), the  
device-specific password format will use the TPM chip. In addition, when the unique  
option is set, a check is run to see if the TPM chip is working properly, and if a hardware  
error is detected the message below is output and the option is set to common.  
Caution  
If set to unique, this setting cannot be re-set to common or canceled. If you wish to reset  
this setting to common, run the reset clear command to restore to factory settings, then  
re-set the configuration.  
When the unique option has been set, all preexisting passwords will be converted to the  
device-specific password format, displayed and saved.  
Password Information  
257  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Default  
If unset, the common setting will be the default.  
password format common  
5.14.2 password admin set  
Function  
Set an administrator password.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
password admin set [<password> [encrypted]]  
Options  
<password>  
Password  
Specify a password using up to 64 characters from, 0x21,0x23 to 0x3e,0x40 to 0x7e  
ASCII set.  
Encrypted password  
Specify the encrypted password together with "encrypted" to be displayed with the  
Correctly specify the character string displayed in the "show candidate-config", "show  
encrypted  
Specify the encrypted password  
Specify it when setting the encrypted password in <password>.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set a password for the administrator to login this device. When changing to the  
administrator with the "admin" command, the administrator password set in this  
command is required.  
To make the password secure, it shall be set with eight or more alphanumeric characters  
and symbols mixed.  
If the <password> option is not set, the password is required interactivery.  
This command becomes valid just after it is set.  
Entering "admin" for the user name and this password for "password" makes it possible  
to login as the admin class and also to use admin-class commands.  
Caution  
Be sure to set an administrator password. When not setting the administrator password,  
you can login without entering any password.  
When not setting the administrator password, you can't use AAA user information (see  
"aaa user id" command) and user information in RADIUS-server.  
When setting a password that consists of seven or fewer characters, only alphabetic  
characters, or only numeric characters, and also when deleting a setting, the setting and  
the deletion are performed, but a warning message will be displayed notifying that the  
password is vulnerable.  
commands, the encrypted password is displayed together with "encrypted".  
Message  
Password:  
The <password> option is not set.  
Type the password for administrator interactivery.  
Password Information  
258  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Retype password:  
The <password> option is not set.  
Retype the password for administrator interactivery.  
<WARNING> weak admin password: set the password  
The administrator password is not set.  
Set an administrator password.  
<WARNING> weak admin password: contain at least 8 characters  
The administrator password is seven or fewer characters in length.  
Set an administrator password with eight or more characters.  
<WARNING> weak admin password: contain a different kind of character  
The administrator password consists of only alphabetic characters or only numeric  
characters.  
Set an administrator password with alphanumeric characters and symbols mixed.  
This message is also displayed at login or execution of the "admin", "load", or "discard"  
command.  
Default  
An administrator password is not set.  
Password Information  
259  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.14.3 password user set  
Function  
Set a general user password.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
password user set <password> [encrypted]  
Options  
<password>  
Password  
Specify a password using up to 64 characters from 0x21, 0x23 to 0x7e ASCII set.  
Encrypted password  
Specify the encrypted password together with "encrypted" to be displayed with the  
Correctly specify the character string displayed in the "show candidate-config", "show  
encrypted  
Specify the encrypted password  
Specify it when setting the encrypted password in <password>.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set a password for general users to login this device.  
To make the password secure, it shall be set with eight or more alphanumeric characters  
and symbols mixed.  
This command becomes valid just after it is set.  
Entering "admin" for the user name and this password for "password" makes it possible  
to login as the user class and also to use user-class commands.  
Caution  
When not setting the user password, you cannot login as the user class. When setting a  
password that consists of seven or fewer characters, only alphabetic characters, or only  
numeric characters, and also when deleting a setting, the setting and the deletion are  
performed, but a warning message will be displayed notifying that the password is  
vulnerable.  
At ftp connection, a user password cannot be used for login.  
If you login with a user password, the contents that were set at logout or execution of the  
"admin" command will be discarded without storing the contents that were set with the  
"terminal" or "alias" command.  
With the "show logging" command, history numbers are discontinuous without displaying  
the commands that were executed by the administrator.  
With the "show candidate-config", "show running-config", and "show startup-config"  
commands, the encrypted password is displayed together with "encrypted".  
Message  
<WARNING> weak user password: contain at least 8 characters  
The user password is seven or fewer characters in length.  
Set a user password with eight or more characters.  
<WARNING> weak user password: contain a different kind of character  
The user password consists of only alphabetic characters or only numeric characters.  
Set a user password with alphanumeric characters and symbols mixed.  
This message is also displayed at login or execution of the "admin", "load", or "discard"  
command.  
Default  
A general user password is not set.  
Password Information  
260  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.14.4 password aaa  
Function  
Set AAA information of login user  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
password aaa <group_id>  
Options  
<group_id>  
AAA Group ID  
Specify AAA group ID with a decimal value  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Specify AAA group ID refered when logging in  
When using RADIUS server  
Specify Filter-ID attribute registered in RADIUS server  
"administrator" is admin class, "user" is user class  
When using local user information  
It is diced by class (aaa user user-role) registered in AAA information  
Default  
N/A  
5.14.5 password authtype  
Function  
Set authentication protocol for login user authentication  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
password authtype <authtype>  
Options  
<authtype>  
chap_md5  
Use MD5-CHAP as authentication protocol  
pap  
Use PAP as authentication protocol  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set authentication protocol for login user authentication  
It is assumed to use MD5-CHAP as authentication protocol.  
password authtype chap_md5  
Password Information  
261  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15 Device Information Settings  
This section explains about device information settings.  
5.15.1 SNMP Information  
This section explains about the commands related to SNMP information.  
5.15.1.1 snmp service  
Function  
Set the SNMP agent and SNMP trap functions.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
snmp service <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
on  
Enable SNMP agent and SNMP trap functions.  
off  
Disable SNMP agent and SNMP trap functions.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set whether to enable SNMP agent and SNMP trap functions.  
It is assumed that the SNMP agent function is stopped.  
snmp service off  
5.15.1.2 snmp agent contact  
Function  
Set the administrator name for the SNMP agent function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
snmp agent contact <syscontact>  
Options  
<syscontact>  
Administrator name (sysContact value)  
Specify the MIB variable, sysContact, which indicates an administrator name of this  
device, with up to 40 characters.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set the administrator name for the SNMP agent function.  
It is assumed that the administrator name is not set.  
Device Information Settings  
262  
               
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.1.3 snmp agent sysname  
Function  
Set the equipment name for the SNMP agent function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
snmp agent sysname <sysname>  
Options  
<sysname>  
Equipment name (sysName value)  
Specify the MIB variable, sysName, which indicates an equipment name of this device,  
with up to 32 characters.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set the equipment name for the SNMP agent function.  
It is assumed that the equipment name is not set.  
5.15.1.4 snmp agent location  
Function  
Set where to install the equipment for the SNMP agent function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
snmp agent location <syslocation>  
Options  
<syslocation>  
Location to install the equipment in (sysLocation value)  
Specify the MIB variable, sysLocation, which indicates where to install this device, with  
up to 72 characters.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set where to install the equipment for the SNMP agent function.  
It is assumed that the location to install the equipment is not set.  
Device Information Settings  
263  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.1.5 snmp agent address  
Function  
Set the SNMP agent address.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
snmp agent address <address>  
Options  
<address>  
Agent address  
Set the agent address of this device.  
Specifying 0.0.0.0 will delete the SNMP agent address.  
The allowable range is as follows:  
1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254  
128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254  
192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set the SNMP agent address. This setting is also used for the local address at trap  
transmission.  
Make sure to set it when using the SNMP agent function.  
Default  
It is assumed that the agent address is not set. The local IP address of trap packet is  
undefined.  
5.15.1.6 snmp agent engineid  
Function  
Set a SNMP engine ID name.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
snmp agent engineid <engineID>  
Options  
<engineID>  
SNMP engine ID  
Specify a SNMP engine ID with up to 27 characters.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set a SNMP engine ID under SNMPv3. In this device, the SNMP engine ID is as follows.  
When setting this command;  
Octets 1 to 5: 0x800000d304 fixed  
Octet 6 and above: Engine ID set in this command  
When not setting this command;  
Octets 1 to 5: 0x800000d304 fixed  
Octet 6 and above: Random value  
Default  
A SNMP engine ID is generated automatically.  
Device Information Settings  
264  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.1.7 snmp manager  
Function  
Set the SNMP host information.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
snmp manager <manager_number> <address> <community> <trap> [<write>]  
Options  
<manager_number>  
SNMP host definition number  
Specify a serial number of SNMP host definition with a decimal value from 0 to 7.  
<address>  
Access permission/trap sending address  
Specify an IP address to permit access and to send a trap to, in the  
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX format, where "XXX" indicates a 3-digit decimal value.  
Specifying 0.0.0.0 will permit access by all hosts without trap sending.  
The allowable range is as follows:  
1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254  
128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254  
192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254  
<community>  
Specify the community name.  
Community name  
Specify the community name for trap sending with up to 32 characters.  
public  
Specify it when communicating with any of the SNMP managers.  
<trap>  
Specify whether or not to perform trap transmission.  
off  
Specify it when not performing trap transmission.  
v1  
Specify it when performing SNMPv1 trap transmission.  
v2c  
Specify it when performing SNMPv2 trap transmission.  
<write>  
Specify whether or not to permit writing from the SNMP manager.  
enable  
Specify it when enabling writing from the SNMP manager.  
disable  
Specify it when disabling writing from the SNMP manager.  
The default is "disable".  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Default  
Set the SNMP host information.  
It is assumed that no SNMP host information is set.  
Device Information Settings  
265  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.1.8 snmp trap coldstart  
Function  
Set the coldStart trap.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
snmp trap coldstart <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
Specify whether to enable or disable trapping.  
enable  
Enable trapping.  
disable  
Disable trapping.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set whether to enable or disable the coldStart trap.  
It is assumed that the coldStart trap is enabled.  
snmp trap coldstart enable  
5.15.1.9 snmp trap linkdown  
Function  
Set the linkDown trap.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
snmp trap linkdown <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
Specify whether to enable or disable trapping.  
enable  
Enable trapping.  
disable  
Disable trapping.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set whether to enable or disable the linkDown trap.  
It is assumed that the linkDown trap is enabled.  
snmp trap linkdown enable  
Device Information Settings  
266  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.1.10 snmp trap linkup  
Function  
Set the linkUp trap.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
snmp trap linkup <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
Specify whether to enable or disable trapping.  
enable  
Enable trapping.  
disable  
Disable trapping.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set whether to enable or disable the linkUp trap.  
It is assumed that the linkUp trap is enabled.  
snmp trap linkup enable  
5.15.1.11 snmp trap authfail  
Function  
Set the authenticationFailure trap.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
snmp trap authfail <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
Specify whether to enable or disable trapping.  
enable  
Enable trapping.  
disable  
Disable trapping.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set whether to enable or disable the authenticationFailure trap.  
It is assumed that the authenticationFailure trap is enabled.  
snmp trap authfail enable  
Device Information Settings  
267  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.1.12 snmp trap newroot  
Function  
Set the newRoot trap.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
snmp trap newroot <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
Specify whether to enable or disable trapping.  
enable  
Enable trapping.  
disable  
Disable trapping.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set whether to enable or disable the newRoot trap.  
It is assumed that the newRoot trap is enabled.  
snmp trap newroot enable  
5.15.1.13 snmp trap topologychange  
Function  
Set the topologyChange trap.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
snmp trap topologychange <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
Specify whether to enable or disable trapping.  
enable  
Enable trapping.  
disable  
Disable trapping.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set whether to enable or disable the topologyChange trap.  
It is assumed that the topologyChange trap is enabled.  
snmp trap topologychange enable  
Device Information Settings  
268  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.1.14 snmp trap noserror  
Function  
Set the nosError trap.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
snmp trap noserror <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
Specify whether to enable or disable trapping.  
enable  
Enable trapping.  
disable  
Disable trapping.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set whether to enable or disable the nosError trap.  
It is assumed that the nosError trap is enabled.  
snmp trap noserror enable  
5.15.1.15 snmp trap lldpremtableschange  
Function  
Set lldpRemTablesChange trap  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
snmp trap lldpremtableschange <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
Set trap mode  
enable  
Enable trap  
disable  
Disable trap  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set whether to enable or not lldpRemTablesChange tra  
It is assumed that the lldpRemTablesChange trap is enabled.  
snmp trap lldpremtableschange enable  
Device Information Settings  
269  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.1.16 snmp rmon  
Function  
Set the RMON function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
snmp rmon <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
Specify whether to enable or disable the RMON function.  
on  
Use the RMON function.  
off  
Do not use the RMON function.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set whether to use the RMON function. When not using this function, the RMON-MIB  
cannot be obtained.  
Default  
It is assumed that the RMON function is used.  
snmp rmon on  
5.15.1.17 snmp user name  
Function  
Set a SNMP user name.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
snmp user [<number>] name <user_name>  
Options  
<number>  
User definition number  
Specify a user definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 7.  
The default is 0.  
<user_name>  
SNMP user name  
Specify a SNMP user name with up to 32 characters.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set a SNMP user name under SNMPv3. Be sure to set it when using the SNMPv3  
function.  
Default  
It is assumed that a SNMP user name is not set.  
Device Information Settings  
270  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.1.18 snmp user address  
Function  
Set a SNMP host address.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
snmp user [<number>] address [<addr_number>] <address>  
Options  
<number>  
User definition number  
Specify a user definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 7.  
The default is 0.  
<addr_number>  
SNMP host definition number  
Specify a SNMP host definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 7.  
The default is 0.  
<address>  
SNMP host address  
Specify an IP address of the host, which permits SNMPv3 access, in the  
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX format, where "XXX" indicates a 3-digit decimal value.  
The allowable range is as follows:  
1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254  
128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254  
192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set a SNMP host address under SNMPv3. Up to eight addresses can be defined for this  
device, including ones set in the "snmp user notification" command.  
Default  
It is assumed that no SNMP host address is set.  
Device Information Settings  
271  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.1.19 snmp user notification  
Function  
Set a trap notification host address.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
snmp user [<number>] notification [<addr_number>] <address>  
Options  
<number>  
User definition number  
Specify a user definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 7.  
The default is 0.  
<addr_number>  
Trap notification host definition number  
Specify a trap notification host definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 7.  
The default is 0.  
<address>  
Trap notification host address  
Specify an IP address of the host, which is subject to trap notification, in the  
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX format, where "XXX" indicates a 3-digit decimal value.  
The allowable range is as follows:  
1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254  
128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254  
192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set a trap notification host address under SNMPv3. Up to eight addresses can be  
defined for this device, including the ones set in the "snmp user address" command.  
Default  
It is assumed that no trap notification host address is set.  
Device Information Settings  
272  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.1.20 snmp user auth  
Function  
Set the authentication protocol  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
snmp user [<number>] auth <protocol> [<password> [encrypted]]  
Options  
<number>  
User definition number  
Specify the user definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 7.  
The default is 0  
<protocol>  
Specify the authentication protocol  
none  
Specify it when unusing authentication protocol.  
md5  
Specify it when using MD5(HMAC-MD5-96)  
sha  
Specify it when using SHA (HMAC-SHA-96)  
<password>  
Set the authentication password  
In the case of specifying unencryption password  
Authentication Protocol  
Password length  
md5  
8-16 characters  
8-20 characters  
sha1  
In the case of specifying encryption password  
Specify the encrypted authentication password shown by show command with  
"encrypted"  
Specify the characters which is shown by show command  
encrypted  
Specify encrypted authentication password  
Specify it when specifying encrypted authentication password in <password>  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set authentication protocol for SNMPv3  
It is assumed that the authentication protocol is not use.  
snmp user <number> auth none  
Device Information Settings  
273  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.1.21 snmp user priv  
Function  
Set encryption protocol  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
snmp user [<number>] priv <protocol> [<password> [encrypted]]  
Options  
<number>  
User definition number  
Specify the user definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 7.  
The default is 0  
<protocol>  
Specify the encryption protocol  
none  
Specify it when unusing encryption protocol.  
des  
Specify when using DES (CBC-DES) as encryption protocol  
<password>  
Specify encrypted password  
In the case of specifying unencryption password  
Encryption Protocol  
Password length  
des  
8 to 16 characters  
In the case of specifying encryption password  
Specify the encrypted encryption password shown by show command with "encrypted"  
Specify the characters which is shown by show command  
encrypted  
Specify encrypted encryption password  
Specify it when specifying encrypted authentication password in <password>  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set the encryption protocol for SNMPv3  
Specify authentication protocol when using encryption protocol  
It is assumed that encryption protocol is not use.  
Default  
snmp user <number> priv none  
Device Information Settings  
274  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.1.22 snmp user write  
Function  
Set the MIB write-enable view.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
snmp user [<number>] write <view_name>  
Options  
<number>  
User definition number  
Specify a user definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 7.  
The default is 0.  
<view_name>  
Specify the view name that indicates whether or not to permit to write in the write enabled  
MIB.  
none  
Specify it when not permitting all.  
all  
Specify it when permitting all.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Specify the MIB write enabled view name under SNMPv3.  
It is assumed that nothing is permitted.  
Device Information Settings  
275  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.1.23 snmp user read  
Function  
Sets MIB read permission view.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
snmp user [<number>] read <access> [<view_number>]  
Options  
<number>  
User ID  
User ID expressed as a base 10 value from 0 to 7. Default is 0.  
<access>  
Sets MIB read permission view.  
all  
Read permission is granted on all supported MIBs.  
none  
MIB read permission is not granted.  
view  
Use the MIB view information set with the "snmp view subtree" command.  
<view_number>  
Specifies the "snmp view subtree" command's MIB view ID number, expressed as a base  
10 value from 0 to 7. The view ID can only be set when view is specified for the <access>  
option.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Sets MIB read permission view in SNMPv3.  
If a "snmp view subtree" command definition corresponding to the view ID set does not  
exist, MIB read permission is not granted.  
Default  
If unset, read permission is granted on all supported MIBs.  
snmp user <number> read all  
Device Information Settings  
276  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.1.24 snmp user notify  
Function  
Sets trap notification permission view.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
snmp user [<number>] notify <access> [<view_number>]  
Options  
<number>  
User ID  
User ID expressed as a base 10 value from 0 to 7. Default is 0.  
<access>  
Indicates trap notification permission view.  
all  
Permission is granted for all supported trap notifications.  
none  
Trap notification permission is not granted.  
view  
Use the MIB view information set with the "snmp view subtree" command.  
<view_number>  
Specifies the "snmp view subtree" command's MIB view ID number, expressed as a base  
10 value from 0 to 7. The view ID can only be set when view is specified for the <access>  
option.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Sets trap notification permission view in SNMPv3.  
If a "snmp view subtree" command definition corresponding to the view ID set does not  
exist, trap notification permission is not granted.  
Default  
If unset, trap notification permission is granted on all supported trap notifications.  
snmp user <number> notify all  
Device Information Settings  
277  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.1.25 snmp view subtree  
Function  
SNMP MIB view information  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
snmp view [<view_number>] subtree [<subtree_number>] <view_type> <subtree_name>  
Options  
<view_number>  
View definition number  
Specify the view definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 7  
The default is 0.  
<subtree_number>  
Subtree definition number  
Specify the subtree definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 15  
The default is 0  
<view_type>  
Specify whether including <subtree_name> in MIB view or not  
include  
Include <subtree_name> in MIB view  
exclude  
Exclude <subtree_name> from MIB view  
<subtree_name>  
Subtree name  
Specify subtree name  
Subtree  
MIB Group name  
name Object ID  
Remark  
iso  
1
internet  
mib2  
1.3.6.1  
1.3.6.1.2.1  
system  
interfaces  
at  
1.3.6.1.2.1.1  
1.3.6.1.2.1.2  
1.3.6.1.2.1.3  
1.3.6.1.2.1.4  
1.3.6.1.2.1.5  
1.3.6.1.2.1.6  
1.3.6.1.2.1.7  
1.3.6.1.2.1.10  
1.3.6.1.2.1.11  
1.3.6.1.2.1.16  
1.3.6.1.2.1.17  
1.3.6.1.2.1.31  
1.3.6.1.2.1.67  
1.3.6.1.4.1  
ip  
icmp  
tcp  
udp  
transmission  
snmp  
rmon  
dot1dBridge  
ifMIB  
radiusMIB  
enterprises  
lldpMIB  
1.0.8802.1.1.2  
Device Information Settings  
278  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Subtree  
name Object ID  
Remark  
Trap name  
coldstart  
linkdown  
linkup  
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.1  
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3  
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4  
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.5  
1.3.6.1.2.1.17.0.1  
authfail  
newroot  
topologychange  
noserror  
1.3.6.1.2.1.17.0.2  
1.3.6.1.4.1.211.1.127.1.0.1  
1.0.8802.1.1.2.0.0.1  
lldpremtableschange  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set MIB view information in SNMPv3  
N/A  
Device Information Settings  
279  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.2 System Log Information  
This section explains about the commands related to system log information.  
5.15.2.1 syslog server address  
Function  
Set the server IP address that receives system log information.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
syslog server <number> address <address>  
Options  
<number>  
Definition number  
Specify the definition number of the server that receives system log information  
(message) with a decimal value from 0 to 2.  
<address>  
IP address  
Specify the IP address of the server that receives system log information (message).  
The allowable range is as follows:  
1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254  
128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254  
192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set the server IP address that receives system log information (message).  
The following describes the procedure for outputting system log information.  
1) Send information to a server the host with the IP address set in syslog server <address>.  
2) Display information with the "show logging syslog" command.  
Caution  
Default  
If STP is used, it takes a long time for transmission to be enabled after device startup.  
During this time, some messages are discarded before reaching the server.  
When transferring system logs to a Linux server, be sure to enable remote logging by  
using the "-syslogd -r" command or editing the syslog init file to include the "-r" qualifier.  
It is assumed that the server that receives system log information is not specified.  
Device Information Settings  
280  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.2.2 syslog server pri  
Function  
Set the severity level for syslog information sent to the syslog servers.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
syslog server <number> pri <mode>  
Options  
<number>  
Definition number  
Specify the definition number of the server that receives system log information  
(message) with a decimal value from 0 to 2.  
<mode>  
Priority  
Specify the severity level for syslog output. When specifying multiple parameters,  
separate them with commas (,).  
- error  
Specifies a severity level of LOG_ERROR events will be output to the syslog servers.  
- warn  
Specifies a severity level of LOG_WARNING will be output to the syslog servers.  
- notice  
Specifies a severity level of LOG_NOTICE will be output to the syslog servers.  
- info  
Specifies a severity of LOG_INFO will be output to the syslog servers.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Specify severity levels to output to each syslog server from among those specified by  
Default  
It is assumed that "error", "warn" and "info" are specified.  
Device Information Settings  
281  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.2.3 syslog pri  
Function  
Set the severity level output to the switch syslog.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
syslog pri <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
Priority  
Specify the priority to output system log information from the following. When  
specifying multiple numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
- error  
Specifies a severity level of LOG_ERROR will be output to the switch syslog.  
- warn  
Specifies a severity level of LOG_WARNING will be output to the switch syslog.  
- notice  
Specifies a severity level of LOG_NOTICE will be output to the switch syslog.  
- info  
Specifies a severity level of LOG_INFO will be output to the switch syslog.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Specify the severity level output to the switch syslog.  
It is assumed that "error", "warn" and "info" are specified.  
5.15.2.4 syslog facility  
Function  
Set a system log information facility.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
syslog facility <num>  
Options  
<num>  
Facility  
Set a system log information facility with a decimal value from 0 to 23.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Specify a system log information facility.  
It is assumed that 0 has been specified.  
syslog facility 0  
Device Information Settings  
282  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.2.5 syslog security  
Function  
Set the security to output the system log information.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
syslog security <securetype>  
Options  
<securetype>  
Security type  
Select one of the followings to output the security log information.  
When specifying multiples, separate them with commas (,).  
proxydns : Specify it when the Proxy DNS module is subject to output.  
none  
: Specify it when all modules are out of subject to output.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Specify the security used to output the system log information.  
It is assumed all options have been specified.  
syslog security proxydns  
5.15.2.6 syslog dupcut  
Function  
Set the duplicated message output of system log information.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
syslog dupcut <cut>  
Options  
<cut>  
yes  
Do not output the previous output message if duplicated.  
no  
Output all messages without checking for duplication.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Specify whether to output a message, which was duplicated with the previously output  
message, to the system log.  
Default  
It is assumed that duplication check is not performed.  
syslog dupcut no  
Device Information Settings  
283  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.2.7 syslog command-logging  
Function  
Set command execution history output of system log information  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
syslog command-logging <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
enable  
Output command execution history to system log  
disable  
Do not Output command execution history to system log  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Specify whether to output command history to system log  
It is assumed that the command execution history is not output to the system log.  
syslog command-logging disable  
5.15.2.8 syslog header  
Function  
Set the RFC3164 Header information of the system log information.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
syslog header <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
enable  
ADD the RFC3164 Header to the system log information sent to the syslog servers.  
disable  
Do not add the RFC3164 Header to the system log information sent to the syslog  
servers.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Specify whether to add the RFC3164 Header to the system log information sent to the  
syslog servers.  
Default  
It is assumed that the RFC3164 Header is not added.  
syslog header disable  
Device Information Settings  
284  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.2.9 syslog source address  
Function  
Set the source IP address of the system log information.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
syslog source address <address>  
Options  
<address>  
Specify the source IPv4 address that is used for sending the system log information.  
The allowable range is as follows:  
1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254  
128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254  
192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Specify the source IPv4 address that is used for sending the system log information.  
If the IPv4 address is not set, the IPv4 address of the sending interface is used.  
Default  
It is assumed that use the IPv4 address of the sending interface in used.  
Device Information Settings  
285  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.3  
Automatic Time Setting Information  
This section explains about the commands related to automatic time setting information.  
5.15.3.1 time auto server  
Function  
Specify the IP address, protocol, and priority of server(s) that supply time information.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
time auto server <count> address <address> <protocol> [<interface>]  
Options  
<count>  
Priority  
Set the server priority with a decimal value from 0 to 3.  
A smaller value has a higher priority.  
<address>  
IPv4 address  
Specify the IPv4 address of the server that supplies time information.  
Specifying 0.0.0.0 will delete the set value.  
The allowable range is as follows:  
1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254  
128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254  
192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254  
224.0.0.1 to 239.255.255.254 (Multicast address)  
255.255.255.255 (Broadcast address)  
IPv6 address  
Specify the IPv6 address of the server that supplies time information.  
Specifying 0:0: 0 will delete the set value.  
The allowable range is as follows:  
::2 to fe7f:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff  
fec0:: to feff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff  
<protocol>  
Specify the desireded protocol.  
time  
Specify the TIME protocol (TCP).  
sntp  
Specify the simple NTP protocol (UDP).  
<interface>  
Specify the target interface.  
[Note]  
This option can be specified only when the <address> has been specified as an IPv4  
multicast address or IPv4 broadcast address and the <protocol> has been specified as  
sntp.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Specify the working parameters for the time information server(s).  
The switch clock is automatically synchronized to the time information server(s)  
specified.  
Default  
It is assumed that the time is not set automatically.  
Device Information Settings  
286  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.3.2 time auto interval  
Function  
Set an automatic setting interval of time information.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
time auto interval <time>  
Options  
<time>  
Specify the interval to set time information.  
start  
Specify when setting time information only once at device power-on or restart.  
Interval  
Specify the interval to set time information within the range of 0 second up to 10 days.  
The unit shall be d (day), h (hour), m (minute), or s (second).  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set an interval to automatically set the time.  
It is assumed that time information is set only once at device power-on or restart when  
using the time supply server.  
time auto interval start  
5.15.3.3 time zone  
Function  
Set the time zone of time information.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
time zone <offset>  
Options  
<offset>  
Difference  
Specify the time zone of this device.  
Specify the time differences from Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set the timezone.  
It is assumed that Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) is set for the time zone.  
time zone 0  
Device Information Settings  
287  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.3.4 time summer-time  
Function  
Sets summer time/daylight saving time.  
Use the no form to return to the default setup.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
time summer-time <start_day> <end_day> [<offset>]  
Options  
<start_day>  
Specifies the day/time to start Daylight Saving Time in any form of "Mm.w.d/hhmm,"  
"Jn/hhmm," or "n/hhmm."  
- Mm.w.d  
Specifies the day to start Daylight Saving Time in m, w, and d.  
Specify month for m (1 to 12), week for w (1 to 5), and the day of the week for d (0 to 6).  
w = 1 means the first week where d exists, and w = 5 means the last week.  
d = 0 means Sunday, d = 6 means Saturday.  
- Jn  
Specifies the day to start Daylight Saving Time in day-of-year (Julian day).  
In leap years, February 29th is not counted.  
Specify a number in the range of 1 to 365 for n.  
- n  
Specifies the day to start Daylight Saving Time in day-of-year.  
In leap years, February 29th is counted.  
Specify a number in the range of 1 to 366 for n.  
- hh  
Specifies the hour to start Daylight Saving Time.  
- mm  
Specifies the minute to start Daylight Saving Time.  
Specifies the following values, for the first day of each month in "Jn" specification and "n"  
specification.  
specification  
Month/Day  
January 1st  
Jn specification  
J1  
Common year  
Leap year  
1
1
February 1st  
March 1st  
J32  
32  
32  
J60  
60  
61  
April 1st  
J91  
91  
92  
May 1st  
J121  
J152  
J182  
J213  
J244  
J274  
J305  
J335  
121  
152  
182  
213  
244  
274  
305  
335  
122  
153  
183  
213  
245  
275  
306  
336  
June 1st  
July 1st  
August 1st  
September 1st  
October 1st  
November 1st  
December 1st  
<end_day>  
Specifies the day/time to end Daylight Saving Time.  
The description format is the same as <start_day>.  
Device Information Settings  
288  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
<offset>  
pecifies the time set forward during Daylight Saving Time in the form of "hhmm."  
- hh  
Specifies the hour set forward during Daylight Saving Time with a two-digit number.  
It can be set in the range of 00 to 23.  
- mm  
Specifies the minute set forward during Daylight Saving Time with a two-digit  
number.  
It can be set in the range of 00 to 59.  
"0000" can not set as <offset>.  
When this parameter is omitted, "0100" (an hour) is specified.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Sets summer time/daylight saving time.  
It is assumed that the daylight saving time is not set.  
Device Information Settings  
289  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.4 ProxyDNS Information  
This section explains about the commands related to proxyDNS information.  
5.15.4.1 proxydns domain  
Function  
Set the forward lookup conditions for proxy DNS.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
proxydns domain <count> <qtype> <qname> <address>/<mask> reject  
(Discard the request to forward)  
proxydns domain <count> <qtype> <qname> <address>/<mask> static <ipaddress>  
(Specify the fixed DNS server)  
Options  
<count>  
Destination definition number  
Specify a destination definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 49.  
The specified values are sorted and renumbered forward when setting was completed.  
If any destination definition with a same number exists, it will be inserted before the  
existing one.  
<qtype>  
Query type number  
Specify a decimal value from 1 to 11 or from 13 to 65535.  
The following shows some part of the query types.  
Name  
Number  
Description  
A
1
2
5
6
Host address  
NS  
An authoritative name server  
Canonical name for an alias  
Start of a zone of authority  
A domain name pointer  
Host information  
CNAME  
SOA  
PTR  
HINFO  
MX  
12  
13  
15  
33  
A mail exchanger  
SRV  
Service  
any  
Specify it for all types, excluding PTR (12).  
<qname>  
Host name  
Specify a host name used as a condition with up to 80 characters.  
For the host name, the following wild cards are usable.  
- * (Asterisk)  
This is considered to be an arbitrary character string of 0 character or more.  
- ? (Question mark)  
This is considered to be an arbitrary character.  
Device Information Settings  
290  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
For the host name, the following wild cards are usable.  
An execution example is given below.  
Execution example  
Matching Character String  
This is considered to match all of the following character strings.  
www.*.com  
www.testa.com  
www.test1.test.com  
*test*  
This is considered to match all of the following character strings.  
www.test.com  
test.com  
test.co.jp  
www.test?.com  
This is considered to match all of the following character strings.  
www.test1.com  
www.test2.com  
www.testA.com  
The host name is checked without case sensitivity.  
<address>/<mask>  
Specify the target source IPv4 address/number of mask bits.  
Source IPv4 address/number of mask bits (or mask value)  
Specify a combination of the target source IPv4 address and the number of mask bits.  
For the mask value, specify successive 1s following the most significant bit (MSB).  
any  
Specify it when targeting all addresses.  
The default is 0.0.0.0/0 (0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0).  
<ipaddress>  
DNS server IP address  
Specify the IPv4 address of the DNS server that forwards a request.  
The allowable range is as follows:  
1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254  
128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254  
192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set forward lookup conditions for proxy DNS. The explanation for each command is as  
follows.  
Discard the requirement for forwarding  
proxydns domain <count> <qtype> <qname> <address>/<mask> reject  
Set the filter that disables forwarding the specified DNS request.  
The host name to be specified in <qname> is available when limiting the access to the  
specified host (group) even if it is registered in the DNS database. A host name that  
has satisfied filtering conditions will be discarded.  
Specify static DNS server  
proxydns domain <count> <qtype> <qname> <address>/<mask> static  
Set the IP address to which the specified DNS request is to be forwarded.  
Default  
It is assumed that no forward lookup conditions for proxy DNS are set.  
Device Information Settings  
291  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.4.2 proxydns domain move  
Function  
Change the forward lookup conditions for proxy DNS.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
proxydns domain move <count> <new_count>  
Options  
<count>  
Destination definition number before changes  
Specify a destination definition number to change its order.  
<new_count>  
New destination definition number  
Specify a new order for <count>.  
If any definition with the same definition number exists, it will be inserted before the  
existing one.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Change the order of forward lookup conditions for proxy DNS.  
If a same definition number which has already existed is specified, it will be inserted  
before the specified definition.  
Device Information Settings  
292  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.4.3 proxydns address  
Function  
Set the reverse lookup conditions for proxy DNS.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
proxydns address <count> <address>/<mask> reject  
(Discard the request to forward)  
proxydns address <count> <address>/<mask> static <ipaddress>  
(Specify the fixed DNS server)  
Options  
<count>  
Destination definition number  
Specify the destination definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 49.  
The specified value is sorted and renumbered forward when setting was completed.  
If any destination definition with a same definition number exists, it will be inserted  
before the existing one.  
<address>/<mask>  
Specify the IPv4 address for reverse lookup and the number of mask bits.  
IPv4 address for reverse lookup/number of mask bits (or mask value)  
Specify a combination of the IPv4 address for reverse lookup and the number of mask  
bits.  
For the mask value, specify successive 1s following the most significant bit (MSB).  
any  
Specify it when all addresses are subject to reverse lookup.  
<ipaddress>  
DNS server IP address  
Specify the IPv4 address of the DNS server that forwards a request.  
The allowable range is as follows:  
1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254  
128.0.0.1 to 191.255.255.254  
192.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set the reverse lookup conditions for proxy DNS.  
The explanation for each command is as follows.  
Discard the requirement for forwarding  
proxydns address <count> <address>/<mask> reject  
Set the filter that disables forwarding the specified DNS request.  
The host name to be specified in <qname> is available when limiting the access to the  
specified host (group) even if it is registered in the DNS database. A host name that  
has satisfied filtering conditions will be discarded.  
Specify static DNS server  
proxydns address <count> <address>/<mask> static <ipaddress>  
Specify the IP address to which the specified DNS request is to be forwarded.  
The route leading to the destination is determined based on IP routing.  
Default  
It is assumed that no reverse lookup conditions for proxy DNS are set.  
Device Information Settings  
293  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.4.4 proxydns address move  
Function  
Change the reverse lookup conditions for proxy DNS.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
proxydns address move <count> <new_count>  
Options  
<count>  
Destination definition number before changes  
Specify a destination definition number to change its order.  
<new_count>  
New destination definition number  
Specify a new order for <count>.  
If any definition with the same definition number exists, it will be inserted before the  
existing one.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Change the order of reverse lookup conditions for proxy DNS.  
If a same destination definition number which has already existed is specified, it will be  
inserted before the specified definition.  
5.15.4.5 proxydns unicode  
Function  
Set the query packets for proxy DNS.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
proxydns unicode <action>  
Options  
<action>  
Specify whether or not to transmit packets.  
pass  
Specify it when transmitting the relevant packet.  
reject  
Specify it when discarding the relevant packet.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set whether or not to transmit a query packet that contains hidden characters in the  
query name (QNAME) of proxy DNS.  
Default  
It is assumed that the relevant packet is discarded.  
proxydns unicode reject  
Device Information Settings  
294  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.5 Host Database Information  
This section explains about the commands related to host database information.  
5.15.5.1 host name  
Function  
Set the host name of the host database information.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
host <number> name <name>  
Options  
<number>  
Definition number  
Specify the definition number of the host database information with a decimal value  
from 0 to 99.  
<name>  
Host name  
Specify the host name using up to 80 ASCII characters, which consist of alphanumeric  
characters, hyphens (-), and periods (.).  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set the name of the host connected under this device in the host database.  
This command is available from the simple DNS server function.  
Default  
It is assumed that the host database is not set.  
5.15.5.2 host ip address  
Function  
Set the IP address of the host database information.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
host <number> ip address <ip_address>  
Options  
<number>  
Definition number  
Specify the definition number of the host database information with a decimal value  
from 0 to 99.  
<ip_address>  
IP address  
Specify the IP address of the host.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set the IP address of the host connected under this device in the host database.  
This command is available from the simple DNS server function.  
Default  
It is assumed that the host database is not set.  
Device Information Settings  
295  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.5.3 host ip6 address  
Function  
Set the IPv6 address of the host database information  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
host <number> ip6 address <ip6_address>  
Options  
<number>  
definition number  
Set the definition number of host database information with a decimal value  
<ip6_address>  
IPv6 address  
Specify IPv6 address of the host  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set the IPv6 address of the host connected under this device in the host database.  
This command is available from the simple DNS server function.  
Default  
N/A  
Device Information Settings  
296  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.6 Schedule Information  
This section explains about the commands related to schedule information.  
5.15.6.1 schedule at  
Function  
Set the command to specify day and time in the system schedule.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
schedule <number> at <day> <time> <command>  
Options  
<number>  
Specify a schedule definition.  
Schedule definition number  
Specify a schedule definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 19.  
any  
Define by using unused schedule definition number.  
<day>  
Day  
Specify a schedule execution day or starting day with a decimal value from 1 to 31.  
Day of the week  
Select a schedule execution day or starting day from the following.  
sun : Sunday  
mon : Monday  
tue  
: Tuesday  
wed : Wednesday  
thu  
fri  
: Thursday  
: Friday  
sat  
: Saturday  
When specifying multiple days, separate them with commas (,).  
any  
Specify it when setting the schedule execution day or starting day to be every day.  
Specify this option at system power-on or restart.  
<time>  
Execution time  
Specify an execution time with a 4-digit decimal value from 0 to 9.  
(Example: 0635 = 06:35 a.m., 2330 = 11:30 p.m.)  
pwon  
Specify it when executing the schedule at device power-on.  
rset  
Specify it when executing the schedule at device restart or power-on.  
<command>  
Specify a command character string to be executed.  
reset  
Specify when rebooting the device.  
reset config1  
Specify it when switching to the configuration 1 at device restart.  
reset config2  
Specify it when switching to the configuration 2 at device restart.  
Specifying other commands will not assure normal operations.  
Device Information Settings  
297  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set the system schedule.  
Explanation  
Based on the schedule, the command is executed at the specified time.  
Default  
It is assumed that no schedule information is set.  
5.15.6.2 schedule syslog  
Function  
Set the system log in the system schedule.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
schedule <number> syslog <syslog>  
Options  
<number>  
Specify the schedule definition.  
Schedule definition number  
Specify a schedule definition number with a decimal value from 0 to 19.  
any  
Define by using unused schedule definition number.  
<syslog>  
yes  
Specify it when outputting command execution using the system log.  
no  
Specify it when outputting command execution without using the system log.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Specify whether or not to write a message, which was output by the command to be  
activated in the schedule, to the system log.  
This command is enabled only when the command activated in the schedule is specified.  
Default  
It is assumed that no data is output to system log at a command execution.  
schedule <number> syslog no  
Device Information Settings  
298  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.7 Filter/QoS Resource Information  
This section explains about the commands related to Filter/QoS Resource Information.  
5.15.7.1 resource filter distribution  
Function  
Set the distribution of filter and QoS resources.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448  
Syntax  
resource filter distribution <function> <protocol>  
Options  
<function>  
all  
Filter and QoS resources are distributed over Filter and QoS.  
filter  
Filter and QoS resources are distributed to only Filter.  
qos  
Filter and QoS resources are distributed to only QoS.  
<protocol>  
all  
Filter and QoS resources are distributed over IPv4 and IPv6.  
ipv4  
Filter and QoS resources are distributed to only IPv4.  
ipv6  
Filter and QoS resources are distributed to only IPv6.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set the distribution of filter and QoS resources.  
Filter and QoS resources are distributed evenly.  
resource filter distribution all all  
Device Information Settings  
299  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.8 Other  
This section explains about other commands.  
5.15.8.1 addact  
Function  
Set the command execution reservation.  
addact <index> <date> <command>  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
Options  
<index>  
Registration number  
Specify the registration number of the command execution reservation information.  
Make sure to specify "0".  
<date>  
Execution date and time  
Specify a command execution date and time in the yymmddHHMM format.  
yy  
: Specify the last two digits of the year, up to 2036.  
mm : Specify month with a decimal value from 1 to 12.  
dd  
: Specify date with a decimal value from 1 to 31.  
: Specify hour with a decimal value from 0 to 23.  
HH  
MM : Specify minutes with a decimal value from 0 to 59.  
<command>  
Specify a command character string to be executed.  
reset  
Specify it when rebooting the device.  
reset config1  
Specify it when switching to the configuration 1 at device restart.  
reset config2  
Specify it when switching to the configuration 2 at device restart.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set the command execution reservation.  
The following shows the cautions when executing a command using the schedule  
function.  
Set the device time correctly.  
Make sure that the device has been turned on before the command is executed.  
Execution Example  
The following shows a setting example to restart the device at 02:00 a.m. in January 1,  
1999 switching to configuration 2.  
# addact 0 9901010200 reset config2  
# show addact  
0 9901010200 reset config2  
#
Default  
It is assumed that no reservation is set to execute a command.  
Device Information Settings  
300  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.8.2 watchdog service  
Function  
Sets watchdog reset.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
watchdog service <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
on  
Initiates watchdog reset function.  
off  
Suspends watchdog reset function.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Initiates or suspends watchdog reset function.  
If <mode> is set to on, if the device hangs it will reset within 16 to 48 seconds and restart.  
Explanation  
Default  
If <mode> is set to off, it will not reset even if it hangs.  
This setting will be reflected after saving the configuration and resetting or reconnecting  
the power of the device.  
If unset, the watchdog reset function will be initiated.  
watchdog service on  
5.15.8.3 consoleinfo  
Function  
Set the serial console connection service.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
consoleinfo autologout <time>  
Options  
<time>  
Forced logout time  
Specify a time period (from 0 to 86400 seconds (one day)) for the user to be forcibly  
logged out if no commands have been executed while logging in on the serial console.  
The unit shall be d (day), h (hour), m (minute), or s (second).  
Specifying 0 seconds will not perform forced logout.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set to log out forcibly if no command was executed within the time specified in <time>  
while login via serial console.  
Default  
It is assumed that forced logout is not set.  
consoleinfo autologout 0s  
Device Information Settings  
301  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.8.4 telnetinfo  
Function  
Set the TELNET connection service.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
telnetinfo autologout <time>  
Options  
<time>  
Automatic disconnection time  
Specify a time period (from 0 to 86400 seconds (one day)) for the user to be  
automatically disconnected when no command input/output processing has been  
performed by the client while connected through telnet.  
The unit shall be d (day), h (hour), m (minute), or s (second).  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set a time period to disconnect the TELNET connection when no data is input and  
output.  
Default  
It is assumed that TELNET connection input/output is not monitored.  
telnetinfo autologout 0s  
5.15.8.5 mflag  
Function  
Set the CE maintenance login.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
mflag <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
on  
Specify it when enabling login using a CE-dedicated password.  
off  
Specify it when disabling login using a CE-dedicated password.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set whether or not to permit CE maintenance login.  
It is assumed that login with a CE-dedicated password is rejected.  
mflag off  
Device Information Settings  
302  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.8.6 dumpswitch  
Function  
Allows/disallows dumping of data to external media.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448  
Syntax  
dumpswitch <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
enable  
Allows dumping of data to external media via a dump switch.  
disable  
Disallows dumping of data to external media via a dump switch.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Allows/disallows dumping of data to external media via a dump switch.  
If unset, dumping of data to external media via a dump switch will be allowed.  
dumpswitch enable  
5.15.8.7 sysname  
Function  
Set a name of this device.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
sysname <name>  
Options  
<name>  
Name  
Specify a name of this device using up to 32 characters from 0x21, 0x23 to 0x7e ASCII  
set.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set a name of this device.  
The name set in this command can be used as the MIB variable, sysName, which is used  
for SNMP. In this case, by deleting the sysName value set in the "snmp agent sysname"  
command, the host name set in this command can be used as sysName.  
This command is not directly associated with the "snmp agent sysname" command  
regarding the behavior on the network. However, their names should be identical for  
network control purposes.  
Caution  
Default  
When you use LLMNR function, please start "sysname" at alphabetic characters, and  
use only alphameric characters, "-" and "_". Some LLMNR client can't use some symbols  
and string start at numeric characters.  
It is assumed that a name of this device is not set.  
Device Information Settings  
303  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.8.8 serverinfo ftp  
Function  
Set the FTP server function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo ftp ip <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
on  
Enable the FTP server function.  
off  
Disable the FTP server function.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set whether or not to enable the FTP server function.  
It is assumed that the FTP server function is enabled.  
serverinfo ftp ip on  
5.15.8.9 serverinfo ftp ip6  
Function  
Set the IPv6 FTP server function FTP  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo ftp ip6 <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
on  
Enable IPv6 FTP server function  
off  
Disable IPv6 FTP server function  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set whether or not to enable IPv6 FTP server function  
It is assumed that the IPv6 FTP server function is enabled.  
serverinfo ftp ip6 on  
Device Information Settings  
304  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.8.10 serverinfo ftp filter  
Function  
Set the application filter for the FTP server function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo ftp filter <count> <action> acl <acl_count>  
Options  
<count>  
Filtering definition number  
Specify a definition number, which indicates a filtering priority, with a decimal value  
from 0 to 29.  
A smaller value has a higher priority.  
<action>  
Specify an operation when filtering conditions are satisfied.  
accept  
Transmit the relevant packet.  
reject  
Block the relevant packet.  
<acl_count>  
ACL definition number  
Set the required ACL definition number with a decimal value.  
If the ACL specified in <acl_count> is not set, the filtering definition will be disabled and  
ignored.  
The following ACL definition is available for application filtering.  
ip  
Set only the source IP address and the number of mask bits.  
If the ip value is not set, the filtering definition will be disabled and ignored.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set the application filter for the FTP server function.  
It is assumed that the application filter is not set for the FTP server function.  
Device Information Settings  
305  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.8.11 serverinfo ftp filter move  
Function  
Change the priority of the application filter for the FTP server function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo ftp filter move <count> <new_count>  
Options  
<count>  
Target filtering definition number  
Specify a filtering definition number of which the priority is to be changed.  
<new_count>  
Destination filtering definition number  
Specify a new priority for <count> with a decimal value from 0 to 29.  
If any definition with the same definition number exists, it will be inserted before the  
existing one.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Change the priority of the application filter for the FTP server function.  
5.15.8.12 serverinfo ftp filter default  
Function  
Set the default operation of the application filter for the FTP server function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo ftp filter default <action>  
Options  
<action>  
Specify how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the FTP  
server function.  
accept  
Transmit the relevant packet.  
reject  
Block the relevant packet.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the FTP  
server function.  
Default  
A packet that did not match any application filter table is transmitted.  
serverinfo ftp filter default accept  
Device Information Settings  
306  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.8.13 serverinfo sftp  
Function  
Set the SSH FTP server function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo sftp ip <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
on  
Enable the SSH FTP server function.  
off  
Disable the SSH FTP server function.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set whether or not to enable the SSH FTP server function.  
Setting this command OFF and the "serverinfo ssh" command Off will reject a connection  
request using the IPv4 address from the sftp client.  
Setting this command OFF and the "serverinfo ssh" command On will reject a connection  
request using the IPv4 address from the sftp client after the password was entered.  
Caution  
Enabling this command generates an SSH host authentication key at device power-on  
and execution of the "reset" command, and it takes several tens of seconds to several  
minutes for the processing time.  
sftp connection is enabled after the SSH host authentication key generation was  
completed.  
If this device has been started to enable this function while all the ssh and sftp functions  
were Off, it also takes several tens of seconds to several minutes for the processing time  
to generate an SSH host authentication key. Note that other processes may be affected;  
session monitoring timeout may occur, for example.  
Default  
It is assumed that the SSH FTP server function is enabled.  
serverinfo sftp ip on  
Device Information Settings  
307  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.8.14 serverinfo sftp ip6  
Function  
Set the IPv6 SSH FTP server function  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo sftp ip6 <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
on  
Enable IPv6 SSH FTP server function  
off  
Disable IPv6 SSH FTP server function  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set whether or not to enable IPv6 SSH FTP server function  
Setting this command OFF and the"serverinfo ssh ip6" command OFF will reject a  
connection request using the IPv6 address from the sftp client.  
Setting this command OFF and the "serverinfo ssh ip6" command ON will reject a  
connection request using the IPv6 address from the sftp client after the password was  
entered.  
Caution  
Default  
Enabling this command generates an SSH host authentication key at device power-on or  
execution of the "reset" command, and it takes several tens of seconds to several  
minutes for the processing time. sftp connection is enabled after the SSH host  
authentication key generation was completed.  
If this device has been started to enable this function while all the ssh and sftp functions  
were Off, it also takes several tens of seconds to several minutes for the processing time  
to generate an SSH host authentication key. Note that other processes may be affected;  
session monitoring timeout may occur, for example.  
It is assumed that the IPv6 SSH FTP server function is enabled.  
serverinfo sftp ip6 on  
5.15.8.15 serverinfo telnet  
Function  
Set the TELNET server function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo telnet ip <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
on  
Enable the TELNET server function.  
off  
Disable the TELNET server function.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set whether or not to enable the TELNET server function.  
It is assumed that the TELNET server function is enabled.  
serverinfo telnet ip on  
Device Information Settings  
308  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.8.16 serverinfo telnet ip6  
Function  
Set the IPv6 telnet server function  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo telnet ip6 <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
on  
Enable telnet server function  
off  
Disable telnet server function  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set the IPv6 telnet server function  
It is assumed that the IPv6 TELNET server function is enabled.  
serverinfo telnet ip6 on  
5.15.8.17 serverinfo telnet filter  
Function  
Set the application filter for the TELNET server function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo telnet filter <count> <action> acl <acl_count>  
Options  
<count>  
Filtering definition number  
Specify a definition number, which indicates a filtering priority, with a decimal value  
from 0 to 29.  
A smaller value has a higher priority.  
<action>  
Specify an operation when filtering conditions are satisfied.  
accept  
Transmit the relevant packet.  
reject  
Block the relevant packet.  
<acl_count>  
ACL definition number  
Specify the required ACL definition number with a decimal value.  
If the ACL specified in <acl_count> is not specified, the filtering definition will be  
disabled and ignored.  
The following ACL definition is available for application filtering.  
ip  
Set only the source IP address and the number of mask bits.  
If the ip value is not set, the filtering definition will be disabled and ignored.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set the application filter for the TELNET server function.  
It is assumed that the application filter is not set for the TELNET server function.  
Device Information Settings  
309  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.8.18 serverinfo telnet filter move  
Function  
Change the priority of the application filter for the TELNET server function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo telnet filter move <count> <new_count>  
Options  
<count>  
Target filtering definition number  
Specify a filtering definition number of which the priority is to be changed.  
<new_count>  
Destination filtering definition number  
Specify a new priority for <count> with a decimal value from 0 to 29.  
If any definition with the same definition number exists, it will be inserted before the  
existing one.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Change the priority of the application filter for the TELNET server function.  
5.15.8.19 serverinfo telnet filter default  
Function  
Set the default operation of the application filter for the TELNET server function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo telnet filter default <action>  
Options  
<action>  
Specify how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the  
TELNET server function.  
accept  
Transmit the relevant packet.  
reject  
Block the relevant packet.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the TELNET  
server function.  
Default  
A packet that did not match any application filter table is transmitted.  
serverinfo telnet filter default accept  
Device Information Settings  
310  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.8.20 serverinfo ssh  
Function  
Set the SSH login server function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo ssh ip <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
on  
Enable the SSH login server function.  
off  
Disable the SSH login server function.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set whether or not to enable the SSH login server function.  
Setting this command Off and the "serverinfo sftp" command Off will reject a connection  
request using the IPv4 address from the ssh client.  
Setting this command Off and the "serverinfo sftp" command On will reject a connection  
request using the IPv4 address from the ssh client after the password was entered.  
Caution  
Enabling this command generates an SSH host authentication key at device power-on  
and execution of the "reset" command, and it takes several tens of seconds to several  
minutes for the processing time.  
ssh connection is enabled after the SSH host authentication key generation was  
completed.  
If this device has been started to enable this function while all the ssh and sftp functions  
were Off, it also takes several tens of seconds to several minutes for the processing time  
to generate an SSH host authentication key. Note that other processes may be affected;  
session monitoring timeout may occur, for example.  
Default  
It is assumed that the SSH login server function is enabled.  
serverinfo ssh ip on  
Device Information Settings  
311  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.8.21 serverinfo ssh ip6  
Function  
Set the IPv6 SSH login server function  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo ssh ip6 <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
on  
Enable IPv6 SSH login server function  
off  
Disable IPv6 SSH login server function  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set whether or not to enable the IPv6 SSH login server function.Setting this command  
Off and the "serverinfo sftp ip6" command Off will reject a connection request using the  
IPv6 address from the ssh client. Setting this command Off and the "serverinfo sftp ip6"  
command On will reject a connection request using the IPv6 address from the ssh client  
after the password was entered.  
Caution  
Default  
Enabling this command generates an SSH host authentication key at device power-on  
and execution of the "reset" command, and it takes several tens of seconds to several  
minutes for the processing time. ssh connection is enabled after the SSH host  
authentication key generation was completed.If this device has been started to enable  
this function while all the ssh and sftp functions were Off, it also takes several tens of  
seconds to several minutes for the processing time to generate an SSH host  
authentication key. Note that other processes may be affected; session monitoring  
timeout may occur, for example.  
It is assumed that the IPv6 SSH login server function is enabled.  
serverinfo ssh ip6 on  
Device Information Settings  
312  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.8.22 serverinfo ssh filter  
Function  
Set the application filter for the SSH server function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo ssh filter <count> <action> acl <acl_count>  
Options  
<count>  
Filtering definition number  
Specify a definition number, which indicates a filtering priority, with a decimal value  
from 0 to 29.  
A smaller value has a higher priority.  
<action>  
Specify an operation when filtering conditions are satisfied.  
accept  
Transmit the relevant packet.  
reject  
Block the relevant packet.  
<acl_count>  
ACL definition number  
Specify the required ACL definition number with a decimal value.  
If the ACL specified in <acl_count> is not specified, the filtering definition will be  
disabled and ignored.  
The following ACL definition is available for application filtering.  
ip  
Set only the source IP address and the number of mask bits.  
If the ip value is not set, the filtering definition will be disabled and ignored.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set the application filter for the SSH server function.  
This definition is enabled for both the SSH login and SSH FTP server functions.  
Each different filter cannot be set for the SSH login and SSH FTP server functions  
separately.  
Default  
It is assumed that the application filter is not set for the SSH server function.  
Device Information Settings  
313  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.8.23 serverinfo ssh filter move  
Function  
Change the priority of the application filter for the SSH server function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo ssh filter move <count> <new_count>  
Options  
<count>  
Target filtering definition number  
Specify a filtering definition number of which the priority is to be changed.  
<new_count>  
Destination filtering definition number  
Specify a new priority for <count> with a decimal value from 0 to 29.  
If any definition with the same definition number exists, it will be inserted before the  
existing one.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set the priority of the application filter for the SSH server function.  
5.15.8.24 serverinfo ssh filter default  
Function  
Set the default operation of the application filter for the SSH server function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo ssh filter default <action>  
Options  
<action>  
Specify how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the SSH  
server function.  
accept  
Transmit the relevant packet.  
reject  
Block the relevant packet.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the SSH  
server function.  
Default  
A packet that did not match any application filter table is transmitted.  
serverinfo ssh filter default accept  
Device Information Settings  
314  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.8.25 serverinfo http  
Function  
Set the HTTP server function  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo http ip <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
on  
Enable HTTP server function  
off  
Disable HTTP server function  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set whether or not to enable HTTP server function  
It is assumed that the HTTP server function is enabled.  
serverinfo http ip on  
5.15.8.26 serverinfo http ip6  
Function  
Set the IPv6 HTTP server function  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo http ip6 <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
on  
Enable IPv6 HTTP server function  
off  
Disable IPv6 HTTP server function  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set whether or not to enable IPv6 HTTP server function  
It is assumed that the IPv6 HTTP server function is enabled.  
serverinfo http ip6 on  
Device Information Settings  
315  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.8.27 serverinfo http filter  
Function  
Set the application filter for HTTP server function  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo http filter <count> <action> acl <acl_count>  
Options  
<count>  
Filtering definition number  
Specify a definition number, which indicates a filtering priority, with a decimal value  
from 0 to 29.  
A smaller value has a higher priority  
<action>  
Specify the action when the packets match the filter.  
accept  
Accept the packets  
reject  
Reject the packets  
<acl_count>  
ACL definition number  
Set the required ACL definition number with a decimal value.  
If the ACL specified in <acl_count> is not set, the filtering definition will be disabled and  
ignored.  
The following ACL definition is available for application filtering.  
- ip  
Source IP address and the number of mask bits are used for the filter.  
If IP value has not been set, the filtering definition will be disabled and ignored.  
- ip6  
Source IPv6 address and the prefix length are used for the filter.  
If IPv6 value has not been set, the filtering definition will be disabled and ignored.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set the application filter for HTTP server function  
N/A  
Device Information Settings  
316  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.8.28 serverinfo http filter move  
Function  
Change the priority of the application filter for the HTTP server function  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo http filter move <count> <new_count>  
Options  
<count>  
Filering definition number  
Specify a filtering definition number of which the priority is to be changed  
<new_count>  
Destination filtering definition number  
Specify a new priority for <count> with a decimal value from 0 to 29.  
If any definition with the same definition number exists, it will be inserted before the  
existing one.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Change the priority of the application filter for the HTTP server function  
5.15.8.29 serverinfo http filter default  
Function  
Set the default action of the application filter for the HTTP server function  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo http filter default <action>  
Options  
<action>  
Specify how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for  
the HTTP server function.  
accept  
Accept the packets  
reject  
Reject the packets  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Specify how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the HTTP  
server function.  
Default  
A packet that did not match any application filter table is transmitted.  
serverinfo http filter default accept  
Device Information Settings  
317  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.8.30 serverinfo dns  
Function  
Set the DNS server function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo dns ip <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
on  
Enable the DNS server function.  
off  
Disable the DNS server function.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set whether to enable the DNS server (static) and ProxyDNS functions.  
It is assumed that the DNS server function is enabled.  
serverinfo dns ip on  
5.15.8.31 serverinfo dns ip6  
Function  
Set the IPv6 DNS server function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo dns ip6 <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
on  
Enable the DNS server function.  
off  
Disable the DNS server function.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set whether to enable the IPv6 DNS server (static) and ProxyDNS functions.  
It is assumed that the IPv6 DNS server function is enabled.  
serverinfo dns ip6 on  
Device Information Settings  
318  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.8.32 serverinfo dns filter  
Function  
Set the application filter for the DNS server function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo dns filter <count> <action> acl <acl_count>  
Options  
<count>  
Filtering definition number  
Specify a definition number, which indicates a filtering priority, with a decimal value  
from 0 to 29.  
A smaller value has a higher priority.  
<action>  
Specify an operation when filtering conditions are satisfied.  
accept  
Transmit the relevant packet.  
reject  
Block the relevant packet.  
<acl_count>  
ACL definition number  
Specify the required ACL definition number with a decimal value.  
If the ACL specified in <acl_count> is not specified, the filtering definition will be  
disabled and ignored.  
The following ACL definition is available for application filtering.  
ip  
Set only the source IP address and the number of mask bits.  
If the ip value is not set, the filtering definition will be disabled and ignored.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set the application filter for the DNS server function.  
It is assumed that the application filter is not set for the DNS server function.  
Device Information Settings  
319  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.8.33 serverinfo dns filter move  
Function  
Change the priority of the application filter for the DNS server function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo dns filter move <count> <new_count>  
Options  
<count>  
Target filtering definition number  
Specify a filtering definition number of which the priority is to be changed.  
<new_count>  
Destination filtering definition number  
Specify a new priority for <count> with a decimal value from 0 to 29.  
If any definition with the same definition number exists, it will be inserted before the  
existing one.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Change the priority of the application filter for the DNS server function.  
5.15.8.34 serverinfo dns filter default  
Function  
Set the default operation of the application filter for the DNS server function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo dns filter default <action>  
Options  
<action>  
Specify how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the DNS  
server function.  
accept  
Transmit the relevant packet.  
reject  
Block the relevant packet.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the DNS  
server function.  
Default  
A packet that did not match any application filter table is transmitted.  
serverinfo dns filter default accept  
Device Information Settings  
320  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.8.35 serverinfo sntp  
Function  
Set the SNTP server.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo sntp ip <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
on  
Enable the SNTP server function.  
off  
Disable the SNTP server function.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set whether or not to enable the SNTP server function.  
It is assumed that the SNTP server function is enabled.  
serverinfo sntp ip on  
5.15.8.36 serverinfo sntp ip6  
Function  
Set the IPv6 SNTP Server function  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo sntp ip6 <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
on  
Enable IPv6 SNTP server function  
off  
Disable IPv6 SNTP server function  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set whether or not to enable IPv6 SNTP server function  
It is assumed that the IPv6 SNTP server function is enabled.  
serverinfo sntp ip6 on  
Device Information Settings  
321  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.8.37 serverinfo sntp filter  
Function  
Set the application filter for the SNTP server function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo sntp filter <count> <action> acl <acl_count>  
Options  
<count>  
Filtering definition number  
Specify a definition number, which indicates a filtering priority, with a decimal value  
from 0 to 29.  
A smaller value has a higher priority.  
<action>  
Specify an operation when filtering conditions are satisfied.  
accept  
Transmit the relevant packet.  
reject  
Block the relevant packet.  
<acl_count>  
ACL definition number  
Specify the required ACL definition number with a decimal value.  
If the ACL specified in <acl_count> is not specified, the filtering definition will be  
disabled and ignored.  
The following ACL definition is available for application filtering.  
ip  
Set only the source IP address and the number of mask bits.  
If the ip value is not set, the filtering definition will be disabled and ignored.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set the application filter for the SNTP server function.  
It is assumed that the application filter is not set for the SNTP server function.  
Device Information Settings  
322  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.8.38 serverinfo sntp filter move  
Function  
Change the priority of the application filter for the SNTP server function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo sntp filter move <count> <new_count>  
Options  
<count>  
Target filtering definition number  
Specify a filtering definition number of which the priority is to be changed.  
<new_count>  
Destination filtering definition number  
Specify a new priority for <count> with a decimal value from 0 to 29.  
If any definition with the same definition number exists, it will be inserted before the  
existing one.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Change the priority of the application filter for the SNTP server function.  
5.15.8.39 serverinfo sntp filter default  
Function  
Set the default operation of the application filter for the SNTP server function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo sntp filter default <action>  
Options  
<action>  
Specify how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the SNTP  
server function.  
accept  
Transmit the relevant packet.  
reject  
Block the relevant packet.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the SNTP  
server function.  
Default  
A packet that did not match any application filter table is transmitted.  
serverinfo sntp filter default accept  
Device Information Settings  
323  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.8.40 serverinfo time ip tcp  
Function  
Set the TIME server function by TCP.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo time ip tcp <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
on  
Enable the TIME server function by TCP.  
off  
Disable the TIME server function by TCP.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set whether or not to enable the TCP-based TIME server function.  
It is assumed that the TCP-based TIME server function is enabled.  
serverinfo time ip tcp on  
5.15.8.41 serverinfo time ip6 tcp  
Function  
Set the IPv6 TIME Server function by TCP  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo time ip6 tcp <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
on  
Enable IPv6 TIME server function by TCP  
off  
Disable IPv6 TIME server function by TCP  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set whether or not to enable IPv6 TIME server function by TCP  
It is assumed that the TCP-based IPv6 TIME server function is enabled.  
serverinfo time ip6 tcp on  
Device Information Settings  
324  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.8.42 serverinfo time ip udp  
Function  
Set the TIME server function by UDP.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo time ip udp <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
on  
Enable the TIME server function by UDP.  
off  
Disable the TIME server function by UDP.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set whether or not to enable the UDP-based TIME server function.  
It is assumed that the UDP-based TIME server function is enabled.  
serverinfo time ip udp on  
5.15.8.43 serverinfo time ip6 udp  
Function  
Set the IPv6 TIME Server function by UDP  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo time ip6 udp <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
on  
Enable IPv6 TIME server function by UDP  
off  
Disable IPv6 TIME server function by UDP  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set whether or not to enable IPv6 TIME server function by UDP  
It is assumed that the UDP-based IPv6 TIME server function is enabled.  
serverinfo time ip6 udp on  
Device Information Settings  
325  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.8.44 serverinfo time filter  
Function  
Set the application filter for the TIME server function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo time filter <count> <action> acl <acl_count>  
Options  
<count>  
Filtering definition number  
Specify a definition number, which indicates a filtering priority, with a decimal value  
from 0 to 29.  
A smaller value has a higher priority.  
<action>  
Specify an operation when filtering conditions are satisfied.  
accept  
Transmit the relevant packet.  
reject  
Block the relevant packet.  
<acl_count>  
ACL definition number  
Specify the required ACL definition number with a decimal value.  
If the ACL specified in <acl_count> is not specified, the filtering definition will be  
disabled and ignored.  
The following ACL definition is available for application filtering.  
ip  
Set only the source IP address and the number of mask bits.  
If the ip value is not set, the filtering definition will be disabled and ignored.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Set the application filter for the TIME server function.  
It is assumed that the application filter is not set for the TIME server function.  
5.15.8.45 serverinfo time filter move  
Function  
Change the priority of the application filter for the TIME server function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo time filter move <count> <new_count>  
Options  
<count>  
Target filtering definition number  
Specify a filtering definition number of which the priority is to be changed.  
<new_count>  
Destination filtering definition number  
Specify a new priority for <count> with a decimal value from 0 to 29.  
If any definition with the same definition number exists, it will be inserted before the  
existing one.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Change the priority of the application filter for the TIME server function.  
Device Information Settings  
326  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.15.8.46 serverinfo time filter default  
Function  
Set the default operation of the application filter for the TIME server function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
serverinfo time filter default <action>  
Options  
<action>  
Specify how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the TIME  
server function.  
accept  
Transmit the relevant packet.  
reject  
Block the relevant packet.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set how to handle a packet that did not match any application filter table for the TIME  
server function.  
Default  
A packet that did not match any application filter table is transmitted.  
serverinfo time filter default accept  
Device Information Settings  
327  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.16 Login banner Settings  
This section explains about Login banner settings.  
5.16.1 Login banner Information  
This section explains about the commands related to Login banner information.  
5.16.1.1 login banner telnet  
Function  
Turn on or off the telnet login banner.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
login banner telnet <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
Specify the desired mode.  
on  
Specify "on" to enable the login banner.  
off  
Specify "off" to disable the login banner.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Enables use of the telnet login banner.  
The telnet login banner is disabled.  
5.16.1.2 login banner ftp  
Function  
Turn on or off the ftp login banner.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
login banner ftp <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
Specify the desired mode.  
on  
Specify "on" to enable the login banner.  
off  
Specify "off" to disable the login banner.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Enables use of the ftp login banner.  
The ftp login banner is disabled.  
Login banner Settings  
328  
               
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.16.1.3 login banner ssh  
Function  
Turn on or off the ssh login banner.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
login banner ssh <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
Specify the desired mode.  
on  
Specify "on" to enable the ssh login banner.  
off  
Specify "off" to disable the ssh login banner.  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Enables use of the ssh login banner.  
The ssh login banner is disabled.  
5.16.1.4 login banner description  
Function  
Define the login banner text.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
login banner description <count> <description>  
Options  
<count>  
Set the definition number of login banner with a decimal value from 0 to 9.  
<description>  
Define the login banner text with up to 80 ASCII characters. The allowable characters are  
0x20,0x21,0x23 to 0x7e.  
When using blank spaces, enclose the text string with quotes(").  
(Example: "this is private network system").  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Default  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Define the login banner text.  
No login banner text is defined.  
Login banner Settings  
329  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.17 Mode and Terminal Operation  
Commands  
This section explains about mode and terminal operation commands.  
5.17.1 Mode Operation Commands  
This section explains about mode operation commands.  
5.17.1.1 admin  
Function  
Switch to the admin class.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
admin  
Options  
N/A  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Operation mode (user class)  
Switch from the user class to the admin class.  
This command has the same function as the "su" command.  
Before switching, enter the administrator password, when asked.  
To return from the admin class to the user class, execute the "exit", "end", "quit", or "!"  
command.  
Caution  
The settings of the "terminal" and "alias" commands will not be inherited by the  
administrator mode.  
Message  
Password:  
Enter an administrator password.  
<ERROR> Authentication failed  
Switching to the admin class was failed due to the incorrect administrator password.  
Enter the correct administrator password.  
<WARNING> weak admin password: set the password  
The administrator password is not set.  
Set an administrator password.  
<WARNING> weak admin password: contain at least 8 characters  
The administrator password is seven or fewer characters in length.  
Set an administrator password with eight or more characters.  
<WARNING> weak admin password: contain a different kind of character  
The administrator password consists of only alphabetic characters or only numeric  
characters.  
Set an administrator password with alphanumeric characters and symbols mixed.  
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands  
330  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Execution Example  
> admin  
Password:  
# exit  
>
5.17.1.2 su  
Function  
Switch to the admin class.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
su  
Options  
N/A  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Operation mode (user class)  
Switch from the user class to the admin class.  
This command has the same function as the "admin" command.  
Before switching, enter the administrator password, when asked.  
To return from the admin class to the user class, execute the "exit", "end", "quit", or "!"  
command.  
Caution  
The settings of the "terminal" and "alias" commands will not be inherited by the  
administrator mode.  
Message  
Password:  
Enter the administrator password.  
<ERROR> Authentication failed  
Switching to the admin class was failed due to the incorrect administrator password.  
Enter the correct administrator password.  
<WARNING> weak admin password: set the password  
The administrator password is not set.  
Set an administrator password.  
<WARNING> weak admin password: contain at least 8 characters  
The administrator password is seven or fewer characters in length.  
Set an administrator password with eight or more characters.  
<WARNING> weak admin password: contain a different kind of character  
The administrator password consists of only alphabetic characters or only numeric  
characters.  
Set an administrator password with alphanumeric characters and symbols mixed.  
Execution Example  
> su  
Password:  
#
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands  
331  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.17.1.3 exit  
Function  
Return to the class, mode or configuration directory, or logout.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
exit  
N/A  
Options  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
In the operation mode, the Use Mode class returns to the user class if it has been  
switched from the user class to the admin class using the "admin" command. Otherwise  
logout occurs.  
In the configuration mode, the current directory will be moved up to the next higher one  
when the configuration directory function is enabled in a directory other than the top  
directory. Otherwise, if the configuration has not been changed, the configuration mode  
returns to the operation mode, but if the configuration has been changed, the  
configuration mode still remains unreturned with an error message.  
For the configuration directory function, refer to "5.17.1.4 configure" (pg.333).  
Caution  
The settings by the "terminal" and "alias" commands will be discarded at logout.  
Message  
<ERROR> The candidate-config has been changed but not committed.  
The configuration is not reflected.  
Reflect the configuration. When returning to the operation mode without reflecting the  
configuration, use the "end" or "quit" command.  
Execution Example  
(config)# exit  
<ERROR> The candidate-config has been changed but not committed.  
(config)# end  
<WARNING> The candidate-config has been changed but not committed.  
# exit  
Login:  
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands  
332  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.17.1.4 configure  
Function  
Switch to the configuration mode.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
configure  
Options  
N/A  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Switch from the operation mode to the configuration mode.  
Pressing the [Ctrl+O] keys after switching to the configuration mode will enable the  
configuration directory function.  
When the configuration directory function is enabled, it looks as if moved to another  
directory according to the input configuration command, therefore, the configuration  
command can be executed simply by entering arguments that follow the configuration  
layer. A normal command also can be executed by entering its command name even  
while moving between the layers.  
The configuration directory is displayed at entry prompt.  
To disable the configuration layer function, press the [Ctrl+G] keys.  
To return to the operation mode from the configuration mode, execute the "exit", "end",  
"quit", or "!" command.  
Caution  
If the configuration has been changed, it is not possible to return to the operation mode  
with the "exit" or "!" command. Using the "end" or "quit" command will makes it possible  
to forcibly return to the operation mode.  
When the configuration directory function is enabled, if the entry prompt character string  
is changed with the "terminal prompt" command without including the configuration  
directory, the configuration directory will not be displayed at entry prompt.  
Execution Example  
# configure  
(config)#  
(Press the [CTRL+O] keys to enable the configuration directory function.)  
<NOTICE> Directory mode is enabled. To disable, type Ctrl+G.  
(config)# lan 0 ip  
(config-lan-0-ip)# address 192.168.0.1/24 3  
(config-lan-0-ip)# show  
address 192.168.0.1/24 3  
(config-lan-0-ip)# show candidate-config  
lan 0 ip address 192.168.0.1/24 3  
(config-lan-0-ip)#  
(Press the [Ctrl+g] keys to disable the configuration directory function.)  
<NOTICE> Directory mode is disabled.  
(config)#  
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands  
333  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.17.1.5 end  
Function  
Return to the operation mode.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
end  
Options  
N/A  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Return from the configuration mode to the operation mode.  
If the configuration has been changed, the Use Mode returns to the operation mode with  
a message.  
This command has the same function as the "quit" command.  
Default  
<WARNING> The candidate-config has been changed but not committed.  
The Use Mode has returned to the operation mode without reflecting the configuration.  
The changed or added configuration remains unchanged.  
Check whether you need to reflect the configuration.  
Execution Example  
(config)# end  
#
5.17.1.6 quit  
Function  
Return to the operation mode.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
quit  
Options  
N/A  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Return from the configuration mode to the operation mode.  
If the configuration has been changed, the Use Mode returns to the operation mode with  
a message.  
This command has the same function as the "end" command.  
Message  
<WARNING> The candidate-config has been changed but not committed.  
The Use Mode has returned to the operation mode without reflecting the configuration.  
The changed or added configuration remains unchanged.  
Check whether you need to reflect the configuration.  
Execution Example  
(config)# quit  
#
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands  
334  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.17.1.7 top  
Function  
Switch to the highest configuration directory.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
top  
Options  
N/A  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
If the configuration directory function is enabled in the configuration mode, move up to  
the top directory.  
Staying already in the top directory still remains unmoved.  
If the configuration directory function is disabled, nothing occurs.  
For the configuration directory function, refer to the "5.17.1.4 configure" (pg.333).  
Execution Example  
(config-lan-0-ip)# top  
(config)#  
(Execute in the "lan 0 ip" directory)  
5.17.1.8 up  
Function  
Switch to the next upper configuration directory.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
up  
Options  
N/A  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
If the configuration directory function is enabled in the configuration mode, move up to  
the next configuration directory. Staying already in the top directory still remains  
unmoved.  
If the configuration directory function is disabled, nothing occurs.  
For the configuration directory function, refer to the "5.17.1.4 configure" (pg.333).  
Execution Example  
(config-lan-0-ip)# up  
(config-lan-0)#  
(Execute in the "lan 0 ip" directory)  
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands  
335  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.17.1.9 !  
Function  
Return to the previous class, mode or configuration directory.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
!
Options  
Use Mode  
N/A  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
In the operation mode, the Use Mode class returns to the user class if it has been  
switched from the user class to the admin class using the "admin" command. Otherwise  
the operation mode still remains unchanged without logout.  
In the configuration mode, the current directory will be moved up to the next higher one  
when the configuration directory function is enabled in a directory other than the top  
directory. Otherwise, if the configuration has not been changed, the configuration mode  
returns to the operation mode, but if the configuration has been changed, the  
configuration mode still remains unreturned with an error message.  
For the configuration directory function, refer to the "5.17.1.4 configure" (pg.333).  
This command is almost the same as for the "exit" command except that logout does not  
occur in the operation mode.  
Execution Example  
# configure  
(config)# !  
# !  
#
(Switch to the configuration mode)  
(Return to the operation mode)  
(Still remain without logout)  
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands  
336  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.17.2 Terminal Operation Commands  
This section explains about terminal operation commands.  
5.17.2.1 terminal pager  
Function  
Set the pager functions.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
terminal pager {enable|disable}  
Options  
enable  
Use the pager functions.  
disable  
Do not use the pager functions.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Specify whether or not to use the pager function.  
When using the pager function, the device is placed in the key-in wait state if one screen  
becomes full of output from the executed command. Pressing any keys makes it possible  
to display the continued data or redisplay the previous data. If one screen does not  
become full of command output, the command will exit without being placed in the key-in  
wait state.  
Some commands have too much output data and cannot be redisplayed back or will be  
displayed up to the end without being placed in the key-in wait state.  
The pager function is enabled only for command execution, but not for command  
completion output (to display an argument list, argument description, and command  
format).  
The default screen size of the terminal is 24 lines x 80 columns. For other screen sizes,  
set the number of lines and columns with the "terminal window" command. Omitting the  
screen size will result in a picture distortion. When you log in with the telnet or ssh, the  
number of lines and columns will be set automatically. If a picture distortion occurs, use  
the "terminal window" command to adjust the number of lines and columns.  
The following prompt will appear in the key-in wait state.  
MORE (xx%): (xx indicates the ratio of the number of displayed bytes to the total number  
of bytes.)  
or  
MORE: (when data cannot be redisplayed backward)  
The following lists the keys and operations in the key-in wait state. ^x means pressing the  
[x] key while holding down the [CTRL] key; M-x means pressing the [x] key after pressing  
the [ESC] key.  
Key inputs  
Operations  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0  
Number of lines, Line number, Number of times  
(Specify it before entering the following keys)  
c
Show up to the end  
f ^F ^V  
b ^B M-v  
z
SPACE  
BS  
Skip one screen forward or specified number of lines forward (omit all  
of the skipped lines)  
Skip one screen backward or specified number of lines backward (omit  
all of the skipped lines) *1  
Skip one screen forward after specifying the number of lines for one  
screen  
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands  
337  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Key inputs  
Operations  
w
Skip one screen backward after specifying the number of lines for one  
screen *1  
j ^J e ^E ^N RETURN  
Skip one screen forward or specified number of lines forward (show all  
of the skipped lines)  
k ^K y ^Y ^P ↑  
Skip one screen backward or specified number of lines backward  
(show all of the skipped lines) *1  
d ^D  
u ^U  
g <  
Skip half screen forward after specifying the number of lines for half  
screen  
Skip half screen backward after specifying the number of lines for half  
screen *1  
Show the first screen or all of the lines that follow the specified line  
number *1  
G >  
Show the last screen or all of the lines that follow the specified line  
number  
/search pattern  
Search forward (specified number of times) *1  
Search backward (specified number of times) *1  
Search forward again *1  
?search pattern  
n
N
Search backward again *1  
M-x  
r ^R ^L  
^G  
Execute x (any command) without exit after showing to the end  
Show screen again *1  
Show information (number of lines, number of bytes, ratio)  
Show help (list for key bind)  
h H  
q Q ^C  
Exit  
*1: Display that cannot be retraced is invalid.  
When specifying a line number, specify the line number on the screen. If a one-line  
command output exceeds the specified number of columns on the screen, it is handled  
as multiple lines on the screen. The line number begins with 1.  
The search prompt is expressed by a slash (/) or question mark (?), which makes it  
possible to enter a search pattern. The allowable search pattern is 76 or fewer characters  
in length. When the allowable number of screen columns is less than 80, a search pattern  
input with 80 or over 80 columns results in a picture distortion. In this case, redisplay the  
screen.  
The following lists the special characters available for search pattern. For other  
characters, the characters themselves are subject to searching.  
Special characters  
Search target  
.
An arbitrary character  
^
$
Head of line (Use with a combination of other characters)  
End of line (Use with a combination of other characters)  
Start word (Use with a combination of other characters)  
Quit word (Use with a combination of other characters)  
x (x shall be any character except < >)  
\<  
\>  
\x  
If the target character string is found in the search process, it is highlighted.  
If not found, the following prompt will appear. Press the [RETURN] key. Pressing  
[CTRL+C] will halt the display of command output.  
MORE: pattern not found (press RETURN)  
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands  
338  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
If information is displayed, the following prompt will appear.  
MORE(line 1-22/515 lines, 1428/33473 bytes, 4%):  
- -- ---  
a b c  
---- -----  
-
d
e
f
If it cannot be displayed backward, the following prompt will appear.  
MORE(line 1-22 lines):  
- --  
a b  
Description:  
a: Top line number on screen  
b: Bottom line number on screen  
c: Total number of lines  
d: Number of displayed bytes  
e: Total number of bytes  
f: Ratio of total number of bytes to number of displayed bytes (d / e x 100)  
When a help is displayed, the prompt below will appear following the help. Press the  
[RETURN] key. Pressing [CTRL+C] will halt the display of command output.  
MORE: help (press RETURN)  
Caution  
Default  
When the allowable number of screen lines is less than 3, pager function will not work. In  
addition, when the allowable number of screen columns is less than character string  
prompt results in a picture distortion.  
This command is an operation command; however, the contents specified in the admin  
class can be saved as the configuration by executing the "save" command. This  
command setting can be deleted using the "delete" command in the configuration mode.  
The contents set in the user class are discarded at logout or execution of the "admin"  
command, and they cannot be saved.  
It is assumed that the pager function is not used.  
terminal pager disable  
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands  
339  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.17.2.2 terminal window  
Function  
Set the terminal screen size.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
terminal window [column <column>] [line <line>]  
Options  
column <column>  
Specify the number of digits of the terminal screen with a decimal value.  
line <line>  
Specify the number of lines of the terminal screen with a decimal value.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Specify the screen size of the terminal.  
For telnet or ssh connection, the screen size of the terminal reported from a telnet or ssh  
client is used at connection or changing the screen size.  
If the screen size is changed after reported, this setting value will be used.  
Caution  
Default  
This command is an operation command; however, the contents specified in the admin  
class can be saved as the configuration by executing the "save" command. This  
command setting can be deleted using the "delete" command in the configuration mode.  
The contents set in the user class are discarded at logout or execution of the "admin"  
command, and they cannot be saved.  
Specifying incorrect screen size may cause a display distortion when a command is input  
or executed.  
It is assumed that the screen size of the terminal is set to 80 columns x 24 lines.  
terminal window column 80 line 24  
5.17.2.3 terminal charset  
Function  
Set the Japanese Kanji character codes.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
terminal charset {EUC|SJIS}  
Options  
EUC  
Use the EUC Japanese Kanji character codes on the terminal.  
SJIS  
Use the Shift-JIS Japanese Kanji character codes on the terminal.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Caution  
Specify the Japanese Kanji character codes to be used on the terminal.  
This command is an operation command; however, the contents specified in the admin  
class can be saved as the configuration by executing the "save" command. This  
command setting can be deleted using the "delete" command in the configuration mode.  
The contents set in the user class are discarded at logout or execution of the "admin"  
command, and they cannot be saved.  
Default  
It is assumed that the EUC Japanese Kanji character codes are used on the terminal.  
terminal charset EUC  
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands  
340  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.17.2.4 terminal prompt  
Function  
Set the input prompt.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
terminal prompt login "<prompt>"  
terminal prompt user "<prompt>"  
terminal prompt admin "<prompt>"  
Options  
login  
Set the input prompt during login.  
user  
Set the input command prompt to be used during login with the user class.  
admin  
Set the input command prompt to be used during login with the admin class.  
<prompt>  
Specify a character string of the input prompt. Up to 80 characters are allowed.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class) (user option)  
Operation mode (admin class) (login or admin option)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Specify a character string for login prompt or command input prompt.  
If a space is included in a character string, enclose it in double quotation marks (").  
If the prompt character string contains a special character beginning with a back slash as  
shown below, it will be replaced with an expanded character string.  
Special character  
Expanded character string  
"config2" only if the configuration file name is config2  
Number of file name for the configuration file (1 or 2)  
Date (month/date format)  
\c  
\C  
\d  
\h  
\H  
\m  
\p  
\t  
Host name or Model name (character string before ".")  
Host name or Model name (all character string)  
Model name  
Prompt character string according to the class (including space)  
Time (hour:minute:second format, 24 hour time system)  
Time (hour:minute:second format, 12 hour time system)  
Time (hour:minute NN format, 12 hour time system, NN:am or pm)  
Firmware version  
\T  
\@  
\v  
\w  
\!  
Configuration directory  
History number  
\\  
A single backslash character  
If this device is running with bank0 configuration, "\c" displays no information, including a  
space before or after "\c".  
If the device is running with bank1 configuration, "\c" displays "bank1".  
"\h" or "\H" displays the host name which is set with the "sysname" command.  
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands  
341  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
If the host name is not set, the model name will be displayed instead.  
The following shows the standard prompts of "\p" and "\$".  
State  
Before login  
Standard prompt  
:
When user login  
>
#
When administrator  
login  
Caution  
Default  
This command is an operation command; however, the contents specified in the admin  
class can be saved as the configuration by executing the "save" command. This  
command setting can be deleted using the "delete" command in the configuration mode.  
The contents set in the user class are discarded at logout or execution of the "admin"  
command, and they cannot be saved.  
It is assumed that the following is set.  
terminal prompt login "Login: "  
terminal prompt user "\h \c\w\p"  
terminal prompt admin "\h \c\w\p"  
Execution Example  
# terminal prompt login "Welcome: "  
# terminal prompt user "[\!]\h\w\p"  
# terminal prompt admin "\h bank/\C\w\p"  
#
5.17.2.5 terminal timestamp  
Function  
Set the command execution date and time display function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
terminal timestamp {enable|disable}  
Options  
enable  
Display the date and time when command is executed.  
disable  
Do not display the date and time when command is executed.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Caution  
Specify whether or not to display the date and time on which execute the command.  
This command is an operation command; however, the contents specified in the admin  
class can be saved as the configuration by executing the "save" command. This  
command setting can be deleted using the "delete" command in the configuration mode.  
The contents set in the user class are discarded at logout or execution of the "admin"  
command, and they cannot be saved.  
Default  
It is assumed that the date and time is not displayed when the command is executed.  
terminal timestamp disable  
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands  
342  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.17.2.6 terminal bell  
Function  
Set the bell function to sound in the case of an operation error.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
terminal bell {enable|disable}  
Options  
enable  
Sound a terminal bell in the case of an operation error.  
disable  
Do not sound a terminal bell in the case of an operation error.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Set whether or not to sound the terminal bell when:  
an attempt has been made to enter characters over the maximum number (1022  
characters);  
data has been pasted over the maximum number of characters (1022 characters); or  
no implementation candidate has been found.  
Caution  
Default  
This command is an operation command; however, the contents specified in the admin  
class can be saved as the configuration by executing the "save" command. This  
command setting can be deleted using the "delete" command in the configuration mode.  
The contents set in the user class are discarded at logout or execution of the "admin"  
command, and they cannot be saved.  
It is assumed that the terminal bell is sounded.  
terminal bell enable  
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands  
343  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.17.2.7 terminal logging  
Function  
Set the command execution history log.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
terminal logging line <line>  
Options  
line <line>  
Specify a number for the lines of the command execution history to be logged with a  
decimal value from 0 to 100.  
No command history is logged if zero (0) is specified.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Specify the number of command execution history lines.  
If the number of lines is changed, the history number and history contents are inherited;  
however, if the number of lines has been increased from 0, the history number will begin  
with 1.  
Caution  
Default  
This command is an operation command; however, the contents specified in the admin  
class can be saved as the configuration by executing the "save" command. This  
command setting can be deleted using the "delete" command in the configuration mode.  
The contents set in the user class are discarded at logout or execution of the "admin"  
command, and they cannot be saved.  
It is assumed that the number of command execution history lines is set to 24.  
terminal logging line 24  
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands  
344  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.17.2.8 show terminal  
Function  
Display the terminal information.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show terminal  
N/A  
Options  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Caution  
Display the terminal information.  
This command is an operation command; however, it can be displayed as the  
configuration, where "candidate-config" and "running-config" are displayed with the same  
values.  
If this command is displayed as the configuration, only the set values other than the  
defaults are displayed without being digit-aligned.  
Execution Example  
# show terminal  
pager  
enable  
window  
charset  
prompt  
prompt  
prompt  
column 80 line 24  
EUC  
login "\p"  
user "\u@\h \c\p"  
admin "\u@\h \c\w\p"  
timestamp disable  
bell  
logging  
#
enable  
line 24  
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands  
345  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.17.3 Command Execution History  
This section explains about command execution history.  
5.17.3.1 show logging command  
Function  
Display the command execution history.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show logging command [brief] [all]  
Options  
N/A  
Display detailed the command execution history on the current login line.  
brief  
Display a brief command execution history.  
all  
Display the command execution history on the all login line.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the command execution history.  
The operation mode displays the history of the commands that have been executed in  
the operation mode.  
The configuration mode displays the history of the commands that have been executed in  
the configuration mode.  
The user class displays only the history of the commands that have been executed in the  
user class, with history numbers in a discontinuous manner.  
The admin class displays the history of the commands that have been executed in the  
user and admin classes.  
On a line where the command is not yet executed because the history was being edited,  
an asterisk (*) is displayed following the history number.  
If "*" is displayed, it can be deleted by:  
pressing the [Ctrl+P] or [Up] key to display the line and pressing the [RETURN] key to  
execute the command;  
pressing the [Ctrl+P] or [Up] key to display the line and pressing the [Ctrl+C] key to  
discard the entry contents; or  
pressing the [Ctrl+P] or [Up] key to display the line, pressing the [Ctrl+U] key to blank  
the line, and moving to another history.  
"show logging command all" command displays asterisk (*) before the current login line.  
Caution  
If the history number exceeds 32767, it returns to an appropriate lower history number.  
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands  
346  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Execution Example  
# show logging command  
01/24 08:48:54 * console 0 admin  
01/24 08:49:02 * console 0 admin  
01/24 08:49:11 * console 0 admin  
show system information  
1 show system information  
2 show date  
3 show logging commandDec 01 15:58:55 1  
# show logging command brief  
1 show date  
2 show logging command  
3 show logging command brief  
# show logging command all  
01/24 08:42:21 * console 0 admin  
01/24 08:42:24 * console 0 admin  
01/24 08:42:32 * console 0 admin  
01/24 08:42:34 * console 0 admin  
01/24 08:42:47 * console 0 admin  
1 show logging  
1 show logging command  
3 exit  
4 exit  
5 show logging command  
82 show logging command  
83 show  
84 show users  
85 exit  
01/24 08:42:59  
01/24 08:43:02  
01/24 08:43:10  
01/24 08:43:12  
01/24 08:43:22  
vty 1  
vty 1  
vty 1  
vty 1  
vty 1  
admin  
admin  
admin  
admin  
admin  
86 show logging command  
6 show logging command all  
01/24 08:51:00 * console 0 admin  
# show logging command all  
XG2600# show logging command brief all  
86 show logging command  
87 show logging command  
88 !  
89 show logging command  
90 show system information  
91 show date  
92 show logging command  
93 show logging command brief  
94 show logging command all  
95 show logging command brief all  
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands  
347  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.17.3.2 clear logging command  
Function  
Clear the command execution history.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
clear logging command [all]  
Options  
N/A  
Clear the command execution history on the current login login.  
all  
Clear the command execution history on the all login login.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Erase the command execution history in the operation and configuration modes.  
The command execution history number returns to 1.  
Execution Example  
# clear logging command  
#
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands  
348  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.17.4 Command Alias  
This section explains about commands related to command alias.  
5.17.4.1 alias  
Function  
Set the command alias information.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
alias <alias> "<command>"  
Options  
<alias>  
Specify a command alias name to be assigned, with up to 80 characters.  
This name must begin with an alphabetical character, and it can be followed by  
alphanumeric characters and hyphens (-).  
<command>  
Specify a command name and command options, to be replaced during execution of  
command alias, using a pair of double quotation marks.  
If no name or option is enclosed by a pair of double quotation marks (""), the definition is  
deleted.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Combine the command name and some command options, and set them as a new  
command. Up to 30 commands can be set.  
Specifying the set command alias will delete the previously registered command and the  
specified one is set.  
The set command alias is reflected immediately, and it can be used promptly.  
The set command alias, if executed, will be replaced with the set command name and  
command options to execute the command.  
When executing the command, the options that were input following the command alias  
are assumed to be input succeeding the command name and command options that  
were replaced with the command alias.  
An input line remains in the command execution history without being replaced with a  
command alias.  
Caution  
The following command alias names cannot be registered.  
"exit", "end", "quit", "up", "top", "delete", "show", "clear", "commit", "discard", "save",  
"load", "reset", "moff"  
Other normal command names can be registered as command aliases; however, note  
that the operations of the registered normal commands are changed.  
This command is an operation command; however, the contents specified in the admin  
class can be saved as the configuration by executing the "save" command. This  
command setting can be deleted using the "delete" command in the configuration mode.  
The contents set in the user class are discarded at logout or execution of the "admin"  
command, and they cannot be saved.  
Default  
It is assumed that no data is registered.  
Execution Example  
# alias history "show logging command brief"  
# history  
1 alias history "show logging command brief"  
2 history  
#
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands  
349  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.17.4.2 show alias  
Function  
Display the command alias information.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show alias [<name>]  
Options  
N/A  
Display all command alias information.  
<name>  
Display the information about the specified command alias name.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Caution  
Display command alias information.  
This command is an operation command; however, it can be displayed as the  
configuration, where "candidate-config" and "running-config" are displayed with the same  
values.  
Default  
# show alias  
history "show logging command brief"  
dsplog "show logging syslog"  
# show alias history  
"show logging command brief"  
#
5.17.4.3 clear alias  
Function  
Clear the command alias information.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
clear alias [<name>]  
Options  
N/A  
Delete all command alias information.  
<name>  
Delete the information of the specified command alias name.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Caution  
Delete command alias information.  
This command is an operation command, but it can be deleted with the "delete"  
command in the configuration mode.  
Execution Example  
# clear alias history  
# clear alias  
#
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands  
350  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.17.5 Command Output  
This section explains about commands related to command output operations.  
5.17.5.1 more  
Function  
Display the command output one screen at a time on a display screen.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
<command> | more  
Options  
<command>  
Specify a command to execute.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the command output result on each screen.  
This command acts in the same way as when the "terminal pager enable" command has  
been specified.  
For details on the description, key operations, and cautions, refer to the "5.17.2.1  
Execution Example  
# show running-config | more  
# show running-config | more  
(snip)  
telnetinfo autologout 5m  
MORE(86%):  
#
(Enter "q" to quit display)  
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands  
351  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.17.5.2 tail  
Function  
Display the last part of command output.  
<command> | tail [<lines>]  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
Options  
<command>  
Specify a command to execute.  
<lines>  
Specify the number of lines to be displayed with a decimal number from 1 to 1000.  
The default is 10 lines.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Execute the specified command, and display the last output of the command by the  
specified number of lines.  
If the output of the specified command does not reach the specified number of lines, all  
output will be displayed.  
If the pager "5.17.2.1 terminal pager" (pg.337) is enabled, the pager will act for the output  
(the last output part of the specified command) of this command.  
Caution  
Enter a space character before and after a command pipe character ("|"). A command  
pipe character can be specified only once, and the "tail" command can be specified only  
once.  
A sentence up to a new-line character is assumed to be one line. A statement that is too  
long is divided into multiple lines on the screen, and the number of lines specified in the  
argument may not match that of lines on the screen.  
Specifying a command that requires a long time to execute, may result in a long wait time  
until the command output.  
This command acts for a "display" command such as the "show" command.  
It displays all the command output for a control command such as the "telnet" command.  
Execution Example  
# show logging syslog | tail 3  
Dec 08 15:19:27 192.168.1.1 XG2600: mstpd: Topology Change detected  
Dec 08 15:19:47 192.168.1.1 XG2600: sshd: generated public/private host key pair.  
Dec 08 15:19:52 192.168.1.1 XG2600: logon: login admin on console  
#
Mode and Terminal Operation Commands  
352  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.18 System Operations and Display  
Commands  
This sectionexplains about system operations and display commands.  
5.18.1 System Operations and Display Commands  
This section explains about system operations and display commands.  
5.18.1.1 show system information  
Function  
Display the system information.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show system information  
Options  
N/A  
Display the system information.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the system status and information of the device.  
Execution Example  
# show system information  
Current time : Fri Jan 14 14:00:45 2011  
Startup time : Fri Jan 14 08:40:05 2011  
System : XG2600  
Serial No. : 00000123  
ROM Ver. : 1.3  
---(1)  
---(2)  
---(3)  
---(4)  
---(5)  
---(6)  
---(7)  
---(8)  
---(9)  
---(10)  
---(11)  
ASIC Firm Ver. : 090203PL1  
Firm Ver. : V01.00 NY0001 Tue Nov 14 17:52:15 JST 2006  
Startup-config : Sat Jan 01 13:08:04 2011 config1  
Running-config : Sat Jan 01 13:08:04 2011  
MAC : 000b5d89011  
Memory : 256MB  
1) Current time  
Displays the current date and time.  
2) Startup time  
Displays the date and time when the device started up.  
3) System  
Displays the device name.  
4) Serial No.  
Displays the device serial number.  
5) ROM Ver.  
Displays the ROM version number in the xx.yy format. xx.yy is indicated by a  
decimal value.  
System Operations and Display Commands  
353  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
6) ASIC Firm Ver. (XG2600 Only)  
Displays the ASIC firmware version number in the yymmddPLn format.  
yymmdd is indicated by date (year-month-day).  
PLn shows patch level and n is indicated by digit decimal value.  
7) Firm Ver.  
Displays the firmware version number in the Vxx.yy format.  
"xx.yy is indicated by a two-digit decimal value.  
8) Startup-config  
Displays the date and time when you have saved the configuration to be read  
during device startup, as well as the file name.  
9) Running-config  
Displays the date and time, when you applied the configuration that is currently  
active.  
10) MAC  
Displays the MAC address with a 12-digit hexadecimal value.  
11) Memory  
Displays the memory size installed in the device.  
5.18.1.2 show system status  
Function  
Display the system status.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show system status  
Options  
N/A  
Display the system status.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the dynamic system information of the device.  
Execution Example  
XG0224  
When no Expansion Card is installed.  
# show system status  
Current-time  
Startup-time  
restart_cause  
machine_state  
power0_state  
fan0_state  
: Wed Dec 10 06:07:43 2008  
: Wed Dec 10 06:05:05 2008  
: power on  
: RUNNING  
: NORMAL  
: NORMAL  
---(1)  
---(2)  
---(3)  
---(4)  
---(5)  
---(6)  
---(7)  
inspiration_state  
phy_state  
: NORMAL  
: NORMAL  
slot1_state  
inspiration_temp  
phy_temp  
slot1_temp  
Slot Information  
slot1  
: UNKNOWN  
: 26 C  
: 40 C  
: -- C  
---(8)  
---(9)  
: NO_PRESENT  
System Operations and Display Commands  
354  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
When a CX4 Card is installed.  
# show system status  
Current-time  
Startup-time  
restart_cause  
machine_state  
power0_state  
fan0_state  
: Wed Dec 10 05:55:40 2008  
---(1)  
---(2)  
---(3)  
---(4)  
---(5)  
---(6)  
---(7)  
: Wed Dec 10 05:52:11 2008  
: power on  
: RUNNING  
: NORMAL  
: NORMAL  
: NORMAL  
inspiration_state  
phy_state  
: NORMAL  
slot1_state  
inspiration_temp  
phy_temp  
slot1_temp  
Slot Information  
slot1  
: UNKNOWN  
: 25 C  
: 40 C  
---(8)  
---(9)  
: -- C  
: SJ10GCX4Z  
When a SFP+ Card is installed.  
# show system status  
Current-time  
Startup-time  
restart_cause  
machine_state  
power0_state  
fan0_state  
: Wed Dec 10 06:03:04 2008  
: Wed Dec 10 06:02:19 2008  
: reset  
: RUNNING  
: NORMAL  
: NORMAL  
---(1)  
---(2)  
---(3)  
---(4)  
---(5)  
---(6)  
---(7)  
inspiration_state  
phy_state  
: NORMAL  
: NORMAL  
slot1_state  
inspiration_temp  
phy_temp  
slot1_temp  
Slot Information  
slot1  
: NORMAL  
: 25 C  
: 39 C  
: 39 C  
---(8)  
---(9)  
: SJ10GSFPZ  
1) Current time  
Present date and time.  
2) Startup time  
Date and time when the system started up.  
3) restart_cause  
Cause for the system startup.  
The following system startup causes are displayed:  
power on  
reset  
: The power has been turned on.  
: The reset command has been issued.  
reset switch  
system down  
: The [RESET] switch has been pressed.  
: System-down has occurred.  
4) machine_state  
State of the device  
RUNNING  
: The device is active.  
5) power0_state  
State of the power unit.  
NORMAL  
: The power unit works normally.  
NO_PRESENT : The power unit is not installed.  
FAIL  
: The power unit has been turned off.  
: The power unit is invalid state.  
UNKNOWN  
6) fan0_state  
State of the fan 0.  
NORMAL  
: The fan works normally.  
: The fan has been abnormal.  
: The fan is invalid state.  
ABNORMAL  
UNKNOWN  
System Operations and Display Commands  
355  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
7) inspiration_state  
State of environment temperature monitor.  
phy_state  
State of temperature monitor around PHY.  
slot1_state  
State of Expansion Card temperature monitor (SLOT1).  
NORMAL : The temperature is normal.  
HIGHWARNING : The device changes to a high temperature state.  
HIGHALARM  
UNKNOWN  
: Thermal alarm occurs in the device.  
: There are three following states.  
The Expantion Card without Thermal Sensor is installed. (CX4).  
The Invalid Expantion Card is installed.  
The Expantion Card is not installed.  
8) inspiration_temp  
Environment temperature.  
phy_temp  
temperature around PHY.  
slot1_temp  
temperature around Expansion Card (SLOT1).  
At the time of three following states, "--" is displayed.  
The Expantion Card without Thermal Sensor is installed. (CX4)  
The Invalid Expantion Card is installed.  
The Expantion Card is not installed.  
9) Slot Information  
The type of Expansion Card.  
SJ10GCX4Z  
SJ10GSFPZ  
: Installed Expansion Card is SJ10GCX4Z. (CX4)  
: Installed Expansion Card is SJ10GSFPZ. (SFP+)  
NO_PRESENT : The Expantion Card is not installed.  
UNKNOWN : Installed Expansion Card is Invalid Card.  
XG0448  
When a CX4 Card is installed in Slot 1 and a SFP+ Card is installed in Slot 2.  
# show system status  
Current-time  
Startup-time  
restart_cause  
machine_state  
power0_state  
power_consumption  
fan0_state  
: Tue Dec 9 20:43:01 2008  
: Tue Dec 9 20:42:48 2008  
: power on  
: RUNNING  
: NORMAL  
---(1)  
---(2)  
---(3)  
---(4)  
---(5)  
---(10)  
---(6)  
: 79 W  
: NORMAL  
fan1_state  
: NORMAL  
fan2_state  
: NORMAL  
inspiration_state  
phy_state  
slot1_state  
slot2_state  
inspiration_temp  
phy_temp  
: NORMAL  
: NORMAL  
: UNKNOWN  
: NORMAL  
: 31 C  
---(7)  
---(8)  
: 38 C  
slot1_temp  
: -- C  
slot2_temp  
: 29 C  
Slot Information  
slot1  
slot2  
: SJ10GCX4Z  
: SJ10GSFPZ  
---(9)  
1) Current time  
Present date and time.  
2) Startup time  
Date and time when the system started up.  
System Operations and Display Commands  
356  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
3) restart_cause  
Cause for the system startup.  
The following system startup causes are displayed:  
power on  
reset  
: The power has been turned on.  
: The reset command has been issued.  
reset switch : The [RESET] switch has been pressed.  
system down : System-down has occurred.  
4) machine_state  
State of the device  
RUNNING: The device is active.  
5) power0_state  
State of the power unit.  
NORMAL  
: The power unit works normally.  
NO_PRESENT : The power unit is not installed.  
FAIL  
: The power unit has been turned off.  
: The power unit is invalid state.  
UNKNOWN  
6) fan0_state  
State of the fan 0.  
fan1_state  
State of the fan 1.  
fan2_state  
State of the fan 2.  
NORMAL  
: The fan works normally.  
: The fan has been abnormal.  
: The fan is invalid state.  
ABNORMAL  
UNKNOWN  
7) inspiration_state  
State of environment temperature monitor.  
phy_state  
State of temperature monitor around PHY.  
slot1_state  
State of Expansion Card temperature monitor (SLOT1).  
slot2_state  
State of Expansion Card temperature monitor (SLOT2).  
NORMAL : The temperature is normal.  
HIGHWARNING : The device changes to a high temperature state.  
HIGHALARM  
UNKNOWN  
: Thermal alarm occurs in the device.  
: There are three following states.  
The Expantion Card without Thermal Sensor is installed. (CX4).  
The Invalid Expantion Card is installed.  
The Expantion Card is not installed.  
System Operations and Display Commands  
357  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
8) inspiration_temp  
Environment temperature.  
phy_temp  
temperature around PHY.  
slot1_temp  
temperature around Expansion Card (SLOT1).  
At the time of three following states, "--" is displayed.  
The Expantion Card without Thermal Sensor is installed. (CX4)  
The Invalid Expantion Card is installed.  
The Expantion Card is not installed.  
slot2_temp  
temperature around Expansion Card (SLOT2).  
At the time of three following states, "--" is displayed.  
The Expantion Card without Thermal Sensor is installed. (CX4)  
The Invalid Expantion Card is installed.  
The Expantion Card is not installed.  
9) Slot Information  
The type of Expansion Card.  
SJ10GCX4Z  
SJ10GSFPZ  
: Installed Expansion Card is SJ10GCX4A. (CX4)  
: Installed Expansion Card is SJ10GSFPA. (SFP+)  
NO_PRESENT : The Expantion Card is not installed.  
UNKNOWN  
: Installed Expansion Card is Invalid Card.  
10) power_consumption  
Power consumption of the device.  
XG2600  
# show system status  
Current-time  
Startup-time  
restart_cause  
machine_state  
access_direction  
power_redundancy  
PSU1 state  
: Thu Dec 21 16:04:50 2008  
: Thu Dec 21 16:04:36 2008  
---(1)  
---(2)  
---(3)  
---(4)  
---(5)  
---(6)  
---(7)  
: power on  
: RUNNING  
: front access  
: redundant  
: NORMAL  
PSU2 state  
: NORMAL  
PSU1 type  
: AC  
---(8)  
PSU2 type  
: AC  
power_consumption  
FAN1 state  
: 75 W  
: NORMAL  
---(9)  
---(10)  
FAN2 state  
: NORMAL  
inspiration_state  
inspiration_temp  
warning time  
recover time  
internal_state  
inspiration_temp  
internal_temp  
: NORMAL  
: NORMA  
: Fri Dec 26 14:00:45 2008  
: Fri Dec 26 14:12:30 2008  
: NORMAL  
---(11)  
---(12)  
: 35 C  
: 32 C  
---(13)  
1) Current time  
Present date and time.  
2) Startup time  
Date and time when the system started up.  
System Operations and Display Commands  
358  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
3) restart_cause  
Cause for the system startup.  
The following system startup causes are displayed:  
power on  
reset  
: The power has been turned on.  
: The reset command has been issued.  
reset switch : The [RESET] switch has been pressed.  
system down : System-down has occurred.  
4) machine_state  
State of the device  
RUNNING  
FALLBACK  
: The device is active.  
: The device is into fallback state.  
5) access_direction  
Direction where a device is installed in.  
front access  
rear access  
: The device should be installed forward.  
: The device should be installed backward.  
6) power_redundancy  
State of the redundant power unit.  
single  
: The device has no redundant power unit.  
: The device has a redundant power unit.  
redundant  
7) PSU1 state  
State of the power unit (PSU1).  
PSU2 state  
Type of the power unit (PSU2).  
NORMAL  
: The power unit works normally.  
NO PRESENT : The power unit is not installed.  
NO POWER  
FAIL  
: The power unit has been turned off.  
: The power unit has been abnormal.  
: The power unit is invalid type.  
UNKNOWN  
WARNING  
: The power unit has been incorrectly mounted.  
8) PSU1 type  
Type of the power unit (PSU1).  
PSU2 type  
Type of the power unit (PSU2).  
AC  
--  
: The power unit is AC.  
: The power unit is not installed or invalid type.  
9) power_consumption  
Power consumption of the device.  
10) FAN1 state  
State of the fan module 1.  
FAN2 state  
State of the fan module 2.  
NORMAL  
FAIL  
: The fan module works normally.  
: The fan module has been abnormal.  
NO PRESENT : The fan module is not installed.  
UNKNOWN  
WARNING  
: The fan module is invalid direction.  
: The fan module has been incorrectly mounted.  
System Operations and Display Commands  
359  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
11) inspiration_state  
State of environment temperature monitor.  
internal_state  
State of device inside temperature monitor.  
NORMAL  
WARNING  
ALARM  
: The temperature is normal.  
: The device changes to a high temperature state.  
: Thermal alarm occurs in the device.  
12) State of changing thermal state  
warning time  
recover time  
: The time when a device changed in a high temperature state.  
: The time when a device returned to a normal state.  
13) inspiration_temp  
Environment temperature.  
internal_temp  
Device inside temperature.  
System Operations and Display Commands  
360  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.18.1.3 show tech-support  
Function  
Display all the analysis information.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show tech-support [detail] [save]  
Options  
N/A  
Display the result of the analysis.  
detail  
Display or save detail report.  
save  
Save the result of the analysis to the external media.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
The analysis information such as settings and statuses of this device is collectively  
displayed.  
Use the output capture function of the terminal software to save the output contents of  
this command, or save the result of the analysis to the external media.  
Caution  
The output of this command is displayed constantly even when the pager function  
5.18.1.4 show logging error  
Function  
Display the error log.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show logging error  
N/A  
Options  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Caution  
Display the error log information about system down and hardware diagnosis errors due  
to ROM or input/output driver.  
"Logging time:" indicates GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) if the timezone (time zone  
<offset>) is not specified in the configuration.  
System Operations and Display Commands  
361  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Execution Example  
# show logging error  
Error Logs on FLASH:  
[0] Error Log:  
flag=80,mode=00,unit=10,regsp=00000000  
Firm information:  
XG2600 V01.00 PTF:NY0010  
Error information:  
error code [85020000]  
Logging time:  
2011/01/01(Sat) 11:51:17  
Hardware diagnostic error information:  
Detail [00142224 00142228 00000080 0000341f]  
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]  
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]  
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]  
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]  
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]  
Extended Error Logs:  
[1] Error Log:  
flag=80,mode=00,unit=10,regsp=00000000  
Firm information:  
XG2600 V01.00 PTF:NY0010  
Error information:  
error code [85020000]  
Logging time:  
2011/01/01(Sat) 11:59:37  
Hardware diagnostic error information:  
Detail [00142224 00142228 00000080 00003520]  
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]  
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]  
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]  
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]  
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]  
Error Logs on DRAM:  
[0] Error Log:  
flag=80,mode=00,unit=80,regsp=04ae9e60  
Firm information:  
XG2600 V01.00 PTF:NY0010  
System down information:  
down code [00000080:00000002]  
Logging time:  
2011/01/01(Sat) 13:05:23  
Register:  
srr0  
[0086dab4] srr1  
[0002d000] csrr0  
[00000000] csrr1  
[00000000] mcsr  
[00000000] tsr  
[00000000]  
[00000000]  
[00000000]  
[01124844]  
[a2c9bdbc]  
[00000000]  
[00000000]  
[00000000]  
[00000000]  
[00000000]  
[04aea174]  
mcsrr0 [00000000] mcsrr1 [00000000] mcar  
lr  
[00886d74] dear  
[00000000] gpr01  
[0087a01c] gpr05  
[c1bcb0a1] gpr09  
[aca5a4a5] gpr13  
[00000000] gpr17  
[00000000] gpr21  
[04aea1e0] gpr25  
[00000000] gpr29  
[0087a01c] esr  
gpr00  
gpr04  
gpr08  
gpr12  
gpr16  
gpr20  
gpr24  
gpr28  
[04ae9f60] gpr02  
[00000005] gpr06  
[00000005] gpr10  
[00000000] gpr14  
[00000000] gpr18  
[00000000] gpr22  
[04aea1f0] gpr26  
[ffffffff] gpr30  
[00000005] gpr03  
[010cf924] gpr07  
[d8c4eab7] gpr11  
[00000000] gpr15  
[00000000] gpr19  
[00000000] gpr23  
[0121ff74] gpr27  
[0121ff7c] gpr31  
Peripheral Register:  
err_det [00000000] l2errdet[00000000] eedr  
[00000000] ltesr  
[00000000]  
(To be continued)  
System Operations and Display Commands  
362  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
(Continued)  
User Stack:  
+0  
+4  
+8  
+C  
+0 +4 +8 +C  
04ae9f60 04aea1d0 00886d58 04ae9fb8 04ae9fa0  
04ae9f70 00c6fcbb fea4cebb d8c4eab7 c1bcb0a1  
04ae9f80 a2c9bdbc a8b7c1bc b0a4f2a5 aca5a4a5  
04ae9f90 c9a5e9a5 a4a5f3a4 cba4a2a4 efa4bba4  
04ae9fa0 eba1a30a 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04ae9fb0 04aea1c0 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04ae9fc0 85004100 04aea0b0 0000000a 00000000  
04ae9fd0 04ae9ff0 04ae9fb0 04ae9fb0 00000100  
04ae9fe0 00000000 85004100 00000100 04aea068  
04ae9ff0 04aea020 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04aea000 00000000 04aea0f0 00000007 00000000  
04aea010 00000001 04ae9ff0 04aea000 2066696c  
04aea020 73666572 000002bf 5472616e 01e89be0  
04aea030 42000082 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04aea040 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04aea050 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04aea060 010b0000 04b22114 0000005d 00000000  
04aea070 04aea148 0124269c ffffffff ffffffff  
04aea080 00405cfc 0002d000 ffffffff ffffffff  
04aea090 0087b9dc 00000000 00000000 42002088  
04aea0a0 00000001 00000000 00000000 42002088  
04aea0b0 00000001 0002d000 00000100 00000001  
04aea0c0 0087b6d4 00000000 00000000 42000084  
04aea0d0 00000001 00000100 00000002 035fc300  
04aea0e0 04aea110 01260af0 00004e43 00000020  
04aea0f0 04aea100 01260af0 00004e43 00000020  
04aea100 04aea130 0087b810 01261d28 035fcdc0  
04aea110 04aea140 01260af0 00004e43 42000082  
04aea120 04aea140 00000022 00000000 035fcdc0  
04aea130 04aea140 0087b8c0 00000000 035fcdc0  
04aea140 04aea170 0087a23c 00000022 01230168  
04aea150 04aea1d0 04b11152 00769eec 01230168  
04aea160 00000000 00000022 04b22114 0000005d  
04aea170 00000000 0087a01c 00000000 00000200  
04aea180 04b71ee0 04b22114 01230168 00000022  
04aea190 04aea1a0 00869238 00000000 00000000  
04aea1a0 04aea1c0 00867cd8 00000000 00000000  
04aea1b0 010b0000 04b11152 00769eec 01230168  
04aea1c0 04b71ee0 01240000 010ed184 01230168  
04aea1d0 04aea210 00768d20 00000000 00000000  
04aea1e0 04b71ee0 04aea220 01230168 0121fd30  
04aea1f0 04aea210 007697d4 00769eec 01230168  
04aea200 04b71ee0 01240000 01230168 01240000  
04aea210 04aea330 007685d4 04aea200 fffffffb  
04aea220 4649524d 57415245 2d494e46 4f000000  
04aea230 53522d53 37313643 32000000 00000000  
04aea240 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04aea250 4e593030 31302056 30322e30 30000000  
04aea260 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04aea270 4d6f6e20 46656220 20372031 343a3239  
04aea280 3a353920 4a535420 32303035 00000000  
......mX........  
................  
................  
................  
................  
................  
..A.............  
................  
......A........h  
... ............  
................  
............ fil  
sfer....Tran....  
B...............  
................  
................  
......!....]....  
...H.$&.........  
.@\.............  
............B. .  
............B. .  
................  
............B...  
............._..  
.....&....NC...  
.....&....NC...  
...0.....&.(._..  
...@.&....NCB...  
...@..."....._..  
...@........._..  
...p...<...".#.h  
.......R.v...#.h  
......."..!....]  
................  
......!..#.h..."  
.......8........  
......|.........  
.......R.v...#.h  
.....$.......#.h  
.....v. ........  
....... .#.h.!.0  
.....v...v...#.h  
.....$...#.h.$..  
...0.v..........  
FIRMWARE-INFO...  
XG2600............  
................  
NY0010 V01.00...  
................  
Thu Jan 1 14:29  
:59 JST 2011....  
(To be continued)  
System Operations and Display Commands  
363  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
(Continued)  
04aea290 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000  
................  
04aea2a0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04aea2b0 00000000 00000000 00000000 000001d4  
04aea2c0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04aea2d0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04aea2e0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04aea2f0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04aea300 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04aea310 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04aea320 011395e0 00000004 01240000 01240000  
04aea330 04aea360 00769fe4 00000000 035fcdc0  
04aea340 04aea360 0087a23c 7ffffff0 01230168  
04aea350 00000004 04aea370 01240000 04b71ee0  
................  
................  
................  
................  
................  
................  
................  
................  
.........$...$..  
...`.v......._..  
...`...<.....#.h  
.......p.$......  
Interrupt Stack:  
+0  
+4  
+8  
+C  
+0 +4 +8 +C  
04ae9e60 00000000 04aea1f0 0121ff74 00000000  
04ae9e70 00000000 04ae9f60 00000005 01124844  
04ae9e80 0087a01c 00000005 010cf924 a2c9bdbc  
04ae9e90 c1bcb0a1 00000005 d8c4eab7 00000000  
04ae9ea0 aca5a4a5 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04ae9eb0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04ae9ec0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04ae9ed0 04aea1e0 04aea1f0 0121ff74 00000000  
04ae9ee0 00000000 ffffffff 0121ff7c 04aea174  
04ae9ef0 0086dab4 0002d000 00000000 00000000  
04ae9f00 00886d74 00000005 00000000 42000082  
04ae9f10 00000001 0087a01c 00000000 00000000  
04ae9f20 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04ae9f30 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04ae9f40 00000000 00000000 00000000 04aea170  
04ae9f50 04ae9f60 01260af0 00004e43 00000008  
# exit  
.........!.t....  
.......`......HD  
...........$....  
................  
................  
................  
................  
.........!.t....  
.........!.|...t  
................  
..mt........B...  
................  
................  
................  
...............p  
...`.&....NC....  
System Operations and Display Commands  
364  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.18.1.5 clear logging error  
Function  
Clear the error log.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
clear logging error  
N/A  
Options  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Clear all the error logs.  
Execution Example  
# clear logging error  
#
5.18.1.6 show logging syslog  
Function  
Display the system log information.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show logging syslog  
N/A  
Options  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Caution  
Display system log information. This command can display &syslognum; pieces or more  
of information in the chronological order, most recent first.  
Turning the device power Off or executing the clear logging syslog command will clear  
system log information.  
System log information is not cleared by executing the "reset" command or pressing the  
[RESET] switch to reset this device; however, by way of exception, if the system is reset  
after firmware was updated, system log information will be cleared.  
Execution Example  
# show logging syslog  
Dec 13 15:52:31 192.168.1.1 XG2600: init: system startup now.  
Dec 13 15:52:31 192.168.1.1 XG2600: sshd: generating public/private host key pair.  
Dec 13 15:52:40 192.168.1.1 XG2600: protocol: ether 1 link up  
Dec 13 15:52:40 192.168.1.1 XG2600: protocol: lan 0 link up  
System Operations and Display Commands  
365  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.18.1.7 clear logging syslog  
Function  
Clear the system log information.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
clear logging syslog  
N/A  
Options  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Clear all the system log information.  
Execution Example  
# clear logging syslog  
#
5.18.1.8 clear statistics  
Function  
Clear all the statistics.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
clear statistics  
N/A  
Options  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Clear all the statistics.  
Execution Example  
# clear statistics  
#
System Operations and Display Commands  
366  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.18.1.9 show date  
Function  
Display the current date and time of the device.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show date  
N/A  
Options  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the current device date and time of the device.  
Execution Example  
# show date  
Sat Jan 01 14:26:00 2011 ---(1)  
1) Displays the current date and time.  
5.18.1.10date  
Function  
Display and set the current date and time of the device.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
date [YYYY/MM/DD.hh:mm:ss]  
Options  
N/A  
Display the current device date and time of the device.  
YYYY/MM/DD.hh:mm:ss  
Set the specified date and time. (Effective for admin class only)  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display and set the current date and time of the device.  
Execution Example  
To display the date and time  
# date  
Sat Jan 01 14:26:00 2011  
#
To set the date and time  
# date 2011/01/01.14:26:00  
#
System Operations and Display Commands  
367  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.18.1.11rdate  
Function  
Set the date and time of the remote host into this device.  
rdate  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
Options  
N/A  
Set the date and time of the remote host in this device.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Obtain the date and time of the remote host (time server) specified in the time auto  
server, and set them as the date and time of this device.  
Execution Example  
# rdate  
Sat Jan 01 14:26:00 2011  
#
5.18.1.12reset  
Function  
Restart the device.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
reset [<filename>]  
reset clear  
Options  
N/A  
Restart the device.  
<filename>  
Specify the "startup-config" file to be read during startup.  
config1  
Read configuration 1.  
config2  
Read configuration 2.  
clear  
Initialize the settings and restart the device.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Restart the device in about 6 seconds.  
Execution Example  
# reset  
#
System Operations and Display Commands  
368  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.19 Configuration Display, Delete and  
Operation Commands  
This section explains about commands related to configuration definition information.  
5.19.1 Configuration Display Commands  
This section explains about commands related to configuration display.  
5.19.1.1 show candidate-config  
Function  
Display the configuration being edited.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show candidate-config [all] [<config>]  
Options  
all  
Display all configuration including default values.  
If omitted, only the modified configuration is displayed.  
<config>  
Display the configuration beginning with <config>.  
The <config> section is NOT included in the configuration to be displayed.  
If omitted, all configurations are displayed.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the currently edited configuration.  
Execution Example  
# show candidate-config lan 0  
ip address 192.168.0.1/24 3  
ip rip use v1 v1 0 off  
#
Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands  
369  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.19.1.2 show running-config  
Function  
Display the configuration during operation.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show running-config [all] [<config>]  
Options  
all  
Display all configuration including default values.  
If omitted, only the modified configuration is displayed.  
<config>  
Display the configuration beginning with <config>.  
The <config> section is NOT included in the configuration to be displayed.  
If omitted, all configurations are displayed.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the currently running configuration.  
Execution Example  
# show running-config lan 1  
ip address 192.168.1.1/24 3  
ip rip use v1 v1 0 off  
5.19.1.3 show startup-config  
Function  
Display the configuration to be used for device startup.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show startup-config [<config>]  
Options  
<config>  
Display the configuration beginning with <config>.  
The character string, containing all options, characters and digits, without changing,  
displayed by the "show running-config" or "show candidate-config" command must be  
specified in the <config> option.  
The <config> section is not included in the configuration to be displayed.  
If omitted, all configurations are displayed.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the configuration that was used at startup or the saved startup configuration.  
Execution Example  
# show startup-config  
lan 0 ip address 192.168.0.1/24 3  
lan 0 vlan 1  
syslog pri error,warn,info  
syslog facility 23  
telnetinfo autologout 5m  
time zone 0900  
Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands  
370  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.19.1.4 diff  
Function  
Display the configuration difference.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
diff <src_filename> <dst_filename>  
Options  
<src_filename>  
Specify the name of the compare source file.  
<dst_filename>  
Specify the name of the compare target file.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display only the differences between the specified files. The information only in  
<src_filename> begins with "<" and one only in <filename2> begins with ">".  
The following file names can be specified.  
candidate-config : Currently edited configuration file  
running-config  
startup-config  
config1  
: Running configuration file  
: Startup configuration file  
: Configuration 1 file  
config2  
: Configuration 2 file  
Execution Example  
# diff candidate-config running-config  
===  
> vlan 1 name rmt1  
===  
< vlan 3 name rmt3  
< vlan 4 name rmt4  
< vlan 5 name rmt5  
< vlan 6 name rmt6  
---  
> vlan 3 name inter3  
===  
< vlan 8 name rmt8  
< vlan 9 name rmt9  
< vlan 10 name rmt10  
< syslog server 192.168.33.63  
#
Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands  
371  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.19.2 Configuration Delete Commands  
This section explains about commands related to configuration delete.  
5.19.2.1 delete  
Function  
Delete the configuration being edited.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
delete <config>  
Options  
<config>  
Configuration command  
Specify the name and arguments of the configuration command to be deleted.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Delete the specified configuration to return to the default state.  
All the commands that begin with the command name and arguments specified in  
<config> are subject to deletion.  
Specifying only the command name deletes all the configuration beginning with the  
specified command name. The number of arguments that can be specified in the config  
command varies depending on commands; in most cases, it is possible to specify up to  
the argument that precedes a variable value.  
Caution  
Login password information cannot be deleted unless up to "set" is specified as shown  
below.  
delete password set  
delete password user set  
Execution Example  
The following shows an execution example when deleting all IPv4 address information of  
lan 0.  
(config)# delete lan 0 ip address  
Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands  
372  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.19.3 Configuration Operation Commands  
This section explains about commands related to configuration definition information operations.  
5.19.3.1 load  
Function  
Read (or load) the configuration.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
load <filename>  
Options  
<filename>  
Specify the name of the file to be read (or loaded).  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Read the specified configuration.  
All the data being set will be invalid.  
The following file names can be specified.  
running-config : Running configuration file  
startup-config : Startup configuration file  
config1  
config2  
: Configuration 1 file  
: Configuration 2 file  
Message  
load failed: config read error  
Since the device has a high communication load, it failed in reading the configuration.  
Stop the communication load, and execute the command again.  
<WARNING> weak admin password: set the password  
The administrator password is not set.  
Set an administrator password.  
<WARNING> weak admin password: contain at least 8 characters  
The administrator password is seven or fewer characters in length.  
Set an administrator password with eight or more characters.  
<WARNING> weak admin password: contain a different kind of character  
The administrator password consists of only alphabetic characters or only numeric  
characters.  
Set an administrator password with alphanumeric characters and symbols mixed.  
<WARNING> weak user password: contain at least 8 characters  
The user password is seven or fewer characters in length.  
Set a user password with eight or more characters.  
<WARNING> weak user password: contain a different kind of character  
The user password consists of only alphabetic characters or only numeric characters.  
Set a user password with alphanumeric characters and symbols mixed.  
Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands  
373  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Execution Example  
# load config1  
#
5.19.3.2 save  
Function  
Save the configuration.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
save [<filename>]  
Options  
N/A  
Overwrite the existing "startup-config" file with the "candidate-config" file contents.  
<filename>  
Overwrite the file specified with the "candidate-config" file contents.  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Overwrite the file specified with the "candidate-config" file contents.  
Omitting options will overwrite the contents on the current startup-config file.  
The following file names can be specified.  
startup-config : Startup configuration file  
config1  
config2  
: Configuration 1 file  
: Configuration 2 file  
Execution Example  
# save  
#
Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands  
374  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.19.3.3 commit  
Function  
Commit (or dynamically activate) the configuration.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
commit  
Options  
N/A  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Apply the configuration that was set or changed with the configuration command, without  
device restart.  
Caution  
Changing the configuration may cause the communication interface to come down once  
in order to apply address information in the device, resulting in a communication  
interrupt.  
Reference  
Message  
<ERROR> Need to do reset after execute the save command.  
Since unallowable configuration was added or changed, it cannot be applied.  
Execute the "reset" command after the "save" command, and restart the device.  
<WARNING> The candidate-config is not changed.  
No configuration is added or changed.  
It is not necessary to execute the commit command.  
Execution Example  
# commit  
#
Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands  
375  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.19.3.4 commit try time  
Function  
Try to commit (dynamically activate) the candidate config, or re-commit the startup-config  
if the try time period expires.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
commit try time <time>  
Options  
<time>  
Specify a time period (from 1m to 24h) until retrieving the startup-config.  
The unit shall be d (day), h (hour), or m (minute).  
Use Mode  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Apply the configuration that was set or changed with the configuration command, without  
device restart, and retrieve the startup-config in the specified time.  
Caution  
During commit try time period the following cannot be executed:  
commit try time  
If you want to execute these commands, please cancel retrieving the startup-config,  
using "commit try cancel" command.  
When the configuration is retrieved, complete the cancellation with this command  
sequence:  
load startup-config  
commit  
If the startup-config (config0 or config1) is not same the configuration before editing for  
try, Old configuration would be lost.  
Reference  
Message  
<ERROR> Need to do reset after execute the save command.  
Since "commit try time" command already working, it cannot be applied.  
Execute after canceling retrieving the startup-config by the "commit try cancel" command.  
<ERROR> Waiting switch-back to old configuration  
An unallowable configuration was created and cannot be applied.  
Execute the "reset" command after the "save" command to restart the device.  
<WARNING> The candidate-config is not changed.  
No configuration is added or changed.  
It is not necessary to execute the commit command.  
Execution Example  
# commit try time 10m commit  
#
Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands  
376  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.19.3.5 commit try cancel  
Function  
Cancel retrieving the startup-config after using the "commit try time" command.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
commit try cancel  
Options  
N/A  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Message  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Cancel retrieving the startup-config after using the "commit try time" command.  
<ERROR> Not waiting switch-back  
The command is not applicable. A "commit try time" command was not previously  
invoked.  
Execution Example  
# commit try cancel  
#
Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands  
377  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.19.3.6 discard  
Function  
Discard the changes of configuration.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
discard  
Options  
N/A  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Discard changes of candidate-config, and return to the same contents as for running-  
config.  
Message  
<WARNING> weak admin password: set the password  
The administrator password is not set.  
Set an administrator password.  
<WARNING> weak admin password: contain at least 8 characters  
The administrator password is seven or fewer characters in length.  
Set an administrator password with eight or more characters.  
<WARNING> weak admin password: contain a different kind of character  
The administrator password consists of only alphabetic characters or only numeric  
characters.  
Set an administrator password with alphanumeric characters and symbols mixed.  
<WARNING> weak user password: contain at least 8 characters  
The user password is seven or fewer characters in length.  
Set a user password with eight or more characters.  
<WARNING> weak user password: contain a different kind of character  
The user password consists of only alphabetic characters or only numeric characters.  
Set a user password with alphanumeric characters and symbols mixed.  
Execution Example  
# discard  
Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands  
378  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.19.4 File Operation Commands  
This section explains about commands related to File Operation Commands.  
5.19.4.1 dir  
Function  
Displays a list of files.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
dir [<filename>]  
Options  
<filename>  
Specifies the name of the file or directory to be displayed. The dir command will only  
display files or directories that match this parameter. If a directory is specified, the files  
inside that directory will be displayed. Wildcards may be used with this option. Valid  
wildcards are listed below.  
*  
matches all character strings, regardless of length.  
?  
matches any single character.  
[<char>]  
matches a target including any of the characters in <char>.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Displays a list of files on external media.  
Execution Example  
# dir  
Directory of /cf0  
---(1)  
(4) (5)  
(2)  
(3)  
2011/01/15 11:55  
2011/01/15 11:55  
2011/01/15 11:55  
2011/01/15 11:55  
2011/01/15 11:55  
2011/01/17 03:16  
2011/01/17 01:58  
1445 CONFIG2.TXT  
1445 CONFIG3.TXT  
1445 CONFIG4.TXT  
1445 CONFIG11.TXT  
1445 CONFIG1.TXT  
2337531 FIRM  
<DIR>  
TEST  
total file 6  
total directory 1  
# dir test/*.*  
Directory of /cf0/test  
2011/01/16 10:23  
2011/01/17 01:58  
3142 CONFIG2.TXT  
<DIR> BKUP  
total file 1  
total directory 1  
1) If CompactFlash /cf0, if USB memory /um0  
2) Displays file last modified date.  
3) Displays <DIR> if directory.  
4) If a regular file, displays file size in bytes.  
5) Displays file or directory name.  
Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands  
379  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.19.4.2 copy  
Function  
Copies a file.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
copy <src_filename> <dst_filename>  
Options  
<src_filename>  
The source file to be copied.  
<dst_filename>  
The target file name.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Copies a file.  
Filenames can be any of the below.  
Filenames that can be used for <src_filename>:  
candidate-config : candidate configuration file  
running-config  
startup-config  
config1  
: Running configuration file  
: Startup configuration file  
: Configuration 1 file  
: Configuration 2 file  
: Firmware  
config2  
firmware  
/cf0/anyfilename : A file on CompactFlash media  
/um0/anyfilename : A file on USB memory  
Filenames that can be used for <dst_filename>:  
startup-config  
config1  
: Startup configuration file  
: Configuration 1 file  
: Configuration 2 file  
: Firmware  
config2  
firmware  
/cf0/anyfilename : A file on CompactFlash media  
/um0/anyfilename : A file on USB memory  
Execution Example  
# copy conifg1 startup-config  
#
Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands  
380  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.19.4.3 remove  
Function  
Deletes a file.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
remove <filename>  
Options  
<filename>  
Name of file to be deleted.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Displays a list of files on external media.  
Execution Example  
# remove config1_cf  
#
5.19.4.4 rename  
Function  
Renames a file.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
rename <old_filename> <new_filename>  
Options  
<old_filename>  
The name of the file to be renamed.  
<new_filename>  
The new file name.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Renames a file on external media.  
Execution Example  
# rename config1_cf config1_cf_old  
#
Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands  
381  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.19.4.5 format  
Function  
Formats.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
format  
N/A  
Options  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Formats external media, restoring to factory state.  
Execution Example  
# format  
#
Configuration Display, Delete and Operation Commands  
382  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.20 Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and  
Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
This section explains commands related to Ethernet.  
5.20.1 Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display  
Commands  
This section explains the commands related to Ethernet counter, log, statistics, and status display commands.  
5.20.1.1 show ether  
Function  
Display the Ethernet physical port information.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show ether [line <line>]  
Options  
N/A  
Display all information.  
line <line>  
Display the specified port information.  
No information is displayed if the specified port number is invalid.  
Range  
Model  
1 to 26  
1 to 52  
XG0224  
XG0448  
XG02600  
1 to 26,m1  
When specifying multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When specifying sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Examples: "1-8")  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the specified Ethernet port information.  
If the "line" option is specified, the information of the target port is displayed.  
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
383  
Commands  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Execution Example  
B9F# show ether line 1-7  
[ETHER PORT-1]  
status  
: down  
---(1)  
flow control  
type  
since  
config  
linkcontrol  
: -  
: Normal  
---(2)  
---(3)  
---(4)  
---(5)  
---(6)  
: Jan 1 00:00:02 GMT 1970  
: -  
: online, recovery(-), downrelay(-)  
[ETHER PORT-2]  
status  
: down  
flow control  
type  
: -  
: Normal  
since  
config  
: Jan 1 00:00:02 GMT 1970  
: -  
linkcontrol  
: online, recovery(-), downrelay(-)  
[ETHER PORT-3]  
status  
: down  
flow control  
type  
: -  
: Normal  
since  
config  
: Jan 1 00:00:02 GMT 1970  
: -  
linkcontrol  
: online, recovery(-), downrelay(-)  
[ETHER PORT-4]  
status  
: down  
flow control  
type  
: -  
: Normal  
since  
config  
: Jan 1 00:00:02 GMT 1970  
: -  
linkcontrol  
: online, recovery(-), downrelay(-)  
[ETHER PORT-5]  
status  
: down  
flow control  
type  
: -  
: Normal  
since  
config  
: Jan 1 00:00:02 GMT 1970  
: -  
linkcontrol  
: online, recovery(-), downrelay(-)  
[ETHER PORT-6]  
status  
: down  
flow control  
type  
: -  
: Normal  
since  
config  
: Jan 1 00:00:02 GMT 1970  
: -  
linkcontrol  
: online, recovery(-), downrelay(-)  
[ETHER PORT-7]  
status  
: down  
flow control  
type  
: -  
: Normal  
since  
config  
: Jan 1 00:00:02 GMT 1970  
: -  
linkcontrol  
: online, recovery(-), downrelay(-)  
XG2600#  
1) Port state  
Displays the speed and state when the connection has been completed.  
disable: Indicates that the port is not used based on the definition.  
offline : Indicates that the port is in the offline state.  
Offline also indicates the following states depending on the cause:  
offline (loopdetect): Port offline by loop detection function  
offline (storm): Port offline by storm control function  
offline (startup): Port offline by startup-time block function  
offline (recovery):  
Port offline by automatic recovery stop function  
offline (downrelay): Port offline by linkdown relay function  
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
384  
Commands  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
offline (backup): Port offline by backup port function  
offline (icmpwatch):  
Port offline by ether L3 monitoring function  
down : Indicates that the port is in the linkdown state.  
auto : Indicates that automatic negotiation is enabled.  
10M/100M/1000M/10G:  
Indicates the baud rate (10Mbps, 100Mbps, 1000Mbps or 10Gbps) of  
the currently linked Ethernet port.  
Full/Half:  
Indicates the full duplex or half duplex mode of the currently linked port.  
MDI/MDI-X:  
Indicates the type of the currently linked MDI.  
2) Flow control state  
Displays in the sending or receiving order of the flow control.  
on  
off  
-
: Indicates that the flow control is enabled.  
: Indicates that the flow control is disabled.  
: Indicates that the port is undefined because it is not in the linkup state.  
3) Port type  
Indicates the port type.  
Normal: Indicates that the port is used as a normal port.  
Mirror : Indicates that the port is used as a target port for mirroring.  
LinkAggregation:  
Indicates that the port is used as a link aggregation port.  
This parameter also indicates the number of the link aggregation group  
that the port belongs to.  
"*LinkAggregation" is displayed when the link aggregation port is not  
linked up as a multiplexed link in the linkup state.  
Backup:  
Indicates that the port is used as a backup port.  
This parameter also indicates the number of the backup group that the  
port belongs to as well as the master or backup type.  
"Standby" is displayed to a standby port.  
Backup LA:  
Indicates that the port is used as a backup link aggregation port.  
This parameter also indicates the number of the link aggregation group  
that the port belongs to.  
It further indicates the number of the backup group that the port belongs  
to as well as the master or backup type.  
"Standby" is displayed to a standby port.  
"*standby" is displayed when the port is not established (not switched)  
as a link aggregation standby port in the linkup state.  
"*LA" is displayed when the link aggregation port is not linked up as a  
multiplexed link in the linkup state.  
: Indicate indetermination by unused port or definition contradiction.  
4) State transition time  
Displays the time when the port has changed to the current state.  
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
385  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5) Configuration  
Indicates setting value of "ether mode" command and "ether mdi" command.  
mode (setting value):  
Indicates the setting value of "ether mode" as mode (auto).  
mdi (setting value):  
Indicates the setting value of "ether mdi" as mdi (auto).  
-
: For the server port "-" will be displayed because it only supports 1000M  
fixed operation.  
6) Link control information  
Indicates link control information.  
online : Indicates that the port runs in the online state during device startup or  
during dynamic definition reflection.  
offline : Indicates that the port runs in the offline state during device startup or  
during dynamic definition reflection.  
recovery (Upper limit: Current value):  
Indicates the upper limit of the linkdown count specified in "ether  
recovery limit" as well as the current linkdown count.  
If the upper limit of the linkdown count is not set, the upper limit and  
current value are indicated by hyphens (-) respectively.  
downrelay (Link port list):  
Displays link port list information when using the linkdown relay  
function.  
The linkdown relay function, if not used, is indicated by a hyphen (-).  
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
386  
Commands  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.20.1.2 show ether brief  
Function  
Display the information about Ethernet physical ports briefly.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show ether brief  
Options  
N/A  
Display all information.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the Ethernet port information briefly.  
Execution Example  
# show ether brief  
port status  
type  
media mdi  
speed duplex flow  
----- -------- ------------------ ------ ----- ------ ------- -----  
(1)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
(2)  
up  
up  
up  
up  
up  
up  
(3)  
normal  
normal  
linkaggregation1  
linkaggregation1  
linkaggregation1  
linkaggregation1  
(4)  
(5)  
(6)  
(7)  
(8)  
TxRx  
Rx  
TxRx  
TxRx  
TxRx  
TxRx  
-
metal MDIX 1000M full  
metal MDI  
metal -  
metal -  
metal -  
metal -  
1000M full  
1000M full  
1000M full  
1000M full  
1000M full  
offline normal  
up backup1  
standby backup1  
-
-
-
-
metal MDIX 1000M full  
metal MDIX 1000M full  
-
-
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
down  
down  
up  
normal  
normal  
linkaggregation4  
linkaggregation4  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Tx  
Tx  
-
metal MDIX 1000M full  
metal MDIX 1000M full  
-
-
-
metal MDIX 1000M full  
metal MDIX 1000M full  
metal MDIX 1000M full  
metal MDIX 1000M full  
metal -  
metal -  
metal -  
metal -  
metal -  
metal -  
up  
disable normal  
disable normal  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
down  
up  
up  
up  
up  
up  
up  
up  
up  
up  
up  
mirror  
normal  
normal  
normal  
normal  
normal  
normal  
normal  
normal  
normal  
normal  
Rx  
Rx  
Rx  
Rx  
Rx  
Rx  
Rx  
Rx  
Rx  
Rx  
1000M full  
1000M full  
1000M full  
1000M full  
1000M full  
1000M full  
#
1) Port number  
2) Port state  
up  
: Indicates that the port is in the linkup state.  
: Indicates that the port is in the linkdown state.  
down  
standby : Indicates that the port is in the standby state. (backup port only)  
"*standby" is displayed when the port is not established (not  
switched) as a standby port in the linkup state.  
offline  
: Indicates that the port is in the offline state.  
disable : Indicates that the port is not used based on the definition.  
3) Port type  
normal  
mirror  
: Indicates that the port is used as a normal port.  
: Indicates that the port is used as a target port for mirroring.  
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
387  
Commands  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
linkaggregation:  
Indicates that the port is used as a link aggregation port.  
This parameter also indicates the number of the link aggregation  
group that the port belongs to.  
"*linkaggregation" is displayed when the link aggregation port is  
not linked up as a multiplexed link in the linkup state.  
backup  
: Indicates that the port is used as a backup port.  
It further indicates the number of the backup group that the port  
belongs to.  
backup LA : Indicates that the port is used as a backup link aggregation port.  
This parameter also indicates the number of the link aggregation  
group that the port belongs to.  
It further indicates the number of the backup group that the port  
belongs to.  
"*LA" is displayed when the link aggregation port is not linked up  
as a multiplexed link in the linkup state.  
4) Media type of the Ethernet port  
Indicates that the 10/100/1000BASE-T port or 10/100BASE-TX is used.  
-: Indicates that the port is undefined because it is not in the linkup state.  
5) MDI state of the Ethernet port  
MDI/MDIX:  
Indicates the type of the currently linked MDI. (When the media type is metal)  
-: Indicates that the port is undefined because it is not in the linkup state.  
[Note]  
For the server port, even it is in the linkup state the state stays in  
"-".  
6) Link speed of the Ethernet port  
10M/100M/1000M/10G:  
Indicates the baud rate (10Mbps, 100Mbps, 1000Mbps or 10Gbps) of the  
currently linked Ethernet port.  
-: Indicates that the port is undefined because it is not in the linkup state.  
7) Duplex state of the Ethernet port  
full/half:  
Indicates the full duplex or half duplex mode of the currently linked port.  
-: Indicates that the port is undefined because it is not in the linkup state, or that  
the port is a Fiber port.  
8) Flow control state of the Ethernet port  
Tx: Indicates that the flow control sending function is enabled.  
Rx: Indicates that the flow control receiving function is enabled.  
-: Indicates that the port is undefined because it is not in the linkup state, and  
that the flow control function is disabled.  
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
388  
Commands  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.20.1.3 show ether statistics  
Function  
Display the statistics of Ethernet physical ports.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show ether statistics [line <line>] [detail]  
Options  
N/A  
Display all the statistics.  
line <line>  
Display the statistics of the specified port.  
No statistics are displayed if the specified port number is invalid.  
The management port is specified by "m1".  
The port for an internal connection that ties each switch device is specified by "C1".  
Range  
Model  
1 to 26  
XG0224  
XG0448  
XG02600  
1 to 52, c1 to c4  
1 to 26,m1  
When specifying multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
The specification of the port simultaneously other than m1 and m1 are also possible.  
The specification of the port simultaneously other than c1 to c4 and c1 to c4 are also  
possible.  
When specifying sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
detail  
Display the statistics of the Ethernet ports together with related detailed information.  
Even if detail is specified, the content of the display is not added for the m1 port.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the statistics of the Ethernet physical port.  
Specifying only the "line" option will display the statistics of the target port.  
The relation between the port number and the switch device of XG0448 is shown.  
Range  
1 to 24,51,52  
25 to 50  
switch device  
switch device 0  
switch device 1  
Connected port between switch devices is called an "internal connection port".  
The relation between the internal connected port number and the switch device is shown.  
Range  
switch device  
c1,c2  
c3,c4  
switch device 0  
switch device 1  
C1 is connected with C3. C2 is connected with c4.  
The statistics are cleared if this device is restarted.  
Caution  
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
389  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Execution Example  
Example of executing XG0224  
#show ether statistics line 1  
[ETHER PORT-1 STATISTICS]  
[Input Statistics]  
Octets  
bits/sec  
Frames  
frames/sec  
Unicast  
frames/sec  
Multicast  
frames/sec  
Broadcast  
frames/sec  
Pause frames  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
---(1)  
---(2)  
---(3)  
---(4)  
---(5)  
---(6)  
---(7)  
---(8)  
---(9)  
---(10)  
---(11)  
Discards  
All DiscardsPkts  
Errors  
: 0  
---(12)  
Undersize  
FCSErrors  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
---(13)  
---(14)  
---(15)  
---(16)  
---(17)  
---(18)  
---(19)  
AlignmentErrors  
FragmentErrors  
Jabbers  
SymbolErrors  
UnknownOpcodes  
[Output Statistics]  
Octets  
bits/sec  
Frames  
frames/sec  
Unicast  
Multicast  
frames/sec  
Broadcast  
frames/sec  
Pause frames  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
---(20)  
---(21)  
---(22)  
---(23)  
---(24)  
---(25)  
---(26)  
---(27)  
---(28)  
---(29)  
Discards  
DelayExceededDiscards  
Queue Full Discards  
Errors  
: 0  
: 0  
---(30)  
---(31)  
FCSErrors  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
---(32)  
---(33)  
---(34)  
---(35)  
---(36)  
FragmentErrors  
CarrierSenseErrors  
ExcessiveCollisions  
LateCollisions  
SingleCollisionFrames  
MultipleCollisionFrames  
DeferredTransmissions  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
---(37)  
---(38)  
---(39)  
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
390  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Execution example when detail of XG0224 (Giga port) is specified  
# show ether statistics line 1 detail  
[ETHER PORT-1 STATISTICS]  
[Input Statistics]  
Octets  
bits/sec  
Frames  
frames/sec  
Unicast  
frames/sec  
Multicast  
frames/sec  
Broadcast  
frames/sec  
Pause frames  
Mac Control frames  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
---(42)  
Discards  
All DiscardsPkts  
Resource Full  
Discards by Filter  
Port In Discards  
Policy Discards  
VLAN dropped  
Input Discards  
Errors  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
---(43)  
---(44)  
---(45)  
---(46)  
---(47)  
---(48)  
Undersize  
FCSErrors  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
AlignmentErrors  
FragmentErrors  
Jabbers  
SymbolErrors  
UnknownOpcodes  
[Output Statistics]  
Octets  
bits/sec  
Frames  
frames/sec  
Unicast  
Multicast  
frames/sec  
Broadcast  
frames/sec  
Pause frames  
Mac Control frames  
Jabbers  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
---(49)  
---(50)  
Discards  
DelayExceededDiscards  
Internal Discards  
Queue Full Discards  
Errors  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
---(51)  
FCSErrors  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
FragmentErrors  
CarrierSenseErrors  
ExcessiveCollisions  
LateCollisions  
InternalCellErrors  
SingleCollisionFrames  
MultipleCollisionFrames  
DeferredTransmissions  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
(To be continued)  
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
391  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
(Continued)  
[Input Detail Statistics]  
Frame size  
64  
frames  
: 0  
frames/sec  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
---(52)  
---(53)  
---(54)  
---(55)  
---(56)  
---(57)  
---(58)  
---(59)  
---(60)  
65-127  
128-255  
256-511  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
512-1023  
1024-1518  
1519-2047  
2048-4095  
4096-9216  
[Output Detail Statistics]  
Frame size  
64  
frames  
frames/sec  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
---(61)  
---(62)  
---(63)  
---(64)  
---(65)  
---(66)  
---(67)  
---(68)  
---(69)  
65-127  
128-255  
256-511  
512-1023  
1024-1518  
1519-2047  
2048-4095  
4096-9216  
Execution example when detail of XG0224 (10Giga port) is specified  
# show ether statistics line 26 detail  
[ETHER PORT-26 STATISTICS]  
[Input Statistics]  
Octets  
bits/sec  
Frames  
frames/sec  
Unicast  
frames/sec  
Multicast  
frames/sec  
Broadcast  
frames/sec  
Pause frames  
Mac Control frames  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
Discards  
All DiscardsPkts  
Resource Full  
Discards by Filter  
Port In Discards  
Policy Discards  
VLAN dropped  
Input Discards  
Errors  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
Undersize  
FCSErrors  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
AlignmentErrors  
FragmentErrors  
Jabbers  
SymbolErrors  
UnknownOpcodes  
(To be continued)  
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
392  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
(Continued)  
[Output Statistics]  
Octets  
bits/sec  
Frames  
frames/sec  
Unicast  
Multicast  
frames/sec  
Broadcast  
frames/sec  
Pause frames  
Mac Control frames  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
Discards  
DelayExceededDiscards  
Internal Discards  
Queue Full Discards  
Errors  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
FCSErrors  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
FragmentErrors  
CarrierSenseErrors  
ExcessiveCollisions  
LateCollisions  
InternalCellErrors  
SingleCollisionFrames  
: 0  
MultipleCollisionFrames : 0  
DeferredTransmissions  
: 0  
[Input Detail Statistics]  
Frame size  
64  
frames  
frames/sec  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
65-127  
128-255  
256-511  
512-1023  
1024-1518  
1519-2047  
2048-4095  
4096-9216  
9217-16383  
[Output Detail Statistics]  
Frame size  
64  
---(70)  
frames  
frames/sec  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
65-127  
128-255  
256-511  
512-1023  
1024-1518  
1519-2047  
2048-4095  
4096-9216  
9217-16383  
---(71)  
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
393  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Execution Example (XG0448)  
XG0448(config)# show ether statistics line 1  
[ETHER PORT-1 STATISTICS]  
[Input Statistics]  
Octets  
bits/sec  
Frames  
frames/sec  
Unicast  
frames/sec  
Multicast  
frames/sec  
Broadcast  
frames/sec  
Pause frames  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
---(1)  
---(2)  
---(3)  
---(4)  
---(5)  
---(6)  
---(7)  
---(8)  
---(9)  
---(10)  
---(11)  
Discards  
All DiscardsPkts  
Errors  
: 0  
---(12)  
Undersize  
FCSErrors  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
---(13)  
---(14)  
---(15)  
---(16)  
---(17)  
---(18)  
---(19)  
AlignmentErrors  
FragmentErrors  
Jabbers  
SymbolErrors  
UnknownOpcodes  
[Output Statistics]  
Octets  
bits/sec  
Frames  
frames/sec  
Unicast  
Multicast  
frames/sec  
Broadcast  
frames/sec  
Pause frames  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
---(20)  
---(21)  
---(22)  
---(23)  
---(24)  
---(25)  
---(26)  
---(27)  
---(28)  
---(29)  
Discards  
DelayExceededDiscards  
Queue Full Discards  
Errors  
: 0  
: 0  
---(30)  
---(31)  
FCSErrors  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
---(32)  
---(33)  
---(34)  
---(35)  
---(36)  
FragmentErrors  
CarrierSenseErrors  
ExcessiveCollisions  
LateCollisions  
SingleCollisionFrames  
MultipleCollisionFrames  
DeferredTransmissions  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
---(37)  
---(38)  
---(39)  
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
394  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Example of executing internal connection port of XG0448  
XG0448(config)# show ether statistics line 1c1  
[INTERNAL CONNECTION PORT-1 STATISTICS]  
Packets from  
Connected to  
: line 1 to 24  
: line 51 to 52  
: C3  
---(40)  
---(41)  
[Input Statistics]  
Octets  
bits/sec  
Frames  
frames/sec  
Unicast  
frames/sec  
Multicast  
frames/sec  
Broadcast  
frames/sec  
Pause frames  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
Discards  
All DiscardsPkts  
Errors  
: 0  
Undersize  
FCSErrors  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
AlignmentErrors  
FragmentErrors  
Jabbers  
SymbolErrors  
UnknownOpcodes  
[Output Statistics]  
Octets  
bits/sec  
Frames  
frames/sec  
Unicast  
Multicast  
frames/sec  
Broadcast  
frames/sec  
Pause frames  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
Discards  
DelayExceededDiscards  
Queue Full Discards  
Errors  
: 0  
: 0  
FCSErrors  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
FragmentErrors  
CarrierSenseErrors  
ExcessiveCollisions  
LateCollisions  
SingleCollisionFrames  
MultipleCollisionFrames  
DeferredTransmissions  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
395  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Execution example when detail of XG0448 (Giga port) is specified  
# show ether statistics line 1 detail  
[ETHER PORT-1 STATISTICS]  
[Input Statistics]  
Octets  
bits/sec  
Frames  
frames/sec  
Unicast  
frames/sec  
Multicast  
frames/sec  
Broadcast  
frames/sec  
Pause frames  
Mac Control frames  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
Discards  
All DiscardsPkts  
Resource Full  
Discards by Filter  
Policy Discards  
Port In Discards  
Input Discards  
Errors  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
Undersize  
FCSErrors  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
AlignmentErrors  
FragmentErrors  
Jabbers  
SymbolErrors  
UnknownOpcodes  
[Output Statistics]  
Octets  
bits/sec  
Frames  
frames/sec  
Unicast  
Multicast  
frames/sec  
Broadcast  
frames/sec  
Pause frames  
Mac Control frames  
Jabbers  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
Discards  
DelayExceededDiscards  
Internal Discards  
Queue Full Discards  
Errors  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
FCSErrors  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
FragmentErrors  
CarrierSenseErrors  
ExcessiveCollisions  
LateCollisions  
InternalCellErrors  
SingleCollisionFrames  
MultipleCollisionFrames  
DeferredTransmissions  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
(To be continued)  
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
396  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
(Continued)  
[Input Detail Statistics]  
Frame size  
64  
frames  
: 0  
frames/sec  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
65-127  
128-255  
256-511  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
512-1023  
1024-1518  
1519-2047  
2048-4095  
4096-9216  
[Output Detail Statistics]  
Frame size  
64  
frames  
frames/sec  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
65-127  
128-255  
256-511  
512-1023  
1024-1518  
1519-2047  
2048-4095  
4096-9216  
Execution example when detail of XG0448 (10Giga port) is specified  
# show ether statistics line 50 detail  
[ETHER PORT-50 STATISTICS]  
[Input Statistics]  
Octets  
bits/sec  
Frames  
frames/sec  
Unicast  
frames/sec  
Multicast  
frames/sec  
Broadcast  
frames/sec  
Pause frames  
Mac Control frames  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
Discards  
All DiscardsPkts  
Resource Full  
Discards by Filter  
Policy Discards  
Port In Discards  
Input Discards  
Errors  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
Undersize  
FCSErrors  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
AlignmentErrors  
FragmentErrors  
Jabbers  
SymbolErrors  
UnknownOpcodes  
(To be continued)  
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
397  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
(Continued)  
[Output Statistics]  
Octets  
bits/sec  
Frames  
frames/sec  
Unicast  
Multicast  
frames/sec  
Broadcast  
frames/sec  
Pause frames  
Mac Control frames  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
Discards  
DelayExceededDiscards  
Internal Discards  
Queue Full Discards  
Errors  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
FCSErrors  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
FragmentErrors  
CarrierSenseErrors  
ExcessiveCollisions  
LateCollisions  
InternalCellErrors  
SingleCollisionFrames  
MultipleCollisionFrames  
DeferredTransmissions  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
[Input Detail Statistics]  
Frame size  
64  
frames  
: 0  
frames/sec  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
65-127  
128-255  
256-511  
512-1023  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
1024-1518  
1519-2047  
2048-4095  
4096-9216  
9217-16383  
[Output Detail Statistics]  
Frame size  
64  
frames  
frames/sec  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
65-127  
128-255  
256-511  
512-1023  
1024-1518  
1519-2047  
2048-4095  
4096-9216  
9217-16383  
1) Number of octets of received data  
2) Number of bits received per second (Bits/sec.)  
3) Total number of received frames  
4) Number of frames received per second (Frames/sec.)  
5) Number of received unicast frames  
6) Number of unicast frames received per second (Frames/sec.)  
7) Number of received multicast frames  
8) Number of multicast frames received per second (Frames/sec.)  
9) Number of received broadcast frames  
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
398  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
10) Number of broadcast frames received per second (Frames/sec.)  
11) Number of received PAUSE frames (MAC control frames)  
12) Number of discarded frames out of all the received frames  
13) Number of received shortsized frames (less than 64 bytes)  
14) Number of frames in which FCS error is detected in 64 data size bytes or more  
15) Number of received frames in which an alignment error was detected  
16) Number of shortsized frames (less than 64 bytes) in which an FCS or alignment  
error was detected  
17) Number of oversized frames (1519 bytes or more without tag, 1523 bytes or more  
with tag) in which an FCS or FCS alignment error was detected  
18) Number of detected symbol errors  
19) Number of unsupported MAC control frames that were received  
20) Total number of sent octets  
21) Number of bits sent per second (Bits/sec.)  
22) Number of sent frames  
23) Number of frames sent per second (Frames/sec.)  
24) Number of sent unicast frames  
25) Number of sent multicast frames  
26) Number of multicast frames sent per second (Frames/sec.)  
27) Number of sent broadcast frames  
28) Number of broadcast frames sent per second (Frames/sec.)  
29) Number of sent pause frames (MAC control frames)  
30) Number of frames that were discarded due to an excessive delay  
31) Number of frames that entered full state of cue and were abandoned  
32) Number of FCS error frame transmissions of 64 data size bytes or more  
33) Number of sent frames in which an FCS or FCS alignment error was detected in  
the shortsized frames  
34) Career undetection error generation frequency  
35) Number of frames in which transmission fails by frequent occurrence of collision  
36) Number of occurrences of late collisions  
37) Number of frames that could be sent after a single collision occurred  
38) Number of frames that could be sent after multiple collisions occurred  
39) Number of frames that got into a transmission deferment because the  
transmissionpath was busy  
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
399  
Commands  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
The following information is displayed only for an internal connected port of XG0448  
40) External port in which it belongs to internal, connected port  
41) Opposed internal, connected port.  
The counter of an internal, connected port becomes a frame that has been  
forwarded from the Giga/10Giga port with the value to which the header for an  
internal control in 12 bytes is added.  
42) Number of received MAC control frames  
43) Number of reception frames abandoned by resource shortage or Back Pressure  
44) Number of reception frames abandoned by filtering  
45) Number of reception frames abandoned by be not of STP in state of forwarding.  
The number of reception frames abandoned because it doesn't belong to set VLAN  
is contained for XG0448.  
46) Number of reception frames annulled by reception annulment setting  
47) Number of reception frames abandoned because it doesn't belong to set VLAN.  
48) Number of reception frames abandoned by other reasons  
- When the MAC header or the IP header is the following values  
All ..TTL.. ..Destination IP address 0, Source.. 0 etc. abnormal checksum and  
abnormal length  
- For a not corresponding frame to the entry of the IP multicast table  
- For the internal control frame not forwarded to an external port in case of an internal,  
connected port  
- When it is annulled without being output among frames that the flooding is done  
without being recognized an abnormal frame in the input port  
49) Number of sent MAC control frames  
50) Number of frames in which FCS error or FCS alignment error is detected with over  
size (1519 bytes or more) frame  
51) Number of frames abandoned in chip  
52) Number of frames (with 64 byte data size) received and number of frame (with  
64byte data size) received per second (Frames/sec.)  
53) Number of frames (with data size of 65 to 127 bytes) sent and number of frame  
(with data size of 65 to 127 bytes) sent per second (Frames/sec.)  
54) Number of frames (with data size of 128 to 255 bytes) received and number of  
frame (with data size of 128 to 255 bytes) received per second (Frames/sec.)  
55) Number of frames (with data size of 256 to 511 bytes) received and number of  
frame (with data size of 256 to 511 bytes) received per second (Frames/sec.)  
56) Number of frames (with data size of 512 to 1023 bytes) received and number of  
frame (with data size of 512 to 1023 bytes) received per second (Frames/sec.)  
57) Number of frames (with data size of 1024 to 1518 bytes) received and number of  
frame (with data size of 1024 to 1518bytes) received per second (Frames/sec.)  
58) Number of frames (with data size of 1519 to 2047 bytes) received and number of  
frame (with data size of 1519 to 1522bytes) received per second (Frames/sec.)  
59) Number of frames (with data size of 2048 to 4095 bytes) received and number of  
frame (with data size of 2048 to 4095 bytes) received per second (Frames/sec.)  
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
400  
Commands  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
60) Number of frames (with data size of 4096 to 9216 bytes) received and number of  
frame (with data size of 4096 to 9216 bytes) received per second (Frames/sec.)  
61) Number of frames (with 64 byte data size) sent and number of frame (with 64 byte  
data size) sent per second (Frames/sec.)  
62) Number of frames (with data size of 65 to 127 bytes) sent and number of frame  
(with data size of 65 to 127 bytes) sent per second (Frames/sec.)  
63) Number of frames (with data size of 128 to 255 bytes) sent and number of frame  
(with data size of 128 to 255 bytes) sent per second (Frames/sec.)  
64) Number of frames (with data size of 256 to 511 bytes) sent and number of frame  
(with data size of 256 to 511 bytes) sent per second (Frames/sec.)  
65) Number of frames (with data size of 512 to 1023 bytes) sent and number of frame  
(with data size of 512 to 1023 bytes) sent per second (Frames/sec.)  
66) Number of frames (with data size of 1024 to 1518 bytes) sent and number of frame  
(with data size of 1024 to 1518bytes) sent per second (Frames/sec.)  
67) Number of frames (with data size of 1519 to 2047 bytes) sent and number of frame  
(with data size of 1519 to 1522bytes) sent per second (Frames/sec.)  
68) Number of frames (with data size of 2048 to 4095 bytes) sent and number of frame  
(with data size of 2048 to 4095 bytes) sent per second (Frames/sec.)  
69) Number of frames (with data size of 4096 to 9216 bytes) sent and number of frame  
(with data size of 4096 to 9216 bytes) sent per second (Frames/sec.)  
70) Number of frame receptions of 9217-16383 data size bytes. And, it is numerical of  
the frame reception of 9217-16383 size of data a second bytes (frames/sec).  
However, the frame forwarding more than 9217 byte length is a unsupport.  
71)  
Number of frame transmissions of 9217-16383 data size bytes. And, Number of  
frame transmissions of 9217-16383 size of data a second bytes (frames/sec).  
However, the frame forwarding more than 9217 byte length is a unsupport.  
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
401  
Commands  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Example of executing 10Giga port of XG2600  
# show ether statistics line 1  
[ETHER PORT-1 STATISTICS]  
[Input Statistics]  
Octets  
bits/sec  
Frames  
frames/sec  
Unicast  
frames/sec  
Multicast  
frames/sec  
Broadcast  
frames/sec  
Pause frames  
: 1493377360  
: 0  
: 6706618  
: 0  
: 6704279  
: 0  
: 15  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
---(1)  
---(2)  
---(3)  
---(4)  
---(5)  
---(6)  
---(7)  
---(8)  
---(9)  
---(10)  
---(11)  
Discards  
All DiscardsPkts  
Errors  
: 94732  
---(12)  
Undersize  
FCSErrors  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 2324  
: 0  
---(13)  
---(14)  
---(15)  
---(16)  
---(17)  
---(18)  
---(19)  
AlignmentErrors  
FragmentErrors  
Jabbers  
SymbolErrors  
UnknownOpcodes  
: 0  
: 0  
[Output Statistics]  
Octets  
bits/sec  
Frames  
frames/sec  
Unicast  
Multicast  
frames/sec  
Broadcast  
frames/sec  
Pause frames  
: 804468332  
: 0  
: 5109155  
: 0  
: 5109152  
: 0  
: 0  
: 3  
: 0  
: 0  
---(20)  
---(21)  
---(22)  
---(23)  
---(24)  
---(25)  
---(26)  
---(27)  
---(28)  
---(29)  
Discards  
DelayExceededDiscards  
Errors  
: 0  
---(30)  
Undersize  
FCSErrors  
FragmentErrors  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
---(31)  
---(32)  
---(33)  
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
402  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Example of executing m1 port of XG2600 (management port)  
# show ether statistics line m1  
[ETHER PORT-1 STATISTICS]  
[Input Statistics]  
Octets  
: 148231  
bits/sec  
Frames  
frames/sec  
Unicast  
frames/sec  
Multicast  
frames/sec  
: 511  
: 897  
: 0  
: 45  
: 0  
: 852  
: 0  
---(34)  
---(35)  
Discards  
DiscardsPkts  
Errors  
: 0  
---(36)  
Oversize  
FCSErrors  
AlignmentErrors  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
[Output Statistics]  
Octets  
bits/sec  
: 4317  
: 0  
Frames  
frames/sec  
Unicast  
Multicast  
frames/sec  
: 32  
: 0  
: 30  
: 2  
---(37)  
---(38)  
: 0  
Discards  
DiscardsPkts  
: 0  
---(39)  
Errors  
CarrierSenseErrors  
ExcessiveCollisions  
LateCollisions  
SingleCollisionFrames  
MultipleCollisionFrames : 0  
DeferredTransmissions : 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
---(40)  
---(41)  
---(42)  
---(43)  
---(44)  
---(45)  
1) Number of octets of received data  
2) Number of bits received per second (Bits/sec.)  
3) Total number of received frames  
4) Number of frames received per second (Frames/sec.)  
5) Number of received unicast frames  
It doesn't contain the error frame.  
6) Number of unicast frames received per second (Frames/sec.)  
It doesn't contain the error frame.  
7) Number of received multicast frames  
It doesn't contain the error frame.  
8) Number of multicast frames received per second (Frames/sec.)  
It doesn't contain the error frame.  
9) Number of received broadcast frames  
It doesn't contain the error frame.  
10) Number of broadcast frames received per second (Frames/sec.)  
It doesn't contain the error frame.  
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
403  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
11) Number of received PAUSE frames (MAC control frames)  
12) Number of discarded frames out of all the received frames  
13) Number of received shortsized frames (less than 64 bytes)  
14) Number of frames in which FCS error is detected in 64 data size bytes or more  
15) Number of received frames in which an alignment error was detected  
16) Number of shortsized frames (less than 64 bytes) in which an FCS or alignment  
error was detected  
17) Number of oversized frames (1519 bytes or more without tag, 1523 bytes or more  
with tag) in which an FCS or FCS alignment error was detected  
18) Number of detected symbol errors  
19) Number of unsupported MAC control frames that were received  
20) Total number of sent octets  
21) Number of bits sent per second (Bits/sec.)  
The number of transmission bits of error frames is not counted at the "cut-  
through mode".  
22) Number of sent frames  
The number of frames in which the transmission discontinuance is done  
because the error detection was done in the reception port after it begins to  
transmit is contained at the "cut-through" mode.  
It doesn't contain the error frame.  
23) Number of frames sent per second (Frames/sec.)  
The number of frames in which the transmission discontinuance is done  
because the error detection was done in the reception port after it begins to  
transmit is contained at the "cut-through" mode.  
It doesn't contain the error frame.  
24) Number of sent unicast frames  
It doesn't contain the error frame.  
25) Number of sent multicast frames  
It doesn't contain the error frame.  
26) Number of multicast frames sent per second (Frames/sec.)  
It doesn't contain the error frame.  
27) Number of sent broadcast frames  
It doesn't contain the error frame.  
28) Number of broadcast frames sent per second (Frames/sec.)  
It doesn't contain the error frame.  
29) Number of sent pause frames (MAC control frames)  
30) Number of frames that were discarded due to an excessive delay  
31) Number of short size (less than 64 bytes) frame transmissions  
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
404  
Commands  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
32) Number of FCS error frame transmissions of 64 data size bytes or more  
The number of frames in which the error detection is done to the "cut-through"  
mode in the reception port after it begins to transmit and the transmission  
discontinuance is done is contained.  
33) Number of sent frames in which an FCS or FCS alignment error was detected in  
the shortsized frames (less than 64 bytes)  
34) Received multicast and number of broadcast frames  
35) Received multicast and number of broadcast frames a second (frames/sec)  
36) Number of discarded frames out of all the received frames  
37) Number of sent multicast frames or broadcast frames  
38) Transmitted multicast and number of broadcast frames a second (frames/sec)  
39) Number of frames abandoned when transmitting  
40) Career undetection error generation frequency  
41) Number of frames in which transmission fails by frequent occurrence of collision  
42) Number of occurrences of late collisions  
43) Number of frames that could be sent after a single collision occurred  
44) Number of frames that could be sent after multiple collisions occurred  
45) Number of frames that got into a transmission deferment because the transmission  
path was busy  
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
405  
Commands  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Execution example when detail of XG2600 (10Giga port) is specified  
# show ether statistics line 1 detail  
[ETHER PORT-1 STATISTICS]  
[Input Statistics]  
Octets  
bits/sec  
: 1493377360  
: 0  
Frames  
frames/sec  
Unicast  
frames/sec  
Multicast  
frames/sec  
Broadcast  
frames/sec  
Pause frames  
Mac Control frames  
: 6706618  
: 0  
: 6704279  
: 0  
: 15  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
---(46)  
Discards  
All DiscardsPkts  
Errors  
: 94732  
Undersize  
: 0  
FCSErrors  
: 0  
AlignmentErrors  
FragmentErrors  
Jabbers  
: 0  
: 2324  
: 0  
SymbolErrors  
UnknownOpcodes  
: 0  
: 0  
[Output Statistics]  
Octets  
bits/sec  
: 804468332  
: 0  
Frames  
frames/sec  
Unicast  
: 5109155  
: 0  
: 5109152  
: 0  
Multicast  
frames/sec  
Broadcast  
: 0  
: 3  
frames/sec  
Pause frames  
Mac Control frames  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
---(47)  
---(48)  
Discards  
DiscardsPkts  
DelayExceededDiscards  
Errors  
: 0  
: 0  
Undersize  
FCSErrors  
FragmentErrors  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
[Detail Statistics]  
Frame size  
64  
frames  
: 0  
frames/sec  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
---(49)  
65-127  
128-255  
256-511  
512-1023  
1024-1518  
1519-16128  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
---(50)  
---(51)  
---(52)  
---(53)  
---(54)  
---(55)  
The following information is also displayed when "detail" is specified.  
46) Number of received MAC control frames  
47) Number of sent MAC control frames  
48) Number of frames abandoned when transmitting  
49) Number of frame sending and receiving of 64 data size bytes.  
And, it is numerical of the frame sending and receiving of (with data size of 65 to  
127 bytes) size of data a second bytes. (frames/sec)  
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
406  
Commands  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
50) Number of frame sending and receiving of (with data size of 65 to 127 bytes) data  
size bytes. And, it is numerical of the frame sending and receiving of (with data  
size of 65 to 127 bytes) size of data a second bytes. (frames/sec)  
51)  
Number of frame sending and receiving of (with data size of 128 to 255 bytes)  
data size bytes. And, it is numerical of the frame sending and receiving of (with  
data size of 128 to 255 bytes) size of data a second bytes. (frames/sec)  
52) Number of frame sending and receiving of (with data size of 256 to 511 bytes) data  
size bytes. And, it is numerical of the frame sending and receiving of (with data  
size of 256 to 511 bytes) size of data a second bytes. (frames/sec)  
53) Number of frame sending and receiving of (with data size of 512 to 1023 bytes)  
data size bytes. And, it is numerical of the frame sending and receiving of (with  
data size of 512 to 1023 bytes) size of data a second bytes. (frames/sec)  
54)  
Number of frame sending and receiving of (with data size of 1024 to 1518 bytes)  
data size bytes. And, it is numerical of the frame sending and receiving of (with  
data size of 1024 to 1518 bytes) size of data a second bytes. (frames/sec)  
55)  
Number of frame sending and receiving of (with data size of 1519 to 16128 bytes)  
data size bytes. And, it is numerical of the frame sending and receiving of (with  
data size of 1519 to 16128 bytes) size of data a second bytes. (frames/sec)  
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
407  
Commands  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.20.1.4 show ether media-info  
Function  
Display Media information of Ethernet physical port  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show ether media-info [line <line>]  
Options  
N/A  
Display the information of all SFP+,CX4 ports and SFP ports  
line <line>  
Display the information of the specified port.  
Range  
Model  
21 to 26  
45 to 52  
1 to 26  
XG0224  
XG0448  
XG2600  
When specifying multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When specifying sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Examples: "1-8")  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display Media information  
Execution Example  
Execution Example (XG0224)  
# show ether media-info  
Port media type Vendor PN  
---- ---------- ----------------  
(1) (2)  
(3)  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
SFP(SX)  
HFBR-5710L  
SFP(ZX)  
SFP(LX)  
SFP(FX)  
SFP+(LR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SCP6P94-F7-BMH  
SCP6P44-F7-BMH  
HFBR-57E0P  
FTLX1471D3BCL  
TRS2000EN-S002  
Execution Example (XG0448)  
# show ether media-info  
Port media type Vendor PN  
---- ---------- ----------------  
(1) (2)  
(3)  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
NONE  
NONE  
SFP(LX)  
NONE  
SFP+(LR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
NONE  
SCP6P44-F7-BMH  
FTLX1471D3BCL  
TRS2000EN-S002  
TRS2000EN-S002  
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
408  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Execution Example (XG2600)  
# show ether media-info  
Port media type Vendor PN  
---- ---------- ----------------  
(1) (2)  
(3)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SFP+(SR)  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
NONE  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
NONE  
1) Port number  
2) Media information  
The type of the installed module is displayed  
SFP(SX)  
SFP(LX)  
SFP(FX)  
SFP (1000BASE-SX) module is installed  
SFP (1000BASE-LX) module is installed  
SFP (1000BASE-FX) module is installed  
SFP(BX-D) SFP (1000BASE-BX-D) module is installed  
SFP(BX-U) SFP (1000BASE-BX-U) module is installed  
SFP(ZX)  
CX4  
SFP (1000BASE-ZX) module is installed  
The CX4 expansion card is mounted. (Only for XG0448/XG0224. )  
SFP+(10GBASE-SR) module is installed  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(LR)  
SFP+(10GBASE-LR) module is installed  
UNKNOWN Type of the installed module is unknown  
NONE SFP+ module is not installed or the module of the unsupport is  
mounted.  
3) Vendor Part Number  
Vendor part number of the installed module is displayed.  
The information is displayed even if the type of the module is unknown.  
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
409  
Commands  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.20.1.5 show ether utilization  
Function  
Display the usage ratio (or utilization) information of Ethernet physical ports.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show ether utilization  
Options  
N/A  
Display the utilization information of all Ethernet ports.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Caution  
Display the usage ratio of the Ethernet physical port.  
The usage ratio is cleared if this device is restarted.  
Execution Example  
Execution Example (XG0224)  
# show ether utilization  
Port  
------ ---------- -------  
(1) (2) (3)  
TX/sec  
Util  
RX/sec  
---------- -------  
(4) (5)  
Util  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
#
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
410  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Execution Example (XG0448)  
# show ether utilization  
Port  
------ ---------- -------  
(1) (2) (3)  
TX/sec  
Util  
RX/sec  
---------- -------  
(4)  
Util  
(5)  
1
2
3
4
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
7
:
:
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
C1  
C2  
C3  
C4  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Execution Example (XG2600)  
# show ether utilization  
Port  
------ ---------- -------  
(1) (2) (3)  
TX/sec  
Util  
RX/sec  
---------- -------  
(4) (5)  
Util  
1
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
0
5
6
710227  
50  
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
0
8
0
0
0
0
9
0
0
0
0
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
M1  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
100  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
100  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1420457  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1420454  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
#
1) Port  
: Ethernet physical port number  
The management port is displayed with M1. (Only XG2600)  
An "internal connected port" is displayed with C1-C4. (Only XG0448)  
2) TX/sec : Number of frames that were sent in 1 second (pps)  
3) Util  
4) RX/sec : Number of frames that were received in 1 second (pps)  
5) Util : Receiving usage ratio (%) of physical port  
: Sending usage ratio (%) of physical port  
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
411  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.20.1.6 show ether queue  
Function  
Display the number of packets placed in the COS queue of Ethernet physical ports.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show ether queue [line <line>]  
Options  
N/A  
Display the number of packets placed in the COS queue of all ports.  
line <line>  
Display the number of packets placed in the COS queue of the specified port.  
No information is displayed if the specified port number is invalid.  
Range  
Model  
1 to 26  
XG0224  
XG0448  
XG2600  
1 to 52, c1 to c4  
1 to 26  
When specifying multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When specifying sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Display the number of packets remaining in the COS queue of Ethernet physical ports.  
If the "line" option is specified, the information of the target port is displayed.  
The number of packets remaining in the COS queue is cleared if this device is restarted.  
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
412  
Commands  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Execution Example  
Execution Example (XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600)  
# show ether queue  
[ETHER PORT-1]  
CoS Queue 0  
CoS Queue 1  
CoS Queue 2  
CoS Queue 3  
CoS Queue 4  
CoS Queue 5  
CoS Queue 6  
CoS Queue 7  
: 0  
: 0  
: 238  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
---(1)  
[ETHER PORT-2]  
CoS Queue 0  
CoS Queue 1  
CoS Queue 2  
CoS Queue 3  
CoS Queue 4  
CoS Queue 5  
CoS Queue 6  
CoS Queue 7  
#
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
1) CoS Queue 0  
Number of packets remaining in the hardware COS queue 0  
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
413  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.20.2 Ethernet Counter, Log, and Statistics Clear Commands  
This section explains the commands related to Ethernet counter, log, statistics,  
and statistics clear commands.  
5.20.2.1 clear ether statistics  
Function  
Clear the statistics of Ethernet physical ports.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
clear ether statistics [line <line>]  
Options  
N/A  
Clear all the statistics.  
line <line>  
Clear the statistics of the specified port.  
No statistics are not cleared if the specified port number is invalid.  
The management port is specified by "m1".  
Range  
Model  
1 to 26  
XG0224  
XG0448  
XG02600  
1 to 52, c1 to c4  
1 to 26, m1  
When specifying multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
The specification of the port simultaneously other than m1 and m1 are also possible.  
The specification of the port simultaneously other than c1-4 and c1-4 are also possible.  
When specifying sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
Use Mode  
Explanation  
Caution  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Clear the statistics of the Ethernet physical port.  
Specifying only the "line" option will clear the statistics of the target port.  
XG0224 / XG0448  
It might be considered that it restores it from the state of the roughhouse once when  
broadcast/multicast roughhouse control information is set, and the statistical information  
of "clear ether statistics" pertinent port is cleared with the reception rate exceeds the  
threshold.  
Execution Example  
# clear ether statistics  
#
Ethernet Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
414  
Commands  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.21 USB connection Counter, Log,  
Statistics, and Status Display and  
Clear Operation Commands  
This section explains about USB connection Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation Commands.  
5.21.1 USB connection Counter, Log, and Statistics Clear  
Commands  
This section explains commands related to USB connection Counter, Log, and Statistics Clear Commands.  
5.21.1.1 show usb hcd status  
Function  
Displays USB port blocking status.  
Available Model XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show usb hcd status  
N/A  
Options  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Default  
Displays blocking status of USB ports.  
# show usb hcd status  
[USB HCD STATUS]  
status  
: enable  
--- (1)  
1) Blocking state  
Displays USB port blocking status  
disable: blocked  
enable: unblocked  
USB connection Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear  
Operation Commands  
415  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.21.1.2 show usb storage status  
Function  
Displays USB mass storage controller status.  
Available Model XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show usb storage status  
N/A  
Options  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class /admin class/CE class)  
Configuration mode (admin class/CE class)  
Explanation  
Default  
Displays current status for USB mass storage controller.  
# show usb storage status  
[Thread]  
Status  
: Active  
---(1)  
[Device #1]  
Status  
Speed  
Geometry probing  
Test unit ready  
Inquiry  
Mode sense  
Read capacity  
: Idle  
: Full  
---(2)  
---(3)  
---(4)  
---(5)  
: Success  
: Success  
: Success  
: Success  
: Success  
Read format capacities : ----  
Hold data  
: Not exist  
---(6)  
Error status  
Error reason  
Error event  
Request sense code  
[Storage specs]  
Vendor  
: Get device specs [5/5] (Read format capacities) ---(7)  
: Transfer URB failure  
: 0x3200000d  
: (02, 10, 00)  
---(8)  
---(9)  
---(10)  
: FUJITSU  
: USB PortableDrive  
: 3.96  
: 500400  
: 695  
---(11)  
---(12)  
---(13)  
---(14)  
---(15)  
---(16)  
---(17)  
Product  
Product Rev.  
Total sectors  
Cylinders  
Heads  
: 15  
: 48  
Sectors per track  
[USB specs]  
Speed  
: Full  
: 3  
---(18)  
---(19)  
Max LUN  
[USB configuration]  
Device address  
Interface  
Sub class  
LUN  
: 1  
: 0  
: 6  
: 0  
: 0x82  
: 0x02  
---(20)  
---(21)  
---(22)  
---(23)  
---(24)  
---(25)  
BulkInEP  
BulkOutEP  
1) USB mass storage controller thread status  
Status is displayed via the following messages:  
Uninit: not initialized  
Waiting for USBD active  
Waiting for entry class completed  
Active  
The information below is displayed only when a connected USB device has  
been detected.  
USB connection Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear  
416  
Operation Commands  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
2) USB device controller status  
Status is displayed via the following messages:  
Uninit: not initialized  
Initializing [1/2] (Set configuration)  
Initializing [2/2] (Get max lun)  
Get device specs [1/5] (Test unit ready)  
Get device specs [2/5] (Inquiry)  
Get device specs [3/5] (Mode sense)  
Get device specs [4/5] (Read capacity)  
Get device specs [5/5] (Read format capacities)  
Idle: waiting for transfer request  
Transferring  
Waiting for unplugging: failure detection  
Unplugging  
3) Speed  
Status is displayed via the following messages.  
Warning : The speed displayed is the transfer rate of the USB device, and is not  
the transfer throughput.  
High  
Full  
: high speed mode (480Mbps)  
: full speed mode (12Mbps)  
: low speed mode (1.5Mbps)  
Low  
4) Geometry probing status  
Geometry refers to the total number of sectors, cylinders, heads, and the  
number of sectors per track on the mass storage device.  
Status is displayed via the following messages:  
Success : Success (partly guessed)  
Failed  
: Not yet detection has not yet occurred  
5) Detailed display of geometry probing status  
Geometry is detected via SCSI commands (TEST_UNIT_READY, INQUIRY,  
MODE SENSE(6), READ CAPACITY, READ FORMAT CAPACITIES).  
The execution status of each command is displayed via the following messages.  
Success  
Failed (no data)  
Failed (retry out)  
Failed  
----: not executed  
6) Hold data  
Displays the presence or absence of transfer requests received from the file  
system.  
Status is displayed via the following messages:  
Exists  
Not exists  
Items 7), 8), 9), and 10) below are displayed only when an error occurs in which  
transfer processing cannot continue.  
7) Error status  
When an error occurs the USB device controller status, (2) above, is displayed.  
8) Error reason  
The reason transfer cannot continue is displayed.  
9) Error event  
Internal information is displayed.  
USB connection Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear  
417  
Operation Commands  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
10) Request sense code  
When an error is detected by the USB device the error data established on the  
USB device is displayed.  
11) Vendor  
Vendor information for the USB device is displayed.  
12) Product  
Product information for the USB device is displayed.  
13) Product Rev.  
Product revision information for the USB device is displayed.  
14) Total sectors  
The total number of sectors held on the USB device is displayed.  
15) Cylinders  
The number of cylinders on the USB device is displayed.  
16) Heads  
The number of heads on the USB device is displayed.  
17) Sectors per track  
The number of sectors per track (per head, per cylinder) on the USB device is  
displayed.  
18) Speed  
The USB protocol speed is displayed. Same as (3) above.  
19) Max LUN  
The maximum LUN value for the USB device. This switch does not support  
devices that do not have LUN=0.  
20) Device address  
The device number allocated by USBD in order to uniquely identify devices on  
the USB bus is displayed.  
21) Interface  
The interface number selected by the USB mass storage controller thread is  
displayed.  
22) Sub class  
The subclass for the USB device is displayed. Class information is 0(=mass  
storage class).  
23) LUN  
The LUN number selected by the USB mass storage controller thread is  
displayed.  
24) BulkInEP  
The bulk-in endpoint number selected by the USB mass storage controller  
thread is displayed.  
25) BulkOutEP  
The bulk-out endpoint number selected by the USB mass storage controller  
thread is displayed.  
USB connection Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear  
418  
Operation Commands  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.22 LACP Counter, Log, Statistics, and  
Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
This section explains the commands related to LACP.  
5.22.1 LACP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display  
Commands  
This section explains the commands related to LACP counter, log, statistics, and status display commands.  
5.22.1.1 show lacp  
Function  
Display LACP information briefly.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show lacp  
Options  
N/A  
Display all information.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the LACP information in a simple format.  
The information is sorted by port numbers, and separated for each group.  
Execution Example  
# show lacp  
[group 2]  
(1) (2)  
port  
(3)  
mode  
(4)  
state  
(5)  
LAG-ID  
(6)  
port-parameter  
----  
2
------- ------- --------------------------- ----------  
Actor : passive ASCD 8000,00-0b-5d-89-02-ba,0002 8000,2  
Partner: active  
ASCD  
8000,00-0b-5d-89-01-22,0001 8000,3  
3
Actor : passive ASCD  
8000,00-0b-5d-89-02-ba,0002 8000,3  
8000,00-0b-5d-89-01-22,0001 8000,2  
Partner: active  
ASCD  
[group 1]  
port  
mode  
state  
LAG-ID  
port-parameter  
----  
4
------- ------- --------------------------- ----------  
Actor : passive ASCD 8000,00-0b-5d-89-02-ba,0001 8000,4  
Partner: active  
ASCD  
8000,00-0b-5d-89-01-22,0002 8000,4  
5
Actor : passive ASCD  
Partner: active ASCD  
8000,00-0b-5d-89-02-ba,0001 8000,5  
8000,00-0b-5d-89-01-22,0002 8000,5  
#
LACP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
419  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
1) Port number  
2) Indicates that the information display at the right side is for this device (Actor) or  
the remote device (Partner).  
3) Indicates that the LACP mode is active or passive.  
The passive is displayed if the valid LACP remote system information has not  
been obtained.  
4) Indicates the LACP state as follows.  
T (LACP_Timeout):  
The LACPDU's receive timeout has been set to Short Timeout (3  
seconds).  
If not shown, the Long Timeout (90 seconds) has been set.  
A (Aggregation):  
The links can be aggregated. If not shown, they are separate links.  
S (Synchronization):  
The link has been synchronized with the aggregator.  
C (Collecting):  
A frame is ready to receive.  
D (Distributing):  
A frame is ready to send.  
d (defaulted):  
The default parameters have been applied to the LACP remote system  
(Partner) information being held by this device.  
E (Expired):  
The receiver of LACP remote system has expired.  
5) Indicates the link aggregation ID.  
All 0's indicates that the valid LACP remote system information has not been  
obtained.  
(a) (b)  
(c) (d) (e)  
8000,00-0b-5d-89-02-ba,0002 8000,2  
a) System priority  
b) System ID (MAC address)  
c) Aggregation key  
d) Port priority  
e) Port number  
6) A value at left shows the port priority, and a value at right shows the port number.  
These values are equivalent to port priority (d) and port number (e) of Item (5).  
LACP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
420  
Commands  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.22.1.2 show lacp statistics  
Function  
Display the LACP statistics.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show lacp statistics  
Options  
N/A  
Display all statistics.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Caution  
Display the LACP statistics.  
The statistics are cleared if the device is restarted or the valid LACP definition is not  
found in the device.  
The item is not displayed if its counter is zero (0). If the LACP is not operating on a port,  
the item is displayed when its counter is not zero.  
Execution Example  
# show lacp statistics  
LACP statistics information:  
[ETHER PORT-1]  
45 transmitted lacpdu  
--- (1)  
--- (2)  
--- (3)  
--- (4)  
--- (5)  
--- (6)  
--- (7)  
--- (8)  
--- (9)  
--- (10)  
--- (11)  
46 received lacpdu  
12 start collecting/distributing  
13 stop collecting/distributing  
5 receive timeout lacpdu  
1 transmitted marker pdu  
1 received marker pdu  
21 received lacpdu no link  
1 transmission error  
1 received error  
[ETHER PORT-3]  
53 transmitted lacpdu  
52 received lacpdu  
4 start collecting/distributing  
3 stop collecting/distributing  
#
1) Port number  
2) Number of sent lacpdu packets  
3) Number of received lacpdu packets  
4) Number of times the aggregation link is disabled, changing from the enabled state,  
to send or receive packets  
5) Number of times the aggregation link is disabled to send or receive packets  
6) Number of times the lacpdu packet reception was timed out  
7) Number of times the marker pdu packet was sent  
8) Number of times the marker pdu packet was received  
9) Number of lacpdu or marker pdu packets received when the LACP was disabled  
10) Number of times the packet sending has failed  
11) Number of times the packet reception has failed  
LACP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
421  
Commands  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.22.2 LACP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear  
Commands  
This section explains the commands related to LACP counter, log, statistics, and status clear commands.  
5.22.2.1 clear lacp statistics  
Function  
Clear the LACP statistics.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
clear lacp statistics  
N/A  
Options  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Clear the LACP statistics.  
Execution Example  
# clear lacp statistics  
#
LACP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
422  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.23 M1 port Status Display command  
This section explains the commands related to oob.  
5.23.1 M1 port Status Display command  
This section explains the commands related to M1 port Status Display command.  
5.23.1.1 show oob  
Function  
Display of M1 port information  
Available Model XG2600  
Syntax  
show oob  
N/A  
Options  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
M1 port information is displayed.  
Execution Example  
#show oob  
IP Address  
Subnet Mask  
IPv6 Address  
MAC Address  
#
: 192.168.3.1  
: 255.255.255.0  
: fe80::217:42ff:fed1:a80/64 ---(3)  
: 00:17:42:d1:0a:80 ---(4)  
---(1)  
---(2)  
1) The IPv4 address in the M1 port is displayed.  
2) The subnet mask in the IPv4 address in the M1 port is displayed.  
3) The IPv6 address in the M1 port is displayed. When IPv6 is not used, it is not  
displayed.  
4) The MAC address in the M1 port is displayed.  
M1 port Status Display command  
423  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.24 Interface Counter, Log, Statistics, and  
Status Display Commands  
This section explains the commands related to the interface.  
5.24.1 Interface Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display  
Commands  
This section explains the commands related to interface counter, log, statistics, and status display commands.  
5.24.1.1 show interface  
Function  
Display the interface information.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show interface [interface <interface_name>]  
Options  
N/A  
Display the status and type of all interfaces.  
interface <interface_name>  
Display the status and type of the specified interface.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the interface information.  
Execution Example  
# show interface  
lan0  
-(1)-  
MTU 1500  
-(2)-  
<UP,BROADCAST,RUNNING,SIMPLEX,MULTICAST>  
------------------(3)-------------------  
Type: port vlan  
VLAN ID is 20  
+
|
MAC address: 00:00:0e:f1:41:dc  
Status: up since Jan 1 19:23:45 2011  
IP address/masklen:  
|
(4)  
|
192.168.1.1/24  
MTU 1500  
Broadcast 192.168.1.255  
<UP,BROADCAST,RUNNING,SIMPLEX,MULTICAST>  
+
lan1  
Type: protocol vlan  
VLAN ID is 30  
+
|
MAC address: 00:00:0e:f1:41:dc  
Status: up since Jan 1 19:23:45 2011  
IP address/masklen:  
|
(4)  
|
192.168.3.1/24  
Broadcast 192.168.3.255  
+
lo0  
MTU 16384  
<UP,LOOPBACK,RUNNING,MULTICAST>  
Type: loopback  
+
|
(4)  
+
Status: up since Jan 1 19:23:45 2011  
IP address/masklen:  
127.0.0.1/32  
192.168.1.1/32  
Interface Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands  
424  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
1) Interface name  
2) MTU size  
3) Interface flag  
4) Type  
The interface type is displayed by any of the following character strings.  
port vlan : Port VLAN  
protocol vlan : Protocol VLAN  
loopback : Loopback interface  
VLAN ID: The VLAN ID is displayed.  
MAC address:The MAC address used for the interface is displayed.  
Status  
:The interface status and the clock time when the interface  
entered in this status are displayed.  
: Available  
up  
down  
: Unavailable  
IP address/masklen:  
The IPv4 address of the interface is displayed.  
Interface Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands  
425  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.24.1.2 show interface brief  
Function  
Display the interface information.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
Display interface information briefly.  
Options  
N/A  
Display all interfaces briefly.  
interface <interface_name>  
Display the specified interface briefly.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the interface information in a simple format.  
Execution Example  
# show interface brief  
Interface  
-------------  
Status  
--------  
(2)  
up  
up  
Type  
-----------------  
(3)  
port vlan  
protocol vlan  
loopback  
(1)  
lan0  
lan1  
lo0  
#
up  
1) Interface  
The interface name is displayed.  
2) Status  
The interface status is displayed.  
up  
: Available  
down  
: Unavailable  
3) Type  
The interface type is displayed.  
port vlan : Port VLAN  
protocol vlan : Protocol VLAN  
loopback  
: Loopback interface  
Interface Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands  
426  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.24.1.3 show interface summary  
Function  
Display the number of interface entries (the interface summary).  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show interface summary  
N/A  
Options  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the number of interface entries.  
Execution Example  
# show interface summary  
There are 4 interfaces (up status 4 interfaces)  
Loopback interface  
Port VLAN interface  
Protocol VLAN interface :  
:
:
1 (up status  
2 (up status  
1 (up status  
1 interfaces) ---(1)  
2 interfaces) ---(2)  
1 interfaces) ---(3)  
#
1) Loopback interface  
2) Port VLAN  
3) Protocol VLAN  
Interface Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands  
427  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.25 ARP Entry Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
This section explains the commands related to ARP entry.  
5.25.1 ARP Entry Display Commands  
This section explains the commands related to ARP entry.  
5.25.1.1 show arp  
Function  
Display the ARP entries.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show arp [<ip_address>]  
show arp summary  
Options  
N/A  
Display the details of all ARP entries.  
<ip_address>  
Display the ARP entries of the specified IP address only.  
summary  
Display the number of ARP entries.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the ARP table entries.  
Execution Example  
# show arp  
IP Address  
MAC Address  
F Rest Interface Port  
--------------- ----------------- -- ----- --------- ----  
(1)  
(2)  
(3) (4)  
01146 lan0  
lan0  
(5)  
(6)  
12  
20.0.0.1  
20.0.0.2  
20.0.0.255  
Entry:3  
00:00:e2:08:57:89  
(incomplete)  
00:00:02:01:14:00 P perm lan0  
---(7)  
# show arp summary  
Entry:3  
# show arp 20.0.0.1  
IP Address  
--------------- ----------------- -- ----- --------- ----  
20.0.0.1 00:00:e2:08:57:89 01146 lan0 12  
Entry:1  
MAC Address  
F Rest Interface Port  
#
1) IP Address  
The IP address of ARP entry is displayed.  
2) MAC Address  
The MAC address of ARP entry is displayed.  
If not resolved, "incomplete" is displayed.  
ARP Entry Display and Clear Operation Commands  
428  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
3)  
F
An entry type is displayed. The details are as follows.  
P: A permanent entry  
4) Rest  
The time to live of the ARP entry is indicated in seconds. For the permanent  
entry, "perm" is shown.  
5) Interface  
The ARP entry interface is displayed.  
6) Port  
The Ethernet port number used for transmission is displayed.  
7) Entry  
The number of ARP entries is displayed.  
ARP Entry Display and Clear Operation Commands  
429  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.25.2 ARP Entry Clear Commands  
This section explains the commands related to ARP entry clear.  
5.25.2.1 clear arp  
Function  
Clear the ARP entries.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
clear arp [<ip_address>]  
Options  
N/A  
Clear all ARP entries.  
<ip_address>  
Clear the ARP entries of the specified IP address.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Clear the entries from the ARP table.  
Execution Example  
# clear arp  
#
ARP Entry Display and Clear Operation Commands  
430  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.26 Routing Table Entry Display Commands  
This section explains the commands related to routing table.  
5.26.1 IPv4 Routing Table Entry Display Commands  
This section explains the commands related to the IPv4 routing table counter, log, statistics, and status display commands.  
5.26.1.1 show ip route  
Function  
Display the routing table information.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show ip route [all]  
show ip route connected [all]  
show ip route static [all]  
show ip route destination <ip_address>/<mask> [all]  
show ip route destination <ip_address>/<mask> longer-prefixes [all]  
Options  
N/A  
Display the route information that has been registered on the routing table.  
all  
Display all route information including route information not registered on the routing  
table.  
connected  
Display interface route information only.  
static  
Display static route information only.  
destination <ip_address>/<mask>  
Display only the route information whose address and mask match the specified ones.  
<mask> must be a number of mask bits or a mask value. For the mask value, specify  
successive 1s following the most significant bit (MSB).  
destination <ip_address>/<mask> longer-prefixes  
Display all route information included in the specified route information.  
<mask> must be a number of mask bits or a mask value. For the mask value, specify  
successive 1s following the most significant bit (MSB).  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the routing table information that routing manager registered.  
Routing Table Entry Display Commands  
431  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Execution Example  
Display of the entire route information  
# show ip route all  
FP Destination/Mask  
--- ---------------  
(1) (2)  
*C 192.168.10.0/24  
*O 192.168.11.0/24  
Gateway  
Distance UpTime  
Interface  
-------------- -------- -------- ---------  
(3)  
192.168.10.50  
192.168.10.20  
(4)  
(5)  
0 00:00:01 lan0  
110 00:00:01 lan0  
(6)  
1) FP  
The kernel flag and the protocol type are displayed.  
The following shows the kernel flags that may be displayed.  
*
: Indicates the route registered in the IP kernel.  
Blank:  
Indicates the route not registered in the IP kernel.  
x
: Indicates the route that cannot be registered in the IP kernel.  
(The route count limit has been exceeded.)  
The following shows the protocol types that may be displayed.  
S : Indicates static route information.  
C : Indicates the interface route information.  
2) Destination/Mask  
The destination address or mask length is displayed.  
3) Gateway  
The gateway address is displayed.  
4) Distance  
The routing priority is displayed.  
5) UpTime  
The elapsed time after the last update of route information is displayed.  
01:23:45  
1 hour, 23 minutes and 45 seconds have passed (if the elapsed time is within 24  
hours).  
6d23h45m  
6 days, 23 hours and 45 minutes have passed (if the elapsed time is within 7  
days).  
3w6d23h  
3 weeks, 6 days and 23 hours have passed.  
6) Interface  
The interface name through which the gateway can be reached is displayed. If  
status of the interface is invalid, its name is followed by (inactive).  
Routing Table Entry Display Commands  
432  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.26.1.2 show ip route summary  
Function  
Display the number of routing table information entries.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show ip route summary [all]  
Options  
N/A  
Display the number of route information sets that have been registered on the routing  
table.  
all  
Display the number of all route information sets including route information not registered  
on the routing table.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the number of routing table information entries that routing manager registered.  
Execution Example  
Display of the number of route  
# show ip route summary  
Route Source  
------------  
(1)  
Networks  
--------  
(2)  
3
Static  
Connected  
Total  
7
10  
1) Route Source  
The routing protocol type is displayed.  
Static  
: Indicates the static route information.  
Connected : Indicates the interface route information.  
2) Networks  
The number of route is displayed.  
Routing Table Entry Display Commands  
433  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.26.1.3 show ip route kernel  
Function  
Display the routing table of the IP kernel.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show ip route kernel  
show ip route kernel longest-match <ip_address>  
show ip route kernel summary  
Options  
N/A  
Display the current entries on the routing table of the IP kernel.  
longest-match <ip_address>  
Display the entries that match the specified address on the routing table of IP kernel by  
longest match.  
summary  
Display the number of entries (the summary) on the routing table of the IP kernel.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the current status of IP kernel's routing table.  
Execution Example  
# show ip route kernel  
Routing Tables for Internet  
Destination/Masklen Gateway  
Flag  
Interface  
---(1)  
------------------- ----------------- ------ ---------  
10.0.0.0/8  
127.0.0.1  
192.168.1.5  
127.0.0.1  
link#1  
link#1  
00:a0:c9:d8:90:4e UH  
127.0.0.1 UG  
UGS  
UH  
U
lan0  
lo0  
lan0  
lan0  
lan0  
lo0  
192.168.1.0/24  
192.168.1.5  
192.168.1.11  
224.0.0.0/4  
Entry:6  
UH  
---(2)  
# show ip route kernel longest-match 10.0.0.1  
Routing Tables for Internet  
Destination/Masklen Gateway  
Flag  
Interface  
------------------- ----------------- ------ ---------  
10.0.0.0/8  
Entry:1  
192.168.1.5  
UGS  
lan0  
# show ip route kernel longest-match 20.0.0.1  
Routing Tables for Internet  
Destination/Masklen Gateway  
Flag  
Interface  
------------------- ----------------- ------ ---------  
Entry:0  
# show ip route kernel summary  
Entry:6  
#
1) Destination/Masklen  
The destination network address and the mask value are displayed.  
If routed via the host, no mask value is displayed.  
Gateway : The gateway address is displayed.  
The direct route indicates the MAC address of the gateway. If the  
gateway address is not resolved, link#x is shown (where, x is an  
interface index number that the system automatically assigns to  
each interface).  
Routing Table Entry Display Commands  
434  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Flag  
: The entry type is displayed. The details are as follows.  
U (Up): Indicates that the route is enabled.  
G (Gateway): Indicates the route which requires an intermediate  
routing such as gateway.  
H (Host): Indicates the host entry.  
S (Static): Indicates the static route.  
R (Reject): Indicates the discarded route (with ICMP unreach  
transmission).  
B (Blackhole): Indicates the discarded route (without ICMP unreach  
transmission).  
Interface : The destination interface is shown.  
2) Entry  
The number of entries, excluding the route entries used inside the device, is  
displayed.  
Routing Table Entry Display Commands  
435  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.26.2 IPv6 Routing Table Entry Display Commands  
This section explains the commands related to IPv6 routing table.  
5.26.2.1 show ipv6 route  
Function  
Display IPv6 routing table information  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show ipv6 route [all]  
show ipv6 route connected [all]  
show ipv6 route static [all]  
show ipv6 route ra [all]  
show ipv6 route destination <prefix>/<prefixlen> [all]  
show ipv6 route destination <prefix>/<prefixlen> longer-prefixes [all]  
Options  
N/A  
Display route IPv6 kernel routing table  
all  
Display all route information  
connected  
Display interface route information  
static  
Display static route information  
ra  
Display only RA receive route information  
destination <prefix>/<prefixlen>  
Display route which matched specified prefix /prefix length  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display IPv6 routing table information  
Execution Example  
# show ipv6 route all  
FP  
Destination/Prefixlen  
UpTime  
(4)  
Distance  
(5)  
(1) (2)  
Gateway  
(3)  
Interface  
(6)  
-- ------------------------------------------- --------- ------------------  
*RA ::/0  
00:00:01  
00:00:01  
00:00:08  
12  
fe80::2  
lan0  
lan0  
oob0  
*C 2001:db8:ffff:1000::/64  
2001:db8:ffff:1000::1  
*C 11:11::/64  
0
0
11:11::22  
Routing Table Entry Display Commands  
436  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
1) FP  
The kernel flag and the protocol type are displayed.  
The following shows the kernel flags that may be displayed.  
: Indicates the route registered in the IPv6 kernel.  
*
Blank : Indicates the route not registered in the IPv6 kernel.  
The following shows the protocol types that may be displayed.  
RA  
S
: Indicates default route by receiving Router Advertisement (RA).  
: Indicates static route information.  
C
: Indicates the interface route information.  
2) Destination/Prefixlen  
The destination IPv6 network address and the Prefix length are displayed.  
IPv6 link-local addresses are not displayed.  
3) Gateway  
The gateway address is displayed.  
If the default route by receiving Router Advertisement (RA) is not registered in  
the IPv6 kernel, the gateway address is not displayed.  
4) UpTime  
The elapsed time after the last update of route information is displayed.  
01:23:45  
6d23h45m  
3w6d23h  
: 1 hour, 23 minutes and 45 seconds have passed (if the elapsed  
time is within 24 hours).  
: 6 days, 23 hours and 45 minutes have passed (if the elapsed  
time is within 7 days).  
: 3 weeks, 6 days and 23 hours have passed.  
5) Distance  
The routing priority is displayed.  
6) Interface  
The interface name through which the gateway can be reached is displayed.  
If status of the interface is invalid, its name is followed by (inactive).  
If the default route by receiving Router Advertisement (RA) is not registered in  
the IPv6 kernel, the interface name is not displayed.  
Routing Table Entry Display Commands  
437  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.26.2.2 show ipv6 route summary  
Function  
Display number of routes registered in IPv6 routing table  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show ipv6 route summary [all]  
Options  
N/A  
Display number of routes registered in IPv6 routing table  
all  
Display all IPv6 route information  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display number of routes registered in IPv6 routing table  
Execution Example  
# show ipv6 route summary  
Route Source  
(1)  
Networks  
(2)  
------------  
Static 3  
RA  
Connected  
Total  
--------  
0
7
10  
1) Route Source  
The routing protocol type is displayed.  
Static  
RA  
: Indicates the static route information.  
: Indicates the default route by receiving Router Advertisement (RA).  
Connected : Indicates the interface route information.  
Total  
: Indicates the total number.  
2) Networks  
The number of route is displayed.  
Routing Table Entry Display Commands  
438  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.26.2.3 show ipv6 route kernel  
Function  
Display routing table of IPv6 kernel  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show ipv6 route kernel  
show ipv6 route kernel summary  
Options  
N/A  
Display the current entry of IPv6 kernel routing table  
longest-match <ipv6_address>  
Display longestmatch IPv6 entry  
summary  
Display number of IPv6 kernel routing table entry  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display IPv6 kernel routing table information  
Execution Example  
# show ipv6 route kernel  
Routing Tables for Internet6  
Destination/Masklen  
Flag  
Interface  
---(1)  
Gateway  
------------------------------------------- ------ ---------  
::1  
UH  
UGS  
U
lo0  
::1  
2001:db8:ffff:1000::/48  
fe80::2a0:c9ff:fed8:904e%lan0  
2001:db8:ffff:2000::/64  
link#1  
fe80::2a0:c9ff:fed8:904e%lan0  
00:a0:c9:d8:90:4e  
fe80::%lo0/64  
fe80::1%lo0  
lan0  
lan0  
lan0  
lo0  
UH  
U
ff01::/32  
U
lo0  
::1  
ff02::%lan0/32  
link#1  
ff02::%lo0/32  
fe80::1%lo0  
UC  
UC  
lan0  
lo0  
Entry:8  
---(2)  
# show ipv6 route kernel longest-match 2001:db8:ffff:1000::1  
Routing Tables for Internet6  
Destination/Masklen  
Gateway  
Flag  
Interface  
------------------------------------------- ------ ---------  
2001:db8:ffff:1000::/48  
fe80::2a0:c9ff:fed8:904e%lan0  
Entry:1  
UGS  
lan0  
# show ipv6 route kernel longest-match 2001:db8:ffff:3000::1  
Routing Tables for Internet6  
Destination/Masklen  
Gateway  
Flag  
Interface  
------------------------------------------- ------ ---------  
Entry:0  
# show ipv6 route kernel summary  
Entry:8  
#
Routing Table Entry Display Commands  
439  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
1) Destination/Masklen  
The destination network address and the mask value are displayed.  
If routed via the host, no mask value is displayed.  
Gateway: The gateway address is displayed.  
The direct route indicates the MAC address of the gateway. If the  
gateway address is not resolved, link#x is shown (where, x is an  
interface index number that the system automatically assigns to each  
interface).  
Flag  
: The entry type is displayed. The details are as follows.  
U (Up) : Indicates that the route is enabled.  
G (Gateway) : Indicates the route which requires an  
intermediaterouting such as gateway.  
H (Host)  
S (Static)  
R (Reject)  
: Indicates the host entry.  
: Indicates the static route.  
: Indicates the discarded route (with ICMP unreach  
transmission).  
B (Blackhole) : Indicates the discarded route (without ICMP unreach  
transmission).  
Interface: The destination interface is shown.  
2) Entry  
The number of entries, excluding the route entries used inside the device, is  
displayed.  
Routing Table Entry Display Commands  
440  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.26.2.4 show ipv6 ra default-router-list  
Function  
Display default router list  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show ipv6 ra default-router-list  
Options  
N/A  
Display default router list  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display default router list  
Execution Example  
# show ipv6 ra default-router-list  
lan0:  
Advertise Router  
(1)  
Lifetime  
(2)  
Time  
(3)  
fe80::1  
1800  
300  
The number of entries : 1  
---(4)  
1) Advertise Router  
Indicates the source address which sending Router Advertisement (RA).  
2) Lifetime  
Indicates the Router Lifetime (sec) in the Router Advertisement (RA).  
3) Time  
Indicates the remaining time (sec) before expiry of the Router Lifetime.  
4) The number of entries  
Indicates the number of default router entries.  
Routing Table Entry Display Commands  
441  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.26.2.5 show ipv6 ra prefix-list  
Function  
Display prefix list  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show ipv6 ra prefix-list  
Options  
N/A  
Display prefix list  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display prefix list  
Execution Example  
# show ipv6 ra prefix-list  
Prefix/Prefixlen  
(1)  
Flag  
(2)  
Preferred Lifetime  
(3)  
Valid Lifetime  
(4)  
Advertise Router  
(5)  
Interface  
(6)  
1000::/64  
fe80::1  
2000::/64  
fe80::2  
2000:2000:2000:2000::/64  
fe80::1000:1000:1000:1001  
2001::/64  
LA  
LA  
-A  
602800(604800)  
lan0  
0(604800)  
lan0  
4800(604800)  
2590000(2592000)  
3599(2592000)  
1992000(2592000)  
lan0  
LA  
infinity  
infinity  
fe80::10  
oob0  
The number of entries : 4  
---(7)  
1) Prefix/Prefixlen  
The IPv6 network prefix and the length in the Router Advertisement (RA).  
2) Flag  
The status of On-link flag and Auto Config flag in the Router Advertisement (RA).  
L
A
-
: On-link flag is 1  
: Auto Config flag is 1  
: flag is 0  
3) Preferred Lifetime  
The remaining time (sec) before expiry of the Preferred Lifetime.  
The Preferred Lifetime (sec) in parentheses.  
4) Valid Lifetime  
The remaining time (sec) before expiry of the Valid Lifetime.  
The Valid Lifetime (sec) in parentheses.  
If the Valid Lifetime expire, the enrty is deleted.  
5) Advertise Router  
The IPv6 address of the router sending the Router Advertisement (RA).  
6) Interface  
The interface name through which the Router Advertisement (RA) was received.  
7) The number of entries  
Indicates the number of prefix entries.  
Routing Table Entry Display Commands  
442  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.27 Packet Statistics Display and Clear  
Operation Commands  
This section explains the commands related to packet statistics information.  
5.27.1 IPv4 Packet Statistics Display Commands  
This section explains the commands related to IPv4 packet statistics display.  
5.27.1.1 show ip traffic  
Function  
Display the IP-related statistics.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show ip traffic  
show ip traffic { tcp | udp | ip | icmp | igmp | pim }  
Options  
N/A  
Display all IP statistics.  
tcp  
Display the TCP packet statistics.  
udp  
Display the UDP packet statistics.  
ip  
Display the IP packet statistics.  
icmp  
Display the ICMP packet statistics.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the IP statistics.  
Packet Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands  
443  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Execution Example  
# show ip traffic  
tcp:  
170 packets sent  
145 data packets (29694 bytes)  
1 data packet (18 bytes) retransmitted  
0 resends initiated by MTU discovery  
19 ack-only packets (10 delayed)  
0 URG only packets  
0 window probe packets  
0 window update packets  
5 control packets  
217 packets received  
145 acks (for 29706 bytes)  
1 duplicate ack  
0 acks for unsent data  
121 packets (14492 bytes) received in-sequence  
0 completely duplicate packets (0 bytes)  
0 old duplicate packets  
0 packets with some dup. data (0 bytes duped)  
3 out-of-order packets (42 bytes)  
0 packets (0 bytes) of data after window  
0 window probes  
0 window update packets  
0 packets received after close  
0 discarded for bad checksums  
0 discarded for bad header offset fields  
0 discarded because packet too short  
3 connection requests  
4 connection accepts  
0 bad connection attempts  
0 listen queue overflows  
6 connections established (including accepts)  
2 connections closed (including 1 drop)  
1 connection updated cached RTT on close  
1 connection updated cached RTT variance on close  
0 connections updated cached ssthresh on close  
1 embryonic connection dropped  
145 segments updated rtt (of 145 attempts)  
1 retransmit timeout  
0 connections dropped by rexmit timeout  
0 persist timeouts  
0 connections dropped by persist timeout  
22 keepalive timeouts  
0 keepalive probes sent  
0 connections dropped by keepalive  
22 correct ACK header predictions  
64 correct data packet header predictions  
udp:  
250 datagrams received  
0 with incomplete header  
0 with bad data length field  
0 with bad checksum  
0 dropped due to no socket  
224 broadcast/multicast datagrams dropped due to no socket  
0 dropped due to full socket buffers  
0 not for hashed pcb  
26 delivered  
0 tunneling packets that can't find gif  
(to be continued)  
Packet Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands  
444  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
(continued)  
26 datagrams output  
ip:  
467 total packets received  
0 bad header checksums  
0 with size smaller than minimum  
0 with data size < data length  
0 with ip length > max ip packet size  
0 with header length < data size  
0 with data length < header length  
0 with bad options  
0 with incorrect version number  
0 fragments received  
0 fragments dropped (dup or out of space)  
0 fragments dropped after timeout  
0 packets reassembled ok  
467 packets for this host  
0 packets for unknown/unsupported protocol  
0 packets forwarded  
0 packets not forwardable  
0 redirects sent  
197 packets sent from this host  
0 packets sent with fabricated ip header  
0 output packets dropped due to no bufs, etc.  
0 output packets discarded due to no route  
0 output datagrams fragmented  
0 fragments created  
0 datagrams that can't be fragmented  
0 tunneling packets that can't find gif  
icmp:  
0 calls to icmp_error  
0 errors not generated because old message was icmp  
0 messages with bad code fields  
0 messages < minimum length  
0 bad checksums  
0 messages with bad length  
0 message responses generated  
#
Packet Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands  
445  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.27.2 IPv4 Packet Statistics Clear Commands  
This section explains the commands related to IPv4 packet statistics clearing.  
5.27.2.1 clear ip traffic  
Function  
Clear the IP-related statistics.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
clear ip traffic  
Options  
N/A  
Clear the IP-related statistics.  
However, the IP packet statistics are not cleared.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Clear the IP-related statistics.  
However, the IP packet statistics are not cleared.  
Execution Example  
# clear ip traffic  
#
Packet Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands  
446  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.27.3 IPv6 Packet Statistics Display Commands  
This section explains the commands related to IPv6 packet statistics display.  
5.27.3.1 show ipv6 traffic  
Function  
Display IPv6 packets statistics information  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show ipv6 traffic  
show ipv6 traffic { tcp | udp | ip | icmp }  
Options  
N/A  
Display all the IPv6 statistics information  
tcp  
Display TCP packets statistics information  
udp  
Display UDP packets statistics information  
ip  
Display IPv6 packets statistics information  
icmp  
Display ICMP packets statistics information  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display IPv6 packets statistics information  
Execution Example  
# show ipv6 traffic  
tcp6:  
0 packets sent  
0 data packets (0 bytes)  
0 data packets (0 bytes) retransmitted  
0 ack-only packets (0 delayed)  
0 URG only packets  
0 window probe packets  
0 window update packets  
0 control packets  
0 packets received  
0 acks (for 0 bytes)  
0 duplicate acks  
0 acks for unsent data  
0 packets (0 bytes) received in-sequence  
0 completely duplicate packets (0 bytes)  
0 old duplicate packets  
0 packets with some dup. data (0 bytes duped)  
0 out-of-order packets (0 bytes)  
0 packets (0 bytes) of data after window  
0 window probes  
0 window update packets  
0 packets received after close  
0 discarded for bad checksums  
0 discarded for bad header offset fields  
0 discarded because packet too short  
(To be continued)  
Packet Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands  
447  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
(Continued)  
0 connection requests  
0 connection accepts  
0 bad connection attempts  
0 connections established (including accepts)  
0 connections closed (including 0 drops)  
0 embryonic connections dropped  
0 segments updated rtt (of 0 attempts)  
0 retransmit timeouts  
0 connections dropped by rexmit timeout  
0 persist timeouts  
0 connections timed out in persist  
0 keepalive timeouts  
0 keepalive probes sent  
0 connections dropped by keepalive  
0 correct ACK header predictions  
0 correct data packet header predictions  
0 PCB cache misses  
udp6:  
0 datagrams received  
0 with incomplete header  
0 with bad data length field  
0 with bad checksum  
0 with no checksum  
0 dropped due to no socket  
0 multicast datagrams dropped due to no socket  
0 dropped due to full socket buffers  
0 delivered  
0 datagrams output  
ip6:  
24 total packets received  
0 with size smaller than minimum  
0 with data size < data length  
0 with bad options  
0 with incorrect version number  
0 fragments received  
0 fragments dropped (dup or out of space)  
0 fragments dropped after timeout  
0 fragments that exceeded limit  
0 packets reassembled ok  
24 packets for this host  
0 packets forwarded  
0 packets not forwardable  
0 redirects sent  
17 packets sent from this host  
0 packets sent with fabricated ip header  
0 output packets dropped due to no bufs, etc.  
0 output packets discarded due to no route  
0 output datagrams fragmented  
0 fragments created  
0 datagrams that can't be fragmented  
0 packets that violated scope rules  
0 multicast packets which we don't join  
Input histogram:  
ICMP6: 24  
Mbuf statistics:  
0 one mbuf  
24 one ext mbuf  
0 two or more ext mbuf  
0 packets whose headers are not continuous  
0 tunneling packets that can't find gif  
0 packets discarded due to too many headers  
0 failures of source address selection  
source addresses on an outgoing I/F  
11 link-locals  
source addresses of same scope  
11 link-locals  
11 forward cache hit  
0 forward cache miss  
(To be continued)  
Packet Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands  
448  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
(Continued)  
icmp6:  
0 calls to icmp6_error  
0 errors not generated because old message was icmp6 error or so  
0 errors not generated because rate limitation  
Output histogram:  
echo: 5  
echo reply: 5  
multicast listener report: 1  
neighbor solicitation: 4  
neighbor advertisement: 2  
0 messages with bad code fields  
0 messages < minimum length  
0 bad checksums  
0 messages with bad length  
Input histogram:  
echo: 5  
echo reply: 15  
neighbor solicitation: 2  
neighbor advertisement: 2  
Histogram of error messages to be generated:  
0 no route  
0 administratively prohibited  
0 beyond scope  
0 address unreachable  
0 port unreachable  
0 packet too big  
0 time exceed transit  
0 time exceed reassembly  
0 erroneous header field  
0 unrecognized next header  
0 unrecognized option  
0 redirect  
0 unknown  
5 message responses generated  
0 messages with too many ND options  
#
Packet Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands  
449  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.27.4 IPv6 Packet Statistics Clear Commands  
This section explains the commands related to IPv6 packet statistics clearing.  
5.27.4.1 clear ipv6 traffic  
Function  
Clear IPv6 packet statistics information  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
clear ipv6 traffic  
Options  
N/A  
Clear all IPv6 statistics information  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user or admin class  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Clear IPv6 packet statistics information  
Execution Example  
# clear ipv6 traffic  
#
Packet Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands  
450  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.28 Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and  
Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
This section explains the commands related to bridge.  
5.28.1 Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display  
Commands  
This section explains the commands related to bridge counter, log, statistics, and status display.  
5.28.1.1 show bridge  
Function  
Display the learning table status and statistics.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show bridge  
show bridge summary  
Options  
N/A  
Display the contents of the learning table.  
summary  
Display the assignment status of the learning table.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the bridge status and statistics.  
Execution Example  
Display of learning table contents  
# show bridge  
Codes: D - Dynamic entry, S - Static entry  
Address  
VLAN Interface  
Status  
------------------ ----- ------------------ ------  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
D
S
S
D
00:00:0e:58:a5:dc 100  
00:0b:5d:89:00:77 10  
00:0b:5d:89:00:77 100  
00:e0:00:ad:a9:76 100  
08:00:46:6f:19:3b 10  
08:00:46:70:84:e4 10  
linkaggregation8  
self  
self  
linkaggregation1  
ether7  
ether8  
S
D
1) MAC address registered on the learning table  
2) VLAN ID  
3) Name of the interface where the entry terminal exists  
ether: Ethernet port  
linkaggregation: Link aggregation port  
self  
: Device address  
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
451  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
4) Status of learning table  
One of the following is displayed.  
D
S
: Dynamic learning table  
: Static learning table  
Display of learning table assignment  
#show bridge summary  
Registered station blocks :  
6
3
1
2
--- (1)  
--- (2)  
--- (3)  
--- (4)  
--- (5)  
Dynamic entry  
Static entry  
System entry  
:
:
:
Free station blocks  
: 16378  
1) Number of learning tables currently used  
2) Number of dynamically learned tables  
3) Number of statically learned tables  
4) Number of learned tables used inside the device  
5) Number of unused learning tables  
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
452  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.28.2 Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear  
Commands  
This section explains the commands related to bridge counter, log, statistics,  
and status clearing.  
5.28.2.1 clear bridge  
Function  
Initialize the dynamically learned MAC address from the learning table.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
clear bridge  
clear bridge port <portlist>  
clear bridge mac <macaddr> <vid>  
Options  
N/A  
Delete all dynamically learned MAC addresses from the learning table.  
port  
Specify to delete port by port.  
mac  
Specify to delete MAC address by MAC address.  
<portlist>  
port list  
Specify a list of physical port numbers to initialize learning table.  
When specifying multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8").  
<macaddr>  
MAC address  
Specify the MAC address to be deleted from the learning table.  
(It must be in the xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx format, where "xx" is a 2-digit hexadecimal value.)  
<vid>  
VLAN ID  
Specify a decimal VLAN ID from 1 to 4094.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Caution  
Delete dynamically learned MAC address from the learning table.  
The address statically learned by the "vlan forward" command definition is not  
initialized.  
If a member port of link aggregation is specified, all learning addresses of the link  
aggregation are deleted.  
Execution Example  
# clear bridge  
#
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
453  
Commands  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.28.3 Spanning Tree Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status  
Display Commands  
This section explains the commands related to spanning tree counter, log, statistics, and status display.  
5.28.3.1 show spanning-tree  
Function  
Display the spanning tree information.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show spanning-tree  
show spanning-tree root  
show spanning-tree bridge  
show spanning-tree active  
show spanning-tree interface <interface_name>  
show spanning-tree detail  
Options  
N/A  
Display all spanning tree information briefly.  
root  
Display the spanning tree information of the root bridge only.  
bridge  
Display the spanning tree bridge information of the device only.  
active  
Display the spanning tree information of the active interface only.  
interface <interface_name>  
Display the spanning tree information of the specified interface only.  
detail  
Display all spanning tree information in detail.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the status of the spanning tree function.  
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
454  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Execution Example  
Display of all spanning tree information in a simple format  
# show spanning-tree  
Spanning tree enabled protocol IEEE  
Root ID  
Priority  
Address  
Cost  
32768  
00:00:e2:08:57:89  
200000  
---(1)  
---(2)  
---(3)  
---(4)  
Port  
1 (eth1)  
Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec  
---------------- -------------- --------------------  
(5)  
(6)  
(7)  
Bridge ID Priority  
Address  
32768  
00:0b:5d:89:00:aa  
---(8)  
---(9)  
Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec  
---------------- -------------- --------------------  
(10)  
BPDU Mode off  
-------------  
(13)  
(11)  
(12)  
STP Mode stp  
------------  
(14)  
Interface  
Port ID Cost  
Status(Role)  
Designated Bridge ID  
Sent  
Received  
--------------- -------- ----------- ----------------------- ----------  
eth1  
----  
(15)  
128.1  
-----  
(16)  
128.1  
-----  
(20)  
128.2  
-----  
(16)  
128.2  
-----  
(20)  
200000* Forwarding(Root)  
------- -----------------  
5
---  
(19)  
24  
---  
(23)  
25  
---  
(19)  
0
---  
(23)  
(17)  
(18)  
0 32768 00:00:e2:08:57:89  
---- -----------------------  
(21)  
(22)  
eth2  
----  
(15)  
200000* Forwarding(Designated)  
------- ----------------------  
(17)  
(18)  
200000 32768 00:0b:5d:89:00:aa  
------- -----------------------  
(21)  
(22)  
1) Priority of root bridge  
The priority of the bridge identified by the root bridge ID is displayed.  
2) MAC address of the root bridge  
The MAC address identified by the root bridge ID is displayed.  
3) Root path cost  
The path cost to the root bridge is displayed.  
4) Port number and interface name  
The port number and the interface name are displayed.  
If this device operates as the root bridge, the following is displayed.  
Port  
0 (This bridge is the root)  
5) Configuration BPDU send interval  
The configuration BPDU send interval (in seconds) is displayed.  
6) Maximum wait time  
The maximum wait time (in seconds) of configuration BPDUs is displayed.  
7) Maximum forwarding delay time  
The maximum forwarding delay time (in seconds) is displayed.  
8) Bridge priority of local device  
The bridge priority used for the bridge identifier of this device is displayed.  
9) MAC address of local device  
The MAC address used for the bridge identifier of this device is displayed.  
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
455  
Commands  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
10) Configuration BPDU send interval  
The configuration BPDU send interval (in seconds) is displayed.  
11) Maximum wait time  
The maximum wait time (in seconds) of configuration BPDUs is displayed.  
12) Maximum forwarding delay time  
The maximum forwarding delay time (in seconds) is displayed.  
13) BPDU forwarding function  
The BPDU forwarding function (on or off) defined on this device is displayed.  
14) STP operation mode  
The STP operation mode (disable/stp/rstp/mstp) of this device is displayed.  
15) Interface name  
The interface name is displayed.  
16) Port ID  
The Port ID is displayed.  
17) Port path cost  
The path cost of the port is displayed (the cost value is followed by an asterisk  
(*) if calculated automatically).  
18) Port status and roles  
One of the following is displayed for the port status.  
Disabled  
: The STP is disabled.  
Discarding : The port is in the discarding state (it is displayed only when  
RSTP or MSTP is active).  
Blocking  
Listening  
Learning  
: The port is in the blocking state.  
: The port is in the listening state.  
: The port is in the learning state.  
Forwarding : The port is in the forwarding state.  
One of the following is displayed for the port role.  
Disabled  
Root  
: The STP is disabled.  
: Root port  
Designated Designated port  
Blocking  
Alternate  
: Blocking port  
: Alternate port (It is displayed only when RSTP or MSTP is  
active.)  
Backup  
: Backup port (It is displayed only when RSTP or MSTP is active.)  
19) Number of BPDU send times  
The number of BPDU send times (the total value of all BPDU types) is  
displayed.  
20) Port ID of designated bridge  
The port ID of the designated bridge is displayed.  
21) Designated path cost of configuration BPDU  
The designated path cost of the configuration BPDU is displayed.  
22) Designated bridge ID  
The designated bridge ID (the priority and MAC address) is displayed.  
23) Number of BPDU receive times  
The number of BPDU receive times (the total value of all BPDU types) is  
displayed.  
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
456  
Commands  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Display of spanning tree information of the root bridge  
# show spanning-tree root  
Root ID  
Priority  
Address  
Cost  
32768  
00:00:e2:08:57:89  
200000  
---(1)  
---(2)  
---(3)  
---(4)  
Port  
1 (eth1)  
Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec  
---------------- -------------- --------------------  
(5)  
(6)  
(7)  
1) Bridge priority  
The priority of the root bridge is displayed.  
2) MAC address  
The MAC address of the root bridge is displayed.  
3) Root path cost  
The path cost to the root bridge is displayed.  
4) Root port  
The interface name of the root port is displayed.  
If this device operates as the root bridge, the following is displayed.  
Port  
0 (This bridge is the root)  
5) Configuration BPDU send interval  
The configuration BPDU send interval (in seconds) is displayed.  
6) Maximum wait time (in seconds)  
The maximum wait time (in seconds) of configuration BPDUs is displayed.  
7) Maximum forwarding delay time (in seconds)  
The maximum forwarding delay time (in seconds) is displayed.  
Display of spanning tree bridge information of this device  
# show spanning-tree bridge  
Bridge ID Priority  
Address  
32768  
00:0b:5d:89:00:aa  
---(1)  
---(2)  
Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec  
---------------- -------------- --------------------  
(3)  
BPDU Mode off  
-------------  
(6)  
(4)  
(5)  
STP Mode stp  
------------  
(7)  
1) Bridge priority  
The bridge priority used for the bridge identifier of this device is displayed.  
2) MAC address  
The MAC address used for the bridge identifier of this device is displayed.  
3) Configuration BPDU send interval  
The configuration BPDU send interval (in seconds) is displayed.  
4) Maximum wait time  
The maximum wait time (in seconds) of configuration BPDUs is displayed.  
5) Maximum forwarding delay time  
The maximum forwarding delay time (in seconds) is displayed.  
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
457  
Commands  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
6) BPDU forwarding function  
The BPDU forwarding function (on or off) defined on this device is displayed.  
7) STP operation mode  
The STP operation mode (disable/stp/rstp/mstp) of this device is displayed.  
Display of only spanning tree information of the active interface  
# show spanning-tree interface active  
eth1 is Forwarding Port Version 0(STP)  
------------------ -------------------  
(1)  
(2)  
Port path cost 200000(auto), Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.1  
--------------------------- ----------------- ----------------------  
(3)  
Port role is Root  
-----------------  
(6)  
(4)  
(5)  
Designated root has priority 32768, address 00:00:e2:08:57:89  
---------------------------------- -------------------------  
(7)  
(8)  
Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 00:00:e2:08:57:89  
------------------------------------ -------------------------  
(9)  
(10)  
Designated port id is 128.1, Designated path cost 0  
--------------------------- -----------------------  
(11)  
(12)  
BPDU statistics:  
Config BPDU: sent 3, sent error 0  
------ ------------  
(13)  
(14)  
received 112, discarded 0  
------------- -----------  
(15)  
(16)  
TCN BPDU:  
sent 2, sent error 0  
------ ------------  
(17)  
(18)  
received 0, discarded 0  
---------- -----------  
(19)  
(20)  
Other error: bad protocol 0, bad version 0  
-------------- -------------  
(21)  
(22)  
bad BPDU type 0  
---------------  
(23)  
eth2 is Forwarding Port Version 0(STP)  
------------------ -------------------  
(1)  
(2)  
Port path cost 200000(auto), Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.2  
--------------------------- ----------------- ----------------------  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
Port role is Designated  
-----------------------  
(6)  
Designated root has priority 32768, address 00:00:e2:08:57:89  
---------------------------------- -------------------------  
(7)  
(8)  
Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 00:0b:5d:89:00:aa  
------------------------------------ -------------------------  
(9)  
(10)  
Designated port id is 128.2, Designated path cost 200000  
--------------------------- ---------------------------  
(11)  
(12)  
(To be continued)  
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
458  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
(Continued)  
BPDU statistics:  
Config BPDU: sent 292, sent error 0  
--------- ------------  
(13)  
(14)  
received 0, discarded 0  
----------- -----------  
(15)  
(16)  
TCN BPDU:  
sent 0, sent error 0  
------ ------------  
(17)  
(18)  
received 0, discarded 0  
---------- -----------  
(19)  
(20)  
Other error: bad protocol 0, bad version 0  
-------------- -------------  
(21)  
(22)  
bad BPDU type 0  
---------------  
(23)  
1) Interface name and port status  
One of the following is displayed for the port status.  
Disabled : The STP is disabled.  
Discarding : The port is in the discarding state (it is displayed only when  
RSTP or MSTP is active).  
Blocking  
Listening  
Learning  
: The port is in the blocking state.  
: The port is in the listening state.  
: The port is in the learning state.  
Forwarding : The port is in the forwarding state.  
2) STP version of port  
One of the following is displayed for the STP version.  
- (OFF)  
: STP unused port  
: 802.1d STP  
0 (STP)  
2 (RSTP)  
3 (MSTP)  
: 802.1w RSTP  
: 802.1s MSTP  
3) Port path cost  
The path cost of the relevant port is displayed.  
4) Port priority  
The priority of the relevant port is displayed.  
5) Port ID  
The port ID (the port priority and port number) is displayed.  
6) Port role  
One of the following is displayed for the port role.  
Disabled  
Root  
: The STP is disabled.  
: Root port  
Designated : Designated port  
Blocking  
Alternate  
Backup  
: Blocking port  
: Alternate port (It is displayed only when RSTP or MSTP is active.)  
: Backup port (It is displayed only when RSTP or MSTP is active.)  
7) Priority of root bridge  
The priority of the root bridge is displayed.  
8) MAC address of root bridge  
The MAC address of the root bridge is displayed.  
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
459  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
9) Designated bridge priority  
The priority of the designated bridge is displayed.  
10) MAC address of designated bridge  
The MAC address of the designated bridge is displayed.  
11) Designated port ID  
The designated port ID (the port priority and port number) is displayed.  
12) Designated port path cost  
The path cost of the designated port is displayed.  
13) Number of configuration BPDU send times  
The number of configuration BPDU send times is displayed.  
14) Number of configuration BPDU send error times  
The number of configuration BPDU send error times is displayed.  
15) Number of configuration BPDU receive times  
The number of configuration BPDU receive times is displayed.  
16) Number of configuration BPDU receive discarding times  
The number of configuration BPDU receive discarding times is displayed.  
17) Number of TCN BPDU send times  
The number of TCN BPDU send times is displayed.  
18) Number of TCN BPDU send error times  
The number of TCN BPDU send error times is displayed.  
19) Number of TCN BPDU receive times  
The number of TCN BPDU receive times is displayed.  
20) Number of TCN BPDU receive discarding times  
The number of TCN BPDU receive discarding times is displayed.  
21) Number of protocol version error times  
The number of discarding times due to protocol version error is displayed.  
22) Number of version error times  
The number of discarding times due to version error is displayed.  
23) Number of BPDU type error times  
The number of discarding times due to BPDU type error is displayed.  
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
460  
Commands  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Display of spanning tree information of the specified interface  
# show spanning-tree interface 1  
eth1 is Forwarding Port Version 0(STP)  
------------------ -------------------  
(1)  
(2)  
Port path cost 200000(auto), Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.1  
--------------------------- ----------------- ----------------------  
(3)  
Port role is Root  
-----------------  
(6)  
(4)  
(5)  
Designated root has priority 32768, address 00:00:e2:08:57:89  
---------------------------------- -------------------------  
(7)  
(8)  
Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 00:00:e2:08:57:89  
------------------------------------ -------------------------  
(9)  
(10)  
Designated port id is 128.1, Designated path cost 0  
--------------------------- -----------------------  
(11)  
(12)  
BPDU statistics:  
Config BPDU: sent 3, sent error 0  
------ ------------  
(13)  
(14)  
received 112, discarded 0  
------------- -----------  
(15)  
(16)  
TCN BPDU:  
sent 2, sent error 0  
------ ------------  
(17)  
(18)  
received 0, discarded 0  
---------- -----------  
(19)  
(20)  
Other error: bad protocol 0, bad version 0  
-------------- -------------  
(21)  
(22)  
bad BPDU type 0  
---------------  
(23)  
1) Interface name and port status  
One of the following is displayed for the port status.  
Disabled : The STP is disabled.  
Discarding : The port is in the discarding state (it is displayed only when  
RSTP or MSTP is active).  
Blocking  
Listening  
Learning  
: The port is in the blocking state.  
: The port is in the listening state.  
: The port is in the learning state.  
Forwarding : The port is in the forwarding state.  
2) STP version of port  
One of the following is displayed for the STP version.  
- (OFF)  
: STP unused port  
: 802.1d STP  
0 (STP)  
2 (RSTP)  
3 (MSTP)  
: 802.1w RSTP  
: 802.1s MSTP  
3) Port path cost  
The path cost of the relevant port is displayed.  
4) Port priority  
The priority of the relevant port is displayed.  
5) Port ID  
The port ID (the port priority and port number) is displayed.  
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
461  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
6) Port role  
One of the following is displayed for the port role.  
Disabled  
Root  
: The STP is disabled.  
: Root port  
Designated : Designated port  
Blocking  
Alternate  
Backup  
: Blocking port  
: Alternate port (It is displayed only when RSTP or MSTP is active.)  
: Backup port (It is displayed only when RSTP or MSTP is active.)  
7) Priority of root bridge  
The priority of the root bridge is displayed.  
8) MAC address of root bridge  
The MAC address of the root bridge is displayed.  
9) Designated bridge priority  
The priority of the designated bridge is displayed.  
10) MAC address of designated bridge  
The MAC address of the designated bridge is displayed.  
11) Designated port ID  
The designated port ID (the port priority and port number) is displayed.  
12) Designated port path cost  
The path cost of the designated port is displayed.  
13) Number of configuration BPDU send times  
The number of configuration BPDU send times is displayed.  
14) Number of configuration BPDU send error times  
The number of configuration BPDU send error times is displayed.  
15) Number of configuration BPDU receive times  
The number of configuration BPDU receive times is displayed.  
16) Number of configuration BPDU receive discarding times  
The number of configuration BPDU receive discarding times is displayed.  
17) Number of TCN BPDU send times  
The number of TCN BPDU send times is displayed.  
18) Number of TCN BPDU send error times  
The number of TCN BPDU send error times is displayed.  
19) Number of TCN BPDU receive times  
The number of TCN BPDU receive times is displayed.  
20) Number of TCN BPDU receive discarding times  
The number of TCN BPDU receive discarding times is displayed.  
21) Number of protocol version error times  
The number of discarding times due to protocol version error is displayed.  
22) Number of version error times  
The number of discarding times due to version error is displayed.  
23) Number of BPDU type error times  
The number of discarding times due to BPDU type error is displayed.  
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
462  
Commands  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
To display all spanning tree information in detail  
# show spanning-tree detail  
IEEE compatible spanning tree protocol is being executed.  
Bridge Identifier has priority 32768, address 00:0b:5d:89:00:aa  
------------------------------------ -------------------------  
(1)  
(2)  
Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15  
----------------------- ---------- ----------------  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
Current root has priority 32768, address 00:00:e2:08:57:89  
------------------------------- -------------------------  
(6)  
(7)  
Root port is eth1, cost of root path is 200000  
----------------- ---------------------------  
(8)  
(9)  
STP Mode stp, BPDU Mode off  
------------ -------------  
(38)  
(39)  
Topology changes 2 Detected date 2011/01/01(Sat) 05:30:28  
------------------ --------------------------------------  
(33)  
(34)  
(time since 05:30:28)  
-------------------  
(35)  
eth1 is Forwarding Port Version 0(STP) STP-Compatible(-)  
------------------ ------------------- -----------------  
(10)  
(11)  
(36)  
Port path cost 200000(auto), Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.1  
--------------------------- ----------------- ----------------------  
(12)  
Port role is Root  
-----------------  
(15)  
(13)  
(14)  
Designated root has priority 32768, address 00:00:e2:08:57:89  
---------------------------------- -------------------------  
(16)  
(17)  
Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 00:00:e2:08:57:89  
------------------------------------ -------------------------  
(18)  
(19)  
Designated port id is 128.1, Designated path cost 0  
--------------------------- -----------------------  
(20)  
(21)  
BPDU statistics:  
Config BPDU: sent 3, sent error 0  
------ ------------  
(22)  
(23)  
received 901, discarded 0  
------------- -----------  
(24)  
(25)  
TCN BPDU:  
sent 0, sent error 0  
------ ------------  
(26)  
(27)  
received 0, discarded 0  
---------- -----------  
(28)  
(29)  
Other error: bad protocol 0, bad version 0  
-------------- -------------  
(30)  
(31)  
bad BPDU type 0  
---------------  
(32)  
(To be continued)  
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
463  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
(Continued)  
Other statistics:  
changed to forwarding state 1  
---  
(37)  
eth2 is Forwarding Port Version 0(STP) STP-Compatible(-)  
------------------ ------------------- -----------------  
(10)  
(11)  
(36)  
Port path cost 200000(auto), Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.2  
--------------------------- ----------------- ----------------------  
(12)  
(13)  
(14)  
Port role is Designated  
-----------------------  
(15)  
Designated root has priority 32768, address 00:00:e2:08:57:89  
---------------------------------- -------------------------  
(16)  
(17)  
Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 00:0b:5d:89:00:aa  
------------------------------------ -------------------------  
(18)  
(19)  
Designated port id is 128.2, Designated path cost 20000  
--------------------------- --------------------------  
(20)  
(21)  
BPDU statistics:  
Config BPDU: sent 902, sent error 0  
--------- ------------  
(22)  
(23)  
received 0, discarded 0  
------------- -----------  
(24)  
(25)  
TCN BPDU:  
sent 0, sent error 0  
------ ------------  
(26)  
(27)  
received 0, discarded 0  
---------- -----------  
(28)  
(29)  
Other error: bad protocol 0, bad version 0  
-------------- -------------  
(30)  
(31)  
bad BPDU type 0  
---------------  
(32)  
Other statistics:  
Changed to forwarding state 1  
---  
(37)  
1) Bridge priority  
The bridge priority used for the bridge identifier of this device is displayed.  
2) MAC address  
The MAC address used for the bridge identifier of this device is displayed.  
3) Configuration BPDU send interval  
The configuration BPDU send interval (in seconds) is displayed.  
4) Maximum wait time  
The maximum wait time (in seconds) of configuration BPDUs is displayed.  
5) Maximum forwarding delay time  
The maximum forwarding delay time (in seconds) is displayed.  
6) Priority of root bridge  
The priority of the root bridge is displayed.  
7) MAC address of root bridge  
The MAC address of the root bridge is displayed.  
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
464  
Commands  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
8) Root port  
The interface name of the root port is displayed.  
If this device operates as the root bridge, the root port (Item (8)) and root path  
cost (Item (9)) are not displayed. Only the following message is displayed.  
This bridge is the root  
9) Root path cost  
The path cost to the root bridge is displayed.  
10) Interface name and port status  
One of the following is displayed for the port status.  
Disabled  
: The STP is disabled.  
Discarding : The port is in the discarding state (it is displayed only when  
RSTP or MSTP is active).  
Blocking  
Listening  
Learning  
: The port is in the blocking state.  
: The port is in the listening state.  
: The port is in the learning state.  
Forwarding : The port is in the forwarding state.  
11) STP version of port  
One of the following is displayed for the STP version.  
- (OFF)  
: STP unused port  
: 802.1d STP  
0 (STP)  
2 (RSTP)  
3 (MSTP)  
: 802.1w RSTP  
: 802.1s MSTP  
12) Port path cost  
The path cost of the relevant port is displayed.  
13) Port priority  
The priority of the relevant port is displayed.  
14) Port ID  
The port ID (the port priority and port number) is displayed.  
15) Port role  
One of the following is displayed for the port role.  
Disabled  
Root  
: The STP is disabled.  
: Root port  
Designated : Designated port  
Blocking  
Alternate  
Backup  
: Blocking port  
: Alternate port (It is displayed only when RSTP or MSTP is active.)  
: Backup port (It is displayed only when RSTP or MSTP is active.)  
16) Priority of root bridge  
The priority of the root bridge is displayed.  
17) MAC address of root bridge  
The MAC address of the root bridge is displayed.  
18) Designated bridge priority  
The priority of the designated bridge is displayed.  
19) MAC address of designated bridge  
The MAC address of the designated bridge is displayed.  
20) Designated port ID  
The designated port ID (the port priority and port number) is displayed.  
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
465  
Commands  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
21) Designated port path cost  
The path cost of the designated port is displayed.  
22) Number of configuration BPDU send times  
The number of configuration BPDU send times is displayed.  
23) Number of configuration BPDU send error times  
The number of configuration BPDU send error times is displayed.  
24) Number of configuration BPDU receive times  
The number of configuration BPDU receive times is displayed.  
25) Number of configuration BPDU receive discarding times  
The number of configuration BPDU receive discarding times is displayed.  
26) Number of TCN BPDU send times  
The number of TCN BPDU send times is displayed.  
27) Number of TCN BPDU send error times  
The number of TCN BPDU send error times is displayed.  
28) Number of TCN BPDU receive times  
The number of TCN BPDU receive times is displayed.  
29) Number of TCN BPDU receive discarding times  
The number of TCN BPDU receive discarding times is displayed.  
30) Number of protocol version error times  
The number of discarding times due to protocol version error is displayed.  
31) Number of version error times  
The number of discarding times due to version error is displayed.  
32) Number of BPDU type error times  
The number of discarding times due to BPDU type error is displayed.  
33) Number of topology change detection times  
The number of topology change detection times is displayed.  
34) Topology change detection time  
The clock time when the topology change was lastly detected.  
35) Elapsed time after topology change detection  
The elapsed time after the topology change was lastly detected.  
36) STP (IEEE802.1D) compatibility mode  
One of the following is displayed for the STP (IEEE802.1D) compatible mode  
operation of the port.  
STP : The port is active in the STP compatible mode when the port version is  
RSTP or MSTP.  
-
: The port is not active in the compatible mode (but operating in the port's  
operation version).  
37) Number of forwarding status transition times  
The number of times when the port was changed to the forwarding state is  
displayed.  
38) STP operation mode  
The STP operation mode (disable/stp/rstp/mstp) of this device is displayed.  
39) BPDU forwarding function  
The BPDU forwarding function (on or off) defined on this device is displayed.  
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
466  
Commands  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.28.3.2 show spanning-tree instance  
Function  
Display the spanning tree information.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show spanning-tree instance <instance_id> [detail]  
Options  
<instance_id>  
Display the spanning tree information of the specified instance only.  
detail  
Display the spanning tree information of the specified instance in detail.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the status of the MSTP spanning tree function.  
Execution Example  
Display of spanning tree information of instance 0  
# show spanning-tree instance 0  
MSTP Configuration Information  
Region Name : region1 Revision Level : 0  
--------------------- ------------------  
(1)  
Instance ID 0  
-------------  
(3)  
(2)  
Vlans 20-30  
------------------------  
(4)  
Root ID  
Priority  
Address  
Cost  
32768  
00:00:e2:08:57:89  
200000  
---(5)  
---(6)  
---(7)  
---(8)  
Port  
1 (eth1)  
Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec  
---------------- -------------- --------------------  
(9)  
(10)  
(11)  
Remaining Hops 20  
-----------------  
(12)  
Bridge ID  
Priority  
Address  
32768  
00:0b:5d:89:00:aa  
---(13)  
---(14)  
Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec  
---------------- -------------- --------------------  
(15)  
Hop count 20  
-------------  
(18)  
(16)  
(17)  
BPDU Mode off  
-------------  
(19)  
STP Mode mstp  
-------------  
(20)  
(To be continued)  
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
467  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
(Continued)  
Interface  
Port ID Cost  
Status(Role)  
Sent  
Designated Bridge ID  
Received  
--------------- -------- ----------- ----------------------- ----------  
eth1  
----  
(21)  
128.1  
-----  
(22)  
128.1  
-----  
(26)  
128.2  
128.2  
128.3  
0.0  
128.4  
128.4  
128.5  
128.4  
128.6  
0.0  
128.7  
0.0  
128.8  
0.0  
128.9  
0.0  
128.10  
0.0  
128.11  
0.0  
128.12  
0.0  
128.13  
128.2  
128.14  
0.0  
128.15  
0.0  
20000* Forwarding(Root)  
------- -----------------  
137  
---  
(25)  
137  
---  
(29)  
137  
135  
0
(23)  
(24)  
0 0 00:00:e2:08:57:89  
---- -----------------------  
(27)  
(28)  
eth2  
20000* Forwarding(Designated)  
0 0 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb  
0 Discarding(Disabled)  
0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00  
20000* Forwarding(Designated)  
0 0 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb  
20000* Discarding(Backup)  
0 0 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb  
0 Discarding(Disabled)  
0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00  
0 Discarding(Disabled)  
0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00  
0 Discarding(Disabled)  
0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00  
0 Discarding(Disabled)  
0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00  
0 Discarding(Disabled)  
0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00  
0 Discarding(Disabled)  
0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00  
0 Discarding(Disabled)  
0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00  
20000* Discarding(Backup)  
0 0 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb  
0 Discarding(Disabled)  
0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00  
0 Discarding(Disabled)  
0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00  
0 Discarding(Disabled)  
0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00  
eth3  
0
eth4  
137  
137  
137  
136  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
eth5  
eth6  
eth7  
eth8  
eth9  
eth10  
eth11  
eth12  
eth13  
eth14  
eth15  
eth16  
0
138  
137  
0
0
0
0
0
0
128.16  
0.0  
1) Region Name  
The region name is displayed.  
2) Revision Level  
The revision level is displayed.  
3) Instance ID  
The instance ID is displayed.  
4) Vlans  
The VLAN ID belonging to the instance is displayed.  
5) Bridge priority  
The priority of MSTI root bridge is displayed.  
6) MAC address  
The MAC address of MSTI root bridge is displayed.  
7) Root path cost  
The path cost to the MSTI root bridge is displayed.  
8) Root port  
The interface name of the root port is displayed.  
9) Configuration BPDU send interval  
The configuration BPDU send interval (in seconds) is displayed.  
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
468  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
10) Maximum wait time (in seconds)  
The maximum wait time (in seconds) of configuration BPDUs is displayed.  
11) Maximum forwarding delay time (in seconds)  
The maximum forwarding delay time (in seconds) is displayed.  
12) Remaining hop count from root bridge  
The remaining hop count from the root bridge is displayed.  
13) Bridge priority  
The bridge priority used for the bridge identifier of this device is displayed.  
14) MAC address  
The MAC address used for the bridge identifier of this device is displayed.  
15) Configuration BPDU send interval  
The configuration BPDU send interval (in seconds) is displayed.  
16) Maximum wait time  
The maximum wait time (in seconds) of configuration BPDUs is displayed.  
17) Maximum forwarding delay time  
The maximum forwarding delay time (in seconds) is displayed.  
18) Hop count of maximum forwarding delay  
The maximum forwarding delay time is displayed by hop counting.  
19) BPDU forwarding function  
The BPDU forwarding function (on or off) defined on this device is displayed.  
20) STP operation mode  
The STP operation mode (disable/stp/rstp/mstp) of this device is displayed.  
21) Interface name  
The interface name is displayed.  
22) Port ID  
The Port ID is displayed.  
23) Port path cost  
The path cost of the port is displayed (the cost value is followed by an asterisk  
(*) if calculated automatically).  
24) Port status and roles  
One of the following is displayed for the port status.  
Disabled  
: The STP is disabled.  
Discarding : The port is in the discarding state (it is displayed only when  
RSTP or MSTP is active).  
Blocking  
Listening  
Learning  
: The port is in the blocking state.  
: The port is in the listening state.  
: The port is in the learning state.  
Forwarding : The port is in the forwarding state.  
One of the following is displayed for the port role.  
: The STP is disabled.  
: Root port  
Disabled  
Root  
Designated : Designated port  
Blocking  
Alternate  
Backup  
: Blocking port  
: Blocking port  
: Backup port  
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
469  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
25) Number of BPDU send times  
The number of BPDU send times (the total value of all BPDU types) is  
displayed.  
26) Port ID of designated bridge  
The port ID of the designated bridge is displayed.  
27) Designated path cost of configuration BPDU  
The designated path cost of the configuration BPDU is displayed.  
28) Designated bridge ID  
The designated bridge ID (the priority and MAC address) is displayed.  
29) Number of BPDU receive times  
The number of BPDU receive times (the total value of all BPDU types) is  
displayed.  
Display of spanning tree information of the specified instance other than  
instance 0  
# show spanning-tree instance 1  
MSTP Configuration Information  
Region Name : region1 Revision Level : 0  
Instance ID 1  
Vlans 120-130  
Root ID  
Priority  
Address  
Cost  
32768  
00:00:e2:08:57:89  
200000  
Port  
1 (eth1)  
Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec  
Remaining Hops 20  
Bridge ID  
Priority  
Address  
32768  
00:0b:5d:89:00:aa  
Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec  
Hop count 20  
BPDU Mode off  
STP Mode mstp  
Interface  
Port ID Cost  
Status(Role)  
Enable  
Designated Bridge ID  
--------------- -------- ----------- ----------------------- ----------  
eth1  
----  
(1)  
128.1  
-----  
(2)  
20000* Forwarding(Root)  
------- -----------------  
*
---  
(5)  
(3)  
(4)  
128.1  
-----  
(6)  
0 0 00:00:e2:08:57:89  
---- -----------------------  
(7) (8)  
eth2  
eth4  
eth5  
eth8  
eth13  
128.2  
128.2  
128.4  
128.4  
128.5  
128.4  
128.8  
0.0  
20000* Forwarding(Designated)  
0 32769 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb  
20000* Forwarding(Designated)  
0 32769 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb  
20000* Discarding(Backup)  
0 32769 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb  
0 Discarding(Disabled)  
0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00  
20000* Discarding(Backup)  
0 32769 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb  
*
*
*
128.13  
128.2  
*
1) Interface name  
Only the active instances are displayed.  
2) Port ID of each instance  
The port ID of the specified instance is displayed.  
3) Port path cost of each instance  
The path cost of the port of the specified instance is displayed (the cost value is  
followed by an asterisk (*) if calculated automatically).  
4) Port status and role of the specified instance  
One of the following is displayed for the port status.  
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
470  
Commands  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Disabled  
: The STP is disabled.  
Discarding : The port is in the discarding state (it is displayed only when  
RSTP or MSTP is active).  
Blocking  
Listening  
Learning  
: The port is in the blocking state.  
: The port is in the listening state.  
: The port is in the learning state.  
Forwarding : The port is in the forwarding state.  
One of the following is displayed for the port role.  
: The STP is disabled.  
: Root port  
Disabled  
Root  
Designated : Designated port  
Blocking  
Alternate  
Backup  
: Blocking port  
: Master port  
: Backup port  
5) Port operation status  
The operation status of the port is displayed (an asterisk (*) is displayed when  
enabled).  
6) Port ID of designated bridge  
The port ID of the designated bridge of the specified instance is displayed.  
7) Designated path cost of BPDU  
The designated path cost of BPDU of the specified instance is displayed.  
8) Designated bridge ID  
The designated bridge ID of the specified instance (the priority and MAC  
address) is displayed.  
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
471  
Commands  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Display of detailed spanning tree information of instance 0  
# show spanning-tree instance 0 detail  
MSTP Configuration Information  
Region Name : region1 Revision Level : 0  
Instance ID 1  
Vlans 20-30  
Root ID  
Priority  
Address  
Cost  
32768  
00:00:e2:08:57:89  
200000  
Port  
1 (eth1)  
Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec  
Remaining Hops 20  
Bridge ID  
Priority  
Address  
32768  
00:0b:5d:89:00:aa  
Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec  
Hop count 20  
BPDU Mode off  
STP Mode mstp  
Topology changes 2 Detected date 2011/01/01(Sat) 05:30:28  
------------------ --------------------------------------  
(27)  
(28)  
(time since 05:30:28)  
--------------------  
(29)  
eth1 is Forwarding Port Version 3(MSTP) STP-Compatible(-) Boundary(*)  
------------------ -------------------- ----------------- ----------  
(1)  
(2)  
(30)  
(31)  
Port path cost 20000(auto), Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.2  
--------------------------- ----------------- ----------------------  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
Port role is Designated  
-----------------------  
(6)  
Designated root has priority 0, address 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb  
------------------------------ -------------------------  
(7)  
(8)  
Designated bridge has priority 0, address 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb  
-------------------------------- -------------------------  
(9)  
(10)  
Designated port is 128.2, Designated path cost 0  
------------------------- ------------------------  
(11)  
(12)  
Port info type is Mine  
---- (13)  
Remaining Hops 20  
--- (14)  
This port is external region  
--------------- (15)  
(To be continued)  
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
472  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
(Continued)  
BPDU statistics:  
Config BPDU: sent 141, sent error 0  
-------- ------------  
(16)  
(17)  
received 138, discarded 1  
------------ -----------  
(18)  
(19)  
TCN BPDU:  
sent 0, sent error 0  
------ ------------  
(20)  
(21)  
received 0, discarded 0  
---------- -----------  
(22)  
(23)  
Other error: bad protocol 0, bad version 0  
-------------- -------------  
(24)  
(25)  
bad BPDU type 0  
---------------  
(26)  
Other statistics:  
changed to forwarding state 1  
---  
(32)  
eth2 is Forwarding Port Version 3(MSTP) STP-Compatible(-) Boundary(-)  
Port path cost 20000(auto), Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.2  
Port role is Designated  
Designated root has priority 0, address 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb  
Designated bridge has priority 0, address 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb  
Designated port is 128.2, Designated path cost 0  
Port info type is Mine  
Remaining Hops 20  
This port is internal region  
BPDU statistics:  
Config BPDU: sent 141, sent error 0  
received 138, discarded 1  
TCN BPDU:  
sent 0, sent error 0  
received 0, discarded 0  
Other error: bad protocol 0, bad version 0  
bad BPDU type 0  
Other statistics:  
Changed to forwarding state 1  
1) Interface name and port status  
One of the following is displayed for the port status.  
Disabled  
: The STP is disabled.  
Discarding : The port is in the discarding state (it is displayed only when  
RSTP or MSTP is active).  
Blocking  
Listening  
Learning  
: The port is in the blocking state.  
: The port is in the listening state.  
: The port is in the learning state.  
Forwarding : The port is in the forwarding state.  
2) STP version of port  
One of the following is displayed for the STP version.  
- (OFF)  
: STP unused port  
: 802.1d STP  
0 (STP)  
2 (RSTP)  
3 (MSTP)  
: 802.1w RSTP  
: 802.1s MSTP  
3) Port path cost  
The path cost of the relevant port is displayed.  
4) Port priority  
The priority of the relevant port is displayed.  
5) Port ID  
The port ID (the port priority and port number) is displayed.  
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
473  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
6) Port role  
One of the following is displayed for the port role.  
Disabled  
Root  
: The STP is disabled.  
: Root port  
Designated : Designated port  
Blocking  
Alternate  
Backup  
: Blocking port  
: Master port  
: Backup port  
7) Priority of root bridge  
The priority of the root bridge is displayed.  
8) MAC address of root bridge  
The MAC address of the root bridge is displayed.  
9) Designated bridge priority  
The priority of the designated bridge is displayed.  
10) MAC address of designated bridge  
The MAC address of the designated bridge is displayed.  
11) Designated port ID  
The designated port ID (the port priority and port number) is displayed.  
12) Designated port path cost  
The path cost of the designated port is displayed.  
13) Port processing type  
One of the following is displayed for the port processing type to be set by the  
sent or received BPDU.  
Disabled: Disabled port  
Aged  
Mine  
: The MSTP BPDU receive timeout detection port  
: MSTP BPDU packets sending port considered having  
high port priority  
Received  
Unknown  
: MSTP BPDU packets receiving port considered having  
low port priority  
: The port in the processing state other than above  
14) Remaining hop count from root bridge  
The remaining hop count from the root bridge is displayed.  
15) MST region status  
If the port is in a state other than "disabled", the connection status of MST region  
is displayed.  
internal region : Indicates the connection between the same region.  
external region : Indicates the connection between different regions.  
16) Number of configuration BPDU send times  
The number of configuration BPDU send times is displayed.  
17) Number of configuration BPDU send error times  
The number of configuration BPDU send error times is displayed.  
18) Number of configuration BPDU receive times  
The number of configuration BPDU receive times is displayed.  
19) Number of configuration BPDU receive discarding times  
The number of configuration BPDU receive discarding times is displayed.  
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
474  
Commands  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
20) Number of TCN BPDU send times  
The number of TCN BPDU send times is displayed.  
21) Number of TCN BPDU send error times  
The number of TCN BPDU send error times is displayed.  
22) Number of TCN BPDU receive times  
The number of TCN BPDU receive times is displayed.  
23) Number of TCN BPDU receive discarding times  
The number of TCN BPDU receive discarding times is displayed.  
24) Number of protocol version error times  
The number of discarding times due to protocol version error is displayed.  
25) Number of version error times  
The number of discarding times due to version error is displayed.  
26) Number of BPDU type error times  
The number of discarding times due to BPDU type error is displayed.  
27) Number of topology change detection times  
The number of topology change detection times is displayed.  
28) Topology change detection time  
The clock time when the topology change was lastly detected.  
29) Elapsed time after topology change detection  
The elapsed time after the topology change was lastly detected.  
30) STP (IEEE802.1D) compatibility mode  
One of the following is displayed for the STP (IEEE802.1D) compatible mode  
operation of the port.  
STP : The port is active in the STP compatible mode when the port version is  
RSTP or MSTP.  
-
: The port is not active in the compatible mode (but operating in the port's  
operation version).  
31) Boundary port status  
The boundary port status of the region is displayed as follows.  
However, if the port role at the opposite device is an alternate or backup, that  
port may never receive the "BPDU". In such cases, the boundary port status is  
not displayed.  
*
-
: Indicates that the port is active as the boundary port.  
: Indicates that the port is NOT active as the boundary port.  
32) Number of forwarding status transition times  
The number of times when the port was changed to the forwarding state is  
displayed.  
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
475  
Commands  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Display of detailed spanning tree information of the specified instance  
other than instance 0  
# show spanning-tree instance 1 detail  
MSTP Configuration Information  
Region Name : region1 Revision Level : 0  
Instance ID 1  
Vlans 120-130  
Root ID  
Priority  
Address  
Cost  
32768  
00:00:e2:08:57:89  
200000  
Port  
1 (eth1)  
Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec  
Remaining Hops 20  
Bridge ID  
Priority  
Address  
32768  
00:0b:5d:89:00:aa  
Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec  
Hop count 20  
BPDU Mode off  
STP Mode mstp  
Topology changes 2 Detected date 2011/01/01(Sat) 05:30:28  
------------------ --------------------------------------  
(15)  
(16)  
(time since 05:30:28)  
--------------------  
(17)  
eth2 is Forwarding Port Version 3(MSTP)  
------------------ --------------------  
(1)  
(2)  
Port path cost 20000(auto), Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.2  
--------------------------- ----------------- ----------------------  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
Port role is Designated  
-----------------------  
(6)  
Designated root has priority 40961, address 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb  
---------------------------------- -------------------------  
(7)  
(8)  
Designated bridge has priority 40961, address 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb  
------------------------------------ -------------------------  
(9)  
(10)  
Designated port is 128.2, Designated path cost 0  
------------------------- ------------------------  
(11)  
(12)  
Port info type is Mine  
-----  
(13)  
Remaining Hops 20  
--  
(14)  
Other statistics:  
changed to forwarding state 1  
---  
(18)  
eth8 is Forwarding Port Version 3(MSTP)  
Port path cost 20000(auto), Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.8  
Port role is Designated  
Designated root has priority 40961, address 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb  
Designated bridge has priority 40961, address 00:0b:5d:89:00:bb  
Designated port is 128.8, Designated path cost 0  
Port info type is Mine  
Remaining Hops 20  
Other statistics:  
changed to forwarding state 1  
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
476  
Commands  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
1) Interface name and port status of the specified instance  
One of the following is displayed for the port status of the specified instance.  
Disabled : The STP is disabled.  
Discarding : The port is in the discarding state (it is displayed only when  
RSTP or MSTP is active).  
Blocking  
Listening  
Learning  
: The port is in the blocking state.  
: The port is in the listening state.  
: The port is in the learning state.  
Forwarding : The port is in the forwarding state.  
2) STP version of port  
One of the following is displayed for the STP version.  
- (OFF)  
: STP unused port  
: 802.1d STP  
0 (STP)  
2 (RSTP)  
3 (MSTP)  
: 802.1w RSTP  
: 802.1s MSTP  
3) Port path cost  
The path cost of the relevant port of the specified instance is displayed.  
4) Port priority  
The priority of the relevant port of the specified instance is displayed.  
5) Port ID  
The port ID of the specified instance (the port priority and port number) is  
displayed.  
6) Port role  
One of the following is displayed for the port role of the specified instance.  
Disabled  
Root  
: The STP is disabled.  
: Root port  
Designated : Designated port  
Blocking  
Alternate  
Backup  
Master  
: Blocking port  
: Master port  
: Backup port  
: Master port  
7) Priority of root bridge  
The priority of root bridge of the specified instance is displayed.  
8) MAC address of root bridge  
The MAC address of root bridge of the specified instance is displayed.  
9) Designated bridge priority  
The priority of the designated bridge of the specified instance is displayed.  
10) MAC address of designated bridge  
The MAC address of the designated bridge of the specified instance is  
displayed.  
11) Designated port ID  
The designated port ID of the specified instance (the port priority and port  
number) is displayed.  
12) Designated port path cost  
The path cost of the designated port of the specified instance is displayed.  
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
477  
Commands  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
13) Port processing type of the specified instance  
One of the following is displayed for the port processing type to be set by the  
sent or received BPDU.  
Disabled  
Aged  
: Disabled port  
: The MSTP BPDU receive timeout detection port  
: MSTP BPDU packets sending port considered having high port  
priority  
Mine  
Received  
Unknown  
: MSTP BPDU packets receiving port considered having low port  
priority  
: The port in the processing state other than above  
14) Remaining hop count from root bridge  
The remaining hop count from the root bridge of the specified instance is  
displayed.  
15) Number of topology change detection times  
The number of topology change detection times is displayed.  
16) Topology change detection time  
The clock time when the topology change was lastly detected.  
17) Elapsed time after topology change detection  
The elapsed time after the topology change was lastly detected.  
18) Number of forwarding status transition times  
The number of times when the port was changed to the forwarding state is  
displayed.  
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
478  
Commands  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.28.4 Spanning Tree Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear  
Commands  
This section explains the commands related to spanning tree counter, log, statistics, and status clearing.  
5.28.4.1 clear spanning-tree statistics  
Function  
Clear the statistics relating to the spanning tree.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
clear spanning-tree statistics  
N/A  
Options  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Clear the spanning tree related statistics.  
Execution Example  
# clear spanning-tree statistics  
#
Bridge Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
479  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.29 LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and  
Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
This section explains about commands related to LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands.  
5.29.1 LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display  
Commands  
This section explains about commands related to LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands.  
5.29.1.1 show lldp  
Function  
Display LLDP Information  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show lldp [port <portlist>] [detail]  
Options  
N/A  
Disokay all LLDP information of the ports which LLDP function is enabled on  
port <portlist>  
Port list  
Specify the port list to display LLDP information  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-).  
(Example: "1-8")  
detail  
Display detailed LLDP information  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display LLDP information  
LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
480  
Commands  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Execution Example  
# show lldp  
Send Interval Time  
Send Hold Count  
Send Delay  
Reinit Delay  
Notification Interval Time  
: 30 seconds  
: 4 times  
: 2 seconds  
: 2 seconds  
: 5 seconds  
---(1)  
---(2)  
---(3)  
---(4)  
---(5)  
Port Mode  
---- ------- ----  
Size  
Info P N D C A  
--------------  
(9)  
P p N I  
-------  
(10)  
M P L F  
-------  
(11)  
T
-
(6)  
1
2
(7)  
enable 274  
receive 0  
(8)  
(12)  
-
P N D C A  
P p N I  
M P L F  
8
send  
179  
P - D C A  
P p N -  
M - - -  
-
Entry:3 ---(30)  
#
# show lldp port 1,8 detail  
Send Interval Time  
Send Hold Count  
Send Delay  
Reinit Delay  
: 30 seconds  
: 4 times  
: 2 seconds  
: 2 seconds  
: 5 seconds  
---(1)  
---(2)  
---(3)  
---(4)  
---(5)  
Notification Interval Time  
[PORT 1]  
---(6)  
---(7)  
---(8)  
---(13)  
---(14)  
---(15)  
---(16)  
---(17)  
Configuration Mode  
Send LLDPDU size  
Chassis ID  
: enable  
: 274 octets  
: subtype=4(MAC) info=00:0b:5d:fd:05:b2  
: subtype=5(ifName) info="1"  
: 120 seconds  
Port ID  
Time To Live(TTL)  
Port Description  
System Name  
: info="EthernetPort(ether1)"  
: info=""  
System Description  
JST  
: info="'SBAX2' '1.2 V01.00' 'Wed Feb 13 15:23:07  
2008'"  
---(18)  
---(19)  
System Capabilities  
enabled=Bridge  
Management Address  
: info=Bridge,Router  
: address subtype=1(IPv4) info=192.168.2.1 ---(20)  
interface number subtype=2(ifIndex) info=3  
oid=""  
Management Address  
: address subtype=6(MAC) info=00:0b:5d:fd:05:b3  
interface number subtype=2(ifIndex) info=7001  
oid=""  
IEEE802.1  
Port VLAN ID  
Port And Protocol VLAN ID  
: PVID=10  
: flags=supported,enabled  
PPVID=20  
---(21)  
---(22)  
Port And Protocol VLAN ID : flags=supported,enabled  
PPVID=21  
VLAN Name  
VLAN Name  
VLAN Name  
VLAN Name  
IEEE802.3  
: VID=10  
name="portvlan10"  
: VID=20  
name="protocolvlan20"  
: VID=21  
name="protocolvlan21"  
: VID=30  
name="taggedvlan30"  
---(23)  
MAC/PHY Configuration/Status : support/status=supported,enabled ---(25)  
capability=1(10BASE-T half duplex mode),  
2(10BASE-T full duplex mode),  
4(100BASE-TX half duplex mode),  
5(100BASE-TX full duplex mode),  
8(PAUSE for full-duplex links),  
11(Asymmetric and Symmetric PAUSE  
for full-duplex links),  
15(1000BASE-T full duplex mode)  
type=16(100BASE-TX full duplex mode)  
Power Via MDI  
Link Aggregation  
Maximum Frame Size  
SNMP Notification Trap Send  
: support=PSE,not supported  
: status=capable,not in aggregation  
: size=9216  
---(26)  
---(27)  
---(28)  
---(29)  
: disable  
(To be continued)  
LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
481  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
(Continued)  
[PORT 8]  
Configuration Mode  
: send  
Send LLDPDU size  
Chassis ID  
Port ID  
: 179 octets  
: subtype=4(MAC) info=00:0b:5d:fd:05:b2ц  
: subtype=5(ifName) info="8"  
Time To Live(TTL)  
Port Description  
System Description  
2008'"  
: 120 seconds  
: info="EthernetPort(ether8)"  
: info="'SBAX2' '1.2 V01.00' 'Wed Feb 13 15:23:07 JST  
System Capabilities  
: info=Bridge,Router  
enabled=Bridge  
Management Address  
: address subtype=1(IPv4) info=192.168.1.1  
interface number subtype=2(ifIndex) info=1  
oid=""  
Management Address  
: address subtype=6(MAC) info=00:0b:5d:fd:05:ba  
interface number subtype=2(ifIndex) info=7008  
oid=""  
IEEE802.1  
Port VLAN ID  
: PVID=1  
Port And Protocol VLAN ID  
PPVID=0  
: flags=supported,disabled  
VLAN Name  
: VID=1  
name="default"  
IEEE802.3  
MAC/PHY Configuration/Status  
: support/status=supported,enabled  
capability=1(10BASE-T half duplex mode),  
2(10BASE-T full duplex mode),  
4(100BASE-TX half duplex mode),  
5(100BASE-TX full duplex mode),  
8(PAUSE for full-duplex links),  
11(Asymmetric and Symmetric PAUSE  
for full-duplex links),  
15(1000BASE-T full duplex mode)  
type=16(100BASE-TX full duplex mode)  
SNMP Notification Trap Send : disable  
Entry:2  
---(30)  
1) LLDPDU send interval time(s)  
Setting value by lldp send interval command  
2) LLDP hold count (times)  
Setting value by lldp send hold command  
3) LLDP Send delay time(s)  
Setting value by lldp send interval command  
4) LLDP Reinit delay time(s)  
Seting value by lldp reinit delay command  
5) LLDP SNMP Notification Trap interval time (s)  
Setting value by lldp notification interval command  
6) Physical port number  
Ether port number  
7) Mode  
Setting value by lldp mode command  
enable  
send  
: send and recive  
: send only  
receive : recive only  
When mode is receive, information from (8) to (28) is not displayed.  
8) LLDPDU (LLDP Protocol Data Unit) Size  
LLDPDU size (octets)  
LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
482  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
9) LLDP send information  
Setting value by lldp info command  
P
N
D
C
A
-
: Send Port Description TLV  
: Send System Name TLV  
: Send System Description TLV  
: Send System Capabilities TLV  
: Send Management Address TLV  
: disable  
10) IEEE802.1 LLDP send information  
P
p
N
I
: Port VLAN ID  
: Port And Protocol VLAN ID  
: VLAN Name  
: Protocol Identity  
: disable  
-
11) IEEE802.3 LLDP send information  
M
P
L
F
-
: MAC/PHY Configuration/Status  
: Power Via MDI  
: Link Aggregation  
: Maximum Frame Size  
: disable  
12) SNMP Trap notification  
T
-
: SNMP Notification Trap  
: disable  
13) Chassis ID information  
Value which is sent with Chassis ID TLV  
subtype= : subtype value (4 is MAC address)  
info= : representative MAC address  
14) Port ID information  
Value which is sent with Port ID TLV  
15) LLDP TTL information (s) information  
Value which is sent with Time To Live (TTL) TLV  
16) Port description information  
Value which is sent with Port Description TLV  
When port-description is disabled by lldp info command, this value is not  
displayed.  
17) System name informationiweowqerwuwqurwqrqwr  
Value which is sent with System Name TLV  
When system-name is disabled by lldp info command, this value is not  
displayed.  
18) System description information  
Value which is sent with System Description TLV  
When system-description is disabled by lldp info command, this value is not  
displayed.  
LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
483  
Commands  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
19) System Capabilities information  
Value which is sent with System Capabilities TLV  
info=  
: Available function  
enabled= : Enabled function  
Bridge  
Router  
: Bridge functon  
: Router function  
When system-description is disabled by lldp info command, this value is not  
displayed.  
20) Management address information  
Value which is sent with Management Address TLV  
When SNMP agent address is set, IPv4 address and MAC address are  
displayed.  
When management-address is disabled by lldp info command, this value is not  
displayed.  
21) Port VLAN ID information  
Value which is sen with ID TLV  
When port-vlan-id is disabled by lldp info command, this value is not displayed.  
22) Protocol information  
Value which is sent with ocol VLAN ID TLV  
When port-and-protocol-vlan-id is disabled by lldp info command, this value is  
not displayed.  
23) VLAN name information  
Value which is sent with IEEE802.1 VLAN Name TLV  
When vlan-name is disabled by lldp info command, this value is not displayed.  
24) Protocol ID information  
Value which is sent with IEEE802.1 Protocol Identity TLV  
This value is not displayed.  
25) MAC/PHY Configuration/Status information  
Value which is sent with IEEE802.3 MAC/PHY Configuration/Status TLV.  
When mac-phy-configuration-status is disabled by lldp info command, this value  
is not displayed.  
26) Power via MDI information  
Value which is sent with IEEE802.3 Power Via MDI TLV  
support=  
PSE  
: Function Information  
: Power supply function  
: Power demand function  
: No function  
PD  
not supported  
supported  
disabled  
enabled  
: Supported  
: Disable function  
: Enable function  
When power-via-mdi is disabled by lldp info command,  
this value is not displayed.  
27) Linkaggregation information  
Value which is sent with linkaggregation TLV  
When link-aggregation is disabled by lldp info command, this value is not  
displayed.  
LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
484  
Commands  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
28) Maximum Frame length Size  
Value which is sent with IEEE802.3 Maximum Frame Size TLV  
When maximum-frame-size is disabled by lldp info command, this value is not  
displayed.  
29) SNMP Notification Trap  
SNMP Notification Trap setting  
30) Number of ports which LLDP function is enabled in  
When port option is not specified, Number of port which LLDP function is  
enabled  
in is displayed.  
LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
485  
Commands  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.29.1.2 show lldp summary  
Function  
Display LLDP summary information  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show lldp summary  
N/A  
Options  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the number of ports which is LLDP function is enabled in  
Execution Example  
# show lldp summary  
Send Entry : 2  
Receive Entry : 2  
---(1)  
---(2)  
#
1) Number of ports which LLDP send is enabled in  
2) Number of ports which LLDP receive is enabled in  
5.29.1.3 show lldp neighbors  
Function  
Display neighbor LLDP device information  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show lldp neighbors [port <portlist>] [detail]  
Options  
N/A  
Display all neighbor LLDP device information  
port <portlist>  
port list  
Specify the port list to display neignbor LLDP device information.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-).  
(Example: "1-8")  
detail  
Display the detailed neighbor LLDP device information  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display neighbor LLDP device information  
LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
486  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Execution Example  
# show lldp neighbors  
Port Neighbor Counts  
---- ---------------  
(1) (2)  
1
2
1
0
#
# show lldp neighbors port 1-2 detail  
[PORT 1]  
Neighbor Counts : 1  
Neighbor 1  
---(1)  
---(2)  
---(3)  
Chassis ID  
Port ID  
Time To Live(TTL)  
Port Description  
System Name  
: subtype=4(MAC) info=02:00:0e:d1:47:80  
: subtype=5(ifName) info="MB/0"  
: 120 seconds  
: info="EthernetPort(MB/line0)"  
: info=""  
---(4)  
---(5)  
---(6)  
---(7)  
---(8)  
System Description  
ST 2008'"  
: info="'Si-R180B' '128.0 V34.00' 'Wed Feb 13 13:11:14 J  
System Capabilities  
: info=Router  
enabled=Router  
: address subtype=1(IPv4) info=192.168.1.181  
interface number subtype=2(ifIndex) info=10000  
---(10)  
---(11)  
Management Address  
Management Address  
oid=""  
: address subtype=6(MAC) info=02:00:0e:d1:47:80  
interface number subtype=2(ifIndex) info=1  
oid=""  
IEEE802.1  
Port VLAN ID  
: PVID=0  
---(12)  
Port And Protocol VLAN ID  
: flags=not supported,disabled  
---(13)  
PPVID=0  
: VID=30  
VLAN Name  
---(14)  
name="lan9"  
IEEE802.3  
MAC/PHY Configuration/Status  
: support/status=supported,enabled  
---(16)  
capability=1(10BASE-T half duplex mode),  
2(10BASE-T full duplex mode),  
4(100BASE-TX half duplex mode),  
5(100BASE-TX full duplex mode)  
type=16(100BASE-TX full duplex mode)  
Power Via MDI  
Link Aggregation  
Maximum Frame Size  
: support=PSE,not supported  
: status=not capable  
: size=1500  
---(17)  
---(18)  
---(19)  
[PORT 2]  
Neighbor Counts : 0  
#
1) Physical port number  
Ether port number  
2) Number of neighbor devices  
Number of neighbor devices information which is received  
3) Neighbor ID  
Neighbor ID  
4) Chassis ID  
Value which is received with Chassis ID TLV  
subtype= : subtype value (4 is MAC address)  
info= : representative MAC address  
5) Port ID information  
Value which is recived with Port ID TLV  
6) LLDP TTL information (s) information  
Value which is received with Time To Live (TTL) TLV  
LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
487  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
7) Port description information  
Value which is sent with Port Description TLV  
8) System name informationiweowqerwuwqurwqrqwr  
Value which is received with System Name TLV  
9) System description information  
Value which is received with System Description TLV  
10) System Capabilities information  
Value which is received with System Capabilities TLV  
info=  
: Available function  
enabled= : Enabled function  
Bridge  
Router  
: Bridge functon  
: Router function  
11) Management address information  
Value which is received with Management Address TLV  
12) Port VLAN ID information  
Value which is received with ID TLV  
13) Protocol information  
Value which is received with ocol VLAN ID TLV  
14) VLAN name information  
Value which is received with IEEE802.1 VLAN Name TLV  
15) Protocol ID information  
Value which is received with IEEE802.1 Protocol Identity TLV  
16) MAC/PHY Configuration/Status information  
Value which is received with IEEE802.3 MAC/PHY Configuration/Status TLV.  
17) Power via MDI information  
Value which is received with IEEE802.3 Power Via MDI TLV  
18) Linkaggregation information  
Value which is received with linkaggregation TLV  
19) Maximum Frame length Size  
Value which is received with IEEE802.3 Maximum Frame Size TLV  
LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
488  
Commands  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.29.1.4 show lldp statistics  
Function  
Display LLDP statistics information  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show lldp statistics [port <portlist>] [detail]  
Options  
N/A  
Display LLDP statistics information of all ports which LLDP function is enabled in  
port <portlist>  
port list  
Specify the port to display LLDP statistics information  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-).  
(Example: "1-8")  
detail  
Display the detailed LLDP informatuion  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display LLDP statistics information  
Execution Example  
# show lldp statistics  
Port Sent packets Received packets  
---- ------------ ----------------  
(1)  
1
2
(2)  
76  
-
(3)  
82  
0
8
48  
-
1) physical port number  
2) Number of times of send  
3) Number of times of receive  
LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
489  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
# show lldp statistics detail  
[Neighbor tables statistics]  
Last changed time  
Tables inserts  
Tables deletes  
Tables drops  
: Wed Feb 13 16:09:01 2008  
---(1)  
---(2)  
---(3)  
---(4)  
---(5)  
:
:
:
:
3
0
0
2
Tables ageouts  
[PORT 1] ---(6)  
Sent packets  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
77  
82  
0
0
0
---(7)  
---(8)  
---(9)  
---(10)  
---(11)  
---(12)  
---(13)  
Received packets  
Packets discarded total  
Packets errors  
TLVs discarded total  
TLVs unrecognized total  
Ageouts total  
0
2
[PORT 2]  
Sent packets  
----(6)  
----(7)  
----(8)  
----(9)  
---(10)  
---(11)  
---(12)  
---(13)  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
Received packets  
Packets discarded total  
Packets errors  
TLVs discarded total  
TLVs unrecognized total  
Ageouts total  
[PORT 8]  
Sent packets  
Received packets  
----(6)  
----(7)  
----(8)  
:
:
49  
-
1) Time which neighbor information is changed at  
lldpStatsRemTablesLastChangeTime  
2) Number of times which neighbor information is registered  
lldpStatsRemTablesInserts  
3) Number of times which neighbor device information is deleted  
lldpStatsRemTablesDeletes  
4) Number of times which neighbor device information is discarded  
lldpStatsRemTablesDrops  
5) Number of times which neighbor device information is aged out  
lldpStatsRemTablesAgeouts  
6) Physical port number  
lldpStatsTxPortNum, lldpStatsRxPortNum  
7) Number of LLDP frames which are sent  
lldpStatsTxPortFramesTotal  
8) Number of LLDP frames which are received  
lldpStatsRxPortFramesTotal  
9) Number of LLDP frames are discarded after receive  
lldpStatsRxPortFramesDiscardedTotal  
10) Number of Error LLDP frames  
lldpStatsRxPortFramesErrors  
11) Nymber of TLVs are discarded after receive  
lldpStatsRxPortTLVsDiscardedTotal  
12) Number of unknown TLVs  
lldpStatsRxPortTLVsUnrecognizedTotal  
13) Number of neighbor device information is aged out  
lldpStatsRxPortAgeoutsTotal  
LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
490  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.29.2 LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear  
Commands  
This section explains about commands related to LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Clear Commands.  
5.29.2.1 clear lldp neighbors  
Function  
Clear LLDP neighbor information  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
clear lldp neighbors  
N/A  
Options  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Clear LLDP neighbor information  
Execution Example  
# clear lldp neighbors  
#
5.29.2.2 clear lldp statistics  
Function  
Clear LLDP statistics information  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
clear lldp statistics  
N/A  
Options  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Clear LLDP statistics information  
Execution Example  
# clear lldp statistics  
#
LLDP Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
491  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.30 VLAN Counter, Log, Statistics, and  
Status Display Commands  
This section explains the commands related to VLAN.  
5.30.1 VLAN Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display  
Commands  
This section explains the commands related to VLAN counter, log, statistics, and status display.  
5.30.1.1 show vlan  
Function  
Display the VLAN setting Information.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show vlan  
show vlan summary  
show vlan interface  
show vlan vid <vlan_id>  
Options  
N/A  
Display all VLAN information and the number of VLANs of the registered VLAN  
configuration.  
summary  
Display only the number of VLANs of the registered VLAN configuration.  
interface  
Display all VLAN information about the registered VLAN configuration.  
vid  
Display VLAN configuration specified by the VLAN ID option.  
<vlan_id>  
VLAN ID: Specify it with a decimal number from 1 to 4094.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the VLAN setting information.  
VLAN Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands  
492  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Execution Example  
# show vlan  
VID Interface  
Tag  
Type  
Description  
---- ---------------- ------------ -------- -----------------------  
(1) (2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
1
ether5  
ether6  
untagged  
untagged  
port  
default  
10  
ether7  
linkaggregation1  
dot1q-tagged port  
dot1q-tagged  
v10  
100 ether8  
200 ether13  
ether14  
300 ether15  
ether16  
1000 linkaggregation8  
4000 ether11  
ether12  
untagged  
untagged  
untagged  
untagged  
untagged  
untagged  
port  
protocol v200  
v100  
ipv4  
port  
v300  
v1000  
v4000  
dot1q-tagged port  
untagged  
Category  
Count  
----------------- -----  
(6)  
Port VLAN  
Protocol VLAN  
5
2
----------------- -----  
Total  
7
#
Display of only the number of registered VLAN  
# show vlan interface  
VID Interface  
Tag  
Type  
Description  
---- ---------------- ------------ -------- -----------------------  
1
ether5  
ether6  
ether7  
linkaggregation1  
untagged  
untagged  
dot1q-tagged port  
dot1q-tagged  
port  
default  
v10  
10  
100 ether8  
200 ether13  
ether14  
300 ether15  
ether16  
1000 linkaggregation8  
4000 ether11  
ether12  
untagged  
untagged  
untagged  
untagged  
untagged  
untagged  
port  
protocol v200  
v100  
ipv4  
port  
v300  
v1000  
v4000  
dot1q-tagged port  
untagged  
#
Display of the registered VLAN configuration only  
# show vlan vid 10  
VID Interface  
Tag  
Type  
Description  
---- -------------- ----------- ------- --------------------------  
10  
#
ether7  
linkaggregation1  
dot1q-tagged port  
dot1q-tagged  
v10  
1) VLAN number  
2) Interface  
ether  
: Ethernet port number  
linkaggregation : Link aggregation port number  
VLAN Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands  
493  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
3) Tag type  
untagged  
dot1q-tagged : Tagged vlan  
: Untagged vlan  
4) VLAN type  
por  
: Port VLAN  
ipv4  
: IPv4 protocol VLAN  
: IPv6 protocol VLAN  
: FNA protocol VLAN  
: Protocol VLAN  
ipv6  
fna  
protocol  
5) VLAN number  
6) Number of entries of each VLAN type, and total number of VLAN entries  
5.30.1.2 show vlan brief  
Function  
Display the VLAN setting Information briefly.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show vlan brief  
N/A  
Options  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the VLAN setting information briefly.  
Execution Example  
# show vlan brief  
Codes: U - Untagged, P - Untagged(Protocol VLAN), T - Tagged  
VID 1  
8 9  
16 17  
24 25 26  
---- -------- -------- -------- -- --  
(1) (2)  
10 UUUUUUUU -------- -------- T T  
11 -------- UUUUUUUU -------- T T  
12 -------- -------- PPPPPPPP T T  
#
1) VLAN number  
2) Tag type  
U: Untagged VLAN  
P: Untagged VLAN(Protocol VLAN)  
T: Tagged VLAN  
-: Not in use  
VLAN Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands  
494  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.31 QoS Counter, Log, Statistics, and  
Status Display Commands  
This section explains commands related to COS queue.  
5.31.1 COS Queue Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display  
Commands  
This section explains commands related to COS queue counter, log, statistics, and status display.  
5.31.1.1 show qos cosmap  
Function  
Display the correspondence between the COS value and storage queue for a packet.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448  
Syntax  
show qos cosmap  
N/A  
Options  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the relationship between packet COS values and their storage queues.  
Execution Example  
# show qos cosmap  
COSvalue Queue  
-------- -----  
(1)  
0
(2)  
2
1
0
2
1
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
1) COSvalue  
COS value of packet  
2) Queue  
Storage queue  
QoS Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands  
495  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.31.1.2 show qos prioritymap  
Function  
Display the correspondence between the COS value and storage queue for a packet.  
Available Model XG2600  
Syntax  
show qos prioritymap [line <line>]  
Options  
N/A  
Display the relationship between packet COS values and their storage queues of all  
ports.  
line <line>  
Display the relationship between packet COS values and their storage queues of the  
specified port.  
Range  
Model  
1 to 26  
XG02600  
When specifying multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When specifying sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the relationship between packet COS values and their storage queues.  
Execution Example  
# show qos prioritymap line 1-5  
Port Priority value : Queue, ...  
---- --------------------------------------  
(1) (2)  
1 0:1, 1,0, 2:1, 3:3, 4:4, 5:5, 6:6, 7:7  
2 0:1, 1,0, 2:1, 3:3, 4:4, 5:5, 6:7, 7:6  
3 0:1, 1,0, 2:1, 3:3, 4:4, 5:5, 6:5, 7:5  
4 0:1, 1,0, 2:1, 3:3, 4:5, 5:4, 6:6, 7:7  
5 0:1, 1,0, 2:1, 3:3, 4:4, 5:5, 6:6, 7:7  
1) Port  
: Ethernet physical port number  
: Queue  
2) Priority value  
COS value of packet :Storage queue  
QoS Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands  
496  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.32 SSH Counter, Log, Statistics, and  
Status Display Commands  
This section explains about commands related to SSH.  
5.32.1 SSH Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display  
Commands  
This section explains about commands related to SSH counter, log, statistics, and status display commands.  
5.32.1.1 show ssh server key  
Function  
Display the public key for SSH host authentication.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show ssh server key {dsa|rsa}  
Options  
dsa  
Display the DSA public key for SSH host authentication of this device.  
rsa  
Display the RSA public key for SSH host authentication of this device.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the public key for SSH host authentication of this device.  
This key is used for SSH protocol version 2 (SSH2) host authentication.  
As the DSA public key encryption system or the RSA public key encryption system is  
used for SSH host authentication, specify either of the public key.  
If the host authentication public key needs to be set in the ssh client or sftp client in  
advance, set the information displayed by this command.  
Caution  
If all of the SSH-related functions are disabled by the "serverinfo ssh" and "serverinfo  
sftp" commands, the SSH host authentication public key is not created. Therefore,  
nothing is displayed.  
However, if those functions are enabled and then disabled, a public key for SSH host  
authentication is created and displayed.  
SSH Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands  
497  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Execution Example  
Display of the DSA public key  
# show ssh server key dsa  
ssh-dss AzaCJB5CpVUXI1LXjzNVo1kt/LHGhWlOleJQDj11tGeeAAAFKoNjMatP  
i8JWtZhrgldtxVVmBAIAB3Nc3MAAAAAkgFa0nu7HMPdQAAAIA4sIwVzNfTpxNtjJ  
Qx1gJHrDjybKeBMmpnJ/RtGTJfvZW5T/aDc/aoB7PdF+appeXx9U8FsQF+EaMNfq  
P3lK2u3XAEoAzLa0JQCo6VjoDQh15YIzKFo2AVaK4lCeS3q81q8A4+jttJ0Dt0U0  
rVucQoOq+BdIgaCMDuaqmJQAotGvZvZQ/RMTSh6pMh+z9DdB1DLnPNxEyt61Sftz  
Vk+rjgZ29In2V7ai4yuOfIhNL61ybOrrfoZ9YQW4P9rJuDxhvn2xvZQ/RMTSh6pM  
6WIwA9mlzAst/YBxbb9JcO7uPVhN8M624q8yKsQaMClW1AAAWOO+ZkaqccWLy9GU  
xPksjfC+N7O22akmykT8V6iMh4+7iAIBJYE6pWpsQU5nFP9rJuDx5R/QV4Ql77od  
96vNtgwv/hSseRFjyqrGxKewMb11FNjzWSAUyzW0p+GLR/mqBCFavMRl4toxEsP3  
UDNRpGpFdw== root@localhost  
#
--- (1)  
1) The DSA public key for host authentication of this device  
Display of the RSA public key  
# show ssh server key rsa  
ssh-rsa AA94UAATdVfYAAxsAArx3AAIF7QAsTsTwAEeKogAFAlNoAA0OAAAAj3F  
AAD3C1yc2EAAAABIwAAAHsMXKAAB+shGQAHDmIABBSpjAARVYAAERAAJZ/IAAAAB  
0AB9QAB+2kSY6AAUAygACvAAB3NzaA7wtAAJ/kAADRQgABwmQAThHAAUtOySgAEJ  
JMBAAX4= root@localhost  
#
--- (1)  
1) The RSA public key for host authentication of this device  
SSH Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display Commands  
498  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.33 IGMP Snooping Counter, Log,  
Statistics, and Status Display and  
Clear Operation Commands  
This section explains commands related to IGMP snooping.  
5.33.1 IGMP Snooping Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status  
Display Commands  
This section explains commands related to IGMP snooping counter, log, statistics, and status display.  
5.33.1.1 show igmpsnoop brief  
Function  
Display the brief information on IGMP snooping.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show igmpsnoop brief  
Options  
N/A  
Display the number of groups held by IGMP snooping.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display IGMP snooping information in a simple format.  
Execution Example  
# show igmpsnoop brief  
IGMP snoop briefing information:  
(1) total registered entries: 0  
1) The number of group address held by IGMP snooping  
IGMP Snooping Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear  
Operation Commands  
499  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.33.1.2 show igmpsnoop mrouter  
Function  
Display the multicast router port information.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show igmpsnoop mrouter [<vidlist>]  
Options  
N/A  
Display information about all VLANs with the valid IGMP snooping.  
<vidlist>  
Specify a VID of VLAN to display the IGMP snooping information.  
When specifying multiple VLANs, separate them with commas (,).  
Also, when specifying the range, specify them with hyphens (-). (Example: 1-3)  
The available description format is as follows:  
To specify values 1, 2, 3, 5 and 7 in the "vidlist"  
Example: 1-3, 5, 7  
To specify values 1, 3 and 5 in the "vidlist"  
Example: 1, 3, 5  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the multicast router port information held by IGMP snooping.  
Execution Example  
# show igmpsnoop mrouter  
VLAN querier  
port  
---- ---------- --------  
(1)  
1
(2)  
(3)  
other(off) 1  
2
3
4
other  
me  
me  
5
5
-
1) VLAN ID  
2) Querier operation display  
One of the following is displayed.  
me  
: Indicates that the port is operating as the querier.  
other  
: Indicates that the port is NOT operating as the querier.  
other (off) : Indicates that the port is NOT operating as the querier due to the  
settings.  
3) Number of the multicast router connection port  
A hyphen (-) shows that no router port exists.  
IGMP Snooping Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear  
500  
Operation Commands  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.33.1.3 show igmpsnoop reporter  
Function  
Display the multicast listener information.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show igmpsnoop reporter [<vidlist>]  
Options  
N/A  
Display information about all VLANs with the valid IGMP snooping.  
<vidlist>  
Specify a VID of VLAN to display the IGMP snooping information.  
When specifying multiple VLANs, separate them with commas (,).  
Also, when specifying the range, specify them with hyphens (-). (Example: 1-3)  
The available description format is as follows:  
To specify values 1, 2, 3, 5 and 7 in the "vidlist"  
Example: 1-3, 5, 7  
To specify values 1, 3 and 5 in the "vidlist"  
Example: 1, 3, 5  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the multicast listener information being held by IGMP snooping.  
Execution Example  
# show igmpsnoop reporter 1-3  
IGMP Snooping statistics: VLAN 1  
#sources: 0  
#hosts:  
(1)  
(2)  
4
Source/Group  
Port Reporter  
Join  
------------------------------- ---- --------------- --------  
(3)  
0.0.0.0  
(4) (5)  
(6)  
1:10:00  
1:10:02  
1:10:03  
1:10:03  
-
/239.1.1.1  
1
2
3
3
-
10.5.20.18  
10.5.20.31  
10.5.20.22  
10.5.20.25  
-
0.0.0.0  
0.0.0.0  
0.0.0.0  
/239.1.1.2  
/239.1.1.3  
/239.1.1.10  
1) The number of source address information  
2) The number of registered listener information  
3) Source address and multicast group address  
4) Port number  
A hyphen (-) shows a group where no listener exists.  
5) IP address to which the Membership-Report has been sent  
A hyphen (-) shows a group where no listener exists.  
6) The elapsed time after participation in the multicast group  
If no listener exists, a hyphen (-) is shown.  
IGMP Snooping Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear  
Operation Commands  
501  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.33.1.4 show igmpsnoop statistics  
Function  
Display the IGMP snooping statistics.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show igmpsnoop statistics [<vidlist>]  
Options  
N/A  
Display information about all VLANs with the valid IGMP snooping.  
<vidlist>  
Specify a VID of VLAN to display the IGMP snooping information.  
When specifying multiple VLANs, separate them with commas (,).  
Also, when specifying the range, specify them with hyphens (-). (Example: 1-3)  
The available description format is as follows:  
To specify values 1, 2, 3, 5 and 7 in the "vidlist"  
Example: 1-3, 5, 7  
To specify values 1, 3 and 5 in the "vidlist"  
Example: 1, 3, 5  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Caution  
Display IGMP snooping statistics.  
The statistics are cleared if the device is restarted.  
Execution Example  
# show igmpsnoop statistics 4094  
VLAN 4094  
---(1)  
----------------------------------------  
IGMP V1/V2 query packet received count : 4  
IGMP V1/V2 query packet ignored count : 0  
IGMP V3 query packet received count : 0  
IGMP V3 query packet ignored count : 0  
IGMP V1 membership report received count : 0  
IGMP V2 membership report received count : 16  
IGMP V3 membership report received count : 0  
IGMP leave received count : 0  
membership joined count : 0  
membership left count : 0  
IGMP checksum error detected count : 0  
malformed packet detected count : 0  
failure to register count(limit over) : 0  
failure to register count(other cause) : 0  
--------------------  
---(2)  
---(3)  
---(4)  
---(5)  
---(6)  
---(7)  
---(8)  
---(9)  
---(10)  
---(11)  
---(12)  
---(13)  
---(14)  
---(15)  
1) VLAN ID to be displayed  
2) Number of received IGMP V1 or IGMP V2 Query packets  
3) Number of IGMP V1 or IGMP V2 Query packets which were ignored due to packet  
formatting errors or other errors  
4) Number of received IGMP V3 Query packets  
5) Number of IGMP V3 Query packets which were ignored due to packet formatting  
errors or other errors  
6) Number of received IGMP V1 Membership report packets  
7) Number of received IGMP V2 Membership report packets  
8) Number of received IGMP V3 Membership report packets  
IGMP Snooping Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear  
502  
Operation Commands  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
9) Number of received IGMP Leave packets  
10) Number of registration times of group address entries  
11) Number of deletion times of group address entries  
12) Number of header received checksum error packets of IGMP packet  
13) Number of received packet-format error packets, except for checksum errors  
14) Number of unsuccessful registration times due to an excess of the upper limit on  
the number of entries  
15) Number of unsuccessful registration times due to reasons other than the excess of  
the upper limit on the number of entries  
IGMP Snooping Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear  
503  
Operation Commands  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.33.2 IGMP Snooping Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status  
Clear Commands  
This section explains commands related to IGMP snooping counter, log, statistics, and status clear.  
5.33.2.1 clear igmpsnoop statistics  
Function  
Clear the IGMP snooping statistics.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
clear igmpsnoop statistics [<vidlist>]  
Options  
N/A  
Clear the statistics of all VLANs with the valid IGMP snooping.  
<vidlist>  
Specify a VID of VLAN to clear the IGMP snooping statistics.  
When specifying multiple VLANs, separate them with commas (,). Also, when specifying  
the range, specify them with hyphens (-). (Example: 1-3)  
The available description format is as follows:  
To specify values 1, 2, 3, 5 and 7 in the "vidlist"  
Example: 1-3, 5, 7  
To specify values 1, 3 and 5 in the "vidlist"  
Example: 1, 3, 5  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Clear IGMP snooping statistics.  
Execution Example  
# clear igmpsnoop statistics  
#
IGMP Snooping Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear  
504  
Operation Commands  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.33.2.2 clear igmpsnoop group  
Function  
Clear the IGMP snooping entries.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
clear igmpsnoop group <vid> <address>  
Options  
<vid>  
Specify an ID of VLAN with the entries to clear. If "all" is specified, all VLANs are  
selected.  
<address>  
Specify an address to clear the entry.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Clear listener information held by IGMP snooping.  
Execution Example  
# clear igmpsnoop group 2048 01:00:5e:01:81:19  
#
Caution  
Specify "all" or the MAC address whose entry is to be cleared. If "all" is specified, then all  
group addresses other than the group address entries in the range 01:00:5e:00:00:00 - ff  
will be cleared. If a particular MAC address is specified, the all group address entries  
using the specified address will be cleared. This means that all entries with the same  
lower bytes in their group address will be cleared. To calculate the MAC address, take the  
group address (A.B.C.D), convert the lower 23bits (B'.C.D) to 2-digit hexadecimal  
numbers, and prepend "01:00:5e" to get "01:00:5e:B':C:D".  
For example, if you would like to clear 224.129.1.1 (0e.81.01.01), please set  
01:00:5e:01:01:01 as MAC address.  
You can't clear 01:00:5e:00:00:01-01:00:5e:00:00:ff for 224.0.0.0-224.0.0.255.  
IGMP Snooping Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear  
505  
Operation Commands  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.34 Loopdetection Counter, Log,  
Statistics, and Status Display and  
Clear Operation Commands  
This section explains about commands related to Loopdetection.  
5.34.1 Loopdetection Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status  
Display Commands  
5.34.1.1 show loopdetect  
Function  
Displays loop detection status.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show loopdetect  
N/A  
Options  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Displays loop detection status.  
Execution Example  
XG0224 example:  
# show loopdetect  
interval : 10s  
recovery : 60  
---(1)  
---(2)  
port  
status  
count  
----- ---------------------- ------------  
(3)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
(4)  
(5)  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
undetected  
undetected  
undetected  
undetected  
undetected  
undetected  
undetected  
detected(portblock)  
detected(portblock)  
undetected  
undetected  
undetected  
undetected  
undetected  
undetected  
undetected  
0/60  
0/60  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1) Frame transmission interval for loop detection.  
2) Recovery monitor count for loop detection status.  
3) Ethernet port number.  
Loopdetection Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear  
Operation Commands  
506  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
4) Loop detection status  
undetected : Loop has not been detected.  
detected  
: Loop has been detected (the loop detection frame sent by this port  
has been received by a port on this device).  
*If the port has been disabled, "(portdisable)" is displayed.  
*If the port has been blocked, "(portblock)" is displayed.  
: Loop detection on an invalid port.  
-
5) Monitor status during loop detection  
The monitor status after a loop has been detected is displayed as follows:  
(consecutive number of times no loop has been detected) / (recovery monitor  
count)  
Loopdetection Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display and Clear  
507  
Operation Commands  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.35 AAA Status Display and Clear  
Operation Commands  
This section explains about commands related to AAA status display.  
5.35.1 AAA Status Display Commands  
This section explains commands related to AAA status display.  
5.35.1.1 show aaa radius client server-info  
Function  
Display the RADIUS server information.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show aaa radius client server-info [group <group_id>]  
Options  
N/A  
Display all server information of the AAA group.  
group <group_id>  
Display the server information of the specified group.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the RADIUS server status.  
Execution Example  
# show aaa radius client server-info group 0  
[aaa group 0]  
Type No. Server Address  
Port Pri State recover  
---- ---- ----------------------------------- ---- --- ----- -------  
(1) (2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
(6)  
(7)  
Auth  
Auth  
Acct  
0 192.168.0.101  
1 192.168.0.100  
0 192.168.0.100  
1812  
1812  
1813  
10 dead  
20 alive  
0 alive  
293/300  
-
-
1) Server type  
Auth : Authentication server  
Acct : Accounting server  
2) Server definition number  
3) Server IP address  
4) Server port number  
5) Priority  
6) Server status  
alive : Available  
dead : Unavailable due to failure of response  
7) Unavailable due to failure of response  
Displayed with a hyphen (-) when server status is usable.  
AAA Status Display and Clear Operation Commands  
508  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.36 NETTIME (time/sntp) Server and Client  
Statistics Display and Clear Operation  
Commands  
This section explains about commands related to NETTIME statistics information.  
5.36.1 NETTIME (time/sntp) Statistics Display Commands  
This section explains commands related to NETTIME (time/sntp) statistics information display.  
5.36.1.1 show nettime status  
Function  
Display the status with the NETTIME (time/sntp) function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show nettime status  
N/A  
Options  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Caution  
Display the NETTIME (time/sntp) status.  
Use of the "rdate" command is not reflected in the display of  
NETTIME (time/sntp) status.  
Execution Example  
# show nettime status  
Server Status Server Address  
Protocol Last Update Time  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
Active  
172.16.0.1  
SNTP UDP  
Wed Jan 5 14:51:45 2011  
1) status of the time information server  
Active : The switch clock has been automatically synchronized.  
Inactive : The switch clock has not been automatically synchronized.  
2) IP address of the time information server  
The IP address of the time information server is displayed.  
When Server Status is Inactive, "-" is displayed.  
3) Time protocol  
TIME TCP : TIME protocol  
TIME TCP6 : TIME protocol (IPv6)  
SNTP UDP : simple NTP protocol  
SNTP UDP6 : simple NTP protocol (IPv6)  
When Server Status is Inactive, "-" is displayed.  
4) Last update time  
The time recorded when the swtich clock was last synchronized.  
NETTIME (time/sntp) Server and Client Statistics Display and Clear  
509  
Operation Commands  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.36.1.2 show nettime statistics  
Function  
Display the statistics with the NETTIME (time/sntp) function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show nettime statistics [<mode> [<protocol>]]  
Options  
N/A  
Display all the currently operating device information.  
<mode>  
Specify the display mode.  
server  
Display the information of the server function (the clock data provider).  
client  
Display the information of the client function (the clock data receiver).  
<protocol>  
Specify the protocol to display.  
time  
Display the TIME protocol information.  
sntp  
Display the simple NTP protocol information.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Caution  
Display the NETTIME (time/sntp) statistics.  
The time acquisition from this product by "rdate" command is not included in the  
NETTIME (time/sntp) statistics.  
Execution Example  
The following gives an example of a command execution with each option.  
<mode> <protocol>  
Only the active protocol in the specified mode is displayed.  
# show nettime statistics client time  
NETTIME client statistics information:  
[time tcp]  
0 request transmission error  
0 transmitted synchronized request  
0 received response  
0
0
received invalid packet  
received clock not synchronized  
0 local clock updated  
#
NETTIME (time/sntp) Server and Client Statistics Display and Clear  
Operation Commands  
510  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
No option  
If options are omitted, all NETTIME information running on this device is displayed.  
# show nettime statistics  
NETTIME server statistics information:  
[sntp udp]  
0 received synchronized request  
received invalid packet  
0 request discard (clock not synchronized)  
0 response transmission error  
0 transmitted response  
--- (1)  
--- (2)  
--- (3)  
--- (4)  
--- (5)  
0
[sntp udp6]  
0 received synchronized request  
received invalid packet  
0
0 request discard (clock not synchronized)  
0 response transmission error  
0 transmitted response  
[time tcp]  
[time udp]  
[time tcp6]  
[time udp6]  
0 received synchronized request  
0
received invalid packet  
0 request discard (clock not synchronized)  
0 response transmission error  
0 transmitted response  
0 received synchronized request  
0
received invalid packet  
0 request discard (clock not synchronized)  
0 response transmission error  
0 transmitted response  
0 received synchronized request  
0
received invalid packet  
0 request discard (clock not synchronized)  
0 response transmission error  
0 transmitted response  
0 received synchronized request  
0
received invalid packet  
0 request discard (clock not synchronized)  
0 response transmission error  
0 transmitted response  
NETTIME client statistics information:  
[sntp udp]  
0 request transmission error  
0 transmitted synchronized request  
0 received response  
--- (6)  
--- (7)  
--- (8)  
--- (9)  
--- (10)  
--- (11)  
0
0
received invalid packet  
received clock not synchronized  
0 local clock updated  
[sntp udp6]  
[time tcp]  
[time tcp6]  
#
0 request transmission error  
0 transmitted synchronized request  
0 received response  
0
0
received invalid packet  
received clock not synchronized  
0 local clock updated  
0 request transmission error  
1 transmitted synchronized request  
1 received response  
0
0
received invalid packet  
received clock not synchronized  
1 local clock updated  
0 request transmission error  
0 transmitted synchronized request  
0 received response  
0
0
received invalid packet  
received clock not synchronized  
0 local clock updated  
NETTIME (time/sntp) Server and Client Statistics Display and Clear  
Operation Commands  
511  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
server  
1) Total number of received synchronized request packets  
2) Total number of invalid packets among the synchronized request packets of Item  
(1)  
3) Total number of discarded synchronized request packets due to the out of  
synchronized status of this device  
4) Total number of unsuccessful response transmission packets  
5) Total number of response transmission packets  
client  
6) Total number of unsuccessfully transmitted synchronized request packets  
7) Total number of forwarded synchronized request packets  
8) Total number of response packets received from the server  
9) Total number of invalid packets among the response packets of Item (8)  
10) Total number of invalid response packets among those of Item (9) due to the out of  
synchronized status of the server  
11) Total number of clock updating times of this device by response packets  
NETTIME (time/sntp) Server and Client Statistics Display and Clear  
512  
Operation Commands  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.36.2 NETTIME (time/sntp) Statistics Clear Commands  
This section explains commands related to NETTIME (time/sntp) statistics information display.  
5.36.2.1 clear nettime statistics  
Function  
Clear the NETTIME (time/sntp) statistics.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
clear nettime statistics [<mode>]  
Options  
N/A  
Clear all NETTIME (time/sntp) statistics.  
<mode>  
Specify the mode to clear.  
server  
Clear the server function statistics.  
client  
Clear the client function statistics.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Clear the NETTIME (time/sntp) statistics.  
Execution Example  
# clear nettime statistics  
#
NETTIME (time/sntp) Server and Client Statistics Display and Clear  
Operation Commands  
513  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.37 ProxyDNS Statistics Display and Clear  
Operation Commands  
This section explains commands related to proxyDNS statistics information.  
5.37.1 ProxyDNS Statistics Display Commands  
This section explains commands related to proxyDNS statistics information display.  
5.37.1.1 show proxydns statistics  
Function  
Display the statistics with Proxy DNS function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show proxydns statistics  
N/A  
Options  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the proxy DNS statistics.  
Execution Example  
# show proxydns statistics  
ProxyDNS statistics information:  
0 Total request packets  
--- (1)  
--- (2)  
--- (3)  
--- (4)  
--- (5)  
--- (6)  
--- (7)  
--- (8)  
--- (9)  
--- (10)  
--- (11)  
--- (12)  
0
0
Send Query packets  
Send Query packets Error  
0 Total reply packets  
0
0
0
0
Send Reply packets  
Send Reply packets Error  
Send Error Reply packets  
Send Error Reply packets Error  
0 Total discard packets  
0
0
0
QTYPE Unknown Char  
QNAME Filter  
Short header  
#
1) Total number of transmitted DNS request messages  
2) Total number of successful transmitted DNS inquiry messages  
3) Total number of unsuccessful transmitted DNS inquiry messages  
4) Total number of transmitted DNS response messages  
5) Total number of successful transmitted DNS response messages  
6) Total number of unsuccessful transmitted DNS response messages  
7) Total number of successful transmitted DNS error response messages  
8) Total number of unsuccessful transmitted DNS error response messages  
9) Total number of discarded packets  
10) Number of packets discarded due to invalid character codes  
ProxyDNS Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands  
514  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
11) Number of packets discarded by the URL filtering function  
12) Number of packets discarded due to insufficient header length  
ProxyDNS Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands  
515  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.37.2 ProxyDNS Statistics Clear Commands  
This section explains commands related to proxyDNS statistics information clear.  
5.37.2.1 clear proxydns statistics  
Function  
Clear the ProxyDNS statistics.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
clear proxydns statistics  
N/A  
Options  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Clear the proxy DNS statistics.  
Execution Example  
# clear proxydns statistics  
#
ProxyDNS Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands  
516  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.38 SNMP Statistics Display and Clear  
Operation Commands  
This section explains about commands related to SNMP statistic information.  
5.38.1 SNMP Statistics Display Commands  
This section explains commands related to the SNMP statistic information display.  
5.38.1.1 show snmp statistics  
Function  
Display the statistics with SNMP function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show snmp statistics  
N/A  
Options  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the SNMP statistics.  
Execution Example  
# show snmp statistics  
SNMP statistics information:  
0 Input Packets  
--- (1)  
--- (2)  
--- (3)  
--- (4)  
--- (5)  
--- (6)  
--- (7)  
--- (8)  
--- (9)  
--- (10)  
--- (11)  
--- (12)  
--- (13)  
--- (14)  
--- (15)  
--- (16)  
--- (17)  
--- (18)  
--- (19)  
--- (20)  
--- (21)  
--- (22)  
--- (23)  
--- (24)  
--- (25)  
--- (26)  
--- (27)  
0 Output Packets  
0 Input Bad Versions  
0 Input Bad Community Names  
0 Input Bad Community Uses  
0 Input ASN Parse Errors  
0 Input Too Bigs  
0 Input No Such Names  
0 Input Bad Values  
0 Input Read Only  
0 Input Gen Errors  
0 Input Total Request Vars  
0 Input Total Set Vars  
0 Input Get Requests  
0 Input Get Next  
0 Input Set Requests  
0 Input Get Responses  
0 Input Traps  
0 Output Too Bigs  
0 Output No Such Names  
0 Output Bad Values  
0 Output Gen Errors  
0 Output Get Requests  
0 Output Get Next  
0 Output Set Requests  
0 Output Get Responses  
0 Output Traps  
#
1) Total number of SNMP received messages  
2) Total number of SNMP sent messages  
3) Total number of unsupported SNMP received messages  
SNMP Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands  
517  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
4) Total number of SNMP received messages of the unused community  
5) Total number of received messages that indicate the operations not allowed in the  
community  
6) Total number of received messages with ASN.1 errors  
7) Total number of receive PDU packets with the tooBig error status  
8) Total number of receive PDU packets with the noSuchName error status  
9) Total number of receive PDU packets with the badValue error status  
10) Total number of receive PDU packets with the readOnly error status  
11) Total number of receive PDU packets with the genErr error status  
12) Total number of successfully collected MIB objects  
13) Total number of successfully set MIB objects  
14) Total number of received GetRequestPDU packets  
15) Total number of received GetNextRequestPDU packets  
16) Total number of received SetRequestPDU packets  
17) Total number of received GetResponsePDU packets  
18) Total number of received trap PDU packets  
19) Total number of sent PDU packets with the tooBig error status  
20) Total number of sent PDU packets with the noSuchNam error status  
21) Total number of sent PDU packets with the badValue error status  
22) Total number of sent PDU packets with the genErr error status  
23) Total number of sent GetRequestPDU packets  
24) Total number of sent GetNextRequestPDU packets  
25) Total number of sent SetRequestPDU packets  
26) Total number of sent GetResponsePDU packets  
27) Total number of sent trap PDU packets  
SNMP Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands  
518  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.38.2 SNMP Statistics Clear Commands  
This section explains commands related to the SNMP statistic clearing.  
5.38.2.1 clear snmp statistics  
Function  
Clear the SNMP statistics.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
clear snmp statistics  
N/A  
Options  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Clear the SNMP statistics.  
Execution Example  
# clear snmp statistics  
#
SNMP Statistics Display and Clear Operation Commands  
519  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.39 Ethernet L3 Monitor Function Counter,  
Log, Statistics, and Status Display and  
Clear Operation Commands  
This section explains about commands related to Ethernet L3 monitor function.  
5.39.1 Ethernet L3 Monitor Function Counter, Log, Statistics,  
and Status Display Commands  
This section explains about commands related to Ethernet L3 monitor function counter, log, statistics, and status display.  
5.39.1.1 show icmpwatch  
Function  
Display various information collected by the Ethernet L3 monitor function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show icmpwatch  
N/A  
Options  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the monitoring information provided by the Ethernet L3 monitor function.  
Execution Example  
# show icmpwatch  
[PORT-1]  
icmpwatch status  
port type  
---(1)  
---(2)  
---(3)  
---(4)  
: Normal  
: Backup (group1, master)  
: 192.168.2.1  
destination address  
[PORT-2]  
icmpwatch status  
port type  
destination address  
: Disable  
: Backup (group1, backup)  
: 192.168.2.1  
[PORT-4]  
icmpwatch status  
port type  
destination address  
: Error  
: Normal  
: 10.1.1.10  
[LA GROUP-1]  
---(5)  
icmpwatch status  
port type  
: Normal  
: Normal  
destination address  
: 172.16.1.50  
1) Ethernet port number  
2) Monitoring status  
Normal: Indicates that the monitoring is normal.  
Error: Indicates that the monitoring is abnormal due to failure detection.  
Disable: Indicates that the monitoring function is disabled.  
3) Port type  
Normal: Indicates that the port is used as the normal port.  
Backup: Indicates that the port is used as the backup port.  
The group number and the port type, master or backup, are displayed.  
Ethernet L3 Monitor Function Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display  
520  
and Clear Operation Commands  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
4) The address to be monitored  
5) Link aggregation group number  
5.39.1.2 show icmpwatch statistics  
Function  
Display the statistics of Ethernet L3 monitor function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show icmpwatch statistics  
Options  
N/A  
Display all statistics.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the statistics provided by the Ethernet L3 monitor function.  
Information about the Ethernet ports where the Ethernet L3 monitor function is enabled,  
and the link aggregation group is displayed.  
Execution Example  
# show icmpwatch statistics  
[PORT-1]  
---(1)  
---(2)  
---(3)  
---(4)  
---(5)  
---(6)  
---(7)  
20 transmitted icmp echo request packets  
0 transmitted icmp echo request packets error  
19 received icmp echo reply packets  
0 received error  
5 retransmitted icmp echo request packets  
1 icmpwatch timeout  
[PORT-3]  
37 transmitted icmp echo request packets  
0 transmitted icmp echo request packets error  
37 received icmp echo reply packets  
0 received error  
0 retransmitted icmp echo request packets  
0 icmpwatch timeout  
[LA GROUP-1]  
14 transmitted icmp echo request packets  
---(8)  
1 transmitted icmp echo request packets error  
14 received icmp echo reply packets  
0 received error  
0 retransmitted icmp echo request packets  
0 icmpwatch timeout  
#
1) Ethernet port number  
2) Number of sent ICMP ECHO requests  
3) Number of sent ICMP ECHO request errors  
4) Number of received ICMP ECHO replies  
5) Number of received errors  
6) Number of retransmitted ICMP ECHO packets  
7) The number of Timeouts  
8) Link aggregation group number  
Ethernet L3 Monitor Function Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display  
and Clear Operation Commands  
521  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.39.2 Ethernet L3 Monitor Function Counter, Log, Statistics,  
and Status Clear Commands  
This section explains about commands related to Ether L3 monitor function counter, log, statistics, and status clearing.  
5.39.2.1 clear icmpwatch statistics  
Function  
Clear the statistics of Ethernet L3 monitor function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
clear icmpwatch statistics  
N/A  
Options  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Clear the statistics provided by the Ethernet L3 monitor function.  
Execution Example  
# clear icmpwatch statistics  
#
Ethernet L3 Monitor Function Counter, Log, Statistics, and Status Display  
and Clear Operation Commands  
522  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.40 Login Information Operations and  
Display Commands  
This section explains about commands related to Login information.  
5.40.1 Login Information Display Commands  
This section explains the display command related to Login information.  
5.40.1.1 show users  
Function  
Display the login information.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show users [all]  
Options  
N/A  
Display current login user's information.  
all  
Display login information about all the lines.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display login information.  
Execution Example  
XG2600# show users  
U No Line  
User Name  
Class Remote Host  
Since  
Idle  
- -- --------- --------------- ----- ------------------ ----------- ---------  
(1)(2) (3)  
* 1 console 0 admin  
2 vty 0 admin  
(4)  
(5)  
admin -  
admin 192.168.10.100  
(6)  
(7)  
01/20.10:28  
01/20.11:58  
(8)  
0:00:00  
0:00:09  
XG2600# show users all  
U No Line User Name  
Class Remote Host  
Since  
Idle  
- -- --------- --------------- ----- ------------------ ----------- ---------  
* 1 console 0 admin  
admin -  
admin 192.168.10.100  
01/20.10:28  
01/20.11:58  
01/20.10:26  
01/20.10:26  
01/20.10:26  
01/20.10:26  
01/20.10:26  
01/20.10:26  
01/20.10:26  
0:00:00  
0:00:58  
0:00:00  
0:00:00  
0:00:00  
0:00:00  
0:00:00  
0:00:00  
0:00:00  
2 vty 0  
3 vty 1  
4 vty 2  
5 vty 3  
6 ftp 0  
7 ssh 0  
8 sftp 0  
9 http 0  
admin  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1) The line indicator  
*: Indicating the current line(executing this command).  
2) The Login line number  
3) The Login line name  
4) The user name  
If the line isn’t used, "-" is displayed.  
Login Information Operations and Display Commands  
523  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5) The user class  
If the line isn't used, "-" is displayed.  
6) The Remote Host  
The Host Ip address that the user login from.  
7) The date of login or logout.  
8) The idle time for the line.  
Login Information Operations and Display Commands  
524  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.40.2 Login Information Operation Commands  
This section explains the operation command related to Login information.  
5.40.2.1 clear line  
Function  
Logout user forcibly.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
clear line <line_number>  
clear line <line_name> <interface_number>  
Options  
<line_number>  
Specify the line number to logout.  
The line number is displayed by "show users" command.  
<line_name>  
Specify the name of the line to logout.  
- Console  
- vty  
- ftp  
- ssh  
- sftp  
- http  
<interface_number>  
Specify the interface number of the line.  
If you'd like to logout the user via vty2, please specify "vty" as <line_name> and "2" as  
<interface_number>.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Logout user forcibly.  
Execution Example  
XG2600# clear line 2  
XG2600# clear line vty 2  
Login Information Operations and Display Commands  
525  
     
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.41 Socket Status Display Commands  
This section explains about commands related to socket status display.  
5.41.1 Socket Status Display Commands  
This section explains commands related to socket status display.  
5.41.1.1 show socket  
Function  
Display the socket status.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show socket  
Options  
N/A  
Display the status of all sockets.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Display the status of sockets used by application layer software.  
Execution Example  
# show socket  
Active sockets for IPv4 (including servers)  
Proto Recv-Q Send-Q Local Address  
----- ------ ------ -------------  
Foreign Address  
---------------  
(5)  
*.*  
127.0.0.1.1025  
127.0.0.1.2600  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
State  
-------  
(6)  
(1)  
tcp  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
0 *.22  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
LISTEN  
ESTABLISHED  
ESTABLISHED  
LISTEN  
LISTEN  
LISTEN  
LISTEN  
LISTEN  
LISTEN  
tcp  
tcp  
tcp  
tcp  
tcp  
tcp  
tcp  
tcp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
0 127.0.0.1.2600  
0 127.0.0.1.1025  
0 *.37  
0 *.21  
0 *.80  
0 *.23  
0 127.0.0.1.61225  
0 127.0.0.1.2600  
0 127.0.0.1.2611  
0 *.68  
0 *.68  
0 *.68  
0 *.68  
0 *.68  
0 *.68  
0 *.68  
0 *.68  
0 *.68  
0 *.68  
0 *.68  
0 *.68  
0 *.68  
0 *.68  
0 *.68  
0 *.68  
(To be continued)  
Socket Status Display Commands  
526  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
(Continued)  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
udp  
#
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 *.68  
0 *.68  
0 *.68  
0 *.68  
0 *.68  
0 *.67  
0 *.67  
0 *.67  
0 *.67  
0 *.67  
0 *.67  
0 *.67  
0 *.67  
0 *.67  
0 *.67  
0 *.67  
0 *.67  
0 *.67  
0 *.67  
0 *.67  
0 127.0.0.1.2645  
0 *.67  
0 *.53  
0 *.67  
0 127.0.0.1.52000  
0 *.67  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
*.*  
0 *.67  
0 127.0.0.1.2642  
0 *.37  
0 *.67  
0 127.0.0.1.2639  
0 127.0.0.1.2638  
0 127.0.0.1.161  
0 127.0.0.1.8900  
0 127.0.0.1.2631  
0 *.123  
0 *.67  
0 127.0.0.1.2633  
0 127.0.0.1.2632  
0 127.0.0.1.2634  
0 127.0.0.1.2635  
0 127.0.0.1.2637  
0 *.500  
0 127.0.0.1.2628  
0 127.0.0.1.2629  
0 127.0.0.1.2621  
0 127.0.0.1.2623  
0 127.0.0.1.2627  
0 127.0.0.1.2624  
0 127.0.0.1.2625  
0 127.0.0.1.2622  
1) Protocol  
tcp or udp is displayed.  
2) Amount of queued data awaiting readout  
The amount of data awaiting readout by the application layer software is  
displayed among the data received by the device.  
3) Amount of data transmission awaiting acknowledgment  
The amount of data, whose transmission has not been acknowledged yet, is  
displayed among the data sent from application layer software.  
4) Local address and port number  
The local address and its port number are displayed. If omitted, an asterisk (*) is  
displayed instead.  
Socket Status Display Commands  
527  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5) Remote address and port number  
The remote address and its port number are displayed. If omitted, an asterisk (*)  
is displayed instead.  
6) Internal status of protocol  
For TCP protocol, one of the following is displayed.  
CLOSED : No session is established yet.  
CLOSE_WAIT : After the session was released, the close processing by the  
application layer software has been awaited.  
CLOSING  
: After the close processing was requested by application layer  
software, and FIN was exchanged, an ACK reception has been  
awaited.  
ESTABLISHED: The session has been established.  
FIN_WAIT_1 : After a FIN was sent, an ACK reception has been awaited.  
FIN_WAIT_2 : A FIN reception has been awaited.  
LAST_ACK  
: After a FIN was exchanged, an ACK reception has been  
awaited.  
LISTEN  
: A session can be received.  
SYN_RCVD : After a SYN-ACK was sent, an ACK reception has been  
awaited.  
SYN_SENT : After a SYN was sent, an SYN-ACK reception has been  
awaited.  
TIME_WAIT : Holding after release of session  
Socket Status Display Commands  
528  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.42 Trace Show and Clear Operation  
Commands  
This section explains about commands related to trace information.  
5.42.1 Trace Show Commands  
This section explains about commands related to trace show.  
5.42.1.1 show trace ssh  
Function  
Show the information traced by the SSH server function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
show trace ssh  
N/A  
Options  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Caution  
Display the trace information of SSH server function.  
The trace information of SSH server function is cleared when this device is restarted.  
Execution Example  
# show trace ssh  
[1] sshd  
--- ----  
(1) (2)  
Sat Jan 15 14:34:37 2011  
------------------------  
(3)  
This platform does not support both privilege separation and compression  
-------------------------------------------------------------------  
(4)  
[2] sshd  
[3] sshd  
[4] sshd  
[5] sshd  
[6] sshd  
[7] sshd  
[8] sshd  
[9] sshd  
Sat Jan 15 14:34:37 2011  
Compression disabled  
Sat Jan 15 14:34:37 2011  
info1: sshd version OpenSSH_3.9p1  
Sat Jan 15 14:34:37 2011  
info1: private host key: #0 type 0 RSA1  
Sat Jan 15 14:34:37 2011  
info1: read PEM private key done: type RSA  
Sat Jan 15 14:34:37 2011  
info1: private host key: #1 type 1 RSA  
Sat Jan 15 14:34:37 2011  
info1: read PEM private key done: type DSA  
Sat Jan 15 14:34:37 2011  
info1: private host key: #2 type 2 DSA  
Sat Jan 15 14:34:37 2011  
info1: Bind to port 22 on 0.0.0.0.  
[10] sshd  
Sat Jan 15 14:34:37 2011  
Server listening on 0.0.0.0 port 22.  
[11] sshd  
Sat Jan 15 14:34:37 2011  
info1: Bind to port 22 on ::.  
[12] sshd  
Sat Jan 15 14:34:37 2011  
Server listening on :: port 22.  
[13] sshd  
Sat Jan 15 14:34:37 2011  
Generating 768 bit RSA key.  
[14] sshd  
Sat Jan 15 14:34:38 2011  
RSA key generation complete.  
1) Trace number  
A decimal trace number is displayed.  
Trace Show and Clear Operation Commands  
529  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
2) Thread name  
The thread name is displayed.  
3) Trace dump time  
The trace dump time is displayed.  
4) Trace information  
The trace information is displayed.  
Trace Show and Clear Operation Commands  
530  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.42.2 Trace Clear Commands  
This section explains about commands related to trace clear.  
5.42.2.1 clear trace ssh  
Function  
Clear the information traced by the SSH server function.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
clear trace ssh  
N/A  
Options  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Caution  
Clear the trace information of SSH server function.  
The trace information of SSH server function is cleared when this device is restarted.  
Execution Example  
# clear trace ssh  
#
Trace Show and Clear Operation Commands  
531  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.43 Ethernet Port Control Commands  
This section explains about commands related to Ethernet port control.  
5.43.1 Ethernet Port Control Commands  
This section explains commands related to Ethernet port control.  
5.43.1.1 offline  
Function  
Offline the Ethernet ports.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
offline ether [<port>]  
Options  
ether  
Offline all ports (linkdown).  
ether <port>  
Offline the specified ports (linkdown).  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
Range  
Model  
1 to 26  
1 to 52  
XG0224  
XG0448  
XG2600  
1 to 26, m1  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Disconnect or place the port offline for communication.  
Execution Example  
# offline ether 1  
#
Ethernet Port Control Commands  
532  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.43.1.2 online  
Function  
Execute connecting or unblocking.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
online ether [<port>]  
Options  
ether  
Online all ports.  
ether <port>  
Online the specified ports.  
When setting multiple port numbers, separate them with commas (,).  
When setting sequential numbers, separate them with hyphens (-). (Example: "1-8")  
Range  
Model  
1 to 26  
1 to 52  
XG0224  
XG0448  
XG2600  
1 to 26, m1  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Connect or place the port online.  
Execution Example  
# online ether 1  
#
Ethernet Port Control Commands  
533  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.44 RADIUS Control Commands  
This section explains commands related to RADIUS control.  
5.44.1 RADIUS Control Commands  
This section explains RADIUS control commands.  
5.44.1.1 radius recovery  
Function  
Recover the RADIUS server.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
radius recovery group <group_id> auth <number>  
Options  
<group_id>  
Group ID  
Specify the ID of AAA group to be applied by the command.  
auth <number>  
Authentication server definition number  
Specify the definition number of the authentication server to be applied by the  
command.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
The RADIUS server can be recovered manually from dead state to alive state.  
Even the RADIUS server recovers from dead state, server remains dead when it cannot  
communicate with the RADIUS server.  
Execution Example  
# radius recovery group 1 auth 2  
#
RADIUS Control Commands  
534  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.45 USB Port Control Commands  
This section explains about commands related to USB Port Control Commands.  
5.45.1 USB Port Control Commands  
5.45.1.1 usbctl  
Function  
Disables or enables USB ports.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
usbctl <mode>  
Options  
<mode>  
enable  
Enable USB port.  
disable  
Disable USB port.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Enables/disables USB ports.  
When enabled, if overcurrent status is detected, recommences supply of electricity and  
clears overcurrent detection status.  
When disabled, connected USB memory will appear to be disconnected in order to cease  
supply of electricity.  
Execution Example  
# usbctl enable  
#
USB Port Control Commands  
535  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.46 I’m here Commands  
This section explains about "I’m here" commands.  
5.46.1 I’m here Commands  
5.46.1.1 iamhere  
Function  
Blink the READY LED and the CHECK LED alternately.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
iamhere <mode> [<time>]  
Options  
<mode>  
on  
Blink the READY LED and the CHECK LED alternately.  
- [<time>]  
Specify the LED blinking time (1s-86400s,1m-1440m,1h-24h,1d).  
The unit shall be d (day), h (hour), m (minute), or s (second).  
off  
Stop blinking.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Blink the READY LED and the CHECK LED alternately. This allows visually locating a  
switch quickly within a rack or series of racks.  
During blinking, the following LEDs are turned off:  
XG2600  
STATUS LED, ERROR LED, FLASH LED, FAN LED.  
XG0224/XG0448  
ERROR LED, FLASH LED  
Execution Example  
# iamhere 0n 30m  
I’m here Commands  
536  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.47 Other Commands  
This section explains commands not previously covered.  
5.47.1 Other Commands  
This section explains other commands.  
5.47.1.1 ping  
Function  
Sends ICMP echo request packets.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
ping <ip_address> [source <ip_address>] [repeat [<count>]] [size <dec>] [tos <hex>] [ttl  
<dec>] [timeout <dec>] [df]  
ping <host_name> [{v4|v6}] [source <ip_address>] [repeat [<count>]] [size <dec>] [tos  
<hex>] [ttl <dec>] [timeout <dec>] [df]  
Options  
<ip_address>  
Target IP address  
Specifies the target IPv4 or IPv6 address.  
If specifying a link-local IPv6 address, append "%<interface>" to the address,  
specifying which interface to use. For example: "fe80::1%lan0"  
Either <ip_address> or <host_name> must be specified.  
<host_name>  
Target host name  
Specifies the target host name.  
If specifying a host name, the host name must be registered in the host database or the  
switch must have access to a DNS server.  
Either <ip_address> or <host_name> must be specified.  
{v4|v6}  
Specifies the IP version of the target host name.  
When specifying the <host_name> parameter, this option specifies the version of the  
IP address that the target <host_name> resolves to. Default is v4. If the version of the  
resolved IP address does not match the specified version an error will occur.  
source <ip_address>  
Source IP address  
Specifies the source IP address. Addresses not defined on the switch cannot be  
specified.  
If the version does not match with the target IP address an error will occur.  
repeat [<count>]  
Number of times to repeat  
Specifies the number of times to repeat expressed as a base 10 value in the range of 0  
to 65535. Default is 0.  
size <dec>  
Data size  
Specifies the length (in bytes) of the ICMP data to send as a base 10 value in the range  
of 46 to 9600.  
Default is 46 bytes.  
Other Commands  
537  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
tos <hex>  
TOS value  
Specifies the TOS value as a hexadecimal value in the range of 0x00 to 0xff. Default is  
0x00.  
Only valid for IPv4.  
ttl <dec>  
TTL value  
Specifies the TTL value as a decimal value in the range of 0 to 255. Default is 128 for  
IPv4, 64 for IPv6.  
timeout <dec>  
Time to wait for response  
Specifies the time to wait for a response (in seconds) as a base 10 value in the range of  
1 to 300.  
Default is 20 seconds.  
df  
Don’t fragment  
Sets the Don’t Fragment bit on the packets to be sent so they won’t be fragmented en  
route.  
Only valid for IPv4.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Explanation  
Sends an ICMP ECHO_REQUEST to the specified host (IP address or host name), and  
confirms receipt of an ICMP ECHO_RESPONSE.  
Execution Example  
(a) Without options (only the IP address is specified)  
# ping 192.168.1.1  
192.168.1.1 is alive.  
#
(b) Host name specified  
# ping jp.fujitsu.com  
192.168.1.2 is alive.  
#
(c) Host name specified (IPv6)  
# ping jp.fujitsu.com v6  
fe80:::fffe:c100:e00:5555:80c2 is alive.  
#
(b) Repeat (3 times specified)  
# ping 192.168.1.1 repeat 3  
PING 192.168.1.1: 56 data bytes.  
64 bytes from 192.168.1.1: icmp_seq=0 ttl=255 time=0.768 ms  
64 bytes from 192.168.1.1: icmp_seq=1 ttl=255 time=0.736 ms  
64 bytes from 192.168.1.1: icmp_seq=2 ttl=255 time=0.736 ms  
----192.168.1.1 PING Statistics----  
3 packets transmitted, 3 packets received, 0% packet loss  
round-trip (ms) min/ave/max = 0.736/0.746/0.768  
#
*When specifying options, do so in the order in which they appear in the syntax.  
Other Commands  
538  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.47.1.2 traceroute  
Function  
Displays network route.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
Syntax  
Options  
traceroute <ip_address> [ source <src_ip_address> ] [ size <data_size> ] [ timeout  
<timeout> ] [ mpls] [ df ]  
traceroute <host_name> [{v4 | v6}] [ source <src_ip_address> ] [ size <data_size> ] [  
timeout <timeout> ] [ mpls ] [ df ]  
<ip_address>  
Target IP address  
Specifies the target IPv4 or IPv6 address.  
Either <ip_address> or <host_name> must be specified.  
<host_name>  
Target host name  
Specifies the target host name.  
If specifying a host name, the host name must be registered in the host database or the  
switch must have access to a DNS server.  
Either <ip_address> or <host_name> must be specified.  
{ v4 | v6 }  
Specifies the IP version of the target host name.  
When specifying the <host_name> parameter, this option specifies the version of the  
IP address that the target <host_name> resolves to. Default is v4. If the version of the  
resolved IP address does not match the specified version an error will occur.  
source <src_ip_address>  
Source IP address  
Specifies the source IP address. Addresses not defined on the switch cannot be  
specified.  
If the version does not match with the target IP address an error will occur.  
size <data_size>  
Data size  
Specifies the length (in bytes) of the packet to be sent, including the IP header, as a  
base 10 value in the range of 46 to 9600. Default is 46 bytes.  
If the target IP is an IPv6 address, or if the target host name’s IP version is specified as  
IPv6, values in the range of 46 to 59 will automatically be read as 60.  
timeout <timeout>  
Time to wait for response  
Specifies the time to wait for a response (in seconds) as a base 10 value in the range of  
1-300.  
Default is 20 seconds.  
df  
Don’t fragment  
Sets the Don’t Fragment bit on the packets to be sent so they won’t be fragmented en  
route.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Other Commands  
539  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Explanation  
Displays network route.  
Displays the route to the specified host (IP address or host name) by sending test  
packets to the host with the time-to-live value in the IP datagram header set to 1 at first,  
then incrementally increasing by 1, and analyzing the ICMP time exceeded packets and  
ICMP destination unreachable packets received.  
The meanings of the letter codes displayed by traceroute are listed below.  
[Destination is an IPv4 address]  
xx.xxx ms  
: Round trip time  
!N  
!H  
!P  
!F  
!S  
!
: Destination unreachable (no route to network)  
: Destination unreachable (no route to host)  
: Destination unreachable (protocol unreachable)  
: Destination unreachable (fragment needed)  
: Source route error  
: Abnormal TTL value  
*
: Probe timeout  
[Destination is an IPv6 address]  
xx.xxx ms  
: Round trip time  
!N  
!H  
!P  
!F  
!S  
!
: Destination unreachable (no route to network)  
: Destination unreachable (no route to address)  
: Destination unreachable (not a neighbor)  
: Festination unreachable (administrative reason)  
: Source route error  
: Abnormal HopLimit value  
*
: probe timeout  
In addition, traceroute reports the following errors.  
traceroute: unknown host <host_name>  
Cannot resolve destination IP address for <host_name> specified.  
traceroute: can't assign source address  
Assignment of source IP address failed.  
(In cases such as when the specified address does not exist for the switch.)  
Execution Example  
Host is responding  
# traceroute 192.168.1.1  
traceroute to 192.168.1.1 from 192.168.5.2, 30 hops max, 46 byte packets  
1
2
#
192.168.5.1  
192.168.1.1  
20.000 ms 20.000 ms 20.000 ms  
41.000 ms 41.000 ms 41.000 ms  
No response from host  
# traceroute 192.168.1.1  
traceroute to 192.168.1.1 from 192.168.5.2, 30 hops max, 46 byte packets  
1
2
3
4
* * *  
* * *  
* * *  
* * *  
:
30  
#
* * *  
Other Commands  
540  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.47.1.3 telnet  
Function  
Connects to a telnet server.  
Available Model XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Syntax  
telnet <host> [<port>] [{ipv4|ipv6}] [escape {<char>|none}] [srcaddr <srcaddr>] [tos  
<tos>]  
Options  
<host>  
Target host (telnet server), specified in the format below.  
Host name  
IPv4 address  
IPv6 address  
If specifying a link-local address, append "%<interface>" to the address, specifying  
which interface to use. For example: "fe80::1%lan0"  
<port>  
Port number specified as a base 10 value in the range of 1 to 65535.  
Default is the telnet port, 23.  
ipv4  
Specified when making a telnet connection to an IPv4 address.  
If a host name is specified in <host> and that host has both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses,  
connect via the IPv4 address.  
ipv6  
Specified when making a telnet connection to an IPv6 address.  
If a host name is specified in <host> and that host has both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses,  
use the IPv6 address.  
If both ipv4 and ipv6 options are omitted, if an address is specified in <host> connection  
will be made via that address; if it is a host name connection will be made via IPv4 if it  
resolves to an IPv4 address or IPv6 if it resolves to an IPv6 address, or if both an IPv4  
and IPv6 address are available connection will be made via the IPv6 address.  
escape {<char>|none}  
Specifies the escape character. For no escape character specify "none".  
To force-disconnect while connected via telnet enter the escape character followed by "q".  
To set a control character as an escape character, prefix the specified character with the  
"^" character. For example, to set CTRL+A as the escape character, specify "^A".  
If a string of characters is specified (other than "none"), the first character in that string  
will be set as the escape character.  
Default is "^]" (CTRL+]).  
srcaddr <srcaddr>  
Source address (the address of this router), specified in the format below.  
IPv4 address  
IPv6 address  
Specify an address with the same version and scope as the address specified in <host>.  
The appropriate address will be set by default.  
tos <tos>  
TOS value specified as a hexadecimal value in the range of 0 to ff.  
Default is 0.  
Use Mode  
Operation mode (user class/admin class)  
Configuration mode (admin class)  
Other Commands  
541  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Explanation  
Allows connection to and remote operation of a host/router running a telnet server.  
If the telnet server demands the following information, enter the information for this  
device as listed within the parentheses.  
Terminal type (VT100)  
Terminal speed (9600bps)  
Screen size (number of lines, number of columns)  
Execution Example  
# telnet 192.168.1.2  
Trying 192.168.1.2...  
Make a telnet connection to another router  
connecting  
Connected to 192.168.1.2. connected  
Escape character is '^]'  
Escape character is displayed  
Login:  
Enter login for the connected router  
Password:  
# exit  
Enter password for the connected router  
Execute exit command on the connected router  
Connection closed by foreign host.  
#
Disconnection  
Prompt for local router is displayed  
Other Commands  
542  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
5.48 Effect by "commit" Command  
Execution  
The effects of running the commit command after changing the configuration via configuration commands are described  
for each command below. In addition, modification/addition/deletion of each configuration command has the same effect.  
Type  
Command Name  
Effect of "commit"  
(3)  
Port  
ether use  
ether media  
ether mode  
ether duplex  
ether mdia  
ether flowctl  
(3)  
(3)  
(3)  
(3)  
(3)  
ether type mirror  
(5):XG2600  
(1):XG0224/XG0448  
ether type linkaggregation  
ether type backup  
ether vlan  
(3)  
(3)  
(1) *1 *2:XG2600  
ether egress permission  
ether loopdetect  
ether startup  
(1)  
(1)  
(3)-1  
(1)  
ether recovery limit  
ether downrelay port  
ether description  
ether mac storm  
ether stp  
(1)  
(0)  
(3)  
(1) *3  
ether macfilter  
(6):XG2600  
(1):XG0224/XG0448  
ether qos aclmap  
(6):XG2600  
(1):XG0224/XG0448  
ether qos priority  
ether qos mode  
(3)  
(1)  
ether qos prioritymap  
ether lacp port-priority  
ether icmpwatch  
ether snmp trap  
(1):XG2600 *4:XG2600  
(1)  
(1)  
(6)  
ether ratecontrol  
linkaggregation  
(1)  
LINKAGGREGATION  
(3)  
linkaggregation mode  
linkaggregation icmpwatch  
linkaggregation downrelay  
linkaggregation description  
backup  
(3)-LA  
(1)  
(1)  
(0)  
BACKUP  
LACP  
(3)  
lacp  
(1)  
Effect by "commit" Command Execution  
543  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Type  
Command Name  
Effect of "commit"  
VLAN  
vlan name  
(0)  
vlan protocol  
(1) *1 *5 *6:XG2600  
(1) *1:XG0224/XG0448  
vlan forward  
(1) *1  
(0)  
vlan description  
vlan igmpsnoop  
vlan macfilter  
(1) *1  
(6):XG2600  
(1):XG0224/XG0448  
vlan ip6filter  
(1):XG0224/XG0448  
vlan qos aclmap  
(6):XG2600  
(1):XG0224/XG0448  
vlan ip6qos aclmap  
mac age  
(1):XG0224/XG0448  
MAC  
LAN  
(1) *1  
mac learning  
mac flush  
(1) *1  
(1):XG0224/XG0448  
lan description  
lan ip address  
lan ip route  
(0)  
(1)  
(1)  
lan ip filter  
(6):XG2600  
(1):XG0224/XG0448  
lan ip dscp  
(6):XG2600  
(1):XG0224/XG0448  
lan ip arp static  
lan vlan  
(1)  
(1)  
lan ip6 use  
lan ip6 ifid  
(1)  
(1)  
lan ip6 address  
lan ip6 ra mode  
lan ip6 route  
lan ip6 filter  
lan ip6 dscp  
lan llmnr use  
oob ip address  
oob ip route  
oob ip6 use  
oob ip6 ifid  
oob ip6 address  
oob ip6 ra mode  
oob ip6 route  
oob llmnr use  
ip arp age  
(1)  
(1)  
(1)  
(1):XG0224/XG0448  
(1):XG0224/XG0448  
(1)  
Management LAN port  
(1):XG2600  
(1):XG2600  
(1):XG2600  
(1):XG2600  
(1):XG2600  
(1):XG2600  
(1):XG2600  
(1):XG2600  
(1)  
IP  
QoS  
qos cosmap  
stp  
(4):XG0224/XG0448  
(1) *3  
STP  
LLDP  
Loop Detect  
lldp  
(1)  
loopdetect  
(1)  
Effect by "commit" Command Execution  
544  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
Type  
Command Name  
Effect of "commit"  
ACL  
acl  
(6)*6:XG2600  
(1):XG0224/XG0448  
AAA  
aaa  
(1)  
Device  
snmp  
syslog  
time  
(1)  
(1)  
(1)  
proxydns  
host  
(1)  
(1)  
password format  
password admin set  
password user set  
password aaa  
password authtype  
schedule  
(0)  
(0)  
(0)  
(1)  
(1)  
(1)  
resource  
(4):XG0224/XG0448  
watchdog service  
consoleinfo  
(4)  
(1)  
telnetinfo  
(1)  
mflag  
(1)  
dumpswitch  
(1):XG0224/XG0448  
sysname  
(4)  
(1)  
(1)  
(1)  
(1)  
(1)  
serverinfo  
Login banner  
login banner telnet  
login banner ftp  
login banner ssh  
login banner description  
(0)  
The settings are enabled immediately after the command has been executed.  
Only the relevant function is stopped or restarted.  
(1)  
(1)-1  
In addition to operation (1), the relevant route is added or deleted with the route  
change for this device and the neighboring routers.  
(2)  
The communication via the relevant logical interface is interrupted briefly.  
The relevant Ethernet port is linked down or linked up.  
(3)  
(3)-LA  
If changed from "static" to "passive" or "active" or vice versa, the relevant Ethernet  
port is linked down or linked up.  
If changed from "passive" to "active" or vice versa, the operation is the same as (1).  
(3)-1  
(4)  
If changed from "online" to "offline", the relevant Ethernet port is linked down or  
linked up.  
If changed from "offline" to "online", the operation is the same as (1).  
To enable the settings, the device needs to be restarted (or reset).  
Effect by "commit" Command Execution  
545  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 5 Command Reference  
(5)  
The port which is set to be target port, is used for monitoring function only, and  
can not be used for forwarding.  
(6)  
*1  
*2  
Forwarding frames is interrupted briefly.  
The registered learning table may be deleted.  
If changed the VLAN ID which used by system for the Management Port, the  
communication via the Management Port is interrupted briefly, and the TCP  
session is closed.  
*3  
If the bridge network configuration is changed, the registered learning table may  
be deleted or the communication via the relevant interface may be interrupted  
briefly.  
*4  
*5  
If configured to use ACL Filter/QoS, the forwarding frames is interrupted briefly.  
If there are "vlan protocol" definitions over 16, the definition, the VLAN and the  
ports belong to the VLAN are invalid.  
*6  
The system reconfigure the Protocol VLAN and the ACL Filter/QoS, the  
communication via the all ports is interrupted briefly.  
Effect by "commit" Command Execution  
546  
Chapter 6  
Managing the  
Device  
This chapter describes the Managing the Device.  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 6 Managing the Device  
6.1 Verifying the Device Operations  
This chapter describes the management of the device.  
Hardware status  
System status  
Log messages  
6.1.1 Verifying Hardware Status  
Verify the status of hardware by entering the "show system status" command and "show ether media-info" command in the  
operation mode (admin class) or the configuration mode (admin class).  
The following example shows the information that is displayed when the "show system status" command is entered.  
Execution Example  
XG0224  
When no Expansion Card is installed.  
# show system status  
Current-time  
Startup-time  
restart_cause  
machine_state  
power0_state  
fan0_state  
: Wed Dec 10 06:07:43 2008  
: Wed Dec 10 06:05:05 2008  
: power on  
: RUNNING  
: NORMAL  
: NORMAL  
---(1)  
---(2)  
---(3)  
---(4)  
---(5)  
---(6)  
---(7)  
inspiration_state  
phy_state  
: NORMAL  
: NORMAL  
slot1_state  
inspiration_temp  
phy_temp  
slot1_temp  
Slot Information  
slot1  
: UNKNOWN  
: 26 C  
: 40 C  
: -- C  
---(8)  
---(9)  
: NO_PRESENT  
When a CX4 Card is installed.  
# show system status  
Current-time  
Startup-time  
restart_cause  
machine_state  
power0_state  
fan0_state  
: Wed Dec 10 05:55:40 2008  
---(1)  
---(2)  
---(3)  
---(4)  
---(5)  
---(6)  
---(7)  
: Wed Dec 10 05:52:11 2008  
: power on  
: RUNNING  
: NORMAL  
: NORMAL  
: NORMAL  
inspiration_state  
phy_state  
: NORMAL  
slot1_state  
inspiration_temp  
phy_temp  
slot1_temp  
Slot Information  
slot1  
: UNKNOWN  
: 25 C  
: 40 C  
---(8)  
---(9)  
: -- C  
: SJ10GCX4Z  
Verifying the Device Operations  
548  
     
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 6 Managing the Device  
When a SFP+ Card is installed.  
# show system status  
Current-time  
Startup-time  
restart_cause  
machine_state  
power0_state  
fan0_state  
: Wed Dec 10 06:03:04 2008  
: Wed Dec 10 06:02:19 2008  
: reset  
: RUNNING  
: NORMAL  
: NORMAL  
---(1)  
---(2)  
---(3)  
---(4)  
---(5)  
---(6)  
---(7)  
inspiration_state  
phy_state  
: NORMAL  
: NORMAL  
slot1_state  
inspiration_temp  
phy_temp  
slot1_temp  
Slot Information  
slot1  
: NORMAL  
: 25 C  
: 39 C  
: 39 C  
---(8)  
---(9)  
: SJ10GSFPZ  
1) Current time  
Present date and time.  
2) Startup time  
Date and time when the system started up.  
3) restart_cause  
Cause for the system startup.  
The following system startup causes are displayed:  
power on  
reset  
: The power has been turned on.  
: The reset command has been issued.  
reset switch  
system down  
: The [RESET] switch has been pressed.  
: System-down has occurred.  
4) machine_state  
State of the device  
RUNNING  
: The device is active.  
5) power0_state  
State of the power unit.  
NORMAL  
: The power unit works normally.  
NO_PRESENT : The power unit is not installed.  
FAIL  
: The power unit has been turned off.  
: The power unit is invalid state.  
UNKNOWN  
6) fan0_state  
State of the fan 0.  
NORMAL  
: The fan works normally.  
: The fan has been abnormal.  
: The fan is invalid state.  
ABNORMAL  
UNKNOWN  
7) inspiration_state  
State of environment temperature monitor.  
phy_state  
State of temperature monitor around PHY.  
slot1_state  
State of Expansion Card temperature monitor (SLOT1).  
Verifying the Device Operations  
549  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 6 Managing the Device  
NORMAL  
: The temperature is normal.  
HIGHWARNING : The device changes to a high temperature state.  
HIGHALARM  
UNKNOWN  
: Thermal alarm occurs in the device.  
: There are three following states.  
The Expantion Card without Thermal Sensor is installed. (CX4).  
The Invalid Expantion Card is installed.  
The Expantion Card is not installed.  
8) inspiration_temp  
Environment temperature.  
phy_temp  
temperature around PHY.  
slot1_temp  
temperature around Expansion Card (SLOT1).  
At the time of three following states, "--" is displayed.  
The Expantion Card without Thermal Sensor is installed. (CX4)  
The Invalid Expantion Card is installed.  
The Expantion Card is not installed.  
9) Slot Information  
The type of Expansion Card.  
SJ10GCX4Z  
SJ10GSFPZ  
: Installed Expansion Card is SJ10GCX4Z. (CX4)  
: Installed Expansion Card is SJ10GSFPZ. (SFP+)  
NO_PRESENT : The Expantion Card is not installed.  
UNKNOWN : Installed Expansion Card is Invalid Card.  
XG0448  
When a CX4 Card is installed in Slot 1 and a SFP+ Card is installed in Slot 2.  
# show system status  
Current-time  
Startup-time  
restart_cause  
machine_state  
power0_state  
power_consumption  
fan0_state  
: Tue Dec 9 20:43:01 2008  
: Tue Dec 9 20:42:48 2008  
: power on  
: RUNNING  
: NORMAL  
---(1)  
---(2)  
---(3)  
---(4)  
---(5)  
---(10)  
---(6)  
: 79 W  
: NORMAL  
fan1_state  
: NORMAL  
fan2_state  
: NORMAL  
inspiration_state  
phy_state  
slot1_state  
slot2_state  
inspiration_temp  
phy_temp  
: NORMAL  
: NORMAL  
: UNKNOWN  
: NORMAL  
: 31 C  
---(7)  
---(8)  
: 38 C  
slot1_temp  
: -- C  
slot2_temp  
: 29 C  
Slot Information  
slot1  
slot2  
: SJ10GCX4Z  
: SJ10GSFPZ  
---(9)  
1) Current time  
Present date and time.  
2) Startup time  
Date and time when the system started up.  
Verifying the Device Operations  
550  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 6 Managing the Device  
3) restart_cause  
Cause for the system startup.  
The following system startup causes are displayed:  
power on  
reset  
: The power has been turned on.  
: The reset command has been issued.  
reset switch : The [RESET] switch has been pressed.  
system down : System-down has occurred.  
4) machine_state  
State of the device  
RUNNING: The device is active.  
5) power0_state  
State of the power unit.  
NORMAL  
: The power unit works normally.  
NO_PRESENT : The power unit is not installed.  
FAIL  
: The power unit has been turned off.  
: The power unit is invalid state.  
UNKNOWN  
6) fan0_state  
State of the fan 0.  
fan1_state  
State of the fan 1.  
fan2_state  
State of the fan 2.  
NORMAL  
: The fan works normally.  
: The fan has been abnormal.  
: The fan is invalid state.  
ABNORMAL  
UNKNOWN  
7) inspiration_state  
State of environment temperature monitor.  
phy_state  
State of temperature monitor around PHY.  
slot1_state  
State of Expansion Card temperature monitor (SLOT1).  
slot2_state  
State of Expansion Card temperature monitor (SLOT2).  
NORMAL : The temperature is normal.  
HIGHWARNING : The device changes to a high temperature state.  
HIGHALARM  
UNKNOWN  
: Thermal alarm occurs in the device.  
: There are three following states.  
The Expantion Card without Thermal Sensor is installed. (CX4)  
The Invalid Expantion Card is installed.  
The Expantion Card is not installed.  
8) inspiration_temp  
Environment temperature.  
phy_temp  
temperature around PHY.  
slot1_temp  
temperature around Expansion Card (SLOT1).  
At the time of three following states, "--" is displayed.  
The Expantion Card without Thermal Sensor is installed. (CX4)  
The Invalid Expantion Card is installed.  
The Expantion Card is not installed.  
Verifying the Device Operations  
551  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 6 Managing the Device  
slot2_temp  
temperature around Expansion Card (SLOT2).  
At the time of three following states, "--" is displayed.  
The Expantion Card without Thermal Sensor is installed. (CX4)  
The Invalid Expantion Card is installed.  
The Expantion Card is not installed.  
9) Slot Information  
The type of Expansion Card.  
SJ10GCX4Z  
SJ10GSFPZ  
: Installed Expansion Card is SJ10GCX4A. (CX4)  
: Installed Expansion Card is SJ10GSFPA. (SFP+)  
NO_PRESENT : The Expantion Card is not installed.  
UNKNOWN  
: Installed Expansion Card is Invalid Card.  
10) power_consumption  
Power consumption of the device.  
XG2600  
# show system status  
Current-time  
Startup-time  
restart_cause  
machine_state  
access_direction  
power_redundancy  
PSU1 state  
: Thu Dec 21 16:04:50 2008  
: Thu Dec 21 16:04:36 2008  
---(1)  
---(2)  
---(3)  
---(4)  
---(5)  
---(6)  
---(7)  
: power on  
: RUNNING  
: front access  
: redundant  
: NORMAL  
PSU2 state  
: NORMAL  
PSU1 type  
: AC  
---(8)  
PSU2 type  
: AC  
power_consumption  
FAN1 state  
: 75 W  
: NORMAL  
---(9)  
---(10)  
FAN2 state  
: NORMAL  
inspiration_state  
inspiration_temp  
warning time  
recover time  
internal_state  
inspiration_temp  
internal_temp  
: NORMAL  
: NORMA  
: Fri Dec 26 14:00:45 2008  
: Fri Dec 26 14:12:30 2008  
: NORMAL  
---(11)  
---(12)  
: 35 C  
: 32 C  
---(13)  
1) Current time  
Present date and time.  
2) Startup time  
Date and time when the system started up.  
3) restart_cause  
Cause for the system startup.  
The following system startup causes are displayed:  
power on  
reset  
: The power has been turned on.  
: The reset command has been issued.  
reset switch : The [RESET] switch has been pressed.  
system down : System-down has occurred.  
4) machine_state  
State of the device  
RUNNING  
FALLBACK  
: The device is active.  
: The device is into fallback state.  
Verifying the Device Operations  
552  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 6 Managing the Device  
5) access_direction  
Direction where a device is installed in.  
front access  
rear access  
: The device should be installed forward.  
: The device should be installed backward.  
6) power_redundancy  
State of the redundant power unit.  
single  
: The device has no redundant power unit.  
: The device has a redundant power unit.  
redundant  
7) PSU1 state  
State of the power unit (PSU1).  
PSU2 state  
Type of the power unit (PSU2).  
NORMAL  
: The power unit works normally.  
NO_PRESENT : The power unit is not installed.  
NO_POWER  
FAIL  
: The power unit has been turned off.  
: The power unit has been abnormal.  
: The power unit is invalid type.  
UNKNOWN  
WARNING  
: The power unit has been incorrectly mounted.  
8) PSU1 type  
Type of the power unit (PSU1).  
PSU2 type  
Type of the power unit (PSU2).  
AC  
--  
: The power unit is AC.  
: The power unit is not installed or invalid type.  
9) power_consumption  
Power consumption of the device.  
10) FAN1 state  
State of the fan module 1.  
FAN2 state  
State of the fan module 2.  
NORMAL  
FAIL  
: The fan module works normally.  
: The fan module has been abnormal.  
NO_PRESENT : The fan module is not installed.  
UNKNOWN  
WARNING  
: The fan module is invalid direction.  
: The fan module has been incorrectly mounted.  
11) inspiration_state  
State of environment temperature monitor.  
internal_state  
State of device inside temperature monitor.  
NORMAL  
WARNING  
ALARM  
: The temperature is normal.  
: The device changes to a high temperature state.  
: Thermal alarm occurs in the device.  
12) State of changing thermal state  
warning time  
recover time  
: The time when a device changed in a high temperature state.  
: The time when a device returned to a normal state.  
13) inspiration_temp  
Environment temperature.  
internal_temp  
Device inside temperature.  
Verifying the Device Operations  
553  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 6 Managing the Device  
The following example shows the information that is displayed when the "show ether media-info" command is entered.  
Execution Example  
Execution Example (XG0224)  
# show ether media-info  
Port media type Vendor PN  
---- ---------- ----------------  
(1) (2)  
(3)  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
SFP(SX)  
HFBR-5710L  
SFP(ZX)  
SFP(LX)  
SFP(FX)  
SFP+(LR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SCP6P94-F7-BMH  
SCP6P44-F7-BMH  
HFBR-57E0P  
FTLX1471D3BCL  
TRS2000EN-S002  
Execution Example (XG0448)  
# show ether media-info  
Port media type Vendor PN  
---- ---------- ----------------  
(1) (2)  
(3)  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
NONE  
NONE  
SFP(LX)  
NONE  
SFP+(LR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
NONE  
SCP6P44-F7-BMH  
FTLX1471D3BCL  
TRS2000EN-S002  
TRS2000EN-S002  
Execution Example (XG2600)  
# show ether media-info  
Port media type Vendor PN  
---- ---------- ----------------  
(1) (2)  
(3)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SFP+(SR)  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
FTLX8571D3BCL  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(SR)  
NONE  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
NONE  
1) Port number  
Verifying the Device Operations  
554  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 6 Managing the Device  
2) Media information  
The type of the installed module is displayed  
SFP(SX)  
SFP(LX)  
SFP(FX)  
SFP (1000BASE-SX) module is installed  
SFP (1000BASE-LX) module is installed  
SFP (1000BASE-FX) module is installed  
SFP(BX-D) SFP (1000BASE-BX-D) module is installed  
SFP(BX-U) SFP (1000BASE-BX-U) module is installed  
SFP(ZX)  
CX4  
SFP (1000BASE-ZX) module is installed  
The CX4 expansion card is mounted. (Only for XG0448/XG0224. )  
SFP+ (10GBASE-SR) module is installed  
SFP+(SR)  
SFP+(LR)  
SFP+ (10GBASE-LR) module is installed  
UNKNOWN Type of the installed module is unknown  
NONE SFP+ module is not installed or the module of the unsupport is  
mounted.  
3) Vendor Part Number  
Vendor part number of the installed module is displayed.  
The information is displayed even if the type of the module is unknown.  
Verifying the Device Operations  
555  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 6 Managing the Device  
6.1.2 Verifying System Status  
Verify the system status by entering the "show system information" command in the operation mode (admin class) or the  
configuration mode (admin class).  
The following example shows the information that is displayed when the "show system information" command is entered.  
Execution Example  
# show system information  
Current time : Fri Jan 14 14:00:45 2011  
Startup time : Fri Jan 14 08:40:05 2011  
System : XG2600  
Serial No. : 00000123  
ROM Ver. : 1.3  
---(1)  
---(2)  
---(3)  
---(4)  
---(5)  
---(6)  
---(7)  
---(8)  
---(9)  
---(10)  
---(11)  
ASIC Firm Ver. : 090203PL1  
Firm Ver. : V01.00 NY0001 Tue Nov 14 17:52:15 JST 2006  
Startup-config : Sat Jan 01 13:08:04 2011 config1  
Running-config : Sat Jan 01 13:08:04 2011  
MAC : 000b5d89011  
Memory : 256MB  
1) Current time  
Displays the current date and time.  
2) Startup time  
Displays the date and time when the device started up.  
3) System  
Displays the device name.  
4) Serial No.  
Displays the device serial number.  
5) ROM Ver.  
Displays the ROM version number in the xx.yy format. xx.yy is indicated by a  
decimal value.  
6) ASIC Firm Ver. (XG2600 Only)  
Displays the ASIC firmware version number in the yymmddPLn format.  
yymmdd is indicated by date (year-month-day). PLn shows patch level and n is  
indicated by digit decimal value.  
7) Firm Ver.  
Displays the firmware version number in the Vxx.yy format.  
"xx.yy is indicated by a two-digit decimal value.  
8) Startup-config  
Displays the date and time when you have saved the configuration to be read  
during device startup, as well as the file name.  
9) Running-config  
Displays the date and time, when you applied the configuration that is currently  
active.  
10) MAC  
Displays the MAC address with a 12-digit hexadecimal value.  
11) Memory  
Displays the memory size installed in the device.  
Verifying the Device Operations  
556  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 6 Managing the Device  
6.1.3 Reviewing Log Messages  
6.1.3.1 Format of System Log Message  
System log messages from the device are classified into 4 levels -- error, info, notice and warn.  
In the default setting, 3 levels of system log messages (error,warn and info) are put.  
To display system logs, run the "show logging syslog" command in the operation mode (admin class) or the configuration  
mode (admin class).  
An example of the format of a system log message displayed by the "show logging syslog" command is shown below.  
Execution Example  
# show logging syslog  
Dec 13 15:52:31 192.168.1.1 XG2600: init: system startup now.  
Dec 13 15:52:31 192.168.1.1 XG2600: sshd: generating public/private host key pair.  
Dec 13 15:52:40 192.168.1.1 XG2600: protocol: ether 1 link up  
Dec 13 15:52:40 192.168.1.1 XG2600: protocol: lan 0 link up  
Verifying the Device Operations  
557  
     
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 6 Managing the Device  
6.1.3.2 Reviewing Error Logs  
If a fault occurred, review the error log to check fault messages.  
To review error logs, enter the "show logging error" command in the operation mode (admin class) or the configuration  
mode (admin class).  
The following examples show the information that is displayed when the "show logging error" command is entered.  
Execution Example  
# show logging error  
Error Logs on FLASH:  
[0] Error Log:  
flag=80,mode=00,unit=10,regsp=00000000  
Firm information:  
XG2600 V01.00 PTF:NY0010  
Error information:  
error code [85020000]  
Logging time:  
2011/01/01(Sat) 11:51:17  
Hardware diagnostic error information:  
Detail [00142224 00142228 00000080 0000341f]  
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]  
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]  
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]  
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]  
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]  
Extended Error Logs:  
[1] Error Log:  
flag=80,mode=00,unit=10,regsp=00000000  
Firm information:  
XG2600 V01.00 PTF:NY0010  
Error information:  
error code [85020000]  
Logging time:  
2011/01/01(Sat) 11:59:37  
Hardware diagnostic error information:  
Detail [00142224 00142228 00000080 00003520]  
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]  
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]  
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]  
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]  
[00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000]  
Error Logs on DRAM:  
[0] Error Log:  
flag=80,mode=00,unit=80,regsp=04ae9e60  
Firm information:  
XG2600 V01.00 PTF:NY0010  
System down information:  
down code [00000080:00000002]  
Logging time:  
2011/01/01(Sat) 13:05:23  
Register:  
srr0  
[0086dab4] srr1  
[0002d000] csrr0  
[00000000] csrr1  
[00000000] mcsr  
[00000000] tsr  
[00000000]  
[00000000]  
[00000000]  
[01124844]  
[a2c9bdbc]  
[00000000]  
[00000000]  
[00000000]  
[00000000]  
[00000000]  
[04aea174]  
mcsrr0 [00000000] mcsrr1 [00000000] mcar  
lr  
[00886d74] dear  
[00000000] gpr01  
[0087a01c] gpr05  
[c1bcb0a1] gpr09  
[aca5a4a5] gpr13  
[00000000] gpr17  
[00000000] gpr21  
[04aea1e0] gpr25  
[00000000] gpr29  
[0087a01c] esr  
gpr00  
gpr04  
gpr08  
gpr12  
gpr16  
gpr20  
gpr24  
gpr28  
[04ae9f60] gpr02  
[00000005] gpr06  
[00000005] gpr10  
[00000000] gpr14  
[00000000] gpr18  
[00000000] gpr22  
[04aea1f0] gpr26  
[ffffffff] gpr30  
[00000005] gpr03  
[010cf924] gpr07  
[d8c4eab7] gpr11  
[00000000] gpr15  
[00000000] gpr19  
[00000000] gpr23  
[0121ff74] gpr27  
[0121ff7c] gpr31  
Peripheral Register:  
err_det [00000000] l2errdet[00000000] eedr  
[00000000] ltesr  
[00000000]  
(To be continued)  
Verifying the Device Operations  
558  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 6 Managing the Device  
(Continued)  
User Stack:  
+0  
+4  
+8  
+C  
+0 +4 +8 +C  
04ae9f60 04aea1d0 00886d58 04ae9fb8 04ae9fa0  
04ae9f70 00c6fcbb fea4cebb d8c4eab7 c1bcb0a1  
04ae9f80 a2c9bdbc a8b7c1bc b0a4f2a5 aca5a4a5  
04ae9f90 c9a5e9a5 a4a5f3a4 cba4a2a4 efa4bba4  
04ae9fa0 eba1a30a 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04ae9fb0 04aea1c0 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04ae9fc0 85004100 04aea0b0 0000000a 00000000  
04ae9fd0 04ae9ff0 04ae9fb0 04ae9fb0 00000100  
04ae9fe0 00000000 85004100 00000100 04aea068  
04ae9ff0 04aea020 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04aea000 00000000 04aea0f0 00000007 00000000  
04aea010 00000001 04ae9ff0 04aea000 2066696c  
04aea020 73666572 000002bf 5472616e 01e89be0  
04aea030 42000082 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04aea040 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04aea050 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04aea060 010b0000 04b22114 0000005d 00000000  
04aea070 04aea148 0124269c ffffffff ffffffff  
04aea080 00405cfc 0002d000 ffffffff ffffffff  
04aea090 0087b9dc 00000000 00000000 42002088  
04aea0a0 00000001 00000000 00000000 42002088  
04aea0b0 00000001 0002d000 00000100 00000001  
04aea0c0 0087b6d4 00000000 00000000 42000084  
04aea0d0 00000001 00000100 00000002 035fc300  
04aea0e0 04aea110 01260af0 00004e43 00000020  
04aea0f0 04aea100 01260af0 00004e43 00000020  
04aea100 04aea130 0087b810 01261d28 035fcdc0  
04aea110 04aea140 01260af0 00004e43 42000082  
04aea120 04aea140 00000022 00000000 035fcdc0  
04aea130 04aea140 0087b8c0 00000000 035fcdc0  
04aea140 04aea170 0087a23c 00000022 01230168  
04aea150 04aea1d0 04b11152 00769eec 01230168  
04aea160 00000000 00000022 04b22114 0000005d  
04aea170 00000000 0087a01c 00000000 00000200  
04aea180 04b71ee0 04b22114 01230168 00000022  
04aea190 04aea1a0 00869238 00000000 00000000  
04aea1a0 04aea1c0 00867cd8 00000000 00000000  
04aea1b0 010b0000 04b11152 00769eec 01230168  
04aea1c0 04b71ee0 01240000 010ed184 01230168  
04aea1d0 04aea210 00768d20 00000000 00000000  
04aea1e0 04b71ee0 04aea220 01230168 0121fd30  
04aea1f0 04aea210 007697d4 00769eec 01230168  
04aea200 04b71ee0 01240000 01230168 01240000  
04aea210 04aea330 007685d4 04aea200 fffffffb  
04aea220 4649524d 57415245 2d494e46 4f000000  
04aea230 53522d53 37313643 32000000 00000000  
04aea240 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04aea250 4e593030 31302056 30322e30 30000000  
04aea260 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04aea270 4d6f6e20 46656220 20372031 343a3239  
04aea280 3a353920 4a535420 32303035 00000000  
......mX........  
................  
................  
................  
................  
................  
..A.............  
................  
......A........h  
... ............  
................  
............ fil  
sfer....Tran....  
B...............  
................  
................  
......!....]....  
...H.$&.........  
.@\.............  
............B. .  
............B. .  
................  
............B...  
............._..  
.....&....NC...  
.....&....NC...  
...0.....&.(._..  
...@.&....NCB...  
...@..."....._..  
...@........._..  
...p...<...".#.h  
.......R.v...#.h  
......."..!....]  
................  
......!..#.h..."  
.......8........  
......|.........  
.......R.v...#.h  
.....$.......#.h  
.....v. ........  
....... .#.h.!.0  
.....v...v...#.h  
.....$...#.h.$..  
...0.v..........  
FIRMWARE-INFO...  
XG2600............  
................  
NY0010 V01.00...  
................  
Thu Jan 1 14:29  
:59 JST 2011....  
(To be continued)  
Verifying the Device Operations  
559  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 6 Managing the Device  
(Continued)  
04aea290 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000  
................  
04aea2a0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04aea2b0 00000000 00000000 00000000 000001d4  
04aea2c0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04aea2d0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04aea2e0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04aea2f0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04aea300 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04aea310 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04aea320 011395e0 00000004 01240000 01240000  
04aea330 04aea360 00769fe4 00000000 035fcdc0  
04aea340 04aea360 0087a23c 7ffffff0 01230168  
04aea350 00000004 04aea370 01240000 04b71ee0  
................  
................  
................  
................  
................  
................  
................  
................  
.........$...$..  
...`.v......._..  
...`...<.....#.h  
.......p.$......  
Interrupt Stack:  
+0  
+4  
+8  
+C  
+0 +4 +8 +C  
04ae9e60 00000000 04aea1f0 0121ff74 00000000  
04ae9e70 00000000 04ae9f60 00000005 01124844  
04ae9e80 0087a01c 00000005 010cf924 a2c9bdbc  
04ae9e90 c1bcb0a1 00000005 d8c4eab7 00000000  
04ae9ea0 aca5a4a5 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04ae9eb0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04ae9ec0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04ae9ed0 04aea1e0 04aea1f0 0121ff74 00000000  
04ae9ee0 00000000 ffffffff 0121ff7c 04aea174  
04ae9ef0 0086dab4 0002d000 00000000 00000000  
04ae9f00 00886d74 00000005 00000000 42000082  
04ae9f10 00000001 0087a01c 00000000 00000000  
04ae9f20 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04ae9f30 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000  
04ae9f40 00000000 00000000 00000000 04aea170  
04ae9f50 04ae9f60 01260af0 00004e43 00000008  
# exit  
.........!.t....  
.......`......HD  
...........$....  
................  
................  
................  
................  
.........!.t....  
.........!.|...t  
................  
..mt........B...  
................  
................  
................  
...............p  
...`.&....NC....  
Verifying the Device Operations  
560  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 6 Managing the Device  
6.2 Saving/Restoring Configuration  
Information  
This device allows you to save/restore configuration information using the following methods:  
Saving/restoring configuration information using FTP  
Saving/restoring configuration information using a CompactFlash card  
Saving/restoring configuration information using USB memory  
6.2.1 Saving/restoring configuration information using FTP  
All models  
Available Model  
This device provides FTP and SFTP server functions, and allows you to use PC or UNIXR system ftp and sftp commands  
to save/restore configuration information.  
This section presents an example of using the XG2600’s FTP server function with ftp commands.  
To use the SFTP server function, sftp client software supporting SSH protocol version 2 is necessary. This would allow  
you to use sftp commands just as you use ftp commands.  
Use the following user name and password with the FTP server function:  
User name  
Password  
: ftp-admin  
: Specify the password configured with the password command  
Note When the password is not defined, the FTP server function works assuming that no password exists.  
z Files for maintenance  
The FTP server function maintains files with the following names:  
Configuration information 1  
Configuration information 2  
: config1  
: config2  
z Restart method  
Enter "get reset" as a subcommand for the ftp command to restart the device.  
To switch the configuration information, use "get reset1" or "get reset2" to restart the device.  
When get reset" is entered  
When "get reset1" is entered  
When "get reset2" is entered  
: The current configuration information takes effect after restart.  
: Configuration information 1 takes effect after restart.  
: Configuration information 2 takes effect after restart.  
Precautions  
It is strongly recommended to define the password to ensure security.  
While no password is defined, anyone can access to the device from the network, resulting in a very dangerous  
situation.  
Reference  
Saving/Restoring Configuration Information  
561  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 6 Managing the Device  
The following error message may be displayed while using ftp commands:  
502 PASV command not implemented.  
Passive mode regused.  
If this error message is displayed, perform the following operation and retry the failed operation:  
ftp> passive : Change the passive mode.  
Passive mode off.  
Saving configuration information using the FTP server function  
The following explains how to save configuration information using ftp commands on a PC.  
Get configuration information  
with an ftp command  
FTP client  
IP address  
192.168.1.1  
Precautions  
Be sure to observe the following precautions while performing maintenance operations:  
Do not cut power to the device.  
Ensure that no data communication is taking place on the device.  
Perform these operations only when no configuration is taking place on the console.  
z Example of using an ftp command  
The following example saves configuration information 1 to the config1-1 file on the PC.  
C:\>cd Directory in which to store configuration information  
C:\tmp>ftp 192.168.1.1  
: Connect to the device.  
Connected to 192.168.1.1.  
220 XG2600 V01.00 FTP server (config1) ready.  
Name(192.168.1.1:root): ftp-admin  
: Enter the user name.  
331 Password required for ftp-admin.  
Password:  
: Enter the password.  
230 User ftp-admin logged in.  
ftp>bin  
: Enter binary mode.  
200 Type set to I.  
fftp>get config1 config1-1  
: Save configuration information 1 (config1) to the config1-1 file.  
local: config1 remote: config1-1  
200 PORT command successful.  
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection for ‘config1’(2753 bytes)  
226- Transfer complete.  
2857 bytes received in 1.10 seconds (2.44 Kbytes/s)  
ftp>bye  
: Finish  
221 Goodbye.  
C:\tmp>  
Saving/Restoring Configuration Information  
562  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 6 Managing the Device  
Reference  
Restoring configuration information using the FTP server function  
The following explains how to restore configuration information using ftp commands on a PC.  
Put configuration information  
with an ftp command  
FTP client  
IP address  
192.168.1.1  
Precautions  
Be sure to observe the following precautions while performing maintenance operations:  
Do not cut power to the device.  
Ensure that no data communication is taking place on the device.  
Perform only when no configuration is taking place on the console.  
z Example of using an ftp command  
The following example restores configuration information 1 from the config1-1 file on the PC.  
C:\>cd Directory in which to store configuration information  
C:\tmp>ftp 192.168.1.1  
: Connect to the device.  
Connected to 192.168.1.1.  
220 XG2600 V01.00 FTP server (config1) ready.  
Name(192.168.1.1:root): ftp-admin  
331 Password required for ftp-admin.  
Password:  
: Enter the user name.  
: Enter the password.  
230 User ftp-admin logged in.  
ftp>bin  
: Enter binary mode.  
200 Type set to I.  
ftp>put config1-1 config1  
local: config1-1 remote: config1  
200 PORT command successful.  
: Write the config1-1 file as configuration information 1.  
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection for ‘config1’  
226- Transfer complete.  
update : File information check now!  
update : File information check ok.  
226 Write complete.  
2856 bytes sent in 1.10 seconds (2.44 Kbytes/s)  
ftp>get reset  
: Restart the device.  
local: reset remote: reset  
200 PORT command successful.  
421 Reset request ok. bye.  
ftp>bye  
: Finish  
C:\tmp>  
Saving/Restoring Configuration Information  
563  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 6 Managing the Device  
Be sure to restart the device to so that the restored configuration information can take effect.  
Note  
Enter "get reset" as a subcommand for the ftp command to restart.  
To switch the configuration information, enter "get reset1" or "get reset2" and restart the device.  
When "get reset" is entered  
When "get reset1" is entered  
When "get reset2" is entered  
: The current configuration information takes effect after restart.  
: Configuration information 1 takes effect after restart.  
: Configuration information 2 takes effect after restart.  
6.2.2 Saving/restoring configuration information using a  
Compact Flash Card  
XG0224  
Available Model  
You can save the device’s configuration information on a CompactFlash card. If necessary, you can also restore the  
configuration information saved on a CompactFlash card.  
z Configuration information which can be saved  
Configuration information 1  
Configuration information 2  
: config1  
: config2  
The following explains how to save/restore configuration information using a CompactFlash card.  
Saving configuration information using a Compact Flash Card  
The following explains how to save the configuration information of this device to a CompactFlash card.  
1.  
2.  
Insert a CompactFlash card on which you will save configuration information into the CompactFlash  
card slot of this device.  
Save the configuration information to the CompactFlash card.  
z Example  
The following example saves configuration information 1 to the config1-1 file.  
# copy config1 /cf0/config1-1  
Saving/Restoring Configuration Information  
564  
     
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 6 Managing the Device  
Restoring configuration information using a CompactFlash card  
The following explains how to restore device configuration information that has been saved to a CompactFlash card.  
1.  
2.  
Insert the CompactFlash card containing the configuration information into the device’s  
CompactFlash card slot.  
Restore configuration information from the CompactFlash card.  
z Example  
The following example restores configuration information 2 from the config2-1 file.  
# copy /cf0/config2-1 config2  
# reset  
: Restart the device.  
Note Be sure to restart the device to so that the restored configuration information can take effect.  
6.2.3 Saving/restoring configuration information using USB  
memory  
XG0448 / XG2600  
Available Model  
You can save the device’s configuration information on USB memory. If necessary, you can also restore the configuration  
information saved on USB memory.  
z Configuration information which can be saved  
Candidate configuration  
Running configuration  
: candidate-config  
: running-config  
: config1  
Configuration information 1  
Configuration information 2  
: config2  
The following explains how to save/restore configuration information using USB memory.  
Saving configuration information using USB memory  
The following explains how to save the configuration information of this device to USB memory.  
1.  
2.  
Insert USB memory on which you will save the configuration information into the USB port of the  
device.  
Release the block status of the USB port.  
# usbctl enable  
3.  
Confirm that the block status of the USB port has been released.  
Run a show usb hcd status command and ensure that the status displays "enable".  
# show usb hcd status  
[USB HCD STATUS]  
status  
: enable  
Saving/Restoring Configuration Information  
565  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 6 Managing the Device  
4.  
Save configuration information to the USB memory.  
z Example  
The following example saves configuration information 1 to the config1-1 file.  
# copy config1 /um0/config1-1  
5.  
6.  
Block the USB port.  
# usbctl disable  
Confirm that the USB port has been blocked.  
Run a show usb hcd status command and ensure that the status displays "disable".  
# show usb hcd status  
[USB HCD STATUS]  
status  
: disable  
7.  
Remove the USB memory from the device.  
Restoring configuration information using USB memory  
The following explains how to restore device configuration information that has been saved to USB memory.  
1.  
2.  
Insert USB memory containing the saved configuration information into the USB port of the device.  
Release the block status of the USB port.  
# usbctl enable  
3.  
4.  
5.  
Confirm that the block status of the USB port has been released.  
Run a show usb hcd status command and ensure that the status displays "enable".  
# show usb hcd status  
[USB HCD STATUS]  
status  
: enable  
Restore configuration information from the USB memory.  
z Example  
The following example restores configuration information 2 from the config2-1 file.  
# copy /um0/config2-1 config2  
# reset  
: Restart the device.  
Block the USB port.  
# usbctl disable  
Saving/Restoring Configuration Information  
566  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 6 Managing the Device  
6.  
Confirm that the USB port has been blocked.  
Run a show usb hcd status command and ensure that the status displays "disable".  
# show usb hcd status  
[USB HCD STATUS]  
status  
: disable  
7.  
Remove the USB memory from the device.  
Note Be sure to restart the device to so that the restored configuration information can take effect.  
Saving/Restoring Configuration Information  
567  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 6 Managing the Device  
6.3 Updating Firmware  
This section explains how to update the firmware and initialize the settings of the device.  
Precautions  
Before updating the firmware, do not connect the switch via the serial interface.  
While updating the firmware, do not power off or reset the device or the chassis main or remove the device from the  
chassis; otherwise the device will become inoperable.  
Verify that the device is not communicating.  
Verify that no configuration work using the CLI is in process.  
Before updating the firmware, back up the configuration data to an external device.  
6.3.1 Updating Firmware Using FTP  
All models  
Available Model  
The following is an example of updating the device firmware using a FTP client.  
Update the firmware using FTP  
FTP client  
192.168.1.1  
Connect the device and the Personal Computer Using LAN  
Connect the device and the personal computer (FTP client) using LAN. Set an IP address which has the same network as  
the device for the personal computer. This section explains about the IP address of the device when set as "192.168.1.1",  
and the subnet mask when set as "255.255.255.0" as an example.  
Update the Firmware  
This section explains how to update the firmware using Windows command prompt.  
1.  
2.  
Save the new firmware in a work folder of the PC.  
The storing destination and file name are explained when they are set as "D:\FIRM\XG2600SOFT.ftp" as an example.  
Open the command prompt.  
1) Click "Start" menu "Run".  
2) Type "cmd" and press the [Enter] key.  
The command prompt is displayed.  
3.  
Change the current directory to the one where the firmware is stored.  
C:\> d:  
D:\> cd \FIRM  
Updating Firmware  
568  
     
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 6 Managing the Device  
4.  
Log in with the account name "ftp-admin".  
Log in to the device using FTP command.  
Login name: ftp-admin  
Password: The password is the one made with the "password set" command.  
If no password has been set, there is no need to enter one.  
Confirm the password with the system administrator.  
D:\FIRM>ftp 192.168.1.1  
Connected to 192.168.1.1  
220 XG2600 V01.00 FTP server ready.  
User (192.168.1.1:(none)): ftp-admin  
331 Password required for ftp-admin.  
Password:  
: Connect the device  
(Specify IP address of the device)  
: Type login name  
: Type password  
230 User ftp-admin logged in.  
ftp>  
5.  
Transfer the firmware to the device.  
Transfer the firmware to the device in "binary" mode.  
Input "put [the file name of the put personal computer (XG2600SOFT.ftp)] [the file name of the device (firmware)]" in the  
"put" command.  
ftp>binary  
: Set "binary" mode  
200 Type set to I.  
ftp>put XG2600SOFT.ftp firmware  
local: XG2600SOFT.ftp remote: firmware  
200 PORT command successful.  
: Write the "XG2600SOFT.ftp" file as a firmware  
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection for `firmware´.  
226- Transfer complete.  
update : Transfer file check now!  
update : Transfer file check ok.  
.
.
When forwarding firmware to this product, the destination file name must be input as "firmware". Anything other than  
"firmware" cannot be input.  
Note  
6.  
Check that the firmware is completely transferred.  
When "Write complete" message is displayed, it indicates that the process is terminated successfully.  
.
.
226 Write complete.  
ftp>  
7.  
8.  
Exit the ftp mode.  
ftp> quit  
221 Goodbye.  
D:\FIRM>  
: Exit "ftp" command  
Remove the device from the chassis, wait about 10 seconds, and reinsert the device to the chassis.  
The power is turned on again, and the firmware is enabled.  
Updating Firmware  
569  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 6 Managing the Device  
9.  
Check that the firmware is successfully updated.  
After restarting the device, log in to the device using the telnet or the terminal PC connected via the master management  
blade. Enter the "show system information" command to verify the firmware version.  
# show system information  
:
System : XG2600  
:
Firm Ver. : V01.00 (firmware version)  
:
6.3.2 Updating Firmware Using CompactFlash card  
XG0224  
Available Model  
This section explains how to update the firmware using a compact flash card.  
Firmware Update with a telnet or a console  
Follow the instructions below to transfer the firmware saved in a compact flash card using the telnet command or a  
console.  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Insert the compact flash card into the compact flash card slot on the back of this device.  
Login as admin class (admin).  
Transfer the firmware from the compact flash card to this device.  
For <filename>, enter the filename of the firmware saved in the compact flash card.  
copy / cf0 / <filename> firmware  
4.  
5.  
Make sure that the prompt is displayed.  
Pull out the power cable of this device and insert it again.  
The power is turned on again and the firmware is enabled.  
6.  
Check that the firmware is updated correctly.  
After restarting this device, login to this device using telnet or console. Run the "show system information" command to  
check that the product name of this device and the firmware version are correctly displayed.  
# show system information  
:
System : XG2600 (product name)  
:
Firm Ver. : V01.00 (firmware version)  
:
Updating Firmware  
570  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 6 Managing the Device  
Firmware Update with a WWW browser  
Follow the instructions below to transfer the firmware saved in a compact flash card using the WWW browser.  
1.  
Connect this device and a PC via LAN.  
Set an IP address which has the same network as the device for the personal computer.  
This section explains about the IP address of the device when set as "192.168.1.1", and the subnet mask when set as  
"255.255.255.0" as an example.  
Precautions  
The IP address of the device is not set at the initial condition,please set the IP address via serial port.  
When someone login via serial port or via telnet, you can't connect from WWW browser.  
Reference  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Insert the compact flash card into the compact flash card slot on the back of this device.  
Start the WWW browser.  
Specify the URL [http://192.168.1.1/] of this device.  
The top page of this device will be displayed.  
5.  
6.  
Login as admin class (admin).  
Click [Maintenance] tab on the left side of the top page screen.  
The login screen will be displayed.  
7.  
8.  
Click [Compact flash] in the Maintenance menu.  
[Compact flash ] page will be displayed.  
Click [Update Firmware].  
[Update Firmware] page will be displayed.  
9.  
Specify Firmware file name and click [Update].  
Firmware will be updated.  
Updating Firmware  
571  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 6 Managing the Device  
6.3.3 Updating Firmware Using USB memory  
XG0448 / X2600  
Available Model  
This section explains how to update the firmware using a compact USB memory.  
Firmware Update with a telnet or a console  
Follow the instructions below to transfer the firmware saved in a USB memory using the telnet command or a console.  
Insert the USB memory into the USB port on the back of this device.  
Login as admin class (admin).  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Transfer the firmware from the USB memory to this device.  
For <filename>, enter the filename of the firmware saved in the compact flash card.  
# copy /um0/<filename> firmware  
4.  
5.  
Make sure that the prompt is displayed.  
Pull out the power cable of this device and insert it again.  
The power is turned on again and the firmware is enabled.  
6.  
Check that the firmware is updated correctly.  
After restarting this device, login to this device using telnet or console. Run the "show system information" command to  
check that the product name of this device and the firmware version are correctly displayed.  
# show system information  
:
System : XG2600 (product name)  
:
Firm Ver. : V01.00 (firmware version)  
:
Updating Firmware  
572  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 6 Managing the Device  
Firmware Update with a WWW browser  
Follow the instructions below to transfer the firmware saved in a USB memory using the WWW browser.  
1.  
Connect this device and a PC via LAN.  
Set an IP address which has the same network as the device for the personal computer.  
This section explains about the IP address of the device when set as "192.168.1.1", and the subnet mask when set as  
"255.255.255.0" as an example.  
Precautions  
The IP address of the device is not set at the initial condition,please set the IP address via serial port.  
When someone login via serial port or via telnet, you can't connect from WWW browser.  
Reference  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Insert the USB memory into the USB port on the back of this device.  
Start the WWW browser.  
Specify the URL [http://192.168.1.1/] of this device.  
The top page of this device will be displayed.  
5.  
6.  
Login as admin class (admin).  
Click [Maintenance] tab on the left side of the top page screen.  
The login screen will be displayed.  
7.  
8.  
Click [USB memory] in the Maintenance menu.  
[USB memory ] page will be displayed.  
Click [Update Firmware].  
[Update Firmware] page will be displayed.  
9.  
Specify Firmware file name and click [Update].  
Firmware will be updated.  
Updating Firmware  
573  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 6 Managing the Device  
6.4 Actions When Firmware Update  
Failes (Backup Firm Function)  
If the firmware update fails due to power failure or some other reason and you cannot start this device, you can restore the  
device to its normal condition by starting the backup firmware and transferring the firmware with an FTP client on the  
network or by a compact flash card.  
6.4.1 Preparing the Device  
Precautions  
When the device boots up Backup Firm, the IP address of Management-port (XG2600) or LAN port (XG0224 /  
XG0448) is set 192.168.1.1.  
A problem has come up, so please connect only this device and a PC.  
1.  
2.  
Make sure that the power of this device is turned off.  
Connect this device and a PC via LAN.  
XG2600  
Directly connect a cable to Management Port (10/100BASE-TX port) of this device and the PC instead of using a HUB  
in between.  
Note Management-port of XG2600 (10/100BASE-TX) is MDI fixed.  
XG0224 / XG0448  
Directly connect a cable to 10/100/1000BASE-T ports of this device and the PC instead of using a HUB in between.  
[XG0224]  
[XG0448]  
As this device supports AutoMDI/MDI-X function, you can connect a cable to 10/100/1000BASE-T ports without being  
conscious of the PC and HUB.  
Note  
Actions When Firmware Update Failes (Backup Firm Function)  
574  
     
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 6 Managing the Device  
3.  
Connect the power cable to the power outlet.  
4.  
Insert the power cable into the power connector while pressing the reset switch on the back of this  
device using a pointed tool. After about five seconds, release the reset switch.  
The power is turned on and the backup firmware is started.  
Precautions  
If you do not release the reset switch within 10 seconds after turning on the device, it is regarded as reset switch failure.  
Be sure release the reset switch within 10 seconds.  
It takes about one minute to start the backup firmware.  
Note  
The Ready LED blinks in green when the backup firmware is running.  
If you start the backup firmware to logon with the console connected, the "backup#" message is displayed on the console  
screen.  
XG2600  
XG0224/XG0448  
[XG0224]  
[XG0448]  
Actions When Firmware Update Failes (Backup Firm Function)  
575  
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 6 Managing the Device  
6.4.2 Updating the Firmware  
You can perform firmware update by transferring the firmware from an FTP client or a compact flash card.  
Reference  
Actions When Firmware Update Failes (Backup Firm Function)  
576  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 6 Managing the Device  
6.5 Extracting of Maintenance Information  
If a fault occurred, maintenance information may be requested by the device sales representative to investigate the cause of  
the fault. This section provides procedures for extracting maintenance information.  
6.5.1 Procedure for Extracting Maintenance Information when a  
System/Subsystem Failure Occurred  
This section describes the procedures for extracting maintenance information when a system or subsystem failure  
occurred.  
Viewing maintenance information  
Using the "show tech-support" command, you can view maintenance information.  
Using the "show tech-support detail" command, you can view the detailed information.  
Saving maintenance information  
Using the "show tech-support save" command, you can save the maintenance information to the external media.  
Using the "show tech-support detail save" command, you can save the detailed information.  
Extracting of Maintenance Information  
577  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting  
7.1 To Return to the Initial Shipment Settings  
(Initializing Switch Configuration)  
In case of incorrect settings or problems, this device status can be returned to its initial shipment settings.  
When relocating this device, initialize the settings to the time of shipment before setting.  
Note Initialization of the setting will erase all the set data. Back up the configuration data or note the contents of settings.  
1.  
2.  
Connect to the device from the terminal PC via the master management blade using the serial  
connection.  
For the connecting method, refer to "6.3.1 Updating Firmware Using FTP" (pg.568).  
Type user name and password to log in.  
User name: admin  
Password: Confirm with the system administrator.  
3.  
Type "reset clear", and press the [Return] or [Enter] key.  
The configuration of the device is initialized.  
# reset clear <enter>  
>
To Return to the Initial Shipment Settings (Initializing Switch  
579  
Configuration)  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Appendix  
A SNMP Traps  
This appendix lists the SNMP traps supported by the device.  
A.1 Trap List  
An SNMP agent can trap events and notify the SNMP manager asynchronously.  
An SNMP agent sends trap when an event occurs.  
The following is the list of supported traps.  
coldStart  
Notified once if the device starts or restarts.  
linkDown  
Notified if a link fails. May be notified at reboot or if the configuration becomes reactivated.  
linkUp  
Notified if a communication link of the device becomes activated.  
authenticationFailure  
Notified if SNMP authentication fails.  
newRoot  
Notified if the device becomes the root bridge.  
topologyChange  
Notified if a change in the bridge network configuration is detected, i.e., if the network status changes from learning to  
forwarding or from forwarding to blocking.  
nosError  
Notified if a hardware failure occurs. Only the occurrence of a failure is notified.  
lldpRemTablesChange  
Notified if the neighbor LLDP device information table changes.  
SNMP Traps  
581  
     
XG Series User's Guide  
Appendix  
B List of MIBs  
This appendix lists the MIBs supported by the device.  
B.1 Standard MIB Definitions  
All models  
Available Model  
The following shows meaning of MIB ACCESS column.  
RO  
RW  
:MIB can be read only.  
:MIB can be read and written.  
:MIB can not be accessed.  
B.1.1  
system Group  
No.  
Name  
sysDescr  
sysObjectID  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
system.1  
system.2  
system.3  
system.4  
system.5  
system.6  
system.7  
RO  
RO  
RO  
sysUpTime  
sysContact  
sysName  
sysLocation  
RW (*)  
RW (*)  
RW (*)  
RO  
sysServices  
*) Written MIB works on until reset.  
List of MIBs  
582  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Appendix  
B.1.2  
interfaces Group  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
interfaces.1  
interfaces.2  
ifTable.1  
ifEntry.1  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ifNumber  
ifTable  
ifEntry  
RO  
ifIndex  
ifDescr  
ifType  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RW  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
ifEntry.2  
ifEntry.3  
ifMtu  
ifSpeed  
ifPhysAddress  
ifEntry.4  
ifEntry.5  
ifEntry.6  
10 ifAdminStatus  
11 ifOperStatus  
12 ifLastChange  
13 ifInOctets  
14 ifInUcastPkts  
15 ifInNUcastPkts  
16 ifInDiscards  
17 ifInErrors  
18 ifInUnknownProtos  
19 ifOutOctets  
20 ifOutUcastPkts  
21 ifOutNUcastPkts  
22 ifOutDiscards  
23 ifOutErrors  
ifEntry.7  
ifEntry.8  
ifEntry.9  
ifEntry.10  
ifEntry.11  
ifEntry.12  
ifEntry.13  
ifEntry.14  
ifEntry.15  
ifEntry.16  
ifEntry.17  
ifEntry.18  
ifEntry.19  
ifEntry.20  
ifEntry.21  
ifEntry.22  
24 ifOutQLen  
25 ifSpecific  
B.1.3  
address translation Group  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
4
5
atTable  
atEntry  
at.1  
atTable.1  
atEntry.1  
atEntry.2  
atEntry.3  
atIfIndex  
atPhysAddress  
atNetAddress  
RO  
RO  
RO  
B.1.4  
ip Group  
ip Group  
No.  
1
Name  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
ipForwarding  
ipDefaultTTL  
ipInReceives  
ipInHdrErrors  
ipInAddrErrors  
ipForwDatagrams  
ipInUnknownProtos  
ipInDiscards  
ip.1  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
2
3
4
ip.2  
ip.3  
ip.4  
5
6
ip.5  
ip.6  
7
8
9
ip.7  
ip.8  
ip.9  
ipInDelivers  
10 ipOutRequests  
11 ipOutDiscards  
12 ipOutNoRoutes  
13 ipReasmTimeout  
14 ipReasmReqds  
ip.10  
ip.11  
ip.12  
ip.13  
ip.14  
List of MIBs  
583  
     
XG Series User's Guide  
Appendix  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
15 ipReasmOKs  
16 ipReasmFails  
17 ipFragOKs  
ip.15  
ip.16  
ip.17  
ip.18  
ip.19  
ip.23  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
18 ipFragFails  
19 ipFragCreates  
20 ipRoutingDiscards  
ipAddr Group  
No.  
1
Name  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
ipAddrTable  
ip.20  
2
3
ipAddrEntry  
ipAdEntAddr  
ipAddrTable.1  
ipAddrEntry.1  
ipAddrEntry.2  
ipAddrEntry.3  
ipAddrEntry.4  
ipAddrEntry.5  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
4
5
6
ipAdEntIfIndex  
ipAdEntNetMask  
ipAdEntBcastAddr  
ipAdEntReasmMaxSize  
7
ipRoute Group  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ipRouteTable  
ipRouteEntry  
ip.21  
ipRouteTable.1  
ipRouteEntry.1  
ipRouteEntry.2  
ipRouteEntry.3  
ipRouteEntry.4  
ipRouteEntry.5  
ipRouteEntry.6  
ipRouteEntry.7  
ipRouteEntry.8  
ipRouteEntry.9  
ipRouteEntry.10  
ipRouteEntry.11  
ipRouteEntry.12  
ipRouteEntry.13  
ipRouteDest  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
ipRouteIfIndex  
ipRouteMetric1  
ipRouteMetric2  
ipRouteMetric3  
ipRouteMetric4  
ipRouteNextHop  
10 ipRouteType  
11 ipRouteProto  
12 ipRouteAge  
13 ipRouteMask  
14 ipRouteMetric5  
15 ipRouteInfo  
ipNetToMedia Group  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
ipNetToMediaTable  
ipNetToMediaEntry  
ipNetToMediaIfIndex  
ipNetToMediaPhysAddress  
ipNetToMediaNetAddress  
ipNetToMediaType  
ip.22  
ipNetToMediaTable.1  
ipNetToMediaEntry.1  
ipNetToMediaEntry.2  
ipNetToMediaEntry.3  
ipNetToMediaEntry.4  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
List of MIBs  
584  
     
XG Series User's Guide  
Appendix  
ipCidrRoute Group  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
ipForward.3  
ipForward.4  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ipCidrRouteNumber  
ipCidrRouteTable  
ipCidrRouteEntry  
ipCidrRouteDest  
ipCidrRouteMask  
ipCidrRouteTos  
RO  
ipCidrRouteTable.1  
ipCidrRouteEntry.1  
ipCidrRouteEntry.2  
ipCidrRouteEntry.3  
ipCidrRouteEntry.4  
ipCidrRouteEntry.5  
ipCidrRouteEntry.6  
ipCidrRouteEntry.7  
ipCidrRouteEntry.8  
ipCidrRouteEntry.9  
ipCidrRouteEntry.10  
ipCidrRouteEntry.11  
ipCidrRouteEntry.12  
ipCidrRouteEntry.13  
ipCidrRouteEntry.14  
ipCidrRouteEntry.15  
ipCidrRouteEntry.16  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
ipCidrRouteNextHop  
ipCidrRouteIfIndex  
ipCidrRouteType  
10 ipCidrRouteProto  
11 ipCidrRouteAge  
12 ipCidrRouteInfo  
13 ipCidrRouteNextHopAS  
14 ipCidrRouteMetric1  
15 ipCidrRouteMetric2  
16 ipCidrRouteMetric3  
17 ipCidrRouteMetric4  
18 ipCidrRouteMetric5  
19 ipCidrRouteStatus  
inetCidrRoute Group  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
inetCidrRouteNumber  
inetCidrRouteTable  
inetCidrRouteEntry  
inetCidrRouteDestType  
inetCidrRouteDest  
ipForward.6  
ipForward.7  
RO  
inetCidrRouteTable.1  
inetCidrRouteEntry.1  
inetCidrRouteEntry.2  
inetCidrRouteEntry.3  
inetCidrRouteEntry.4  
inetCidrRouteEntry.5  
inetCidrRouteEntry.6  
inetCidrRouteEntry.7  
inetCidrRouteEntry.8  
inetCidrRouteEntry.9  
inetCidrRouteEntry.10  
inetCidrRouteEntry.11  
inetCidrRouteEntry.12  
inetCidrRouteEntry.13  
inetCidrRouteEntry.14  
inetCidrRouteEntry.15  
inetCidrRouteEntry.16  
inetCidrRouteEntry.17  
ipForward.8  
inetCidrRoutePfxLen  
inetCidrRoutePolicy  
inetCidrRouteNextHopType  
inetCidrRouteNextHop  
10 inetCidrRouteIfIndex  
11 inetCidrRouteType  
12 inetCidrRouteProto  
13 inetCidrRouteAge  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
14 inetCidrRouteNextHopAS  
15 inetCidrRouteMetric1  
16 inetCidrRouteMetric2  
17 inetCidrRouteMetric3  
18 inetCidrRouteMetric4  
19 inetCidrRouteMetric5  
20 inetCidrRouteStatus  
21 inetCidrRouteDiscards  
ipv6 Group  
No.  
1
Name  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
RO  
RO  
ipv6IpForwarding  
ip.25  
ip.26  
2
ipv6IpDefaultHopLimit  
List of MIBs  
585  
     
XG Series User's Guide  
Appendix  
ipv4Interface Group  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ipv4InterfaceTableLastChange  
ipv4InterfaceTable  
ipv4InterfaceEntry  
ip.27  
ip.28  
RO  
ipv4InterfaceTable.1  
ipv4InterfaceEntry.1  
ipv4InterfaceEntry.2  
ipv4InterfaceEntry.3  
ipv4InterfaceEntry.4  
ipv4InterfaceIfIndex  
ipv4InterfaceReasmMaxSize  
ipv4InterfaceEnableStatus  
ipv4InterfaceRetransmitTime  
RO  
RO  
RO  
ipv6Interface Group  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ipv6InterfaceTableLastChange  
ipv6InterfaceTable  
ip.29  
ip.30  
RO  
ipv6InterfaceEntry  
ipv6InterfaceIfIndex  
ipv6InterfaceTable.1  
ipv6InterfaceEntry.1  
ipv6InterfaceEntry.2  
ipv6InterfaceEntry.3  
ipv6InterfaceEntry.5  
ipv6InterfaceEntry.6  
ipv6InterfaceEntry.7  
ipv6InterfaceEntry.8  
ipv6InterfaceReasmMaxSize  
ipv6InterfaceIdentifier  
ipv6InterfaceEnableStatus  
ipv6InterfaceReachableTime  
ipv6InterfaceRetransmitTime  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
10 ipv6InterfaceForwarding  
ipSystemStats Group  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ipSystemStatsTable  
ipSystemStatsEntry  
ipSystemStatsIPVersion  
ipTrafficStats.1  
ipSystemStatsTable.1  
ipSystemStatsEntry.1  
ipSystemStatsEntry.3  
ipSystemStatsEntry.7  
ipSystemStatsEntry.10  
ipSystemStatsEntry.11  
ipSystemStatsEntry.12  
ipSystemStatsEntry.14  
ipSystemStatsEntry.15  
ipSystemStatsEntry.16  
ipSystemStatsEntry.18  
ipSystemStatsEntry.20  
ipSystemStatsEntry.22  
ipSystemStatsEntry.23  
ipSystemStatsEntry.25  
ipSystemStatsEntry.26  
ipSystemStatsEntry.27  
ipSystemStatsEntry.28  
ipSystemStatsEntry.29  
ipSystemStatsEntry.30  
ipSystemStatsEntry.46  
ipSystemStatsEntry.47  
ipSystemStatsInReceives  
ipSystemStatsInHdrErrors  
ipSystemStatsInUnknownProtos  
ipSystemStatsInTruncatedPkts  
ipSystemStatsInForwDatagrams  
ipSystemStatsReasmReqds  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
10 ipSystemStatsReasmOKs  
11 ipSystemStatsReasmFails  
12 ipSystemStatsInDelivers  
13 ipSystemStatsOutRequests  
14 ipSystemStatsOutNoRoutes  
15 ipSystemStatsOutForwDatagrams  
16 ipSystemStatsOutDiscards  
17 ipSystemStatsOutFragReqds  
18 ipSystemStatsOutFragOKs  
19 ipSystemStatsOutFragFails  
20 ipSystemStatsOutFragCreates  
21 ipSystemStatsOutTransmits  
22 ipSystemStatsDiscontinuityTime  
23 ipSystemStatsRefreshRate  
List of MIBs  
586  
     
XG Series User's Guide  
Appendix  
ipAddressPrefix Group  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ipAddressPrefixTable  
ipAddressPrefixEntry  
ipAddressPrefixIfIndex  
ipAddressPrefixType  
ipAddressPrefixPrefix  
ipAddressPrefixLength  
ipAddressPrefixOrigin  
ip.32  
ipAddressPrefixTable.1  
ipAddressPrefixEntry.1  
ipAddressPrefixEntry.2  
ipAddressPrefixEntry.3  
ipAddressPrefixEntry.4  
ipAddressPrefixEntry.5  
ipAddressPrefixEntry.6  
ipAddressPrefixEntry.7  
ipAddressPrefixEntry.8  
ipAddressPrefixEntry.9  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
ipAddressPrefixOnLinkFlag  
ipAddressPrefixAutonomousFlag  
10 ipAddressPrefixAdvPreferredLifetime  
11 ipAddressPrefixAdvValidLifetime  
ipAddress Group  
No.  
1
Name  
Object identifier  
ip.34  
MIB ACCESS  
ipAddressTable  
ipAddressEntry  
ipAddressAddrType  
ipAddressAddr  
ipAddressIfIndex  
ipAddressType  
ipAddressPrefix  
ipAddressOrigin  
ipAddressStatus  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ipAddressTable.1  
ipAddressEntry.1  
ipAddressEntry.2  
ipAddressEntry.3  
ipAddressEntry.4  
ipAddressEntry.5  
ipAddressEntry.6  
ipAddressEntry.7  
ipAddressEntry.8  
ipAddressEntry.9  
ipAddressEntry.10  
ipAddressEntry.11  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
10 ipAddressCreated  
11 ipAddressLastChanged  
12 ipAddressRowStatus  
13 ipAddressStorageType  
ipNetToPhysical Group  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
ip.35  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ipNetToPhysicalTable  
ipNetToPhysicalEntry  
ipNetToPhysicalIfIndex  
ipNetToPhysicalTable.1  
ipNetToPhysicalEntry.1  
ipNetToPhysicalEntry.2  
ipNetToPhysicalEntry.3  
ipNetToPhysicalEntry.4  
ipNetToPhysicalEntry.5  
ipNetToPhysicalEntry.6  
ipNetToPhysicalEntry.7  
ipNetToPhysicalEntry.8  
ipNetToPhysicalNetAddressType  
ipNetToPhysicalNetAddress  
ipNetToPhysicalPhysAddress  
ipNetToPhysicalLastUpdated  
ipNetToPhysicalType  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
ipNetToPhysicalState  
10 ipNetToPhysicalRowStatus  
List of MIBs  
587  
     
XG Series User's Guide  
Appendix  
B.1.5  
icmp Group  
icmp Group  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
icmpInMsgs  
icmpInErrors  
icmp.1  
icmp.2  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
icmpInDestUnreachs  
icmpInTimeExcds  
icmpInParmProbs  
icmpInSrcQuenchs  
icmpInRedirects  
icmpInEchos  
icmp.3  
icmp.4  
icmp.5  
icmp.6  
icmp.7  
icmp.8  
icmpInEchoReps  
icmp.9  
10 icmpInTimestamps  
11 icmpInTimestampReps  
12 icmpInAddrMasks  
13 icmpInAddrMaskReps  
14 icmpOutMsgs  
icmp.10  
icmp.11  
icmp.12  
icmp.13  
icmp.14  
icmp.15  
icmp.16  
icmp.17  
icmp.18  
icmp.19  
icmp.20  
icmp.21  
icmp.22  
icmp.23  
icmp.24  
icmp.25  
icmp.26  
15 icmpOutErrors  
16 icmpOutDestUnreachs  
17 icmpOutTimeExcds  
18 icmpOutParmProbs  
19 icmpOutSrcQuenchs  
20 icmpOutRedirects  
21 icmpOutEchos  
22 icmpOutEchoReps  
23 icmpOutTimestamps  
24 icmpOutTimestampReps  
25 icmpOutAddrMasks  
26 icmpOutAddrMaskReps  
icmpStat Group  
No.  
1
Name  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
icmpStatsTable  
icmp.29  
2
icmpStatsEntry  
icmpStatsTable.1  
icmpStatsEntry.1  
icmpStatsEntry.2  
icmpStatsEntry.3  
icmpStatsEntry.4  
icmpStatsEntry.5  
3
4
5
icmpStatsIPVersion  
icmpStatsInMsgs  
icmpStatsInErrors  
icmpStatsOutMsgs  
icmpStatsOutErrors  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
6
7
icmpMsgStats Group  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
icmpMsgStatsTable  
icmpMsgStatsEntry  
icmpMsgStatsIPVersion  
icmpMsgStatsType  
icmpMsgStatsInPkts  
icmpMsgStatsOutPkts  
icmp.30  
icmpMsgStatsTable.1  
icmpMsgStatsEntry.1  
icmpMsgStatsEntry.2  
icmpMsgStatsEntry.3  
icmpMsgStatsEntry.4  
RO  
RO  
List of MIBs  
588  
     
XG Series User's Guide  
Appendix  
B.1.6  
tcp Group  
tcp Group  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
tcpRtoAlgorithm  
tcpRtoMin  
tcp.1  
tcp.2  
tcp.3  
tcp.4  
tcp.5  
tcp.6  
tcp.7  
tcp.8  
tcp.9  
tcp.10  
tcp.11  
tcp.12  
tcp.14  
tcp.15  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
tcpRtoMax  
tcpMaxConn  
tcpActiveOpens  
tcpPassiveOpens  
tcpAttemptFails  
tcpEstabResets  
tcpCurrEstab  
10 tcpInSegs  
11 tcpOutSegs  
12 tcpRetransSegs  
13 tcpInErrs  
14 tcpOutRsts  
tcpConn Group  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
tcpConnTable  
tcpConnEntry  
tcp.13  
tcpConnTable.1  
tcpConnEntry.1  
tcpConnEntry.2  
tcpConnEntry.3  
tcpConnEntry.4  
tcpConnEntry.5  
tcpConnState  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
tcpConnLocalAddress  
tcpConnLocalPort  
tcpConnRemAddress  
tcpConnRemPort  
tcpConnection Group  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
tcpConnectionTable  
tcpConnectionEntry  
tcpConnectionLocalAddressType  
tcpConnectionLocalAddress  
tcpConnectionLocalPort  
tcpConnectionRemAddressType  
tcpConnectionRemAddress  
tcpConnectionRemPort  
tcp.19  
tcpConnectionTable.1  
tcpConnectionEntry.1  
tcpConnectionEntry.2  
tcpConnectionEntry.3  
tcpConnectionEntry.4  
tcpConnectionEntry.5  
tcpConnectionEntry.6  
tcpConnectionEntry.7  
tcpConnectionEntry.8  
RO  
RO  
tcpConnectionState  
10 tcpConnectionProcess  
List of MIBs  
589  
     
XG Series User's Guide  
Appendix  
tcpListener Group  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
tcpListenerTable  
tcpListenerEntry  
tcpListenerLocalAddressType  
tcpListenerLocalAddress  
tcpListenerLocalPort  
tcp.20  
tcpListenerTable.1  
tcpListenerEntry.1  
tcpListenerEntry.2  
tcpListenerEntry.3  
tcpListenerEntry.4  
RO  
tcpListenerProcess  
B.1.7  
udp Group  
udp Group  
No.  
Name  
Name  
Name  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
4
udpInDatagrams  
udpNoPorts  
udpInErrors  
udp.1  
udp.2  
udp.3  
udp.4  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
udpOutDatagrams  
udpListener Group  
No.  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
4
udpTable  
udp.5  
udpEntry  
udpLocalAddress  
udpLocalPort  
udpTable.1  
udpEntry.1  
udpEntry.2  
RO  
RO  
udpEndpoint Group  
No.  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
udpEndpointTable  
udpEndpointEntry  
udpEndpointLocalAddressType  
udpEndpointLocalAddress  
udpEndpointLocalPort  
udpEndpointRemoteAddressType  
udpEndpointRemoteAddress  
udpEndpointRemotePort  
udpEndpointInstance  
udp.7  
udpEndpointTable.1  
udpEndpointEntry.1  
udpEndpointEntry.2  
udpEndpointEntry.3  
udpEndpointEntry.4  
udpEndpointEntry.5  
udpEndpointEntry.6  
udpEndpointEntry.7  
udpEndpointEntry.8  
10 udpEndpointProcess  
RO  
List of MIBs  
590  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Appendix  
B.1.8  
dot3 Group  
dot3Stats Group  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
dot3StatsTable  
dot3StatsEntry  
dot3StatsIndex  
dot3StatsAlignmentErrors  
dot3StatsFCSErrors  
dot3.2  
dot3StatsTable.1  
dot3StatsEntry.1  
dot3StatsEntry.2  
dot3StatsEntry.3  
dot3StatsEntry.4  
dot3StatsEntry.5  
dot3StatsEntry.6  
dot3StatsEntry.7  
dot3StatsEntry.8  
dot3StatsEntry.9  
dot3StatsEntry.10  
dot3StatsEntry.11  
dot3StatsEntry.13  
dot3StatsEntry.16  
dot3StatsEntry.17  
dot3StatsEntry.18  
dot3StatsEntry.19  
dot3StatsEntry.20  
dot3StatsEntry.21  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames  
dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames  
dot3StatsSQETestErrors  
dot3StatsDeferredTransmissions  
10 dot3StatsLateCollisions  
11 dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions  
12 dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors  
13 dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors  
14 dot3StatsFrameTooLongs  
15 dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors  
16 dot3StatsEtherChipSet  
17 dot3StatsSymbolErrors  
18 dot3StatsDuplexStatus  
19 dot3StatsRateControlAbility  
20 dot3StatsRateControlStatus  
dot3Control Group  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
1
dot3ControlTable  
dot3ControlEntry  
dot3ControlFunctionsSupported  
dot3ControlInUnknownOpcodes  
dot3.9  
RO  
RO  
2
3
4
dot3ControlTable.1  
dot3ControlEntry.1  
dot3ControlEntry.2  
dot3Pause Group  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
dot3PauseTable  
dot3PauseEntry  
dot3.10  
dot3PauseTable.1  
dot3PauseEntry.1  
dot3PauseEntry.2  
dot3PauseEntry.3  
dot3PauseEntry.4  
dot3PauseAdminMode  
dot3PauseOperMode  
dot3InPauseFrames  
dot3OutPauseFrames  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
List of MIBs  
591  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Appendix  
B.1.9  
snmp Group  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
snmpInPkts  
snmpOutPkts  
snmpInBadVersions  
snmp.1  
snmp.2  
snmp.3  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
snmpInBadCommunityNames  
snmpInBadCommunityUses  
snmpInASNParseErrs  
snmpInTooBigs  
snmpInNoSuchNames  
snmpInBadValues  
snmp.4  
snmp.5  
snmp.6  
snmp.8  
snmp.9  
snmp.10  
snmp.11  
snmp.12  
snmp.13  
snmp.14  
snmp.15  
snmp.16  
snmp.17  
snmp.18  
snmp.19  
snmp.20  
snmp.21  
snmp.22  
snmp.24  
snmp.25  
snmp.26  
snmp.27  
snmp.28  
snmp.29  
snmp.30  
10 snmpInReadOnlys  
11 snmpInGenErrs  
12 snmpInTotalReqVars  
13 snmpInTotalSetVars  
14 snmpInGetRequests  
15 snmpInGetNexts  
16 snmpInSetRequests  
17 snmpInGetResponses  
18 snmpInTraps  
19 snmpOutTooBigs  
20 snmpOutNoSuchNames  
21 snmpOutBadValues  
22 snmpOutGenErrs  
23 snmpOutGetRequests  
24 snmpOutGetNexts  
25 snmpOutSetRequests  
26 snmpOutGetResponses  
27 snmpOutTraps  
28 snmpEnableAuthenTraps  
B.1.10 rmon Group  
rmonEthernetStatistics Group  
No.  
1
Name  
Object identifier  
statistics.1  
MIB ACCESS  
etherStatsTable  
2
3
4
etherStatsEntry  
etherStatsIndex  
etherStatsDataSource  
etherStatsDropEvents  
etherStatsOctets  
etherStatsTable.1  
etherStatsEntry.1  
etherStatsEntry.2  
etherStatsEntry.3  
etherStatsEntry.4  
etherStatsEntry.5  
etherStatsEntry.6  
etherStatsEntry.7  
etherStatsEntry.8  
etherStatsEntry.9  
etherStatsEntry.10  
etherStatsEntry.11  
etherStatsEntry.12  
etherStatsEntry.13  
etherStatsEntry.14  
etherStatsEntry.15  
etherStatsEntry.16  
etherStatsEntry.17  
etherStatsEntry.18  
etherStatsEntry.19  
etherStatsEntry.20  
etherStatsEntry.21  
RO  
RO  
5
6
7
RO  
RO  
RO  
etherStatsPkts  
8
9
etherStatsBroadcastPkts  
etherStatsMulticastPkts  
RO  
RO  
RO  
10 etherStatsCRCAlignErrors  
11 etherStatsUndersizePkts  
12 etherStatsOversizePkts  
13 etherStatsFragments  
RO  
RO  
RO  
14 etherStatsJabbers  
15 etherStatsCollisions  
RO  
RO  
16 etherStatsPkts64Octets  
17 etherStatsPkts65to127Octets  
18 etherStatsPkts128to255Octets  
19 etherStatsPkts256to511Octets  
20 etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets  
21 etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets  
22 etherStatsOwner  
RO / – (XG2600)  
RO / – (XG2600)  
RO / – (XG2600)  
RO / – (XG2600)  
RO / – (XG2600)  
RO / – (XG2600)  
RO  
23 etherStatsStatus  
RO  
List of MIBs  
592  
     
XG Series User's Guide  
Appendix  
rmonHistoryControl Group  
No.  
1
2
Name  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
historyControlTable  
historyControlEntry  
historyControlIndex  
history.1  
historyControlTable.1  
historyControlEntry.1  
historyControlEntry.2  
historyControlEntry.3  
historyControlEntry.4  
historyControlEntry.5  
historyControlEntry.6  
historyControlEntry.7  
3
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
4
5
6
historyControlDataSource  
historyControlBucketsRequested  
historyControlBucketsGranted  
historyControlInterval  
7
8
9
historyControlOwner  
historyControlStatus  
rmonEthernetHistory Group  
No.  
1
2
Name  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
etherHistoryTable  
etherHistoryEntry  
etherHistoryIndex  
history.2  
etherHistoryTable.1  
etherHistoryEntry.1  
etherHistoryEntry.2  
etherHistoryEntry.3  
etherHistoryEntry.4  
etherHistoryEntry.5  
etherHistoryEntry.6  
etherHistoryEntry.7  
etherHistoryEntry.8  
etherHistoryEntry.9  
etherHistoryEntry.10  
etherHistoryEntry.11  
etherHistoryEntry.12  
etherHistoryEntry.13  
etherHistoryEntry.14  
etherHistoryEntry.15  
3
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
4
5
6
etherHistorySampleIndex  
etherHistoryIntervalStart  
etherHistoryDropEvents  
etherHistoryOctets  
7
8
9
etherHistoryPkts  
etherHistoryBroadcastPkts  
10 etherHistoryMulticastPkts  
11 etherHistoryCRCAlignErrors  
12 etherHistoryUndersizePkts  
13 etherHistoryOversizePkts  
14 etherHistoryFragments  
15 etherHistoryJabbers  
16 etherHistoryCollisions  
17 etherHistoryUtilization  
B.1.11 dot1dBridge Group  
dot1dBase Group  
No.  
1
2
Name  
dot1dBaseBridgeAddress  
dot1dBaseNumPorts  
dot1dBaseType  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
dot1dBase.1  
dot1dBase.2  
dot1dBase.3  
RO  
RO  
RO  
3
4
5
6
dot1dBasePortTable  
dot1dBasePortEntry  
dot1dBasePort  
dot1dBase.4  
dot1dBasePortTable.1  
dot1dBasePortEntry.1  
dot1dBasePortEntry.2  
dot1dBasePortEntry.3  
dot1dBasePortEntry.4  
dot1dBasePortEntry.5  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
7
8
9
dot1dBasePortIfIndex  
dot1dBasePortCircuit  
dot1dBasePortDelayExceededDiscards  
10 dot1dBasePortMtuExceededDiscards  
List of MIBs  
593  
     
XG Series User's Guide  
Appendix  
dot1dStp Group  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
dot1dStp.1  
dot1dStp.2  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
dot1dStpProtocolSpecification  
dot1dStpPriority  
dot1dStpTimeSinceTopologyChange  
dot1dStpTopChanges  
dot1dStpDesignatedRoot  
dot1dStpRootCost  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
dot1dStp.3  
dot1dStp.4  
dot1dStp.5  
dot1dStp.6  
dot1dStpRootPort  
dot1dStpMaxAge  
dot1dStpHelloTime  
dot1dStp.7  
dot1dStp.8  
dot1dStp.9  
10 dot1dStpHoldTime  
dot1dStp.10  
dot1dStp.11  
dot1dStp.12  
11 dot1dStpForwardDelay  
12 dot1dStpBridgeMaxAge  
13 dot1dStpBridgeHelloTime  
14 dot1dStpBridgeForwardDelay  
15 dot1dStpPortTable  
dot1dStp.13  
dot1dStp.14  
dot1dStp.15  
16 dot1dStpPortEntry  
17 dot1dStpPort  
18 dot1dStpPortPriority  
dot1dStpPortTable.1  
dot1dStpPortEntry.1  
dot1dStpPortEntry.2  
dot1dStpPortEntry.3  
dot1dStpPortEntry.4  
dot1dStpPortEntry.5  
dot1dStpPortEntry.6  
dot1dStpPortEntry.7  
dot1dStpPortEntry.8  
dot1dStpPortEntry.9  
dot1dStpPortEntry.10  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
19 dot1dStpPortState  
20 dot1dStpPortEnable  
21 dot1dStpPortPathCost  
22 dot1dStpPortDesignatedRoot  
23 dot1dStpPortDesignatedCost  
24 dot1dStpPortDesignatedBridge  
25 dot1dStpPortDesignatedPort  
26 dot1dStpPortForwardTransitions  
dot1dTp Group  
No.  
Name  
dot1dTpLearnedEntryDiscards  
dot1dTpAgingTime  
dot1dTpFdbTable  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
dot1dTp.1  
dot1dTp.2  
dot1dTp.3  
RO  
RO  
dot1dTpFdbEntry  
dot1dTpFdbAddress  
dot1dTpFdbPort  
dot1dTpFdbTable.1  
dot1dTpFdbEntry.1  
dot1dTpFdbEntry.2  
dot1dTpFdbEntry.3  
dot1dTp.4  
dot1dTpPortTable.1  
dot1dTpPortEntry.1  
dot1dTpPortEntry.2  
dot1dTpPortEntry.3  
dot1dTpPortEntry.4  
dot1dTpPortEntry.5  
RO  
RO  
RO  
dot1dTpFdbStatus  
dot1dTpPortTable  
dot1dTpPortEntry  
10 dot1dTpPort  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
11 dot1dTpPortMaxInfo  
12 dot1dTpPortInFrames  
13 dot1dTpPortOutFrames  
14 dot1dTpPortInDiscards  
dot1dExtBase Group  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
dot1dDeviceCapabilities  
dot1dExtBase.1  
RO  
RO  
RO  
dot1dTrafficClassesEnabled  
dot1dGmrpStatus  
dot1dPortCapabilitiesTable  
dot1dPortCapabilitiesEntry  
dot1dPortCapabilities  
dot1dExtBase.2  
dot1dExtBase.3  
dot1dExtBase.4  
dot1dPortCapabilitiesTable.1  
dot1dPortCapabilitiesEntry.1  
RO  
List of MIBs  
594  
     
XG Series User's Guide  
Appendix  
dot1dPriority Group  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
dot1dPriority.1  
dot1dPortPriorityTable.1  
dot1dPortPriorityEntry.1  
dot1dPortPriorityEntry.2  
dot1dPriority.3  
dot1dTrafficClassTable.1  
dot1dTrafficClassEntry.1  
dot1dTrafficClassEntry.2  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
dot1dPortPriorityTable  
dot1dPortPriorityEntry  
RO  
RO  
dot1dPortDefaultUserPriority  
dot1dPortNumTrafficClasses  
dot1dTrafficClassTable  
dot1dTrafficClassEntry  
dot1dTrafficClassPriority  
dot1dTrafficClass  
RO  
List of MIBs  
595  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Appendix  
B.1.12 qBridgeMIB Group  
dot1qBase Group  
No.  
1
2
Name  
dot1qVlanVersionNumber  
dot1qMaxVlanId  
Object identifier  
dot1qBase.1  
dot1qBase.2  
dot1qBase.3  
dot1qBase.4  
dot1qBase.5  
MIB ACCESS  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
3
4
5
dot1qMaxSupportedVlans  
dot1qNumVlans  
dot1qGvrpStatus  
dot1qVlan Group  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
dot1qVlanNumDeletes  
dot1qVlan.1  
dot1qVlan.2  
RO  
dot1qVlanCurrentTable  
dot1qVlanCurrentEntry  
dot1qVlanTimeMark  
dot1qVlanIndex  
dot1qVlanCurrentEgressPorts  
dot1qVlanCurrentUntaggedPorts  
dot1qVlanStatus  
dot1qVlanCurrentTable.1  
dot1qVlanCurrentEntry.1  
dot1qVlanCurrentEntry.2  
dot1qVlanCurrentEntry.4  
dot1qVlanCurrentEntry.5  
dot1qVlanCurrentEntry.6  
dot1qVlan.3  
RO  
RO  
RO  
dot1qVlanStaticTable  
10 dot1qVlanStaticEntry  
11 dot1qVlanStaticName  
dot1qVlanStaticTable.1  
dot1qVlanStaticEntry.1  
dot1qVlanStaticEntry.2  
dot1qVlanStaticEntry.3  
dot1qVlanStaticEntry.4  
dot1qVlanStaticEntry.5  
dot1qVlan.4  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
12 dot1qVlanStaticEgressPorts  
13 dot1qVlanForbiddenEgressPorts  
14 dot1qVlanStaticUntaggedPorts  
15 dot1qVlanStaticRowStatus  
16 dot1qNextFreeLocalVlanIndex  
17 dot1qPortVlanTable  
dot1qVlan.5  
18 dot1qPortVlanEntry  
19 dot1qPvid  
20 dot1qPortAcceptableFrameTypes  
21 dot1qPortIngressFiltering  
22 dot1qPortGvrpStatus  
dot1qPortVlanTable.1  
dot1qPortVlanEntry.1  
dot1qPortVlanEntry.2  
dot1qPortVlanEntry.3  
dot1qPortVlanEntry.4  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
B.1.13 ifMIB Group  
ifx Group  
No.  
1
2
Name  
Object identifier  
ifMIBObjects.1  
ifXTable.1  
MIB ACCESS  
ifXTable  
ifXEntry  
3
4
5
ifName  
ifXEntry.1  
ifXEntry.2  
ifXEntry.3  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
ifInMulticastPkts  
ifInBroadcastPkts  
ifOutMulticastPkts  
ifOutBroadcastPkts  
ifHCInOctets  
ifHCInUcastPkts  
6
7
8
ifXEntry.4  
ifXEntry.5  
ifXEntry.6  
9
ifXEntry.7  
ifXEntry.8  
ifXEntry.9  
10 ifHCInMulticastPkts  
11 ifHCInBroadcastPkts  
12 ifHCOutOctets  
ifXEntry.10  
ifXEntry.11  
13 ifHCOutUcastPkts  
List of MIBs  
596  
     
XG Series User's Guide  
Appendix  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
ifXEntry.12  
MIB ACCESS  
14 ifHCOutMulticastPkts  
15 ifHCOutBroadcastPkts  
16 ifLinkUpDownTrapEnable  
17 ifHighSpeed  
18 ifPromiscuousMode  
19 ifConnectorPresent  
20 ifAlias  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
ifXEntry.13  
ifXEntry.14  
ifXEntry.15  
ifXEntry.16  
ifXEntry.17  
ifXEntry.18  
ifXEntry.19  
21 ifCounterDiscontinuityTime  
ifStack Group  
No.  
1
Name  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
ifStackTable  
ifMIBObjects.2  
ifStackTable.1  
ifStackEntry.1  
ifStackEntry.2  
ifStackEntry.3  
2
3
4
ifStackEntry  
ifStackHigherLayer  
ifStackLowerLayer  
ifStackStatus  
5
RO  
ifMIB Group  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
ifTableLastChange  
ifStackLastChange  
ifMIBObjects.5  
ifMIBObjects.6  
RO  
RO  
B.1.14 radiusMIB Group  
radiusAuthClient Group  
No.  
1
2
Name  
radiusAuthClientInvalidServerAddresses  
radiusAuthClientIdentifier  
Object identifier  
radiusAuthClient.1  
radiusAuthClient.2  
MIB ACCESS  
RO  
RO  
3
radiusAuthServerTable  
radiusAuthClient.3  
4
5
radiusAuthServerEntry  
radiusAuthServerIndex  
radiusAuthServerTable.1  
radiusAuthServerEntry.1  
radiusAuthServerEntry.2  
radiusAuthServerEntry.3  
radiusAuthServerEntry.4  
radiusAuthServerEntry.5  
radiusAuthServerEntry.6  
radiusAuthServerEntry.7  
radiusAuthServerEntry.8  
radiusAuthServerEntry.9  
radiusAuthServerEntry.10  
radiusAuthServerEntry.11  
radiusAuthServerEntry.12  
radiusAuthServerEntry.13  
radiusAuthServerEntry.14  
radiusAuthServerEntry.15  
6
7
8
radiusAuthServerAddress  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
radiusAuthClientServerPortNumber  
radiusAuthClientRoundTripTime  
radiusAuthClientAccessRequests  
9
10 radiusAuthClientAccessRetransmissions  
11 radiusAuthClientAccessAccepts  
12 radiusAuthClientAccessRejects  
13 radiusAuthClientAccessChallenges  
14 radiusAuthClientMalformedAccessResponses  
15 radiusAuthClientBadAuthenticators  
16 radiusAuthClientPendingRequests  
17 radiusAuthClientTimeouts  
18 radiusAuthClientUnknownTypes  
19 radiusAuthClientPacketsDropped  
List of MIBs  
597  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Appendix  
radiusAccClient Group  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
radiusAccClient.1  
radiusAccClient.2  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
radiusAccClientInvalidServerAddresses  
radiusAccClientIdentifier  
RO  
RO  
radiusAccServerTable  
radiusAccClient.3  
radiusAccServerEntry  
radiusAccServerIndex  
radiusAccServerTable.1  
radiusAccServerEntry.1  
radiusAccServerEntry.2  
radiusAccServerEntry.3  
radiusAccServerEntry.4  
radiusAccServerEntry.5  
radiusAccServerEntry.6  
radiusAccServerEntry.7  
radiusAccServerEntry.8  
radiusAccServerEntry.9  
radiusAccServerEntry.10  
radiusAccServerEntry.11  
radiusAccServerEntry.12  
radiusAccServerEntry.13  
radiusAccServerAddress  
radiusAccClientServerPortNumber  
radiusAccClientRoundTripTime  
radiusAccClientRequests  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
10 radiusAccClientRetransmissions  
11 radiusAccClientResponses  
12 radiusAccClientMalformedResponses  
13 radiusAccClientBadAuthenticators  
14 radiusAccClientPendingRequests  
15 radiusAccClientTimeouts  
16 radiusAccClientUnknownTypes  
17 radiusAccClientPacketsDropped  
List of MIBs  
598  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Appendix  
B.2 Fujitsu Extension MIB  
XG0224 / XG0448 / XG2600  
Available Model  
The following shows meaning of MIB ACCESS column.  
RO  
RW  
:MIB can be read only.  
:MIB can be read and written.  
:MIB can not be accessed.  
B.2.1  
nonosSystem Group  
No.  
1
Name  
Object identifier  
nonosSystem.1  
MIB ACCESS  
RW  
nosResetSystem  
B.2.2  
nonosSystemError Group  
No.  
1
Name  
nosSystemErrorPoint  
nosSystemErrorText1  
nosSystemErrorText2  
nosSystemErrorText3  
nosSystemErrorText4  
nosSystemErrorText5  
nosSystemErrorText6  
nosSystemErrorText7  
nosSystemErrorText8  
Object identifier  
nonosSystemError.1  
MIB ACCESS  
RO  
2
3
4
nonosSystemError.2  
nonosSystemError.3  
nonosSystemError.4  
nonosSystemError.5  
nonosSystemError.6  
nonosSystemError.7  
nonosSystemError.8  
nonosSystemError.9  
nonosSystemError.10  
nonosSystemError.11  
nonosSystemError.12  
nonosSystemError.13  
nonosSystemError.14  
nonosSystemError.15  
nonosSystemError.16  
nonosSystemError.17  
nonosSystemError.18  
nonosSystemError.19  
nonosSystemError.20  
nonosSystemError.21  
RO  
RO  
RO  
5
6
7
RO  
RO  
RO  
8
9
RO  
RO  
RO  
10 nosSystemErrorText9  
11 nosSystemErrorText10  
12 nosSystemErrorText11  
13 nosSystemErrorText12  
14 nosSystemErrorText13  
15 nosSystemErrorText14  
16 nosSystemErrorText15  
17 nosSystemErrorText16  
18 nosSystemErrorText17  
19 nosSystemErrorText18  
20 nosSystemErrorText19  
21 nosSystemErrorText20  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
B.2.3  
nonosLineset Group  
XG0224 / XG0448  
Available Model  
No.  
1
2
Name  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
nosLineset  
nonosLineset.1  
nosLineset.1  
nosLinesetTable.1  
nosLinesetEntry.1  
nosLinesetEntry.2  
nosLinesetEntry.4  
nosLinesetTable  
nosLinesetEntry  
nosLinesetIndex  
nosLinesetId  
3
4
5
6
RO  
RO  
RO  
nosLinesetStatus  
List of MIBs  
599  
       
XG Series User's Guide  
Appendix  
B.2.4  
nosDualPower Group  
XG2600  
Available Model  
No.  
1
Name  
Object identifier  
nosDualPower.1  
MIB ACCESS  
dualPowerBase  
dualPowerSet  
dualPowerState  
2
3
dualPowerBase.1  
nosDualPower.2  
RO  
4
dualPowerStateTable  
dualPowerStateEntry  
dualPowerStateUnitIndex  
dualPowerStateUnit  
dualPowerState.1  
5
6
7
dualPowerStateTable.1  
dualPowerStateEntry.1  
dualPowerStateEntry.2  
RO  
RO  
List of MIBs  
600  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Appendix  
B.3 IEEE802.1MIB  
All models  
Available Model  
The following shows meaning of MIB ACCESS column.  
RO  
RW  
:MIB can be read only.  
:MIB can be read and written.  
:MIB can not be accessed.  
B.3.1  
lldpMIB Group  
lldpConfiguration Group  
No.  
1
2
Name  
Object identifier  
lldpConfiguration.1  
lldpConfiguration.2  
lldpConfiguration.3  
lldpConfiguration.4  
lldpConfiguration.5  
MIB ACCESS  
lldpMessageTxInterval  
lldpMessageTxHoldMultiplier  
lldpReinitDelay  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
3
4
5
lldpTxDelay  
lldpNotificationInterval  
lldpPortConfig Group  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
lldpPortConfigTable  
lldpPortConfigEntry  
lldpPortConfigPortNum  
lldpPortConfigAdminStatus  
lldpPortConfigNotificationEnable  
lldpPortConfigTLVsTxEnable  
lldpConfiguration.6  
lldpPortConfigTable.1  
lldpPortConfigEntry.1  
lldpPortConfigEntry.2  
lldpPortConfigEntry.3  
lldpPortConfigEntry.4  
RO  
RO  
RO  
lldpConfigManAddr Group  
No.  
1
Name  
Object identifier  
lldpConfiguration.7  
MIB ACCESS  
lldpConfigManAddrTable  
lldpConfigManAddrEntry  
2
3
lldpConfigManAddrTable.1  
lldpConfigManAddrEntry.1  
RO  
lldpConfigManAddrPortsTxEnable  
lldpStatistics Group  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
lldpStatistics.1  
lldpStatistics.2  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
4
5
lldpStatsRemTablesLastChangeTime  
lldpStatsRemTablesInserts  
lldpStatsRemTablesDeletes  
lldpStatsRemTablesDrops  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
lldpStatistics.3  
lldpStatistics.4  
lldpStatistics.5  
lldpStatsRemTablesAgeouts  
List of MIBs  
601  
         
XG Series User's Guide  
Appendix  
lldpStatsTxPort Group  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
lldpStatistics.6  
lldpStatsTxPortTable.1  
lldpStatsTxPortEntry.1  
lldpStatsTxPortEntry.2  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
4
lldpStatsTxPortTable  
lldpStatsTxPortTable  
lldpStatsTxPortNum  
RO  
lldpStatsTxPortFramesTotal  
lldpStatsRxPort Group  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
lldpStatsRxPortTable  
lldpStatsRxPortEntry  
lldpStatsRxPortNum  
lldpStatsRxPortFramesDiscardedTotal  
lldpStatsRxPortFramesErrors  
lldpStatistics.7  
lldpStatsRxPortTable.1  
lldpStatsRxPortEntry.1  
lldpStatsRxPortEntry.2  
lldpStatsRxPortEntry.3  
lldpStatsRxPortEntry.4  
lldpStatsRxPortEntry.5  
lldpStatsRxPortEntry.6  
lldpStatsRxPortEntry.7  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
lldpStatsRxPortFramesTotal  
lldpStatsRxPortTLVsDiscardedTotal  
lldpStatsRxPortTLVsUnrecognizedTotal  
lldpStatsRxPortAgeoutsTotal  
lldpLocalSystemData Group  
No.  
1
2
Name  
lldpLocChassisIdSubtype  
lldpLocChassisId  
Object identifier  
lldpLocalSystemData.1  
lldpLocalSystemData.2  
lldpLocalSystemData.3  
lldpLocalSystemData.4  
lldpLocalSystemData.5  
lldpLocalSystemData.6  
MIB ACCESS  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
3
lldpLocSysName  
4
5
6
lldpLocSysDesc  
lldpLocSysCapSupported  
lldpLocSysCapEnabled  
lldpLocPort Group  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
lldpLocalSystemData.7  
lldpLocPortTable.1  
lldpLocPortEntry.1  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
lldpLocPortTable  
lldpLocPortEntry  
lldpLocPortNum  
lldpLocPortIdSubtype  
lldpLocPortId  
lldpLocPortEntry.2  
lldpLocPortEntry.3  
lldpLocPortEntry.4  
RO  
RO  
RO  
lldpLocPortDesc  
lldpLocManAddr Group  
No.  
1
Name  
Object identifier  
lldpLocalSystemData.8  
lldpLocManAddrTable.1  
lldpLocManAddrEntry.1  
lldpLocManAddrEntry.2  
lldpLocManAddrEntry.3  
lldpLocManAddrEntry.4  
lldpLocManAddrEntry.5  
lldpLocManAddrEntry.6  
MIB ACCESS  
lldpLocManAddrTable  
lldpLocManAddrEntry  
lldpLocManAddrSubtype  
lldpLocManAddr  
2
3
4
5
6
7
lldpLocManAddrLen  
lldpLocManAddrIfSubtype  
lldpLocManAddrIfId  
lldpLocManAddrOID  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
8
List of MIBs  
602  
         
XG Series User's Guide  
Appendix  
lldpRem Group  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
lldpRemoteSystemsData.1  
lldpRemTable.1  
lldpRemEntry.1  
lldpRemEntry.2  
lldpRemEntry.3  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
lldpRemTable  
lldpRemEntry  
lldpRemTimeMark  
lldpRemLocalPortNum  
lldpRemIndex  
lldpRemChassisIdSubtype  
lldpRemChassisId  
lldpRemEntry.4  
lldpRemEntry.5  
lldpRemEntry.6  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
lldpRemPortIdSubtype  
lldpRemPortId  
lldpRemEntry.7  
lldpRemEntry.8  
lldpRemEntry.9  
10 lldpRemPortDesc  
11 lldpRemSysName  
12 lldpRemSysDesc  
13 lldpRemSysCapSupported  
14 lldpRemSysCapEnabled  
lldpRemEntry.10  
lldpRemEntry.11  
lldpRemEntry.12  
lldpRemManAddr Group  
No.  
1
Name  
Object identifier  
lldpRemoteSystemsData.2  
lldpRemManAddrTable.1  
lldpRemManAddrEntry.1  
lldpRemManAddrEntry.2  
lldpRemManAddrEntry.3  
lldpRemManAddrEntry.4  
lldpRemManAddrEntry.5  
MIB ACCESS  
lldpRemManAddrTable  
lldpRemManAddrEntry  
lldpRemManAddrSubtype  
lldpRemManAddr  
2
3
4
5
6
7
lldpRemManAddrIfSubtype  
lldpRemManAddrIfId  
lldpRemManAddrOID  
RO  
RO  
RO  
lldpRemUnknownTLV Group  
No.  
1
2
Name  
lldpRemUnknownTLVTable  
lldpRemUnknownTLVEntry  
lldpRemUnknownTLVType  
lldpRemUnknownTLVInfo  
Object identifier  
lldpRemoteSystemsData.3  
lldpRemUnknownTLVTable.1  
lldpRemUnknownTLVEntry.1  
lldpRemUnknownTLVEntry.2  
MIB ACCESS  
3
4
RO  
lldpRemOrgDefInfo Group  
No.  
1
2
Name  
Object identifier  
lldpRemoteSystemsData.4  
lldpRemOrgDefInfoTable.1  
lldpRemOrgDefInfoEntry.1  
lldpRemOrgDefInfoEntry.2  
lldpRemOrgDefInfoEntry.3  
lldpRemOrgDefInfoEntry.4  
MIB ACCESS  
lldpRemOrgDefInfoTable  
lldpRemOrgDefInfoEntry  
lldpRemOrgDefInfoOUI  
3
4
5
6
lldpRemOrgDefInfoSubtype  
lldpRemOrgDefInfoIndex  
lldpRemOrgDefInfo  
RO  
lldpXdot3PortConfig Group  
No.  
1
Name  
lldpXdot3PortConfigTable  
Object identifier  
lldpXdot3Config.1  
MIB ACCESS  
2
3
lldpXdot3PortConfigEntry  
lldpXdot3PortConfigTLVsTxEnable  
lldpXdot3PortConfigTable.1  
lldpXdot3PortConfigEntry.1  
RO  
List of MIBs  
603  
         
XG Series User's Guide  
Appendix  
lldpXdot3LocPort Group  
No.  
1
Name  
Object identifier  
lldpXdot3LocalData.1  
MIB ACCESS  
lldpXdot3LocPortTable  
2
lldpXdot3LocPortEntry  
lldpXdot3LocPortTable.1  
lldpXdot3LocPortEntry.1  
lldpXdot3LocPortEntry.2  
lldpXdot3LocPortEntry.3  
lldpXdot3LocPortEntry.4  
3
4
5
lldpXdot3LocPortAutoNegSupported  
lldpXdot3LocPortAutoNegEnabled  
lldpXdot3LocPortAutoNegAdvertisedCap  
lldpXdot3LocPortOperMauType  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
6
lldpXdot3LocPower Group  
No.  
1
2
Name  
Object identifier  
lldpXdot3LocalData.2  
MIB ACCESS  
lldpXdot3LocPowerTable  
lldpXdot3LocPowerEntry  
lldpXdot3LocPowerTable.1  
lldpXdot3LocPowerEntry.1  
lldpXdot3LocPowerEntry.2  
lldpXdot3LocPowerEntry.3  
lldpXdot3LocPowerEntry.4  
lldpXdot3LocPowerEntry.5  
lldpXdot3LocPowerEntry.6  
3
lldpXdot3LocPowerPortClass  
lldpXdot3LocPowerMDISupported  
lldpXdot3LocPowerMDIEnabled  
lldpXdot3LocPowerPairControlable  
lldpXdot3LocPowerPairs  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
4
5
6
7
8
lldpXdot3LocPowerClass  
lldpXdot3LocLinkAgg Group  
No.  
1
Name  
lldpXdot3LocLinkAggTable  
Object identifier  
lldpXdot3LocalData.3  
MIB ACCESS  
2
lldpXdot3LocLinkAggEntry  
lldpXdot3LocLinkAggStatus  
lldpXdot3LocLinkAggPortId  
lldpXdot3LocLinkAggTable.1  
lldpXdot3LocLinkAggEntry.1  
lldpXdot3LocLinkAggEntry.2  
3
4
RO  
RO  
lldpXdot3LocMaxFrameSize Group  
No.  
1
Name  
lldpXdot3LocMaxFrameSizeTable  
lldpXdot3LocMaxFrameSizeEntry  
lldpXdot3LocMaxFrameSize  
Object identifier  
lldpXdot3LocalData.4  
MIB ACCESS  
2
3
lldpXdot3LocMaxFrameSizeTable.1  
lldpXdot3LocMaxFrameSizeEntry.1  
RO  
lldpXdot3RemPort Group  
No.  
1
2
Name  
Object identifier  
lldpXdot3RemoteData.1  
lldpXdot3RemPortTable.1  
lldpXdot3RemPortEntry.1  
lldpXdot3RemPortEntry.2  
lldpXdot3RemPortEntry.3  
lldpXdot3RemPortEntry.4  
MIB ACCESS  
lldpXdot3RemPortTable  
lldpXdot3RemPortEntry  
3
4
5
lldpXdot3RemPortAutoNegSupported  
lldpXdot3RemPortAutoNegEnabled  
lldpXdot3RemPortAutoNegAdvertisedCap  
lldpXdot3RemPortOperMauType  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
6
lldpXdot3RemPower Group  
No.  
1
Name  
lldpXdot3RemPowerTable  
Object identifier  
lldpXdot3RemoteData.2  
MIB ACCESS  
2
3
lldpXdot3RemPowerEntry  
lldpXdot3RemPowerPortClass  
lldpXdot3RemPowerMDISupported  
lldpXdot3RemPowerTable.1  
lldpXdot3RemPowerEntry.1  
lldpXdot3RemPowerEntry.2  
RO  
RO  
4
List of MIBs  
604  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Appendix  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
lldpXdot3RemPowerEntry.3  
lldpXdot3RemPowerEntry.4  
lldpXdot3RemPowerEntry.5  
lldpXdot3RemPowerEntry.6  
MIB ACCESS  
5
6
7
8
lldpXdot3RemPowerMDIEnabled  
lldpXdot3RemPowerPairControlable  
lldpXdot3RemPowerPairs  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
lldpXdot3RemPowerClass  
lldpXdot3RemLinkAgg Group  
No.  
1
Name  
lldpXdot3RemLinkAggTable  
Object identifier  
lldpXdot3RemoteData.3  
MIB ACCESS  
2
3
lldpXdot3RemLinkAggEntry  
lldpXdot3RemLinkAggStatus  
lldpXdot3RemLinkAggPortId  
lldpXdot3RemLinkAggTable.1  
lldpXdot3RemLinkAggEntry.1  
lldpXdot3RemLinkAggEntry.2  
RO  
RO  
4
lldpXdot3RemMaxFrameSize Group  
No.  
1
2
Name  
lldpXdot3RemMaxFrameSizeTable  
lldpXdot3RemMaxFrameSizeEntry  
lldpXdot3RemMaxFrameSize  
Object identifier  
lldpXdot3RemoteData.4  
lldpXdot3RemMaxFrameSizeTable.1  
MIB ACCESS  
3
lldpXdot3RemMaxFrameSizeEntry.1 RO  
lldpXdot1ConfigPortVlan Group  
No.  
1
Name  
lldpXdot1ConfigPortVlanTable  
lldpXdot1ConfigPortVlanEntry  
lldpXdot1ConfigPortVlanTxEnable  
Object identifier  
lldpXdot1Config.1  
MIB ACCESS  
2
3
lldpXdot1ConfigPortVlanTable.1  
lldpXdot1ConfigPortVlanEntry.1  
RO  
lldpXdot1ConfigVlanName Group  
No.  
1
Name  
lldpXdot1ConfigVlanNameTable  
lldpXdot1ConfigVlanNameEntry  
lldpXdot1ConfigVlanNameTxEnable  
Object identifier  
lldpXdot1Config.2  
MIB ACCESS  
2
3
lldpXdot1ConfigVlanNameTable.1  
lldpXdot1ConfigVlanNameEntry.1  
RO  
lldpXdot1ConfigProtoVlan Group  
No.  
1
2
Name  
lldpXdot1ConfigProtoVlanTable  
lldpXdot1ConfigProtoVlanEntry  
lldpXdot1ConfigProtoVlanTxEnable  
Object identifier  
lldpXdot1Config.3  
lldpXdot1ConfigProtoVlanTable.1  
lldpXdot1ConfigProtoVlanEntry.1  
MIB ACCESS  
3
RO  
lldpXdot1ConfigProtocol Group  
No.  
1
2
Name  
lldpXdot1ConfigProtocolTable  
lldpXdot1ConfigProtocolEntry  
lldpXdot1ConfigProtocolTxEnable  
Object identifier  
lldpXdot1Config.4  
lldpXdot1ConfigProtocolTable.1  
lldpXdot1ConfigProtocolEntry.1  
MIB ACCESS  
RO  
3
List of MIBs  
605  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Appendix  
lldpXdot1Loc Group  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
lldpXdot1LocalData.1  
lldpXdot1LocTable.1  
lldpXdot1LocEntry.1  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
lldpXdot1LocTable  
lldpXdot1LocEntry  
lldpXdot1LocPortVlanId  
RO  
lldpXdot1LocProtoVlan Group  
No.  
1
Name  
lldpXdot1LocProtoVlanTable  
Object identifier  
MIB ACCESS  
lldpXdot1LocalData.2  
2
3
lldpXdot1LocProtoVlanEntry  
lldpXdot1LocProtoVlanId  
lldpXdot1LocProtoVlanTable.1  
lldpXdot1LocProtoVlanEntry.1  
lldpXdot1LocProtoVlanEntry.2  
lldpXdot1LocProtoVlanEntry.3  
4
5
lldpXdot1LocProtoVlanSupported  
lldpXdot1LocProtoVlanEnabled  
RO  
RO  
lldpXdot1LocVlanName Group  
No.  
1
Name  
lldpXdot1LocVlanNameTable  
Object identifier  
lldpXdot1LocalData.3  
MIB ACCESS  
2
lldpXdot1LocVlanNameEntry  
lldpXdot1LocVlanId  
lldpXdot1LocVlanName  
lldpXdot1LocVlanNameTable.1  
lldpXdot1LocVlanNameEntry.1  
lldpXdot1LocVlanNameEntry.2  
3
4
RO  
lldpXdot1LocProtocol Group  
No.  
1
Name  
lldpXdot1LocProtocolTable  
Object identifier  
lldpXdot1LocalData.4  
MIB ACCESS  
2
lldpXdot1LocProtocolEntry  
lldpXdot1LocProtocolIndex  
lldpXdot1LocProtocolId  
lldpXdot1LocProtocolTable.1  
lldpXdot1LocProtocolEntry.1  
lldpXdot1LocProtocolEntry.2  
3
4
RO  
lldpXdot1Rem Group  
No.  
Name  
Object identifier  
lldpXdot1RemoteData.1  
lldpXdot1RemTable.1  
lldpXdot1RemEntry.1  
MIB ACCESS  
1
2
3
lldpXdot1RemTable  
lldpXdot1RemEntry  
lldpXdot1RemPortVlanId  
RO  
lldpXdot1RemProtoVlan Group  
No.  
1
Name  
lldpXdot1RemProtoVlanTable  
Object identifier  
lldpXdot1RemoteData.2  
MIB ACCESS  
2
lldpXdot1RemProtoVlanEntry  
lldpXdot1RemProtoVlanId  
lldpXdot1RemProtoVlanSupported  
lldpXdot1RemProtoVlanEnabled  
lldpXdot1RemProtoVlanTable.1  
lldpXdot1RemProtoVlanEntry.1  
lldpXdot1RemProtoVlanEntry.2  
lldpXdot1RemProtoVlanEntry.3  
3
4
5
RO  
RO  
List of MIBs  
606  
           
XG Series User's Guide  
Appendix  
lldpXdot1RemVlanName Group  
No.  
1
2
Name  
lldpXdot1RemVlanNameTable  
lldpXdot1RemVlanNameEntry  
lldpXdot1RemVlanId  
Object identifier  
lldpXdot1RemoteData.3  
lldpXdot1RemVlanNameTable.1  
lldpXdot1RemVlanNameEntry.1  
lldpXdot1RemVlanNameEntry.2  
MIB ACCESS  
3
4
RO  
lldpXdot1RemVlanName  
lldpXdot1RemProtocol Group  
No.  
1
Name  
lldpXdot1RemProtocolTable  
Object identifier  
lldpXdot1RemoteData.4  
MIB ACCESS  
2
lldpXdot1RemProtocolEntry  
lldpXdot1RemProtocolIndex  
lldpXdot1RemProtocolId  
lldpXdot1RemProtocolTable.1  
lldpXdot1RemProtocolEntry.1  
lldpXdot1RemProtocolEntry.2  
3
4
RO  
List of MIBs  
607  
   
XG Series User's Guide  
Index  
Index  
Symbols  
C
Number  
A
D
B
608  
 
XG Series User's Guide  
Index  
H
E
I
K
L
F
609  
XG Series User's Guide  
Index  
M
N
O
P
610  
XG Series User's Guide  
Index  
Q
R
Restoring configuration information using  
Restoring configuration information using  
Restoring configuration information using  
S
Saving configuration information using  
Saving configuration information using  
Saving configuration information using  
611  
XG Series User's Guide  
Index  
T
612  
XG Series User's Guide  
Index  
U
V
W
613  
XG Series User’s Guide  
P3NK-4452-01ENZ0  
Issued on  
Issued by  
February, 2011  
FUJITSU LIMITED  
• The contents may be revised without prior notice.  
• Fujitsu assumes no liability for damages to third party copyrights or other rights arising from the use of  
any information in this manual.  
• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the prior written permission of Fujitsu.  

HP Hewlett Packard Hewlett Packard Computer Monitor v72 User Manual
Falcon U109988 02 User Manual
Fagor America 5HA 196X User Manual
Dynex DX SC71 User Manual
Creda C261E User Manual
Compaq V 55 User Manual
Clarity D613HS User Manual
Cisco Systems IPS4360 User Manual
Avaya Lucent 2500 YMGP User Manual
AT T 2400 User Manual